for construction on state highway - cctaccta.net/uploads/59010eb104699.pdf · for construction on...

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

SPECIAL PROVISIONS (95% Submittal)

FOR CONSTRUCTION ON

STATE HIGHWAY

FOR CONSTRUCTION ON AND ADJACENT TO STATE HIGHWAY

IN CONTRA COSTA COUNTY

IN MARTINEZ AND CONCORD FROM 0.1 MILE EAST OF MILANO WAY OVERCROSSING

TO 0.6 MILE EAST OF ROUTE 4/242

DISTRICT 04, ROUTE 4

For use in Connection with Standard Specifications Dated 2015,

Standard Plans Dated 2015, and Labor Surcharge And Equipment Rental Rates

CONTRACT NO. 04-229114

04-CC-4-PM R11.2/R15.1

Project ID 0414000130

Dated: July 20, 2016

Contract No. 04-229114

The Special Provisions contained herein have been prepared by or under the direction of the following Registered Persons.

REGISTERED CIVIL ENGINEER

REGISTERED CIVIL ENGINEER


Table of Contents i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

STANDARD PLANS LIST ............................................................................................................................. 1

BID ITEM LIST ............................................................................................................................................ 17

ORGANIZATION ......................................................................................................................................... 29

DIVISION I GENERAL PROVISIONS........................................................................................................ 30

1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 30

2 BIDDING ................................................................................................................................................. 45

5 CONTROL OF WORK ............................................................................................................................ 47

6 CONTROL OF MATERIALS ................................................................................................................... 50

8 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS........................................................................................................ 53

9 PAYMENT ............................................................................................................................................... 55

DIVISION II GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................ 56

10 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................. 56

12 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL .................................................................................................... 58

13 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 105

14 ENVIRONMENTAL STEWARDSHIP.................................................................................................. 119

15 EXISTING FACILITIES ....................................................................................................................... 142

DIVISION III EARTHWORK AND LANDSCAPE ..................................................................................... 143

19 EARTHWORK ..................................................................................................................................... 143

21 EROSION CONTROL ......................................................................................................................... 150

DIVISION IV SUBBASES AND BASES ................................................................................................... 152

28 CONCRETE BASES ........................................................................................................................... 152

DIVISION V SURFACINGS AND PAVEMENTS ..................................................................................... 154

39 ASPHALT CONCRETE ...................................................................................................................... 154

40 CONCRETE PAVEMENT .................................................................................................................... 155

DIVISION VI STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................... 157

48 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES ............................................................................................................ 157

49 PILING ................................................................................................................................................ 159

51 CONCRETE STRUCTURES .............................................................................................................. 173

52 REINFORCEMENT ............................................................................................................................. 183

55 STEEL STRUCTURES ....................................................................................................................... 185

59 STRUCTURAL STEEL COATINGS.................................................................................................... 186

60 EXISTING STRUCTURES .................................................................................................................. 188

DIVISION VII DRAINAGE FACILITIES .................................................................................................... 192

65 CONCRETE PIPE ............................................................................................................................... 192

71 EXISTING DRAINAGE FACILITIES ................................................................................................... 198

DIVISION VIII MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................. 200


Table of Contents ii

75 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ................................................................................................................ 200

DIVISION IX TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES ......................................................................................... 202

83 RAILINGS AND BARRIERS ............................................................................................................... 203

DIVISION X ELECTRICAL WORK .......................................................................................................... 211

DIVISION XI MATERIALS ....................................................................................................................... 245

90 CONCRETE ........................................................................................................................................ 245

REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DATED ................................................................................. 248


Standard Plans List 1

XE "StdPln_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 15

Except for structures plans, do not include the Standard Plans List in the project plans. Division of Engineering Services, Office Engineer will add RSP sheets in the project plans, except for an AADD project, the District will add RSP sheets in the project plans. Sheet numbers are included on the Title Sheet Index under the heading, "Revised Standard Plans."

Instructions for editing: Click in the left margin to select Standard Plan sheets to be included (the entire row must be selected). Use "StrikeHide no initials" key to select or undo a previous selection.

STANDARD PLANS LIST

The standard plan sheets applicable to this Contract include those listed below. The applicable revised standard plans (RSPs) listed below are included in the project plans.

ABBREVIATIONS, LINES, SYMBOLS, AND LEGEND A3A Abbreviations (Sheet 1 of 3)

A3B Abbreviations (Sheet 2 of 3)

A3C Abbreviations (Sheet 3 of 3)

A10A Legend - Lines and Symbols (Sheet 1 of 5)

A10B Legend - Lines and Symbols (Sheet 2 of 5)

A10C Legend - Lines and Symbols (Sheet 3 of 5)

A10D Legend - Lines and Symbols (Sheet 4 of 5)

A10E Legend - Lines and Symbols (Sheet 5 of 5)

A10F Legend - Soil (Sheet 1 of 2)

A10G Legend - Soil (Sheet 2 of 2)

A10H Legend - Rock

PAVEMENT MARKERS, TRAFFIC LINES, AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS A20A Pavement Markers and Traffic Lines - Typical Details

A20B Pavement Markers and Traffic Lines - Typical Details

A20C Pavement Markers and Traffic Lines - Typical Details

A20D Pavement Markers and Traffic Lines - Typical Details

A24A Pavement Markings - Arrows

A24B Pavement Markings - Arrows and Symbols

A24C Pavement Markings - Symbols and Numerals

A24D Pavement Markings - Words

A24E Pavement Markings - Words, Limit and Yield Lines

A24F Pavement Markings - Crosswalks

RUMBLE STRIP A40B Shoulder Rumble Strip Details - Ground-In Indentations

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A62A Excavation and Backfill - Miscellaneous Details

A62B Limits of Payment for Excavation and Backfill - Bridge Surcharge and Wall

A62C Limits of Payment for Excavation and Backfill - Bridge



A62D Excavation and Backfill - Concrete Pipe Culverts

A62DA Excavation and Backfill - Concrete Pipe Culverts - Indirect Design Method

A62E Excavation and Backfill - Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete Box and Arch Culverts

A62F Excavation and Backfill - Metal and Plastic Culverts

A62G Excavation and Backfill - Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts

PORTABLE CONCRETE BARRIER A63A Portable Concrete Barrier (Type 60K)

A63B Portable Concrete Barrier (Type 60K)

OBJECT MARKERS, DELINEATORS, CHANNELIZERS, AND BARRICADES A73A Object Markers

A73B Markers

A73C Delineators, Channelizers and Barricades

SURVEY MONUMENTS A74 Survey Monuments

CONCRETE BARRIER TYPE 60 SERIES A76A Concrete Barrier Type 60

A76B Concrete Barrier Type 60

A76C Concrete Barrier Type 60F

A76D Concrete Barrier Type 60G

A76E Concrete Barrier Type 60G

A76F Concrete Barrier Type 60GE

A76G Concrete Barrier Type 60S

A76H Concrete Barrier Type 60S

A76I Concrete Barrier Type 60SF

CONCRETE BARRIER WILDLIFE PASSAGEWAY A76J Concrete Barrier - Wildlife Passageway (Type S)

A76K Concrete Barrier - Wildlife Passageway (Type M)

A76L Concrete Barrier - Wildlife Passageway (Type L)

MIDWEST GUARDRAIL SYSTEM - STANDARD RAILING SECTIONS A77L1 Midwest Guardrail System - Standard Railing Section (Wood Post with Wood

Block)

A77L2 Midwest Guardrail System - Standard Railing Section (Steel Post with Notched Wood or Notched Recycled Plastic Block)

A77L3 Metal Beam Guard Railing - Reconstruct Installation

A77M1 Midwest Guardrail System - Standard Hardware

A77N1 Midwest Guardrail System - Wood Post and Wood Block Details

A77N2 Midwest Guardrail System - Steel Post and Notched Wood Block Details

A77N3 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Line Post Embedment and Hinge Point Offset Details

A77N4 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Railing Delineation and Dike Positioning Details

MIDWEST GUARDRAIL SYSTEM - TYPICAL VEGETATION CONTROL A77N5 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Vegetation Control Standard Railing

Section

A77N6 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Vegetation Control for Terminal System End Treatments



A77N7 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Vegetation Control at Structure Approach

A77N8 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Vegetation Control at Fixed Object



MIDWEST GUARDRAIL SYSTEM - TYPICAL LAYOUTS FOR EMBANKMENTS A77P1 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Embankments

A77P2 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Embankments





MIDWEST GUARDRAIL SYSTEM - TYPICAL LAYOUTS FOR STRUCTURES A77Q1 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Structure Approach

A77Q2 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Structure Approach and Between Structures

A77Q3 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Structure Approach

A77Q4 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Structure Departure

A77Q5 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Structure Departure

MIDWEST GUARDRAIL SYSTEM - TYPICAL LAYOUTS FOR FIXED OBJECTS A77R1 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Fixed Objects Between

Separate Roadbeds (Two-Way Traffic)

A77R2 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Fixed Objects Between Separate Roadbeds (One-Way Traffic)

A77R3 Midwest Guardrail System - Typical Layouts for Roadside Fixed Objects






MIDWEST GUARDRAIL SYSTEM - END ANCHORAGE AND RAIL TENSIONING ASSEMBLY

A77S1 Midwest Guardrail System - End Anchor Assembly (Type SFT)

A77S2 Midwest Guardrail System - Rail Tensioning Assembly

A77S3 Metal Railing Anchor Cable and Anchor Plate Details

A77T1 Metal Railing End Anchor Assembly (Type CA)

A77T2 Midwest Guardrail System - Buried Post End Anchor

MIDWEST GUARDRAIL SYSTEM - CONNECTION DETAILS AND TRANSITION RAILING TO BRIDGE RAILINGS, ABUTMENTS AND WALLS

A77U1 Midwest Guardrail System - Connections to Bridge Railings without Sidewalks Details No. 1

A77U2 Midwest Guardrail System - Connections to Bridge Railings without Sidewalks Details No. 2

A77U3 Midwest Guardrail System - Connections to Abutments and Walls

A77U4 Midwest Guardrail System - Transition Railing (Type WB-31)

A77U5 Midwest Guardrail System - Transition to Metal Beam Guardrail

A77V1 Midwest Guardrail System - Connections to Bridge Railings with Sidewalks



Details No. 1

A77V2 Midwest Guardrail System - Connections to Bridge Railings with Sidewalks Details No. 2

THRIE BEAM BARRIER - STANDARD BARRIER SECTIONS A78A Thrie Beam Barrier - Standard Barrier Railing Section (Wood Post with Wood

Block)

A78B Thrie Beam Barrier - Standard Barrier Railing Section (Steel Post with Notched Wood Block or Notched Recycled Plastic Block)

A78C1 Thrie Beam Barrier - Standard Hardware Details

A78C2 Thrie Beam Barrier - Post and Block Details

THRIE BEAM BARRIER - TYPICAL VEGETATION CONTROL A78C3 Single Thrie Beam Barrier - Typical Vegetation Control Standard Barrier Railing

Section

A78C4 Double Thrie Beam Barrier - Typical Vegetation Control Standard Barrier Railing Section

A78C5 Thrie Beam Barrier - Typical Vegetation Control at Fixed Objects in Median

A78C6 Thrie Beam Barrier - Typical Vegetation Control at Structure Approach

THRIE BEAM BARRIER AT FIXED OBJECTS AND ON BRIDGE A78D1 Thrie Beam Barrier at Fixed Objects in Median

A78D2 Double Thrie Beam Barrier on Bridge

THRIE BEAM BARRIER - END ANCHORAGE END TREATMENT AND EMERGENCY PASSAGEWAY

A78E1 Single Thrie Beam Barrier - End Anchor Assembly and Terminal System End Treatment

A78E2 Double Thrie Beam Barrier - Emergency Passageway and End Anchor Assembly Details

A78E3 Double Thrie Beam Barrier - Crash Cushion End Treatment

THRIE BEAM BARRIER - CONNECTIONS TO BRIDGE RAILINGS, ABUTMENTS, WALLS, AND BARRIER

A78F1 Double Thrie Beam Barrier - Connections to Bridge Railings without Sidewalks

A78F2 Single Thrie Beam Barrier - Connections to Bridge Railings without Sidewalks

A78G Single Thrie Beam Barrier - Connections to Abutments and Walls

A78H Thrie Beam Barrier - Typical Layout for Connection to Bridge Railing

A78I Double Thrie Beam Barrier - Connection to Concrete Barrier

THRIE BEAM BARRIER - TRANSITION RAILING A78J Single Thrie Beam Barrier - Transition Railing (Type STB)

A78K Double Thrie Beam Barrier - Transition Railing (Type DTB)

CRASH CUSHIONS A81A Crash Cushion, Sand Filled (Unidirectional)

A81B Crash Cushion, Sand Filled (Unidirectional)

A81C Crash Cushion, Sand Filled (Bidirectional)

FENCES A85 Chain Link Fence

A85A Chain Link Fence Details

A85B Chain Link Fence Details

A86 Barbed Wire and Wire Mesh Fences

A86A Barbed Wire and Wire Mesh Fence Detail on Sharp Break in Grade



A86B Barbed Wire and Wire Mesh Fence Details

A86C Barbed Wire and Wire Mesh Fence Details at Ditch Crossing

A86D Barbed Wire and Wire Mesh Fence - Miscellaneous Details

CURBS, DRIVEWAYS, DIKES, CURB RAMPS, AND ACCESSIBLE PARKING A87A Curbs and Driveways

RSP A87B Hot Mix Asphalt Dikes

A88A Curb Ramp Details

A88B Curb Ramp and Island Passageway Details

A90A Accessible Parking Off-Street

A90B Accessible Parking On-Street

PAVEMENTS P1 Jointed Plain Concrete Pavement - New Construction

P2 Jointed Plain Concrete Pavement (Widened Lane) - New Construction

P3A Jointed Plain Concrete Pavement - Lane and Shoulder Addition or Replacement

P3B Jointed Plain Concrete Pavement (Widened Lane) - Lane and Shoulder Addition or Replacement

P4 Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement

P5A Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement (Widened Lane)

P5B Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement (Widened Lane) - Lane and Shoulder Addition or Replacement

P6 Spall Repair

P7 Dowel Bar Retrofit

P8 Individual Slab Replacement with Rapid Strength Concrete

P10 Concrete Pavement Dowel Bar Details

P12 Concrete Pavement Dowel Bar Basket Details

P13 Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement - Single Piece Transverse Bar Assembly

P14 Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement - Transverse Construction Joint

P15 Concrete Pavement - Tie Bar Details

P16 Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement - Tie Bars and Joint Details

P17 Concrete Pavement - Tie Bar Basket Details

P18 Concrete Pavement - Lane Schematics and Isolation Joint Detail

P20 Joint Seals

P30 Concrete Pavement - End Panel Pavement Transitions

P31A Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement - Terminal Joint Details

P31B Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement - Expansion Joint and Anchor Details

P32A Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement - Wide Flange Beam Terminals

P32B Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement - Wide Flange Beam Terminals

P33 Concrete Pavement - Lane Drop Paving Details No. 1

P34 Concrete Pavement - Lane Drop Paving Details No. 2

P35 Concrete Pavement - Ramp Transition Paving Details

P45 Concrete Pavement - Drainage Inlet Details No. 1

P46 Concrete Pavement - Drainage Inlet Details No. 2

P50 Pavement Structure - Drainage System Details



P51 Edge Drain Outlet and Vent Details

P52 Edge Drain Cleanout and Vent Details

P53 Cross Drain Interceptor Details

P70 Hot Mix Asphalt Paving (Longitudinal Tapered Notched Wedge Joint)

P74 Pavement Edge Treatments

P75 Pavement Edge Treatments - Overlays

P76 Pavement Edge Treatments - New Construction

CRIB WALLS C7A Reinforced Concrete Crib Wall - Types A, B and C

C7B Reinforced Concrete Crib Wall - Types A, B and C - Header and Stretcher Details

C7C Reinforced Concrete Crib Wall - Foundation Pressure

DRAINAGE INLETS, PIPE INLETS AND GRATES D71 Drainage Inlet Markers

D72 Drainage Inlets

D73 Drainage Inlets

D73A Drainage Inlets (Precast)

D74A Drainage Inlets

D74B Drainage Inlets

D74C Drainage Inlet Details

D75A Steel Pipe Inlets

D75B Concrete Pipe Inlets

D75C Pipe Inlets - Ladder and Trash Rack Details

D77A Grate Details No. 1

D77B Grate Details No. 2

D77C Alternative Hinged Cover for Type OL and OS Inlets and Trash Rack for Type OCP Inlet

GUTTER AND INLET DEPRESSIONS D78A Gutter Depressions

D78B Inlet Depressions - Concrete Shoulders

D78C Inlet Depressions - Hot Mix Asphalt Shoulders

CONCRETE PIPE - DIRECT DESIGN METHOD D79 Precast Reinforced Concrete Pipe - Direct Design Method

D79A Precast Reinforced Concrete Pipe - Direct Design Method

BOX CULVERTS D80 Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete Single Box Culvert

D81 Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete Double Box Culvert

D82 Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert - Miscellaneous Details

D83A Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert

D83B Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert - Miscellaneous Details

D84 Box Culvert Wingwalls - Types A, B and C

D85 Box Culvert Wingwalls - Types D and E

D86A Box Culvert Warped Wingwalls

PIPE AND ARCH CULVERT - ENDWALLS AND WARPED WINGWALLS D86B Pipe Culvert Headwalls, Endwalls and Warped Wingwalls



D86C Arch Culvert Headwalls, Endwalls and Warped Wingwalls

PIPE DOWNDRAINS, ANCHORAGE SYSTEMS AND OVERSIDE DRAINS D87A Corrugated Metal Pipe Downdrain Details

D87B Plastic Pipe Downdrain Details

D87C Cable Anchorage System

D87D Overside Drains

CONSTRUCTION LOADS ON CULVERTS AND STRUT DETAILS D88 Construction Loads on Culverts

D88A Strut Details for Structural Steel Pipes, Arches and Vehicular Undercrossing

PIPE CULVERT HEADWALLS, ENDWALLS, WINGWALLS, AND JUNCTION STRUCTURE

D89 Pipe Culvert Headwalls - Straight and "L"

D90 Pipe Culvert Headwalls, Endwalls and Wingwalls - Types A, B and C

D91A Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete Junction Structure

D91B Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete Junction Structure

PIPE RISER AND DRAINAGE INLET RISER CONNECTIONS D93A Pipe Riser Connections

D93B Drainage Inlet Riser Connections

D93C Pipe Riser with Debris Rack Cage

FLARED END SECTIONS D94A Metal and Plastic Flared End Sections

D94B Concrete Flared End Sections

PIPE COUPLING AND JOINT DETAILS D97A Corrugated Metal Pipe Coupling Details No. 1 - Annular Coupling Band Bar and

Strap and Angle Connections

D97C Corrugated Metal Pipe Coupling Details No. 3 - Helical and Universal Couplers

D97D Corrugated Metal Pipe Coupling Details No. 4 - Hugger Coupling Bands

D97E Corrugated Metal Pipe Coupling Details No. 5 - Standard Joint

D97F Corrugated Metal Pipe Coupling Details No. 6 - Positive Joint

D97G Corrugated Metal Pipe Coupling Details No. 7 - Downdrain

D97H Reinforced Concrete Pipe or Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe - Standard and Positive Joints

D97I Corrugated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe with Smooth Interior - Standard and Positive Joints

D97J Composite Steel Spiral Rib Pipe with Smooth Interior - Standard Joint

SLOTTED AND GRATED LINE DRAINS D98A Slotted Corrugated Steel Pipe Drain Details

D98B Slotted Corrugated Steel Pipe Drain Details

D98C Grated Line Drain Details

D98F Slotted Steel Pipe Grate Extension Details

GABIONS AND UNDERDRAINS D100A Gabion Basket Details No. 1

D100B Gabion Basket Details No. 2

D102 Underdrains

LANDSCAPE AND EROSION CONTROL H1 Landscape and Erosion Control Symbols



H2 Landscape Details






RSP H8 Landscape Details


H10 Irrigation Controller Enclosure Cabinet

H51 Erosion Control Details - Fiber Roll and Compost Sock

H52 Rolled Erosion Control Product

TEMPORARY CRASH CUSHIONS, RAILING AND TRAFFIC SCREEN T1A Temporary Crash Cushion, Sand Filled (Unidirectional)

T1B Temporary Crash Cushion, Sand Filled (Bidirectional)

T2 Temporary Crash Cushion, Sand Filled (Shoulder Installations)

T3A Temporary Railing (Type K)

T3B Temporary Railing (Type K)

T4 Temporary Traffic Screen

T5 Temporary Terminal Section (Type K)

TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS T9 Traffic Control System Tables for Lane and Ramp Closures

T10 Traffic Control System for Lane Closure on Freeways and Expressways

T10A Traffic Control System for Lane Closure on Freeways and Expressways

T11 Traffic Control System for Lane Closure on Multilane Conventional Highways

T12 Traffic Control System for Half Road Closure on Multilane Conventional Highways and Expressways

T13 Traffic Control System for Lane Closure on Two Lane Conventional Highways

T14 Traffic Control System for Ramp Closure

T15 Traffic Control System for Moving Lane Closure on Multilane Highways

T16 Traffic Control System for Moving Lane Closure on Multilane Highways

T17 Traffic Control System for Moving Lane Closure on Two Lane Highways

TEMPORARY WATER POLLUTION CONTROL T51 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Silt Fence)

T52 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Straw Bale Barrier)

T53 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Cover)

T54 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Erosion Control Blanket)

T55 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Erosion Control Blanket)

T56 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Fiber Roll)

T57 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Check Dam)

T58 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Construction Entrance)

T59 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Concrete Washout Facility)

T60 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Reinforced Silt Fence)



T61 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Drainage Inlet Protection)




T65 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details [Temporary Fence (Type ESA)]

T66 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Large Sediment Barrier)

T67 Temporary Water Pollution Control Details (Temporary Construction Roadway)

BRIDGE DETAILS B0-1 Bridge Details

B0-3 Bridge Details

B0-5 Bridge Details

B0-13 Bridge Details

PILES B2-3 16" and 24" Cast-In-Drilled-Hole Concrete Pile

B2-5 Pile Details - Class 90 and Class 140

B2-8 Pile Details - Class 200

B2-9 Load Test Pile Details (1)



RETAINING WALLS B3-1A Retaining Wall Type 1 (Case 1)

B3-1B Retaining Wall Type 1 (Case 2)

B3-1C Retaining Wall Type 1 (Case 3)

B3-3A Retaining Wall Type 1A (Case 1)

B3-3B Retaining Wall Type 1A (Case 2)

B3-4A Retaining Wall Type 5 (Case 1)


B3-4C Retaining Wall Type 5 (Case 3)

B3-5 Retaining Wall Details No. 1

B3-6 Retaining Wall Details No. 2

B3-7A Retaining Wall Type 6 (Case 1)


B3-7C Retaining Wall Type 6 Details

T-BEAM DETAILS B6-1 T-Beam Details

B6-10 Utility Openings - T-Beam

JOINT SEALS B6-21 Joint Seals (Maximum Movement Rating = 2")

BOX GIRDER DETAILS B7-1 Box Girder Details

DECK DRAINS B7-5 Deck Drains



B7-6 Deck Drains - Types D-1 and D-2

B7-7 Deck Drain - Type D-3

B7-8 Deck Drainage Details

UTILITY OPENING B7-10 Utility Opening - Box Girder

B7-11 Utility Details

CAST-IN-PLACE POST-TENSIONED GIRDER B8-5 Cast-In-Place Post-Tensioned Girder Details

CHAIN LINK RAILING, CABLE RAILING AND TUBULAR HAND RAILING B11-7 Chain Link Railing

B11-47 Cable Railing

B11-51 Tubular Handrailing

B11-52 Chain Link Railing Type 7

BRIDGE CONCRETE BARRIERS B11-54 Concrete Barrier Type 26

B11-55 Concrete Barrier Type 732



B11-60 Concrete Barrier Type 80 (Sheet 1 of 2)

B11-61 Concrete Barrier Type 80 (Sheet 2 of 2)

B11-62 Concrete Barrier Type 80SW (Sheet 1 of 3)



BRIDGE METAL RAIL BARRIERS B11-65 California ST-30 Bridge Rail

B11-66 California ST-40 Bridge Rail (Sheet 1 of 2)





STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATE VEHICULAR UNDERCROSSING B14-1 Structural Steel Plate Vehicular Undercrossing

COMMUNICATION AND SPRINKLER CONTROL CONDUITS (BRIDGE) B14-3 Communication and Sprinkler Control Conduits (Conduit Less Than 4")

WATER SUPPLY LINE (BRIDGE) B14-4 Water Supply Line (Bridge) (Pipe Sizes Less Than 4")

B14-5 Water Supply Line (Details) (Pipe Sizes Less Than 4")

SOUND WALLS B15-1 Sound Wall Masonry Block on Footing Details (1)

B15-2 Sound Wall Masonry Block on Footing Details (2)

B15-3 Sound Wall Masonry Block on Pile Cap Details (1)



B15-6 Sound Wall Masonry Block on Type 736S/SV Barrier Details (1)





B15-9 Sound Wall Masonry Block Miscellaneous Details

B15-10 Sound Wall Masonry Block on Footing or Pile Cap - 5'-0" Access Gate Details (1)

B15-11 Sound Wall Masonry Block on Footing or Pile Cap - 5'-0" Access Gate Details (2)

B15-12 Sound Wall Masonry Block on Barrier - 5'-0" Access Gate Details (1)

B15-13 Sound Wall Masonry Block on Barrier - 5'-0" Access Gate Details (2)

B15-14 Sound Wall Masonry Block Access Gate Locking Details

B15-15 Sound Wall Masonry Block on Type 736S/SV Barrier on Pile Footing for Spanning Utilities

ROADSIDE SIGNS RS1 Roadside Signs - Typical Installation Details No. 1

RS2 Roadside Signs - Wood Post - Typical Installation Details No. 2

RS3 Roadside Signs - Laminated Wood Box Post - Typical Installation Details No. 3

RS4 Roadside Signs - Typical Installation Details No. 4

OVERHEAD SIGNS (TRUSS) S1 Overhead Signs - Truss, Instructions and Examples

S2 Overhead Signs - Truss, Single Post Type - Post Types II thru IX

S3 Overhead Signs - Truss, Single Post Type - Base Plate and Anchorage Details

S4 Overhead Signs - Truss, Single Post Type - Structural Frame Members Details No. 1

S5 Overhead Signs - Truss, Single Post Type - Structural Frame Members Details No. 2

S6 Overhead Signs - Truss, Gusset Plate Details

S8 Overhead Signs - Truss, Single Post Type - Round Pedestal Pile Foundation

S9 Overhead Signs - Truss, Two Post Type - Post Types I-S Through VII-S

S10 Overhead Signs - Truss, Two Post Type - Base Plate and Anchorage Details

S11 Overhead Signs - Truss, Two Post Type - Structural Frame Members

S12 Overhead Signs - Truss, Structural Frame Details

S13 Overhead Signs - Truss, Frame Juncture Details

S15 Overhead Signs - Truss, Two Post Type - Round Pedestal Pile Foundation

S16 Overhead Signs - Walkway Details No. 1

S17 Overhead Signs - Walkway Details No. 2

S17A Overhead Signs - Walkway Details No. 3

S18 Overhead Signs - Walkway Safety Railing Details

S19 Overhead Signs - Truss, Sign Mounting Details - Laminated Panel - Type A

S20 Overhead Signs - Steel Frames - Removable Sign Panel Frames

S21 Overhead Signs - Removable Sign Panel Frames Mounting Details

S22 Overhead Signs - Truss, Removable Sign Panel Frames - 110" and 120" Sign Panels

OVERHEAD SIGNS (TUBULAR) S30 Overhead Signs - Tubular, Instructions and Examples

S31 Overhead Signs - Tubular, Single Post Type - Layout and Pipe Selection

S32 Overhead Signs - Tubular, Two Post Type - Layout and Pipe Selection

S33 Overhead Signs - Tubular, Structural Frame - Details No. 1

S34 Overhead Signs - Tubular, Structural Frame - Details No. 2



S35 Overhead Signs - Tubular, Single and Two Post Type - Base Plate and Anchorage Details

S36 Overhead Signs - Tubular, Single Post and Two Post Type - Square Pedestal Pile Foundation

S37 Overhead Signs - Tubular, Single Post and Two Post Type - Round Pedestal Pile Foundation

OVERHEAD SIGNS (LIGHTWEIGHT) S48 Overhead Signs - Lightweight Post Details

S49 Overhead Signs - Lightweight Foundation Details

S50 Overhead Signs - Lightweight, Extinguishable Message Sign and Flashing Beacons

OVERHEAD AND ROADSIDE SIGNS PANELS S81 Overhead Laminated Sign - Single or Multiple Panel (Type A, 1" Thick)

S82 Roadside Laminated Sign - Single or Multiple Panel (Type B, 1" Thick)

S83 Roadside Laminated Sign - Single or Multiple Panel (Type B, 2-1/2" Thick)

S84 Roadside Laminated Sign - Single or Multiple Panel (Type H, 2-1/2" Thick)

S85 Seam Closure, "H" Section Extrusion and Post Spacing Tables (Multi-Horizontal Laminated Panel Aluminum Signs)

S86 Laminated Panel Details (Extrusions for Type A, B and H Panels)

S87 Type A-1 Mounting Hardware for Overhead Laminated Type A Panel (Truss and Lightweight Sign Structures)

S88 Type A-2 Mounting Hardware for Overhead Laminated Type A Panel (Bridge Mounted and Tubular Sign Structures)

S89 Roadside Sign - Formed Single Sheet Aluminum Panel

S90 Channel and Bolt Hole Location for Overhead Formed Sign Panel

S91 Overhead Sign - Formed Sign Panel, Type A-3 Mounting Hardware

S92 Overhead Sign - Formed Sign Panel

S93 Framing Details for Framed Single Sheet Aluminum Signs, Rectangular Shape

S94 Roadside Framed Single Sheet Aluminum Signs, Rectangular Shape

S95 Roadside Single Sheet Aluminum Signs, Diamond Shape

OVERHEAD SIGN - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN (MODEL 500) S101 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Layout, Unbalanced Butterfly

Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S102 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Structural Frame Details, Unbalanced Butterfly Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S103 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Plan and Upper Bolt Details, Unbalanced Butterfly Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S104 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Frame Juncture Details, Unbalanced Butterfly Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S105 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Layout, Balanced Butterfly Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S106 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Structural Frame Details, Balanced Butterfly Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S107 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Plan and Upper Bolt Details, Balanced Butterfly Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S108 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Frame Juncture Details, Balanced Butterfly Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S109 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Layout, Full Cantilever Changeable



Message Signs, Model 500

S110 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Structural Frame Details, Full Cantilever Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S111 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Plan and Upper Bolt Details, Full Cantilever Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S112 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Frame Juncture Details, Full Cantilever Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S113 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Mounting Details, Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S114 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Walkway Details, Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S115 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Anchorage and Base Plate Details, Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

S116 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Foundation and Miscellaneous Details, Changeable Message Signs, Model 500

OVERHEAD SIGN - CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN (MODEL 500 AND 510) WALKWAY SAFETY RAILING AND GUSSET PLATE DETAILS

S140 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Walkway Safety Railing Details, Changeable Message Signs, Model 500 and 510

S141 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Safety Cable Anchorage Details, Changeable Message Signs, Model 500 and 510

S142 Overhead Sign - Truss, Single Post Type, Gusset Plate Details, Changeable Message Signs, Model 500 and 510

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS ES-1A Electrical Systems (Legend)

ES-1B Electrical Systems (Legend)

RSP ES-1C Electrical Systems (Legend)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND WIRING DIAGRAMS ES-2A Electrical Systems (Service Equipment)

ES-2B Electrical Systems (Service Equipment Enclosure, Type II Series)

ES-2C Electrical Systems (Service Equipment Enclosure Notes, Type III Series)

ES-2D Electrical Systems (Service Equipment Enclosure and Typical Wiring Diagram, Type III - A Series)

ES-2E Electrical Systems (Service Equipment Enclosure and Typical Wiring Diagram, Type III - B Series)

ES-2F Electrical Systems (Service Equipment Enclosure and Typical Wiring Diagram, Type III - C Series)

ES-2G Electrical Systems (Service Equipment Enclosure and Typical Wiring Diagram, Type III - D Series)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - CONTROLLER CABINETS ES-3A Electrical Systems (Controller Cabinet Details)

RSP ES-3B Electrical Systems (Controller Cabinet Adapter, Foundation, and Pad Details)

RSP ES-3C Electrical Systems (Controller Cabinet Foundation and Pad Details)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - TELEPHONE DEMARCATION CABINETS RSP ES-3D Electrical Systems (Telephone Demarcation Cabinet, Type A)

RSP ES-3E Electrical Systems (Telephone Demarcation Cabinet, Type B)

RSP ES-3F Electrical Systems (Telephone Demarcation Cabinet, Type C)

ES-3G Electrical Systems (Telephone Demarcation Cabinet, Type C Details)



ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - IRRIGATION CONTROLLER ENCLOSURE CABINET ES-3H Electrical Systems (Irrigation Controller Enclosure Cabinet)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - BBS POWER CONNECTION DIAGRAMS RSP ES-3I Electrical Systems (BBS Power Connection Diagram, with Bypass Control Line)

RSP ES-3J Electrical Systems (BBS Power Connection Diagram, with Bypass Control Line)

RSP ES-3K Electrical Systems (BBS Power Connection Diagram, without Bypass Control Line)

RSP ES-3L Electrical Systems (BBS Power Connection Diagram, without Bypass Control Line)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - SIGNAL HEADS, SIGNAL FACES AND MOUNTINGS ES-4A Electrical Systems (Signal Heads and Mountings)

ES-4B Electrical Systems (Pedestrian Signal Heads)

ES-4C Electrical Systems (Signal Heads and Mountings)

ES-4D Electrical Systems (Signal Head Mounting)

ES-4E Electrical Systems (Signal Heads and Optical Detector Mounting)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - DETECTORS RSP ES-5A Electrical Systems (Loop Detectors)

RSP ES-5B Electrical Systems (Detectors)

ES-5C Electrical Systems (Accessible Pedestrian Signal and Push Button Assemblies)

ES-5D Electrical Systems (Curb and Shoulder Termination, Trench, and Handhole Details)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - LIGHTING STANDARDS ES-6A Electrical Systems (Lighting Standard, Types 15 and 21)

ES-6B Electrical Systems (Electrolier Anchorage and Grouting for Type 15 and Type 21, Barrier Rail Mounted)

ES-6C Electrical Systems (Lighting Standard, Types 5 and 10, Overhead Sign Mounted)

ES-6D Electrical Systems (Lighting Standard, Types 15D and 21D, Double Luminaire Mast Arm)

ES-6E Electrical Systems (Lighting Standard, Types 30 and 31)

ES-6F Electrical Systems (Lighting Standard, Slip Base Plate)

ES-6G Electrical Systems (Lighting Standard, Type 32)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - SIGNAL AND LIGHTING STANDARD, TYPE TS, AND PUSH BUTTON ASSEMBLY POST

ES-7A Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard, Type TS, and Push Button Assembly Post)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - SIGNAL AND LIGHTING STANDARDS ES-7B Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard, Type 1 and Equipment

Identification Characters)

ES-7C Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard, Case 1 Signal Mast Arm Loading, Wind Velocity = 100 mph and Signal Mast Arm Lengths 15' to 30')

ES-7D Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard, Case 2 Signal Mast Arm Loading, Wind Velocity = 100 mph and Signal Mast Arm Lengths 15' to 30')

ES-7E Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard, Case 3 Signal Mast Arm Loading, Wind Velocity = 100 mph and Signal Mast Arm Lengths 15' to 45')

ES-7F Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard, Case 4 Signal Mast Arm Loading, Wind Velocity = 100 mph and Signal Mast Arm Lengths 25' to 45')

ES-7G Electrical Systems (Signal And Lighting Standard, Case 5 Signal Mast Arm



Loading, Wind Velocity = 100 mph and Signal Mast Arm Lengths 50' to 55')

ES-7H Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard, Case 5 Signal Mast Arm Loading, Wind Velocity = 100 mph and Signal Mast Arm Lengths 60' to 65')

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - FLASHING BEACONS RSP ES-7J Electrical Systems (Flashing Beacon on a Type 1, Type 15-FBS and Type 40

Standard)

RSP ES-7K Electrical Systems (Flashing Beacon with Type 9, 9A and 9B Sign)

RSP ES-7L Electrical Systems (Flashing Beacon with Type 9, 9A and 9B Sign)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - SIGNAL AND LIGHTING STANDARD DETAILS ES-7M Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard - Detail No. 1)

ES-7N Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard - Detail No. 2)

ES-7O Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting Standard - Detail No. 3)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED STREET NAME SIGN ES-7P Electrical Systems (Internally Illuminated Street Name Sign)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - PEDESTRIAN BARRICADES ES-7Q Electrical Systems (Pedestrian Barricades)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - SIGNAL AND LIGHTING, MISCELLANEOUS ATTACHMENT

ES-7R Electrical Systems (Signal and Lighting, Miscellaneous Attachment)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - PULL BOX RSP ES-8A Electrical Systems (Non-Traffic Pull Box)

RSP ES-8B Electrical Systems (Traffic Pull Box)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - STRUCTURE INSTALLATIONS ES-9A Electrical Systems (Structure Pull Box Installations)

ES-9B Electrical Systems (Conduit Riser and Expansion Fitting, Structure Installations)

RSP ES-9C Electrical Systems (Structure Pull Box)

RSP ES-9D Electrical Systems (Structure Pull Box Installations)

RSP ES-9E Electrical Systems (Flush-Mounted Soffit, Pendant soffit and Wall-Mounted Luminaire, Structure Installations)

ES-9F Electrical Systems (Flush-Mounted Soffit Luminaire Details)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - ISOFOOTCANDLE CURVES AND FOUNDATION DETAILS

ES-10A Electrical Systems (Isofootcandle Curves)

ES-10B Electrical Systems (Isofootcandle Curves)

ES-11 Electrical Systems (Foundation Installations)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - SPLICING, FUSE RATING, KINKING AND BANDING DETAILS

RSP ES-13A Electrical Systems (Splicing Details)

RSP ES-13B Electrical Systems (Fuse Rating, Kinking, and Banding Detail)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - EXTINGUISHABLE MESSAGE SIGN ES-14A Electrical Systems (LED Extinguishable Message Sign, 10" Letters)

RSP ES-14B Electrical Systems (Control Assembly Wiring Diagrams)

ES-14C Electrical Systems (Extinguishable Message Sign on a Full Cantilever)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - SIGN ILLUMINATION EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS ES-15A Electrical Systems (Sign Illumination Equipment)

ES-15C Electrical Systems (Sign Illumination Equipment)

ES-15D Electrical Systems (Lighting and Sign Illumination Control)



ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION POLE AND FOUNDATION DETAILS

ES-16A Electrical Systems (Closed Circuit Television, 5' to 15' Overhead Sign Mounted Pole)

ES-16B Electrical Systems (Closed Circuit Television, 25' to 45' Pole)

ES-16C Electrical Systems (Closed Circuit Television - 50' to 90' High Mast Pole)

ES-16D Electrical Systems (Closed Circuit Television with Vehicle Detection System, 30' to 40' Pole)

.


Bid Item List 17

BID ITEM LIST

Item No.

Item Code Item Description Unit of Measure

Estimated Quantity

1 017261 VIBRATION MONITORING LS LS

2 070019A SURVEY OF EXISTING NON-HIGHWAY FACILITIES LS LS

3 070030 LEAD COMPLIANCE PLAN LS LS

4 080050 PROGRESS SCHEDULE (CRITICAL PATH METHOD) LS LS

5 090105 TIME-RELATED OVERHEAD WD 550

6 120090 CONSTRUCTION AREA SIGNS LS LS

7 120100 TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEM LS LS

8 120120 TYPE III BARRICADE EA 24

9 120159 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC STRIPE (PAINT) LF 160,000

10 120165 CHANNELIZER (SURFACE MOUNTED) EA 202

11 120300 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKER EA 8,200

12 128652 PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN LS LS

13 128662A TEMPORARY SHORING SQFT 25,600

14 129000 TEMPORARY RAILING (TYPE K) LF 68,900

15 129100 TEMPORARY CRASH CUSHION MODULE EA 190

16 129101A TEMPORARY CRASH CUSHION ABSORB 350 (TYPE TL-2)

EA 9

17 129102A TEMPORARY CRASH CUSHION ABSORB 350 (TYPE TL-3)

EA 7

18 129170A TEMPORARY CREEK DIVERSION SYSTEM EA 2

19 130100 JOB SITE MANAGEMENT LS LS

20 130300 PREPARE STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

LS LS


Bid Item List 18

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

21 130310 RAIN EVENT ACTION PLAN EA 60

22 130320 STORM WATER SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS DAY EA 40

23 130330 STORM WATER ANNUAL REPORT EA 3

24 130505 MOVE-IN/MOVE-OUT (TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL)

EA 10

25 130530 TEMPORARY HYDRAULIC MULCH (BONDED FIBER MATRIX)

SQYD 12,300

26 130620 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE INLET PROTECTION EA 125

27 130640 TEMPORARY FIBER ROLL LF 9,900

28 130680 TEMPORARY SILT FENCE LF 8,500

29 130710 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE EA 32

30 130720 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ROADWAY SQYD 5,000

31 130730 STREET SWEEPING LS LS

32 130800 TEMPORARY ACTIVE TREATMENT SYSTEM LS LS

33 130900 TEMPORARY CONCRETE WASHOUT LS LS

34 131103 WATER QUALITY SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS DAY EA 24

35 140003 ASBESTOS COMPLIANCE PLAN LS LS

36 141000 TEMPORARY FENCE (TYPE ESA) LF 2,890

37 141103 REMOVE YELLOW THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC STRIPE (HAZARDOUS WASTE)

LF 61,050

38 141109 ADL BURIAL LOCATION REPORT LS LS

39 141120 TREATED WOOD WASTE LS LS

40 148005 NOISE MONITORING LS LS


Bid Item List 19

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

41 150204 ABANDON CULVERT LF 535

42 150608 REMOVE CHAIN LINK FENCE LF 5,640

43 150620 REMOVE GATE EA 1

44 150661 REMOVE GUARDRAIL LF 1,292

45 150665 REMOVE SINGLE METAL BEAM BARRIER LF 2,750

46 150667 REMOVE DOUBLE METAL BEAM BARRIER LF 13,560

47 150714 REMOVE THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC STRIPE LF 93,800

48 150715 REMOVE THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING SQFT 280

49 150722 REMOVE PAVEMENT MARKER EA 11,130

50 150742 REMOVE ROADSIDE SIGN EA 25

51 150757 REMOVE SIGN STRUCTURE EA 4

52 150770 REMOVE ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT SQFT 8,825

53 150771 REMOVE ASPHALT CONCRETE DIKE LF 7,660

54 150809 REMOVE CULVERT LF 473

55 150820 REMOVE INLET EA 32

56 150833 REMOVE RETAINING WALL LF 595

57 150854 REMOVE CONCRETE PAVEMENT CY 13,528

58 150860 REMOVE BASE AND SURFACING CY 1,100

59 151270 SALVAGE METAL BRIDGE RAILING LF 2,758

60 152430 ADJUST INLET EA 28


Bid Item List 20

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

61 153121 REMOVE CONCRETE CY 61

62 153221 REMOVE CONCRETE BARRIER LF 710

63 153226 REFINISH BRIDGE DECK SQFT 160

64 153307 CORE CONCRETE (7") LF 5

65 155003 CAP INLET EA 2

66 157550 BRIDGE REMOVAL LS LS

67 157560 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION) (LOCATION A) LS LS

68 157560 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION) (LOCATION B) LS LS

69 157560 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION) (LOCATION C) LS LS

70 157560 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION) (LOCATION D) LS LS

71 157560 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION) (LOCATION E) LS LS

72 157560 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION) (LOCATION F) LS LS

73 160102 CLEARING AND GRUBBING LS LS

74 190101 ROADWAY EXCAVATION CY 70,040

75 190107 ROADWAY EXCAVATION (TYPE Y-1) (AERIALLY DEPOSITED LEAD)

CY 2,220

76 192003 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION (BRIDGE) CY 4,611

77 192008 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION (TYPE A) CY 1,240

78 192037 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION (RETAINING WALL) CY 680

79 192057 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION (TYPE Y-1)(AERIALLY DEPOSITED LEAD) CY 753

80 193003 STRUCTURE BACKFILL (BRIDGE) CY 3,690


Bid Item List 21

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

81 193013 STRUCTURE BACKFILL (RETAINING WALL) CY 1,000

82 193114 SAND BACKFILL CY 35

83 193118A LIGHTWEIGHT EMBANKMENT MATERIAL (CELLULAR CONCRETE)

CY 35,485

84 198209 SUBGRADE ENHANCEMENT GEOTEXTILE, CLASS B2

SQYD 122,873

85 194001 DITCH EXCAVATION CY 2,850

86 200101A IMPORTED BIOFILTRATION SOIL CY 1,095

87 210010 MOVE-IN/MOVE-OUT (EROSION CONTROL) EA 10

88 210270 ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCT (NETTING)

SQFT 141,400

89 210300 HYDROMULCH SQFT 443,000

90 210350 FIBER ROLLS LF 56,200

91 210420 STRAW SQFT 586,500

92 210430 HYDROSEED SQFT 734,200

93 210600 COMPOST SQFT 613,300

94 250201 CLASS 2 AGGREGATE SUBBASE CY 34,560

95 260203 CLASS 2 AGGREGATE BASE CY 1,270

96 280000 LEAN CONCRETE BASE CY 7,034

97 280200 REPLACE BASE CY 181

98 390132 HOT MIX ASPHALT (TYPE A) TON 30,670

99 390137 RUBBERIZED HOT MIX ASPHALT (GAP GRADED) TON 5,970

100 394060 DATA CORE LS LS


Bid Item List 22

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

101 394074 PLACE HOT MIX ASPHALT DIKE (TYPE C) LF 520

102 394076 PLACE HOT MIX ASPHALT DIKE (TYPE E) LF 7,220

103 394077 PLACE HOT MIX ASPHALT DIKE (TYPE F) LF 6,330

104 394090 PLACE HOT MIX ASPHALT (MISCELLANEOUS AREA)

SQYD 248

105 400050 CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT

CY 9,515

106 401050 JOINTED PLAIN CONCRETE PAVEMENT CY 14,420

107 410096 DRILL AND BOND (DOWEL BARS) EA 320

108 411105 INDIVIDUAL SLAB REPLACEMENT (RAPID STRENGTH CONCRETE)

CY 373

109 490505A FURNISH STEEL PILING (PP 18 X 0.625) LF 479

110 490506A DRIVE STEEL PILE (PP 18 X 0.625) EA 10

111 490603 24" CAST-IN-DRILLED-HOLE CONCRETE PILING LF 3,760

112 490606 42" CAST-IN-DRILLED-HOLE CONCRETE PILING LF 1,232

113 490614 78" CAST-IN-DRILLED-HOLE CONCRETE PILING LF 73

114 490617 90" CAST-IN-DRILLED-HOLE CONCRETE PILING LF 85

115 490746 FURNISH PILING (CLASS 140) (ALTERNATIVE W) LF 3,800

116 490747 DRIVE PILE (CLASS 140) (ALTERNATIVE W) EA 82

117 490782 FURNISH PILING (CLASS 200) (ALTERNATIVE W) LF 14,461

118 490783 DRIVE PILE (CLASS 200) (ALTERNATIVE W) EA 225

119 495133 FURNISH 36" CAST-IN-STEEL SHELL CONCRETE PILING LF 217

120 495134 DRIVE 36" CAST-IN-STEEL SHELL CONCRETE PILE EA 4


Bid Item List 23

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

121

500001 PRESTRESSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LS LS

122 510000 SEAL COURSE CONCRETE CY 300

123 510051 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, BRIDGE FOOTING CY 1,270

124 510053 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, BRIDGE CY 4,575

125 510054 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, BRIDGE (POLYMER FIBER) CY 3,355

126 510060 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, RETAINING WALL CY 417

127 510086 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, APPROACH SLAB (TYPE N) CY 1,272

128 510087 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, APPROACH SLAB (TYPE R) CY 82

129 510502 MINOR CONCRETE (MINOR STRUCTURE) CY 399

130 510503A WATER QUALITY WEIR EA 11

131 510526 MINOR CONCRETE (BACKFILL) CY 1,081

132 511106 DRILL AND BOND DOWEL LF 6,489

133 512202 FURNISH PC PS CONCRETE GIRDER (30FT-40FT) EA 9




137 512206A FURNISH PC PS CONCRETE WIDE FLANGE GIRDER (70FT-80FT) EA 20



140 512500 ERECT PC PS CONCRETE GIRDER EA 114


Bid Item List 24

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

141

519081 JOINT SEAL (MR = 1/2") LF 57

142 519088 JOINT SEAL (MR = 1") LF 318

143 519091 JOINT SEAL (MR = 1 1/2") LF 517

144 519100 JOINT SEAL (MR = 2") LF 207

145 519102 JOINT SEAL (TYPE AL) LF 27

146 520102 BAR REINFORCING STEEL (BRIDGE) LB 2,850,300

147 520103 BAR REINFORCING STEEL (RETAINING WALL) LB 37,400

148 520110 BAR REINFORCING STEEL (EPOXY COATED) (BRIDGE) LB 344,600

149 520120 HEADED BAR REINFORCEMENT EA 912

150 540101 ASPHALT MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING SQFT 1,997

151 550110 COLUMN CASING LB 134,700

152 560218 FURNISH SIGN STRUCTURE (TRUSS) LB 138,500

153 560219 INSTALL SIGN STRUCTURE (TRUSS) LB 138,500

154 560233 FURNISH FORMED PANEL SIGN (OH SIGN) SQFT 2,140

155 560248 FURNISH SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN (0.063"-UNFRAMED)

SQFT 340

156 560249 FURNISH SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN (0.080"-UNFRAMED)

SQFT 80

157 560251 FURNISH SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN (0.063" FRAMED)

SQFT 160

158 560252 FURNISH SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN (0.080" FRAMED)

SQFT 290

159 498052 60" CAST-IN-DRILLED-HOLE CONCRETE PILE (SIGN FOUNDATION)

LF 172

160 562004 METAL (RAIL MOUNTED SIGN) LB 700


Bid Item List 25

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

161 566011 ROADSIDE SIGN - ONE POST EA 18

162 566012 ROADSIDE SIGN - TWO POST EA 7

163 568001 INSTALL SIGN (STRAP AND SADDBLE METHOD) EA 10

164 620060 12" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT LF 28

165 620100 18" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT LF 5,963

166 620140 24" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT LF 2,190

167 620220 36" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT LF 127

168 650018 24" REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE LF 11

169 650034 48" REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE LF 5,292

170 650042 60" REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE LF 745

171 655211 JACKED 18" REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (CLASS II)

LF 201

172 665010 12" CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE LF 82

173 665016 18" CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE LF 48

174 680905 8" PERFORATED PLASTIC PIPE UNDERDRAIN LF 922

175 682022 CLASS 2 PERMEABLE MATERIAL CY 341

176 705307 12" ALTERNATIVE FLARED END SECTION EA 2



179 721015A ROCK SLOPE PROTECTION (LIGHT, METHOD A) CY 252

180 721602 ROCK SLOPE PROTECTION (LIGHT, METHOD B) CY 43


Bid Item List 26

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

181

721810 SLOPE PAVING (CONCRETE) CY 247

182 729011 ROCK SLOPE PROTECTION FABRIC (CLASS 8) SQYD 143

183 731502 MINOR CONCRETE (MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION)

CY 198

184 731518 MINOR CONCRETE (BRUSHED CONCRETE) SQFT 9,562

185 750001 MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL LB 53,930

186 750041 ISOLATION CASING LB 24,200

187 750501 MISCELLANEOUS METAL (BRIDGE) LB 1,581

188 750505 BRIDGE DECK DRAINAGE SYSTEM LB 14,580

189 800360 CHAIN LINK FENCE (TYPE CL-6) LF 2,300

190 802620 16' CHAIN LINK GATE (TYPE CL-6) EA 1

191 820107 DELINEATOR (CLASS 1) EA 87

192 820132 OBJECT MARKER (TYPE L) EA 12

193 820136A BARRIER MARKER EA 56

194 832007 MIDWEST GUARDRAIL SYSTEM (WOOD POST) LF 8,205

195 832070 VEGETATION CONTROL (MINOR CONCRETE) SQYD 16,710

196 839221 DOUBLE MIDWEST GUARDRAIL SYSTEM (WOOD POST)

LF 25

197 839271 CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 732A) LF 605

198 839302 SINGLE THRIE BEAM BARRIER (WOOD POST) LF 2,020

199 839311 DOUBLE THRIE BEAM BARRIER (WOOD POST) LF 9,300

200 839540 TRANSITION RAILING (TYPE STB) EA 8


Bid Item List 27

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

201 839542 TRANSITION RAILING (TYPE DTB) EA 4

202 839543 TRANSITION RAILING (TYPE WB-31) EA 11

203 839576 END CAP (TYPE A) EA 7

204 839578 END CAP (TYPE TC) EA 23

205 839581 END ANCHOR ASSEMBLY (TYPE SFT) EA 9

206 839582 END ANCHOR ASSEMBLY (TYPE CA) EA 1

207 839585 ALTERNATIVE FLARED TERMINAL SYSTEM EA 6

208 839601 CRASH CUSHION (TYPE CAT) EA 2

209 839602 CRASH CUSHION (TYPE CAT) BACKUP EA 2

210 839699 CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60P) LF 96

211 839700 CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60F) LF 710

212 839700A CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60R) LF 164

213 839701 CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60) LF 1,808

214 839701A CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60R) (MOD) LF 88

215 839702 CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60A) LF 509

216 839702A CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60A) (MOD) LF 322

217 839703 CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60C) LF 3,250

218 839705A CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60D) (MOD) LF 157

219 839720 CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 732) LF 2,257

220 839720A CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 732) (MOD) LF 1,684


Bid Item List 28

Item No.


Estimated Quantity

221 840506 8" THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC STRIPE LF 4,100

222 840516 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING (ENHANCED WET NIGHT VISIBILITY)

SQFT 770

223 840525 4" THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC STRIPE (BROKEN 36-12)

LF 77,100

224 840526 4" THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC STRIPE (BROKEN 17-7)

LF 3,100

225 840656 PAINT TRAFFIC STRIPE (2-COAT) LF 80,000

226 840666 PAINT PAVEMENT MARKING (2-COAT) SQFT 1,050

227 846001 4" THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC STRIPE (ENHANCED WET NIGHT VISIBILITY)

LF 53,300

228 850101 PAVEMENT MARKER (NON-REFLECTIVE) EA 7,100

229 850111 PAVEMENT MARKER (RETROREFLECTIVE) EA 3,150

230 860090 MAINTAIN EXISTING TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ELEMENTS DURING CONSTRUCTION

LS LS

231 860415 LIGHTING (STAGE CONSTRUCTION) LS LS

232 861547A TRAFFIC OPERATIONS SYSTEM (STAGE CONSTRUCTION)

LS LS

233 872134A MODIFYING EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (LIGHTING)

LS LS

234 872135A MODIFYING EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (TRAFFIC OPERATIONS SYSTEM)

LS LS

235 999990 MOBILIZATION (10%) LS LS


Special Provisions 29

XE "SP_TEMPLATE_A10-30-15__2015"

Page 1 of 11

SP_TEMPLATE. Insert special provisions between corresponding headings and caret separations. Delete headings and carets if you do not insert special provisions between them. Do not use a reserved heading without authorization from the OCCS Chief.

Insert the Standard Plan List at the top of this document.

Unless a standard special provision (SSP) instructs otherwise, use the following editing instructions for all SSPs:

1. Do not delete a section of an SSP. If a section is not used under the instructions of the SSP, (1) leave the heading unedited, (2) write Not Used under the heading, and (3) strike and hide the text of the section.

2. Interpret instructions in a list as all items in the list applying unless the items are specified as choices.

3. Renumber a list if an item other than the last is deleted.

4. If 1 item remains after deleting items in a list and the clause introducing the list becomes incorrect, combine the remaining item with the clause introducing the list. Exception: Do not combine 1 listed item and change an introduction for a grammatical correction (e.g., do not change plural pronouns and verbs to their singular forms).

5. Use the style Comments for any editing notes you add. Limit your use of editing notes.

ORGANIZATION Special provisions are under headings that correspond with the main-section headings of the Standard Specifications. A main-section heading is a heading shown in the table of contents of the Standard Specifications.

Each special provision begins with a revision clause that describes or introduces a revision to the Standard Specifications as revised by any revised standard specification.

Any paragraph added or deleted by a revision clause does not change the paragraph numbering of the Standard Specifications for any other reference to a paragraph of the Standard Specifications.



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION I GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 GENERAL

XE "1-1.01_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 15

Section 1-1.01. Use for any bid item that has a code that does not correspond to the specification section number.

Undelete applicable rows.

Add rows for nonstandard items. Use an item code that corresponds to the specification section number and add an A to the code (e.g., 801000A). HQOE will convert the number to a one-time-use number. Add rows as necessary.

Add to section 1-1.01:

Bid Items and Applicable Sections

Item code

Item description Applicable section

141000 TEMPORARY FENCE (TYPE ESA) 16 146005 TEMPORARY WETLAND PROTECTION MAT (EA) 16 146006 TEMPORARY WETLAND PROTECTION MAT (LS) 16 150100 PUBLIC SAFETY PLAN 60 150190 INJECT CRACK (EPOXY) 60 150200 CLOSE ACCESS, DECK 60 150201 SOFFIT ACCESS EXTENSION 60 150202 CORE AND PRESSURE GROUT DOWEL 60 150203 ABANDON CULVERT (EA) 71 150204 ABANDON CULVERT (LF) 71 150205 ABANDON REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX 71 150208 ABANDON DECK DRAIN 71 150209 ABANDON DRAINAGE FACILITY 71 150221 ABANDON INLET 71 150224 ABANDON MANHOLE 71 150227 ABANDON PIPELINE 71 150230 DESTROY WELL 76 150241 ABANDON SEWER 71 150305 OBLITERATE SURFACING 78 150310 RAPID SETTING CONCRETE (PATCH) 60 150312 REPAIR SPALLED SURFACE AREA 60 150604 REMOVE WOOD FENCE 80 150605 REMOVE FENCE 80 150606 REMOVE FENCE (TYPE BW) 80 150607 REMOVE FENCE (TYPE WM) 80 150608 REMOVE CHAIN LINK FENCE 80 150615 REMOVE ENTRANCE TAPER 71 150620 REMOVE GATE 80 150630 REMOVE MARKER 82 150646 REMOVE PEDESTRIAN BARRICADE 56 150655 REMOVE BARRIER 83 150656 REMOVE CABLE BARRIER 83 150661 REMOVE GUARDRAIL 83




Item code


150665 REMOVE SINGLE METAL BEAM BARRIER 83 150667 REMOVE DOUBLE METAL BEAM BARRIER 83 150668 REMOVE FLARED END SECTION 70 150676 REMOVE CABLE RAILING 83 150685 REMOVE IRRIGATION FACILITY 20 150711 REMOVE PAINTED TRAFFIC STRIPE 84 150712 REMOVE PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKING 84 150714 REMOVE THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC STRIPE 84 150715 REMOVE THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING 84 150720 REMOVE CONTRAST TREATMENT 84 150722 REMOVE PAVEMENT MARKER 81 150740 REMOVE SIGN 82 150741 REMOVE ROADSIDE SIGN MOUNTED ON MAST ARM 82 150742 REMOVE ROADSIDE SIGN 82 150743 REMOVE SIGN FROM ELECTROLIER 82 150744 REMOVE ROADSIDE SIGN (WOOD POST) 82 150745 REMOVE ROADSIDE SIGN (METAL POST) 82 150746 REMOVE ROADSIDE SIGN (TIMBER POLE) 82 150747 REMOVE ROADSIDE SIGN (STRAP AND SADDLE BRACKET

METHOD) 82

150748 REMOVE ROADSIDE SIGN PANEL 82 150749 REMOVE METAL POST 82 150750 REMOVE ROADSIDE SIGN (STEEL POST) 82 150755 REMOVE SIGN STRUCTURE WALKWAY (EA) 56 150756 REMOVE SIGN STRUCTURE WALKWAY (LS) 56 150757 REMOVE SIGN STRUCTURE (EA) 56 150758 REMOVE SIGN STRUCTURE (LS) 56 150761 REMOVE SIGN PANEL AND REMOVABLE SIGN PANEL FRAME 82 150762 REMOVE SIGN FROM SIGN FRAME 82 150763 REMOVE SIGN PANEL 82 150764 REMOVE SIGN OVERLAY 82 150765 REMOVE SIGN POST 82 150767 REMOVE BRIDGE MOUNTED SIGN 56 150768 REMOVE ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (CY) 39 150770 REMOVE ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (SQFT) 39 150771 REMOVE ASPHALT CONCRETE DIKE 39 150772 REMOVE CURB 73 150776 REMOVE DRAINAGE FACILITY (EA) 71 150777 REMOVE DRAINAGE FACILITY (LS) 71 150780 REMOVE GUTTER DRAIN 71 150801 REMOVE OVERSIDE DRAIN 71 150807 REMOVE STORM DRAIN 71 150808 REMOVE CULVERT (EA) 71 150809 REMOVE CULVERT (LF) 71 150810 REMOVE PIPE (EA) 71 150812 REMOVE PIPE (LF) 71 150814 REMOVE DOWNDRAIN (EA) 71 150815 REMOVE DOWNDRAIN (LS) 71 150816 REMOVE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERT (EA) 71 150817 REMOVE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERT (LF) 71




Item code


150818 REMOVE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERT (CY) 71 150819 REMOVE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERT (LS) 71 150820 REMOVE INLET 71 150821 REMOVE HEADWALL 71 150824 REMOVE SEWER MANHOLE 71 150826 REMOVE MANHOLE 71 150827 REMOVE CATCH BASIN 71 150828 REMOVE JUNCTION BOX 71 150831 REMOVE DRAINAGE JUNCTION STRUCTURE 71 150832 REMOVE RETAINING WALL (CY) 60 150833 REMOVE RETAINING WALL (LF) 60 150834 REMOVE RETAINING WALL (WOOD) 60 150836 REMOVE RETAINING WALL (LS) 60 150837 REMOVE RETAINING WALL (PORTION) (CY) 60 150838 REMOVE RETAINING WALL (PORTION) (LF) 60 150839 REMOVE RETAINING WALL (PORTION) (LS) 60 150841 REMOVE SEWER PIPE 71 150847 REMOVE CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND BASE 41 150851 REMOVE SLOPE PAVING (LS) 72 150852 REMOVE SLOPE PAVING (SQYD) 72 150853 REMOVE CONCRETE PAVEMENT (SQYD) 41 150854 REMOVE CONCRETE PAVEMENT (CY) 41 150857 REMOVE ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING 60 150859 REMOVE ASPHALT CONCRETE OVERSIDE DRAIN 71 150860 REMOVE BASE AND SURFACING 39 150870 REMOVE CONCRETE DECK SURFACE 60 151211 SALVAGE CORRUGATED METAL PIPE 71 151212 SALVAGE CORRUGATED METAL PIPE ARCH 71 151214 SALVAGE REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 71 151224 REMOVE DELINEATOR 81 151226 SALVAGE GRATE 71 151227 SALVAGE FRAME AND GRATE 71 151230 SALVAGE DOWNDRAIN 71 151251 SALVAGE IRRIGATION FACILITY 20 151258 SALVAGE DELINEATOR 81 151261 SALVAGE FENCE (TYPE BW) 80 151264 SALVAGE FENCE 80 151265 SALVAGE SINGLE THRIE BEAM BARRIER 83 151266 SALVAGE DOUBLE THRIE BEAM BARRIER 83 151268 SALVAGE CHAIN LINK GATE 80 151269 SALVAGE MARKER 82 151270 SALVAGE METAL BRIDGE RAILING 83 151274 SALVAGE CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE K) 83 151280 SALVAGE ROADSIDE SIGN (STRAP AND SADDLE BRACKET

METHOD) 82

151281 SALVAGE ROADSIDE SIGN 82 151282 SALVAGE ROADSIDE SIGN PANEL 82 151284 SALVAGE ROADSIDE SIGN (WOOD POST) 82 151285 SALVAGE SIGN PANEL 82 151286 SALVAGE SIGN STRUCTURE 56




Item code


151287 SALVAGE SIGNS AND FLASHING BEACONS 82 151290 SALVAGE ROADSIDE SIGN (METAL POST) 82 151295 SALVAGE GUARDRAIL (STEEL POST) 83 151296 SALVAGE GUARDRAIL 83 151508 RECONSTRUCT DRAINAGE FACILITY (EA) 71 151509 RECONSTRUCT DRAINAGE FACILITY (LS) 71 151512 RECONSTRUCT INLET 71 151531 RECONSTRUCT FENCE 80 151534 RECONSTRUCT WOOD FENCE 80 151536 RECONSTRUCT FENCE (TYPE BW) 80 151537 RECONSTRUCT FENCE (TYPE WM) 80 151538 RECONSTRUCT CHAIN LINK RAILING 83 151540 RECONSTRUCT CHAIN LINK FENCE 80 151554 RECONSTRUCT CHAIN LINK GATE 80 151568 RECONSTRUCT THRIE BEAM BARRIER 83 151570 RECONSTRUCT DOUBLE THRIE BEAM BARRIER 83 151573 RECONSTRUCT GUARDRAIL 83 151581 RECONSTRUCT SIGN STRUCTURE 56 151626 RECONSTRUCT GUARDRAIL (7' POST) 83 151627 RECONSTRUCT GUARDRAIL (WOOD POST) 83 152255 RESET MAILBOX 78 152261 RESET INLET 71 152266 RESET FRAME AND GRATE 71 152291 RESET GATE 80 152299 RESET MILEPOST MARKER 82 152300 RESET OBJECT MARKER 82 152301 RESET MARKER 82 152303 RESET MARKERS AND DELINEATORS 81 152315 RESET CRASH CUSHION 83 152316 RESET ROADSIDE SIGN (ONE POST) 82 152317 RESET ROADSIDE SIGN (TWO POST) 82 152320 RESET ROADSIDE SIGN 82 152322 RESET ROADSIDE SIGN (WOOD POST) 82 152324 RESET ROADSIDE SIGN (METAL POST) 82 152325 RESET ROADSIDE SIGN (STRAP AND SADDLE BRACKET METHOD) 82 152370 RELOCATE MAILBOX 78 152372 RELOCATE CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE K) 83 152379 RELOCATE FENCE 80 152380 RELOCATE CHAIN LINK FENCE 80 152381 RELOCATE GATE 80 152383 RELOCATE OVERSIDE DRAIN 71 152384 RELOCATE OBJECT MARKER 82 152385 RELOCATE MARKER 82 152386 RELOCATE ROADSIDE SIGN-ONE POST 82 152387 RELOCATE ROADSIDE SIGN-TWO POST 82 152388 RELOCATE CRASH CUSHION 83 152390 RELOCATE ROADSIDE SIGN 82 152391 RELOCATE ROADSIDE SIGN (METAL POST) 82 152392 RELOCATE ROADSIDE SIGN (WOOD POST) 82 152393 RELOCATE ROADSIDE SIGN (STRAP AND SADDLE BRACKET 82




Item code


METHOD) 152394 RELOCATE SIGN STRUCTURE 56 152395 RELOCATE GUARDRAIL 83 152396 RELOCATE SIGN PANEL 82 152398 RELOCATE SIGN STRUCTURE (BRIDGE-MOUNTED) 56 152399 RELOCATE FRAMED SIGN PANEL 82 152400 ADJUST SEWER CLEANOUT TO GRADE 71 152415 ADJUST EDGE DRAIN CLEANOUT 71 152422 ADJUST MONUMENT COVER 78 152423 ADJUST MONUMENT TO GRADE 78 152430 ADJUST INLET 71 152431 ADJUST GRATE 71 152432 ADJUST MANHOLE 71 152434 ADJUST RISER 71 152436 ADJUST DOWNDRAIN 71 152437 ADJUST OVERSIDE DRAIN 71 152438 ADJUST FRAME AND COVER TO GRADE 71 152439 ADJUST FRAME AND GRATE TO GRADE 71 152440 ADJUST MANHOLE TO GRADE 71 152441 ADJUST VALVE BOX FRAME AND COVER TO GRADE 71 152443 ADJUST PIPE INLET TO GRADE 71 152453 ADJUST VALVE BOX 71 152454 ADJUST PULL BOX 86 152469 ADJUST UTILITY COVER TO GRADE 71 152472 ADJUST UTILITY COVER 71 152473 ADJUST UNDERDRAIN RISER 71 152475 ADJUST SEWER MANHOLE 71 152501 ADJUST GUARDRAIL 83 152555 ADJUST SLOTTED DRAIN TO GRADE 71 152600 MODIFY DRAINAGE FACILITY 71 152601 MODIFY DRAINAGE STRUCTURE 71 152602 MODIFY HEADWALL 71 152603 MODIFY DRAINAGE SYSTEM 71 152604 MODIFY INLET 71 152605 MODIFY INLET GRATE 71 152606 MODIFY DOWNDRAIN 71 152607 MODIFY CATCH BASIN 71 152608 MODIFY SLOTTED PIPE GRATE 71 152609 MODIFY INLET TO MANHOLE 71 152610 MODIFY MANHOLE 71 152622 MODIFY EDGE DRAIN CLEANOUT 71 152633 MODIFY GUARDRAIL 83 152641 MODIFY SIGN STRUCTURE 56 152650 MODIFY CHAIN LINK FENCE 80 152659 PLASTIC PIPE LINER 71 152664 PLASTIC PIPE LINER (21.50" O.D.) 71 153103 COLD PLANE ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 39 153130 REMOVE CONCRETE CURB (LF) 73 153131 REMOVE CONCRETE CURB (CY) 73 153132 REMOVE CONCRETE CURB (LS) 73




Item code


153133 REMOVE CONCRETE CURB (SQYD) 73 153136 REMOVE CONCRETE CURB AND SIDEWALK (LF) 73 153138 REMOVE CONCRETE CURB AND SIDEWALK (SQYD) 73 153139 REMOVE CONCRETE SIDEWALK (LF) 73 153140 REMOVE CONCRETE SIDEWALK (SQYD) 73 153141 REMOVE CONCRETE ISLAND (PORTIONS) (SQYD) 73 153142 REMOVE CONCRETE ISLAND (PORTIONS) (CY) 73 153211 REMOVE CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAY 73 153213 REMOVE CONCRETE (STRUCTURE) 73 153215 REMOVE CONCRETE (CURB AND GUTTER) 73 153219 REMOVE CONCRETE FLARED END SECTION 70 153220 REMOVE CONCRETE (CHANNEL) 71 153221 REMOVE CONCRETE BARRIER 83 153223 REMOVE UNSOUND CONCRETE 60 153224 POLYESTER CONCRETE EXPANSION DAM 60 153225 PREPARE CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK SURFACE 60 153226 REFINISH BRIDGE DECK 60 153227 FURNISH POLYESTER CONCRETE OVERLAY 60 153228 PLACE POLYESTER CONCRETE OVERLAY 60 153229 REMOVE CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE K) 83 153230 REMOVE CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 50) 83 153231 REMOVE CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 50C) 83 153233 TREAT BRIDGE DECK 60 153234 FURNISH BRIDGE DECK TREATMENT MATERIAL 60 153237 REMOVE CHIP SEAL 60 153240 REMOVE CONCRETE (CURB, GUTTER, AND SIDEWALK) (CY) 73 153241 REMOVE CONCRETE (CURB, GUTTER, AND SIDEWALK) (LF) 73 153251 REMOVE SOUND WALL (LF) 60 153252 REMOVE SOUND WALL (LS) 60 153253 REMOVE SOUND WALL (SQFT) 60 153300 CORE CONCRETE 60 153301 CORE CONCRETE (1") 60 153302 CORE CONCRETE (2") 60 153303 CORE CONCRETE (3") 60 153304 CORE CONCRETE (4") 60 153305 CORE CONCRETE (5") 60 153306 CORE CONCRETE (6") 60 153307 CORE CONCRETE (7") 60 153308 CORE CONCRETE (8") 60 153309 CORE CONCRETE (9") 60 153310 CORE CONCRETE (10") 60 153312 CORE CONCRETE (12") 60 153315 CORE CONCRETE (15") 60 153318 CORE CONCRETE (1 1/8") 60 153319 CORE CONCRETE (1 1/4") 60 153320 CORE CONCRETE (1 1/2") 60 153321 CORE CONCRETE (1 3/4") 60 153322 CORE CONCRETE (2 1/2") 60 153530 ACCESS OPENING, DECK 60 153531 ACCESS OPENING, SOFFIT 60




Item code


155003 CAP INLET 71 155006 CAP RISER 71 155007 CAP MANHOLE 71 155100 6" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155101 6" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155102 6" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155103 8" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155104 8" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155105 8" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155106 10" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155107 10" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155108 10" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155109 12" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155110 12" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155111 12" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155112 15" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155113 15" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155114 15" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155115 18" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155116 18" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155117 18" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155118 21" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155119 21" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155120 21" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155121 24" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155122 24" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155123 24" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155124 27" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155125 27" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155126 27" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155127 30" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155128 30" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155129 30" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155130 36" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155131 36" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155132 36" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155133 42" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155134 42" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155135 42" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155136 48" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155137 48" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155138 48" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155139 54" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155140 54" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155141 54" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155142 60" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER 71 155143 60" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE A) 71 155144 60" ALTERNATIVE PIPELINER (TYPE B) 71 155212 CLEANING, INSPECTING, AND PREPARING CULVERT (CY) 71 155213 CLEANING, INSPECTING, AND PREPARING CULVERT (LF) 71




Item code


155220 CULVERT CONTACT GROUTING 71 155221 GROUT PORTS 71 155230 CONCRETE INVERT PAVING 71 155231 CULVERT SLURRY-CEMENT BACKFILL 71 155232 SAND BACKFILL 71 155310 8" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155311 10" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155312 12" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155313 15" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155314 18" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155315 21" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155316 24" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155317 27" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155318 30" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155319 36" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155320 42" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155321 48" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155322 54" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155323 60" CURED-IN-PLACE PIPELINER 71 155330 18" DEFORMED/RE-FORMED HDPE PIPELINER 71 155331 21" DEFORMED/RE-FORMED HDPE PIPELINER 71 155332 24" DEFORMED/RE-FORMED HDPE PIPELINER 71 155333 27" DEFORMED/RE-FORMED HDPE PIPELINER 71 155334 30" DEFORMED/RE-FORMED HDPE PIPELINER 71 155349 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (GROUTED, 21") 71 155350 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (GROUTED, 24") 71 155351 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (GROUTED, 27") 71 155352 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (GROUTED, 30") 71 155353 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (GROUTED, 36") 71 155354 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (GROUTED, 42") 71 155355 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (GROUTED, 48") 71 155356 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (GROUTED, 54") 71 155357 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (GROUTED, 60") 71 155360 6" MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (EXPANDABLE

DIAMETER) 71

155361 8" MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (EXPANDABLE DIAMETER)

71


71


71


71


71


71


71

155368 27" MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (EXPANDABLE 71




Item code


DIAMETER) 155369 30" MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC PIPELINER (EXPANDABLE

DIAMETER) 71

155380 12" CEMENTITIOUS PIPELINER 71 155381 15" CEMENTITIOUS PIPELINER 71 155382 18" CEMENTITIOUS PIPELINER 71 155383 21" CEMENTITIOUS PIPELINER 71 155384 24" CEMENTITIOUS PIPELINER 71 155385 27" CEMENTITIOUS PIPELINER 71 155386 30" CEMENTITIOUS PIPELINER 71 155387 36" CEMENTITIOUS PIPELINER 71 155400 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, BOX, 4' X 3') 71 155401 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, BOX, 4' X 4') 71 155402 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, BOX, 5' X 3') 71 155403 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, BOX, 5' X 4') 71 155404 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, BOX, 5' X 5') 71 155405 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, BOX, 6' X 3') 71 155406 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, BOX, 6' X 4') 71 155407 36" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER 71 155409 42" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER 71 155411 48" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER 71 155413 54" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER 71 155415 60" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER 71 155416 66" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER 71 155417 72" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER 71 155418 78" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER 71 155419 84" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER 71 155420 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, ARCH, 42" X 29") 71 155421 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, ARCH, 49" X 33") 71 155422 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, ARCH, 57" X 38") 71 155423 MACHINE SPIRAL WOUND PVC LINER (GROUTED, ARCH, 64" X 43") 71 155425 17" x 13" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155427 21" X 15" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155429 24" X 18" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155431 28" X 20" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155433 35" X 24" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155435 42" X 29" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155437 49" X 33" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155439 57" X 38" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155441 64" X 43" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155443 71" X 47" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155445 83" X 57" WELDED STEEL PIPELINER (ARCH) 71 155530 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (16" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155531 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (18" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155532 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (20" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155533 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (22" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155534 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (24" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155535 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (26" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155536 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (28" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155537 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (30" OD SDR 32.5) 71




Item code


155538 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (32" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155539 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (34" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155540 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (36" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155541 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (39.5" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155542 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (42" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155543 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (48" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155544 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (54" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155545 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (55.3" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155546 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (63.2" OD SDR 32.5) 71 155547 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (16" OD SDR 26) 71 155548 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (18" OD SDR 26) 71 155549 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (20" OD SDR 26) 71 155550 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (22" OD SDR 26) 71 155551 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (24" OD SDR 26) 71 155552 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (26" OD SDR 26) 71 155553 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (28" OD SDR 26) 71 155554 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (30" OD SDR 26) 71 155555 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (32" OD SDR 26) 71 155556 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (34" OD SDR 26) 71 155557 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (36" OD SDR 26) 71 155558 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (39.5" OD SDR 26) 71 155559 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (42" OD SDR 26) 71 155560 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (48" OD SDR 26) 71 155561 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (54" OD SDR 26) 71 155562 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (55.3" OD SDR 26) 71 155563 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (63.2" OD SDR 26) 71 155564 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (16" OD SDR 21) 71 155565 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (18" OD SDR 21) 71 155566 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (20" OD SDR 21) 71 155567 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (22" OD SDR 21) 71 155568 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (24" OD SDR 21) 71 155569 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (26" OD SDR 21) 71 155570 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (28" OD SDR 21) 71 155571 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (30" OD SDR 21) 71 155572 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (32" OD SDR 21) 71 155573 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (34" OD SDR 21) 71 155574 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (36" OD SDR 21) 71 155575 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (39.5" OD SDR 21) 71 155576 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (42" OD SDR 21) 71 155577 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (48" OD SDR 21) 71 155578 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (54" OD SDR 21) 71 155579 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (55.3" OD SDR 21) 71 155580 HDPE PLASTIC PIPELINER (63.2" OD SDR 21) 71 156535 REMOVE BOX CULVERT 71 156540 REMOVE TIMBER 60 156545 REMOVE TIMBER BULKHEAD 60 156572 REMOVE RAILING 83 156576 REMOVE METAL RAILING 83 156577 REMOVE BARRIER RAILING 83 156579 REMOVE BRIDGE RAILING 83




Item code


156585 REMOVE CRASH CUSHION 83 156590 REMOVE CRASH CUSHION (SAND FILLED) 83 157550 BRIDGE REMOVAL 60 157551 BRIDGE REMOVAL, LOCATION A 60 157552 BRIDGE REMOVAL, LOCATION B 60 157553 BRIDGE REMOVAL, LOCATION C 60 157554 BRIDGE REMOVAL, LOCATION D 60 157555 BRIDGE REMOVAL, LOCATION E 60 157556 BRIDGE REMOVAL, LOCATION F 60 157557 BRIDGE REMOVAL, LOCATION G 60 157558 BRIDGE REMOVAL, LOCATION H 60 157559 BRIDGE REMOVAL, LOCATION I 60 157560 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION) 60 157561 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION A 60 157562 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION B 60 157563 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION C 60 157564 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION D 60 157565 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION E 60 157566 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION F 60 157567 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION G 60 157568 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION H 60 157569 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION I 60 157570 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION J 60 157571 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION K 60 157572 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION L 60 157573 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION M 60 157581 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION 1 60 157582 BRIDGE REMOVAL (PORTION), LOCATION 2 60 158001 MODIFY BRIDGE RAILING (LS) 83 158002 MODIFY BRIDGE RAILING (EA) 83 158100 SALVAGE CRASH CUSHION 83 158101 SALVAGE CRASH CUSHION MODULES 83 158210 RESET TEMPORARY RAILING (TYPE K) 83 159001 RECONSTRUCT HANDRAILING 83 159010 RECONSTRUCT METAL RAILING (BRIDGE) 83 159021 RECONSTRUCT FENDER 60 159800 MODIFY PUMP PLANT 60 160102 CLEARING AND GRUBBING (LS) 17 160103 CLEARING AND GRUBBING (ACRE) 17 170101 DEVELOP WATER SUPPLY 10 394050 RUMBLE STRIP 84 394053 SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIP (HMA,GROUND-IN INDENTATIONS) 84 401083 SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIP (CONCRETE PAVEMENT, GROUND-IN

INDENTATIONS) 84

413000 CRACK AND SEAT 30 510510 MINOR CONCRETE (INVERT PAVING) 71 511123 CONCRETE (RAPID SETTING) 60 511127 FURNISH DECK OVERLAY (CONCRETE) 60 511128 PLACE DECK OVERLAY (CONCRETE) 60 518040 REPLACE BEARING PAD 60




Item code


518042 REPLACE BEARING 60 519050 EXPANSION DAM 60 550110 COLUMN CASING 60 560205 INSTALL REMOVABLE SIGN PANEL FRAME 82 560206 FURNISH REMOVABLE SIGN PANEL FRAME WITH SIGN PANELS

ATTACHED 82

560232 FURNISH FORMED PANEL SIGN (ROADSIDE) 82 560233 FURNISH FORMED PANEL SIGN (OVERHEAD) 82 560244 FURNISH LAMINATED PANEL SIGN (1"-TYPE A) 82 560245 FURNISH LAMINATED PANEL SIGN (1"-TYPE B) 82 560246 FURNISH LAMINATED PANEL SIGN (2 1/2"-TYPE B) 82 560247 FURNISH LAMINATED PANEL SIGN (2 1/2"-TYPE H) 82 560248 FURNISH SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN (0.063"-UNFRAMED) 82 560249 FURNISH SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN (0.080"-UNFRAMED) 82 560250 FURNISH SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN (0.125"-UNFRAMED) 82 560251 FURNISH SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN (0.063"-FRAMED) 82 560252 FURNISH SINGLE SHEET ALUMINUM SIGN (0.080"-FRAMED) 82 560253 FURNISH FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL SIGN (0.135") 82 562001 METAL (ROADSIDE SIGN) 82 562002 METAL (BARRIER MOUNTED SIGN) 82 562004 METAL (RAIL MOUNTED SIGN) 82 566011 ROADSIDE SIGN - ONE POST 82 566012 ROADSIDE SIGN - TWO POST 82 568001 INSTALL SIGN (STRAP AND SADDLE BRACKET METHOD) 82 568007 INSTALL SIGN OVERLAY 82 568015 INSTALL SIGN (MAST-ARM HANGER METHOD) 82 568016 INSTALL SIGN PANEL ON EXISTING FRAME 82 568017 INSTALL ROADSIDE SIGN PANEL ON EXISTING POST 82 568021 INSTALL FRAMED SIGN PANEL 82 568023 INSTALL ROADSIDE SIGN (LAMINATED WOOD BOX POST) 82 591200 ROCK STAIN 78 597401 PAINT CURB (2-COAT) 78 597600 PREPARE AND PAINT CONCRETE 78 597601 PREPARE AND STAIN CONCRETE 78 597602 PREPARE AND STAIN SHOTCRETE 78 598001 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING 78 620002 6" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620020 8" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620040 10" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620060 12" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620061 12" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE A) 61 620062 12" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE B) 61 620063 12" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE C) 61 620080 15" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620100 18" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620101 18" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE A) 61 620102 18" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE B) 61 620120 21" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620140 24" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620141 24" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE A) 61




Item code


620142 24" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE B) 61 620143 24" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE C) 61 620160 27" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620180 30" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620181 30" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE A) 61 620182 30" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE B) 61 620183 30" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE C) 61 620220 36" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620221 36" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE A) 61 620222 36" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE B) 61 620223 36" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE C) 61 620260 42" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620261 42" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE A) 61 620262 42" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE B) 61 620300 48" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620340 54" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620380 60" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620420 66" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620460 72" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620461 72" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE A) 61 620462 72" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT (TYPE B) 61 620550 96" ALTERNATIVE PIPE CULVERT 61 620710 12" ALTERNATIVE SLOTTED PIPE 61 620715 18" ALTERNATIVE SLOTTED PIPE 61 620800 CONCRETE BACKFILL (PIPE TRENCH) 61 623000 TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623001 12" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623002 15" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623003 18" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623004 24" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623005 30" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623006 36" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623007 42" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623008 48" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623009 54" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623010 60" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 623011 78" TEMPORARY CULVERT 61 625219 21" X 15" ALTERNATIVE PIPE ARCH CULVERT 61 625279 35" X 24" ALTERNATIVE PIPE ARCH CULVERT 61 625299 42" X 29" ALTERNATIVE PIPE ARCH CULVERT 61 625319 49" X 33" ALTERNATIVE PIPE ARCH CULVERT 61 735000 PARKING BUMPER (PRECAST CONCRETE) 78 750496 MISCELLANEOUS METAL (RESTRAINER - PIPE TYPE) 60 750497 MISCELLANEOUS METAL (RESTRAINER - BAR TYPE) 60 750498 MISCELLANEOUS METAL (RESTRAINER - CABLE TYPE) 60 750503 MISCELLANEOUS METAL (RESTRAINER) 60 810111 SURVEY MONUMENT (TYPE A) 78 810112 SURVEY MONUMENT (TYPE B) 78 810116 SURVEY MONUMENT (TYPE D) 78 820105 DELINEATOR (SPECIAL) 81




Item code


820107 DELINEATOR (CLASS 1) 81 820108 DELINEATOR (CLASS 2) 81 820109 METAL MARKER POST 81 820111 UNDERDRAIN MARKER 81 820112 MARKER (CULVERT) 81 820115 SNOW POLE MARKER 81 820118 GUARD RAILING DELINEATOR 81 820121 TEMPORARY DELINEATOR (CLASS 1) 81 820122 TEMPORARY DELINEATOR (CLASS 2) 81 833077 PEDESTRIAN BARRICADE 56 850101 PAVEMENT MARKER (NON-REFLECTIVE) 81 850111 PAVEMENT MARKER (RETROREFLECTIVE) 81 850121 PAVEMENT MARKER (NON-REFLECTIVE- RECESSED) 81 850122 PAVEMENT MARKER (RETROREFLECTIVE-RECESSED) 81 860297 SIGNAL AND LIGHTING (CITY) 77 860300 SIGNAL AND LIGHTING (CITY STREET LOCATION 1) 77 860302 SIGNAL AND LIGHTING (CITY STREET LOCATION 2) 77 860303 SIGNAL AND LIGHTING (CITY STREET LOCATION 3) 77 860402 LIGHTING (CITY STREET) 77 995100 WATER METER CHARGES 5 995200 IRRIGATION WATER SERVICE CHARGES 5 999991 MOBILIZATION (MARINE ACCESS) 9 839702A CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 60A)(MODIFIED) 83 839720A CONCRETE BARRIER (TYPE 732)(MODIFIED) 83



Add to section 1-1.07B:

Authority: The Contra Costa Transportation Authority (CCTA), including its authorized officers, employees, agents, consultants and volunteers.

Authority Indemnitees: The Authority and the indemnitees listed in Section 7-1.05B and their respective successors and assigns, governing bodies or boards, board members, officers, directors, agents, employee, consultants and subconsultants.

Caltrans or Department of Transportation: Department of Transportation as defined in St & Hwy Code § 20 and authorized in St & Hwy Code § 90; its authorized representatives.

Contract Approval Date: The date the fully executed contract is approved by the Authority as evidenced by the date entered by Authority’s counsel on the signature document.

Contract Award Date: The effective date the contract is awarded by the Authority as evidenced by a resolution approved by the Authority’s Board of Directors.

Inspector: The engineering or technical personnel authorized to act as agents or representatives for the Engineer in inspection of work covered by the contract, limited to the particular duties entrusted to them.

Oversight Engineer: The assigned Caltrans representative duly authorized to oversee work covered by the contract. The Oversight Engineer will have authority to stop work at any time there is a risk to the traveling traffic or pedestrians or when the work is performed in an unsafe manner. The Oversight Engineer has authority to reject any materials or work not in conformance with project specifications.

Local Agency or Public Agency: All references to “Local Agency” or “Public Agency” shall be references to the Authority.

Replace definition for "Department", "Director" and “State” in section 1-1.07B with:

Department: The Contra Costa Transportation Authority except that any references to the Department’s forms, websites, manuals, guides, test methods. These shall be defined as forms, websites, manuals, guides, test methods of Caltrans.

Director: The Authority’s Executive Director.

State: The Contra Costa Transportation Authority (CCTA), including its authorized officers, employees, agents, consultants and volunteers.

Replace “The Department" in the 1st paragraph in section 1-1.08 with:

Caltrans

Replace section 1-1.12 with:

Make checks and bonds payable to the Contra Costa Transportation Authority.

Payment and performance bonds must name the CCTA as obligee and Caltrans as an additional obligee.



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

2 BIDDING

XE "2-1.06B_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 2-1.06B. Use if supplemental project information is available.

List available supplemental project information.

If railroad relations and insurance requirements are available, insert Railroad Relations and Insurance Requirements in the 1st row.

If water use is restricted and the project requires 100,000 gal or more of water for nonlandscaping work, insert Water source information in the 1st row.

If water allowance calculations for landscaping are available, insert Maximum Applied Water Allowance Calculations for New and Rehabilitated Landscapes in the 1st row.

If cross sections are available, insert Cross sections in the 2nd row.

If bridge as-built drawings are available, insert Bridge as-built drawings in the 2nd row.

If logs of test borings are available, insert Logs of test borings in the 3rd row.

Insert the telephone number in the 5th row.

For a District 10 project, insert (209) 948-7934.

For districts other than 5, 6, and 10, insert the telephone number to call to schedule a viewing date.

Insert the location and telephone number in the 6th row.

For a District 5 project, insert 1150 LAUREL LN STE 175

SAN LUIS OBISPO CA

(805) 549-3116.

For a District 6 project, insert 2015 E SHIELDS AVE STE 100

FRESNO CA

(559) 230-3115

Add rows as necessary. Delete nonapplicable rows.

Add between the 1st and 2nd paragraphs of section 2-1.06B:

The Department Authority makes the following supplemental project information available:



Supplemental Project Information

Means Description

Included in the Information Handout • Foundation Reports for the following structures: 1. Pacheco Blvd. UC (widen) (Br No. 28-0182) 2. I-680/SR-4 Separation (Widen) (Br No. 28-

01792) 3. Grayson Creek Bridge (Replace)(Br No. 28-

0415) 4. Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen) )(Br No. 28-0240

L/R) 5. Solano Way UC (Widen) )(Br No. 28-0241 L/R) 6. Peralta Road Undercrossing (Widen) 28-0242

L/R) • Storm Water Data Report • Geotechnical Design and Material • RWQCB 401 Certification • U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Permit (404) • California Dept of Fish and Wildlife Agreement) • Biological Opinion issued by U.S. Fish and Wildlife

Sevice • NOAA Letters of Concurrence (File #2007/02704) • Guidelines for Design and Construction near

Kinder Morgan Operated Facilities

Available as specified in the Standard Specifications

Cross sections Bridge as-built drawing

Included with the project plans Logs of test borings Available for inspection at the Transportation Laboratory

Available for inspection at the District Office Telephone no.: _____

Available for inspection at: _____ _____

Telephone no.: _____



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

3 CONTRACT AWARD AND EXECUTION

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

4 SCOPE OF WORK

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

5 CONTROL OF WORK

XE "5-1.09A_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 5-1.09A. Use for a project with an estimated cost over $10 million and with 100 or more working days.

Add to the end of section 5-1.09A:

The Department encourages the project team to exhaust the use of partnering in dispute resolution before engagement of an objective third party.

For certain disputes, a facilitated partnering session or facilitated dispute resolution session may be appropriate and effective in clarifying issues and resolving all or part of a dispute.

To afford the project team enough time to plan and hold the session, a maximum of 20 days may be added to the DRB referral time following the Engineer's response to a Supplemental Potential Claim Record.

To allow this additional referral time, the project team must document its agreement and intention in the dispute resolution plan of the partnering charter. The team may further document agreement of any associated criteria to be met for use of the additional referral time.

If the session is not held, the DRB referral time remains in effect as specified in section 5-1.43.



XE "5-1.20A_A10-30-15__2015"

Page 1 of 1

Section 5-1.20A. Use if work under other contracts is at or near the job site. Identify the other contracts. In the 3rd column, insert (1) the city for a project within city limits or (2) a distance from a physical landmark such as an intersection or a bridge for a project not within city limits. Add or delete rows as necessary.


During the progress of the work under this Contract, work under the following contracts may be in progress at or near the job site of this Contract:

Coincident or Adjacent Contracts

Contract no. County–Route–Post Mile Location Type of work

XE "5-1.36D_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 5-1.36D. Use if utilities are to be relocated during construction or if utilities are involved with pile driving, drilling, or substructure construction.

Add between the 2nd and 3rd paragraphs of section 5-1.36D:

1. Use if the date of relocation is known. Identify each utility and relocation date.

The utility owner will relocate a utility shown in the following table before the corresponding date shown:

Utility Relocation and Date of the Relocation Utility Location Date

2. Use if the Department has arranged the relocation schedule with the utility owner. Identify each utility and number of days for its relocation.

During the progress of the work under this Contract, the utility owner will relocate a utility shown in the following table within the corresponding number of days shown. Notify the Engineer before you work near a utility shown. The days start on the notification date.

Utility Relocation and Department-Arranged Time for the Relocation Utility Location Days



3. Use if the Contractor is to arrange the relocation schedule with the utility owner. Identify each utility and number of days for its relocation.

Installation of the utilities shown in the following table requires coordination with your activities. Make the necessary arrangements with the utility company through the Engineer and submit a schedule:

1. Verified by a representative of the utility company 2. Allowing at least the time shown for the utility owner to complete its work

Utility Relocation and Contractor-Arranged Time for the Relocation Utility Utility address Location Days

4. Use if utilities are being rearranged to permit pile driving, drilling activities, or substructure construction. Identify each utility and its location.

To allow pile driving, drilling activities, or substructure construction, the utility owner will rearrange the utilities shown in the following table during construction activities. No other utility will be rearranged or temporarily deactivated before or during construction activities for this purpose unless you make arrangements with the utility owner. Notify the Engineer at least 30 days before the interfering utilities are to be rearranged. The Engineer notifies the utility owners.

Utility Rearrangement for Pile Driving, Drilling Activities, or Substructure Construction

Utility Location

5. Use if utilities are not being rearranged to permit pile driving, drilling activities, or substructure construction. Identify each utility and its location.

The utilities shown in the following table will not be rearranged. The utilities may interfere with pile driving, drilling activities, or substructure construction. If you want any of them rearranged or temporarily deactivated, make arrangements with the utility owner.

Utilities Not Rearranged for Pile Driving, Drilling Activities, or Substructure Construction

Utility Location

Kinder Morgan (KM) Oil Line Extra Storage property on Solano Way

BR 06-19-16 Comply with Kinder Morgan (KM) Guidelines for Design and Construction near its Operated Facilities. A copy of the guidelines is included in the Supplemental Project Information.

BR 06-19-16 Notify KM Area Manager, Mr. Grant McClellan (925)682-0764, at the beginning of the construction. A schedule of activities for the duration of the project must be made available at that time to facilitate the scheduling of KM’s site representative. Any schedule changes must be provided to KM. immediately. Notify KM at least 72 hours before start of any construction activities near the KM pipelines. KM will



arrange for an authorized representative to be present during construction within 10 feet of its facilities. All excavation within 2’ of the Km pipeline must be done by hand.

BR 06-19-16 Submit equipment specifications (weights, number of axels, dimensions, etc.) to KM for all construction equipment that will be working over and near its pipelines for review and approval. No heavy equipment may be operated in the vicinity of KM facilities without written approval.

BR 06-19-16 The extent of footing excavation for bent 4 of Solano Way Undercrossing, adjacent to the Kinder Morgan Pipeline shall be minimized by utilizing shoring around the footing.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

6 CONTROL OF MATERIALS

.

XE "6-1.02_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 6-1.02. Use for Department-furnished materials.

Add items as necessary.

Delete any item not furnished by the Department.

Change Model 170 controller assembly as applicable.

Insert the plant numbers as shown and address where the Contractor is to pick them up.

Add to the beginning of section 6-1.02:

1

** KYC 6/2/16 The Department furnishes you with:

• Sign panels for roadside signs and overhead sign structures • Sign overlay panels for roadside signs and overhead sign structures • Mast arm sign hanger assemblies • Laminated wood box posts with metal caps for roadside signs • Hardware for mounting sign panels as follows:

Aluminum closure inserts for multiple panel laminated signs A-1 and A-2 mounting hardware for mounting laminated sign panels on overhead sign

structures A-3 mounting hardware for mounting overhead formed panels

• Disks for survey monuments • Marker panels, including reflectors, for Type N, Type P, and Type R object markers • Concrete barrier markers • Magnetic detector amplifiers and magnetic sensing elements • Loop detector sensor units • Model 170 controller units assembly, including controller unit, completely wired controller cabinet, and

detector sensor units • Modems • Individual or axle type scales for materials hauling equipment on bridges • Components of battery backup system as follows:

Inverter/charger unit



Power transfer relay Manually-operated bypass switch Battery harness Utility interconnect wires Battery temperature probe Relay contact wires

• Plants numbered _____ on the plans. Pick these plants up at _____. • Recycled water signs, labels, decals, and tags •CCTV Router

2. Use if the Department furnishes controller assemblies. Insert address.

** KYC 6/2/16 Only controller units The Department furnishes you with completely wired controller cabinets with auxiliary equipment but without controller unit at _____. At least 48 hours before you pick up the materials, inform the Engineer of what you will pick up and when you will pick it up.

3. Use if the Department furnishes a changeable message sign. Insert address.

** KYC 6/2/16 No CMS The Department furnishes you with a Model 500 changeable message sign, wiring harness, and controller assembly, including the controller unit and completely wired cabinet, at _____. At least 48 hours before you pick up the materials, inform the Engineer of what you will pick up and when you will pick it up.

4. Use if the Contractor is to pick up Department-furnished sign panels and overlay panels from the district warehouse. Insert address and telephone number.

** KYC 6/2/16 The Department furnishes you with sign panels and overlay panels at the district warehouse at _____. At least 2 business days before you pick up the materials, notify the Engineer and inform the district warehouse manager of what you will pick up and when you will pick it up. Also, inform the manager of the number, type, and size of the sign panels and Contract number. The manager's telephone number is (___) ___-____.

5. Use if the Department furnishes recycled materials. Insert material, address, and telephone number.

** KYC 6/2/16 The Department furnishes you with _____ at the district recycle center at _____. At least 48 hours before you pick up the materials, inform the Engineer and the district recycle coordinator of the Contract number, what you will pick up, and when you will pick it up. The coordinator's telephone number is (___) ___-____.

6. Use if the Department does not furnish replacement plants.

** KYC 6/2/16 You must furnish replacement plants. The Department does not pay you for the replacement plants.

7. Use if the Department furnishes replacement plants. Insert each plant name and its deduction.

** KYC 6/2/16 The Department furnishes you with replacement plants at the same location as the original plants. For each replacement plant, the Department deducts the amount shown in the following table. If you do not plant all of the replacement plants before work completion, return unplanted plants to the location designated by the Engineer. If the plants are fit for future use, the Department credits you for them.



Replacement-Plant Deductions Botanical name (common name) Deduction per plant ($)



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

8 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS

XE "8-1.04C_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 8-1.04C. Use for a project (1) with an estimated cost of $5 million or more and with 200 or more working days, (2) that requires a SWPPP, or (3) that requires a SSPC-QP certification.

Do not use this SSP for maintenance or building projects.

Obtain concurrence from the district or region construction deputy director or chief if you are:

1. Not using the SSP in a project complying with the SSP instructions

2. Using the SSP in a project not complying with the SSP instructions

3. Changing the 55-day period

4. Adding or deleting submittals to par. 3 or 6 except as described in the instructions

Use for a delayed start to procure materials as a first activity in the sequence of construction. For this case, the project need not comply with the above instructions and concurrence from the district or region construction deputy director or chief is not required.

Replace Reserved in section 8-1.04C with:

1

Section 8-1.04B does not apply.

2. Replace 55 as required for a delayed start other than 55 days.

Start job site activities within 55 days after receiving notice that the Contract has been approved by the Attorney General or the attorney appointed and authorized to represent the Department.

3. Use item 1 (1) if SSP 14-6.05 is used and if requested by a district biologist or (2) if SSP 14-6.02 is used and desert tortoise or Mohave ground squirrel is specified.

Use item 2 if SSP 14-6.08 is used.

Use item 4 if a WPCP or SWPPP is required.

Use item 5 for a contract with 100 or more original working days and a total bid of $3 million or more.

For items 6–8, use only the items required for the project.

Do not start job site activities until the Department authorizes or accepts your submittal for:

1. Contractor-supplied biologist 2. Biological resource information program 3. CPM baseline schedule 4. WPCP or SWPPP, whichever applies 5. Notification of DRA or DRB nominee and disclosure statement 6. Natural resource protection plan 7. Contingency plan for opening closures to traffic



8. SSPC QP certifications

4. Use if item 1 or 2 in par. 3 is used. Delete Contractor-supplied biologist if item 1 in par. 3 is not used. Delete and biological resource information program if item 2 in par. 3 is not used. Replace are with is if either the biologist or the program is deleted.

If the submittals for Contractor-supplied biologist and biological resource information program are authorized, you may enter the job site only to measure controlling field dimensions and locate utilities.

5. Use if par. 4 is not used.

You may enter the job site only to measure controlling field dimensions and locate utilities.

6. Use item 2 if ordering Contractor-furnished signs is a first activity in the sequence of construction.

Use item 3 if ordering electrical material is a first activity in the sequence of construction.

Use item 4 if ordering structural steel or other material with a long lead time is a first activity in the sequence of construction. Edit item 4 for the type of material.

Do not start other job site activities until all the submittals from the above list are authorized or accepted and the following information is received by the Engineer:

1. Notice of Materials To Be Used form. 2. Written statement from the vendor that the order for the sign panels has been received and accepted

by the vendor. The statement must show the dates that the materials will be shipped. 3. Written statement from the vendor that the order for electrical material has been received and

accepted by the vendor. The statement must show the dates that the materials will be shipped. 4. Written statement from the vendor that the order for structural steel has been received and accepted

by the vendor. The statement must show the dates that the materials will be shipped.

7. If 55 in par. 2 is replaced, replace 55th to match par. 2.

You may start job site activities before the 55th day after Contract approval if you:

1. Obtain specified authorization or acceptance for each submittal before the 55th day 2. Receive authorization to start

8

Submit a notice 72 hours before starting job site activities. If the project has more than 1 location of work, submit a separate notice for each location.



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

9 PAYMENT

XE "9-1.16C_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 9-1.16C. Use for a project that has (1) at least 90 working days except plant establishment, (2) an estimated cost exceeding the minor B threshold, and (3) items shown in section 6.13 of the RTL Guide. Insert any item that has (1) a material value of at least $1,000 for a project with an estimated cost of less than $1 million or (2) a material value of at least $5,000 for a project with an estimated cost of over $1 million.

Add to the end of section 9-1.16C:

The following items are eligible for progress payment even if they are not incorporated into the work:

1. Pavement Markers 2. Reinforcement 3. Precast Girders 4. Fences 5. Railings 6. Culvert Pipe 7. Rock Slope Protection Fabric 8. Crash Cushions 9. Miscellaneous iron and Steel 10. Lighting Fixtures 11. Luminaires 12. Piling (except CIDH Piling)_____ 13. Prestressing steel for cast-in-place members, sealed packages only, and prestressing ducts and

anchorages _____ 14. Bar reinforcing steel_____ 15. Miscellaneous metal (bridge) 16. Bridge deck drainage system 17. Precast concrete members 18. Type B Joint Seal 19. Column casing 20. Isolation casings



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION II GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

10 GENERAL

XE "10-1.02_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 10-1.02. Use for specifying a construction sequence not associated with a specific construction specification. (For a sequence associated with a specific construction specification, place the sequence in the section that specifies the work to be constructed first.)

Add to the end of the RSS for section 10-1.02B:

1. Use for cutting detector loops into the new top layer if district policy allows it.

Install loop detectors in the uppermost layer of the new pavement.

2. Use if irrigation components are to be relocated.

Add to the end of section 10-1.02C(2):

Protect any irrigation component to be relocated before performing any other construction activity in the area.

3. Use if plants are to be transplanted.

Replace Reserved in section 10-1.02C(3) with:

Transplant any plant to be transplanted before performing any other construction activity in the area.

4. Use for a widening project that requires excavation adjacent to a lane being used by traffic and that allows a moving operation without a safety wedge if the work is on schedule and if the open trench is to be closed within a relatively short period of time.

In the 1st blank and item 2, insert 5 for widening on the left of traffic and 8 for widening on the right. In the 2nd blank, insert the sum of the number of days to construct the structural section (e.g., 1 for AS, AB, or HMA used as base; 2 for excavation and preparation of subgrade, 3 for CTB, LCB, or concrete base).

Add to the beginning of section 10-1.02E:

Construct the new pavement structure adjacent to the existing traveled way by successively excavating, preparing subgrade, placing base materials, and paving. Perform these activities concurrently after you start paving. Excavation within 5 feet of the existing traveled way must not precede the paving operation by more than 6 working days unless:

1. Authorized 2. Material is placed and compacted against the vertical cuts within 5 feet of the existing traveled way.

During excavation, you may use native material for this purpose except you must use structural material once you start placing the pavement structure. Place the material to the top of the existing pavement and taper at a slope of 4:1 (horizontal:vertical) or flatter to the bottom of the excavation. Do not use treated base for the taper.



XE "10-1.03_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 10-1.03. Use for specifying a time constraint not associated with a specific construction specification. (For a time constraint associated with a specific construction specification, place the constraint in that section.)

Delete nonapplicable clauses.

Replace Reserved in section 10-1.03 with:

1. In the 1st and 2nd blanks, insert the post miles. In the 3rd and 4th blanks, insert the dates. For a project with more than one route, add on Route <insert route no.> before from. Add a similar clause for each route.

No construction activity is allowed from post mile _____ to post mile _____ from _____ to _____.

2. In the 1st blank, insert the date. In the list, insert the locations (e.g., railroad name, bridge name, drainage structure). Add a similar clause for each date.

Do not work at the following locations until _____:

1. _____ 2. _____

3. Insert the beginning month and day and end month and day. If the month and day vary by year, delete of any year and insert the dates. Add a similar clause for each period.

You may work within drainage channels only from June 1 to October 15 of any year.

4. In the 1st blank, insert the location (e.g., name of river, name of railroad property). In the 2nd and 3rd blanks, insert the dates. Add a similar clause for each location.

No work is allowed over _____ from _____ to _____.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

11 WELDING



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

12 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

XE "12-3.11_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 3

Section 12-3.11. Use on a project with an estimated cost of at least $750,000 and at least 50 working days. Do not use for a seal coat, surfacing, or seismic project. Do not include plant establishment days in the number of working days.

Replace Reserved in section 12-3.11B(5) with:

1. Use if details for construction project funding signs are not shown.

A construction project funding sign must comply with the details shown on the Department's Traffic Operations website.

2

The sign must be a wood-post sign complying with section 82-3.

3

The sign panels must be framed, single-sheet aluminum panels complying with section 82-2.

4

The background on the sign must be Type II retroreflective sheeting. The Type II retroreflective sheeting must be on the Authorized Material List for signing and delineation materials.

5

The legend must be retroreflective except for nonreflective black letters and numerals. The blue must match PR color no. 3 on FHWA's Color Tolerance Chart. The orange must match PR color no. 6 on FHWA's Color Tolerance Chart.



6. Replace TYPE OF PROJECT with one of the project types shown in the following table:

Type of project: Work description examples:

Highway construction Construct expressway, freeway, shoulders, structure, HOV lane, ramp, interchange, left turn lane, truck escape ramp, or weigh station; widen freeway, roadway or shoulders; realign roadways.

Highway repair Clean and paint overhead sign structure; crack, seal, and grind pavement; pavement markings; pavement rehabilitation; ramp repaving; replace culverts, drainage systems, railroad crossings, or sign structures; retrofit curb ramps.

Highway improvement Channelization; changeable message signs; highway advisory radio system; median barrier; motorist aid communication system; ramp metering; retaining and sound walls; signal modification; signals and lighting; traffic signals; traffic count stations; traffic operations system; slope protection; thrie beam barrier; realign curve; modify interchange or gore; reconstruct interchange.

Bridge construction Replace, remove or widen bridge; construct overcrossing, pedestrian overcrossing, overhead, undercrossing, sidehill viaduct, or interchange connectors.

Bridge repair Clean and paint bridge; clean and replace joint seals; upgrade joints seals; modify bridge railing; raise bridge; replace bridge bearings; rehabilitate bridge decks; tunnel rehabilitation.

Roadside work Erosion control; highway planting and irrigation; replacement planting; revegetation; irrigation upgrade; planting; restoration and irrigation; maintenance station; landscape maintenance station; maintenance yard and building; pumping plant; safety roadside rest area; vista point; park and ride lot; transit station; truck inspection facility; truck scale; right of way fence upgrade; biological or habitat enhancement; treat contaminated water supply.

The legend for the type of project must read as follows:

TYPE OF PROJECT HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION

7. Specify the type of funding. If county funds are involved (i.e., a cooperative agreement is provided), specify the type of county funding. Otherwise, delete the third line. If the project does not have any federal funding, delete the first line.

The legend for the types of funding on a construction project funding sign must read as follows and in the following order:

FEDERAL HIGHWAY TRUST FUNDS

STATE HIGHWAY FUNDS

CONTRA COSTA COUNTY TRANSPORTATION FUNDS



8. Use if the Engineer is to specify the year of completion.

The Engineer provides the year of completion for the legend on the sign. Install a sign overlay for the year of completion within 15 days of notification.

9. Insert the year of completion if the Engineer is not to provide the year of completion.

The legend for the year of completion on a construction project funding sign must read as follows:

YEAR OF COMPLETION 20XX

10

Do not add information to the construction project funding sign unless authorized.


11. Insert the quantity and type of construction project funding signs on the project. Insert Type 1 for conventional highways; Type 2 for freeways and expressways. Edit as necessary to include both types.

Install 2 Type 1 construction project funding sign at the location determined by the Engineer before starting major work activities visible to highway users.

12

Dispose of construction project funding signs upon completion of the project if authorized.

XE "12-3.11B(1)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 12-3.11B(1). Use to specify a retroreflective, nonfluorescent-orange construction area sign instead of a retroreflective, fluorescent-orange construction area sign if recommended by the district traffic manager.

Add between retroreflective and orange in the 1st sentence of the 4th paragraph of section 12-3.11B(1):

Nonfluorescent

NSSP XE 12-3.19)_N6-06-16"

Page 1 of 2

Add to section 12-3:

12-3.19 Temporary Crash Cushion Absorb 350

12-3.19A General

This work includes furnishing, installing, maintaining and removing temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 Test Level 2 (TL2).and temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 Test Level 3 (TL3) as shown.



12-3.19B Materials

2

Temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 (TL2), 5-element system and temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 (TL3), 9-element system must be manufactured by Barrier Systems Incorporated and must include the items shown for the crash cushion.

3

You can obtain the crash cushion from the distributor, Statewide Safety and Signs, 130 Grobic Court, Fairfield, California 94534, Telephone (800) 770-2644.

4

The price quoted by the distributor for the temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 (TL2) and Absorb 350 (TL3), FOB Fairfield, California are $7,500 and $9,000 respectively, not including sales tax.

5

The above price will be firm for orders placed on or before December 31, 2016, provided delivery is accepted within 90 days after the order is placed.

12-3.19C Submittals

6

Submit a copy of the manufacturer's plan and parts list as an informational submittal.

7

Submit a certificate of compliance for the temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 (Type TL2) and the temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 (Type TL3).

12-3.19D Construction

8

Install the temporary crash cushion under the manufacturer's installation instructions.

9

Attach a Type R or Type P marker panel to the front of the temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 when the closest point of the crash cushion is within 12 feet of the traveled way. Firmly fasten the marker panel to the crash cushion with commercial quality hardware or by other authorized methods.

10

Maintain temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 in place at location, including times when work is not actively in progress.

Temporary crash cushion ABSORB 350 systems damaged due to your operations must be repaired immediately by you at your expense. Temporary crash cushion ABSORB 350 systems damaged beyond repair due to your operations, as determined by the Engineer, must be removed and replaced by you at your expense.

11

Upon completion of work, temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 becomes your property and must be removed from the job site. Do not install temporary crash cushion Absorb 350 in the permanent work.



12-3.19E Payment

The Engineer measures temporary alternative crash cushion by the unit from actual count of cushions used in the work or as ordered by the Engineer.

15

Repairing the temporary crash cushion damaged by public traffic is change order work.

If the Engineer orders a lateral move of the temporary alternative crash cushion and the repositioning is not shown, moving the temporary alternative crash cushion is by change order work and the temporary alternative crash cushion is not counted for payment in the new position

XE "12-3.32C_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 12-3.32C. Use to specify (1) the number and locations of PCMSs, (2) the use of PCMSs for newly installed traffic signals, or (3) a start time for PCMSs.

Add to the beginning of section 12-3.32C:

1. Use to specify the location of PCMSs if the locations are not shown. Edit as necessary to fit the type of work. Include exact locations by station or post mile if necessary.

Place PCMSs at the locations shown and in advance of the 1st warning sign for each:

1. Stationary lane closure 2. Off-ramp closure 3. Connector closure 4. Shoulder closure 5. Speed reduction zone

2. Use to specify the use of PCMSs for newly installed traffic signals.

For 5 days starting on the day of signal activation, place 1 PCMS in each direction of travel and display the following message in all caps: Signal Ahead -- Prepare To Stop.

Add between the 5th and 6th paragraphs of section 12-3.32C:

3. Use to specify a start time for PCMSs. Edit per the transportation management plan manager's or district traffic manager's instructions.

Start displaying the message on the sign 15 minutes before closing the lane or shoulder or when directed by the Engineer.



XE "12-4.02A(2)_A10-30-15__2015"

Page 1 of 1

Section 12-4.02A(2). Use to revise the designated holidays table or to define special days. Edit as recommended by the transportation management plan manager or the district traffic manager.

1. Delete holidays that do not generate heavy traffic through the project.

Replace the table in the definition of designated holidays in section 12-4.02A(2) with:

Designated Holidays Holiday Date observed

New Year's Day January 1st Washington's Birthday 3rd Monday in February Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4th Labor Day 1st Monday in September Veterans Day November 11th Thanksgiving Day 4th Thursday in November Christmas Day December 25th

2. Use to define special days. For a District 7 project, include the birthday of Martin Luther King Jr., Halloween, and Columbus Day as special days. Insert the special days.

Add to section 12-4.02A(2):

special days:the third Monday in January.



XE "12-4.02A(3)(c)_A10-30-15__2015"

Page 1 of 1

Section 12-4.02A(3)(c). Use if a contingency plan is required for an activity that could affect a closure.

Add between the 1st and 2nd paragraphs of section 12-4.02A(3)(c):

1. Insert the activities requiring a contingency plan. Activities include:

Activity requiring a complete roadway closure Blasting Rapid-set concrete activities, including concrete slab replacement Roadway excavations encroaching on the traveled way not protected by Type K railing Cold-planing asphalt concrete for depths of 2 inches or greater HMA paving Asphalt or concrete grinding Chip seal Asphalt or concrete pavement sealing Bridge work Placement of bar reinforcing steel or structural members Falsework erection or removal, including adjustments Bridge demolition Striping Methacrylate application

Submit a contingency plan for each of the following activities:

1. Cold planning asphalt concrete pavement 2. HMA paving 3. Striping 4. Rapid-set concrete activities 5. Falsework erection or removal, including adjustments.

2. Use to specify other than 3 business days for the submittal of a contingency plan. Insert the number of business days. Delete business if more than 5 days are required.

Replace 3 business days in the 1st sentence in the last paragraph of section 12-4.02A(3)(c) with:

_____ business days



XE "12-4.02C(1)_A01-15-16__2015"

Page 1 of 3

Section 12-4.02C(1). Use for general closure requirements if work will be performed over, on, or adjacent to lanes carrying traffic, including contiguous or adjacent shoulders.

1–4. Use for a District 7 project.

Add to the end of the 1st paragraph of section 12-4.02C(1):

1

except for work shown on the stage construction and traffic handling plans

2. Use for on-ramp and off-ramp closures in District 7.

Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 12-4.02C(1) with:

Do not close on-ramps or off-ramps servicing 2 consecutive local street interchanges in the same direction of travel. The Engineer may authorize a closure if:

1. You submit a request 2. Traffic will be better served 3. Work will be expedited

Add between the 3rd and 4th paragraphs of section 12-4.02C(1):

3. Use if ramp closure charts are not included.

You may close a ramp if the adjacent freeway lane is allowed to be closed as shown on charts nos. _____–_____. If a ramp is closed, detour traffic to the next available ramp downstream of the closed ramp in the direction of travel.

4. Use if only selective ramp closure charts are included.

Except as otherwise shown on charts nos. _____–_____, you may close a ramp if the adjacent freeway lane is allowed to be closed as shown on charts nos. _____–_____. If a ramp is closed and a ramp lane requirement chart is not included, detour traffic to the next available ramp downstream of the closed ramp in the direction of travel.

5. Use if ramp requirement charts are not included except for a District 7 project.

If complete ramp closure hours and ramp lane requirements are not included, you may close the ramp adjacent to the closed freeway lane.

Add between the 4th and 5th paragraphs of section 12-4.02C(1):

6–7. Use for a District 7 project.

6. Use for project limits equal to or less than 8 miles except if construction is to be performed at a spot location (less than 0.2 mile).

Not more than 1 stationary closure is allowed per direction of travel at one time.

7. Use for project limits longer than 8 miles.

Concurrent stationary closures must be more than 5 miles apart. Closure spacing is the distance between the last cone of the upstream closure and the temporary sign (W20-1) of the downstream closure. The number of lanes open in the upstream closures must be less than or equal to the number of lanes open in



the downstream closures. For multiple closures in each direction of travel, pick up the downstream closures first.


8. Use for a project without lane requirement charts but with lane closure restrictions for weekend work, designated legal holidays, or special days. Delete special days if recommended by the transportation management plan manager or district traffic manager.

Keep the full width of the traveled way open to traffic when no active construction activities are occurring in the traveled way or within 6 feet of the traveled way and on:

1. Friday after 3:00 p.m. 2. Saturday 3. Sunday 4. Designated holidays 5. Special days

9. Use for a project with lane requirement charts except in District 7. Edit as recommended by the transportation management plan manager or district traffic manager.

Keep the full width of the traveled way open to traffic when no active construction activities are occurring in the traveled way or within 6 feet of the traveled way.

10. Use for a project with ramp lane requirement charts. Add and special days if special days are defined.

Keep the full width of the ramp traveled way open for use by traffic on designated holidays and special days.



11. Use if estimated damages equal or exceed $6,000 per hour for a mainline segment or connector closure. The transportation management plan manager or district traffic manager will calculate the damages. The concurrence of the regional or district division chief of construction is required when damages are included. Edit the number and type of facilities as appropriate. Calculate damages as follows:

Mainline or connector

For the 1st half hour, without exceeding 0.5% of the estimated cost or $3,000/10 minutes, use the higher of the following: 1. 50% of the amount for 10-minute intervals 2. $1,000/10 minutes For the 2nd half hour, use the higher of the following: 1. 75% of the amount for 10-minute intervals 2. $1,000/10 minutes For the 2nd hour and beyond, use the amount for 10-minute intervals.

Example: Amount = $48,000/hour based on traffic volumes over a 2-hour period 1st half hour = $8,000/10 min x 50% = $4,000/10 min (>$1,000/10 min). Limit is $3,000/10 min or 0.5% of the estimated cost. Use $3,000/10 minutes. 2nd half hour = $8,000/10 min x 75% = $6,000/10 min (>$1,000/10 min). Use $6,000/10 minutes. 2nd hour and beyond = $8,000/10 minutes

For each 10-minute interval or fraction thereof past the time specified to open the closure, the amount for liquidated damages per interval shown in the table below is deducted. Liquidated damages are limited to 5 percent of the total bid per occurrence. Liquidated damages are not assessed if the Engineer orders the closure to remain in place beyond the scheduled pickup time.

Type of facility Route Direction or Segment

Period Liquidated damages/interval ($)

Mainline I-680 (full Closure)

I-680 Northbound 1st half hour 2nd half hour

2nd hour and beyond

$5200/ 10 minutes $5200 / 10 minutes $5200 / 10 minutes

Mainline I-680 (lane Closure)

I-680 Northbound 1st half hour 2nd half hour

2nd hour and beyond


Mainline I-680 (full Closure)

I-680 Southbound 1st half hour 2nd half hour

2nd hour and beyond


Mainline I-680 (lane Closure)

I-680 Southbound 1st half hour 2nd half hour

2nd hour and beyond


SR4/I-680 Connector

SR4/I-680 All Connectors

1st half hour 2nd half hour

2nd hour and beyond

$2600 / 10 minutes $2600 / 10 minutes $2600 / 10 minutes



XE "12-4.02C(3)(a)_A01-15-16__2015"

Page 1 of 2

Section 12-4.02C(3)(a). Use for miscellaneous closure requirements.

1. Use for a high-volume freeway with enough lanes to allow closure of the lane adjacent to the lane where the work is being performed.

Add to the list in the 1st paragraph of section 12-4.02C(3)(a):

3. Work is on the traveled way but within 6 feet of the adjacent traffic lane

2. Use for District 7 projects to exclude the installation, maintenance, or removal of Category 3 devices except for impact attenuator vehicles from the listed items of work not requiring a closure.

Replace item 3 in the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 12-4.02C(3)(a) with:

3. Installation, maintenance, or removal of Category 1 and Category 2 traffic control devices and impact attenuator vehicles

Add to the end of section 12-4.02C(3)(a):

3. Use for construction activities where equipment can be operated up to the edge of the lane using the 2-foot offset of the cones for separation between the work and the traffic. Edit for the type of activity.

If you use an impact attenuator vehicle as a shadow vehicle, you are not required to close the adjacent traffic lane for the following activities:

1. Grinding 2. Grooving 3. Saw cutting of concrete slabs 4. Installing loop detectors

4. Use if Standard Plan T10 is included for a freeway or expressway.

If work vehicles or equipment are parked on the shoulder within 6 feet of a traffic lane of a freeway or expressway, close the shoulder area as shown.

5. Use if there are routes where Standard Plan T10 does not apply. Insert the routes.

If work vehicles or equipment are parked on the shoulder within 6 feet of a traffic lane at ____________________, close the shoulder area with fluorescent-orange traffic cones or portable delineators. Place the cones or delineators on a taper in advance of the parked vehicles or equipment and along the edge of the traveled way at 25-foot intervals to a point not less than 25 feet past the last vehicle or piece of equipment. Use at least 9 cones or delineators for the taper. Place advance warning signs as specified in section 12-4.02C(8).

6. Use for multilane highways and undivided highways if lane requirement charts are not required because closures are allowed without restriction. Insert the traffic lane width. A lane width less than 10 feet must be justified. Delete paved if traffic is allowed to travel on an unpaved surface.

Keep a minimum of 1 paved traffic lane at least _____ feet wide open for traffic in each direction of travel.



7. Use for 2-lane, two-way highways and undivided highways if one-way-reversing traffic control is allowed and lane requirement charts are not required. Insert the traffic lane width. A lane width less than 10 feet must be justified. Delete paved if traffic is allowed to travel on an unpaved surface.

Keep a minimum of 1 paved traffic lane at least _____ feet wide open for traffic.

8. Use only for landscape, electrical, or striping and pavement marker projects.

If a connector closure is required within the limits of a freeway lane closure, first complete the work on the connector and the freeway traveled way necessary for the safe passage of traffic between the connector and the open freeway lanes.

9–11. Use for miscellaneous clauses for District 7 lane requirement charts.

9. Use if work is possible during daylight hours, but the lane requirement charts do not allow work where visible to freeway traffic.

Use the entire paragraph if the project limits include curve radii less than 2,000 feet. Edit or delete the 2nd sentence if the project limits do not include curve radii less than 2,000 feet.

You may perform construction activities during the hours designated as No work is allowed on charts nos. _____–_____ if you install temporary traffic screens on top of the Type K temporary railings. Traffic screens are not allowed on the right side of traffic within the limits of a right horizontal curve with a radius of less than 2,000 feet as viewed in the direction of travel or on the left side of traffic within the limits of a left horizontal curve with a radius of less than 2,000 feet as viewed in the direction of travel.

10. Use for a concrete pavement rehabilitation project. Delete and approach slab if none are on the project. Insert the table number and reference the chart number that may include connectors and ramps.

Schedule your concrete pavement and approach slab removal and replacement activities to comply with the hours and requirements shown in tables _____– _____ instead of charts nos. _____–_____.

11. Use if an extended ramp or connector closure over the weekend is required, typically for constructing a concrete terminal section at an off-ramp or a short section of a roadway structural section. In the 1st sentence, insert the name of the ramp or the connector, the beginning and ending times, and the chart numbers. In the 2nd sentence, insert the name of the ramp to be displayed in the message.

You may close the _______ ramp or _______ connector for an extended period of time beginning at _______ Friday through _______ the following Monday instead of the hours shown in charts nos. _____–_____. When the ramp or connector is closed, place a PCMS for the duration of the closure at least 1,500 feet in advance of the off-ramp upstream from the ramp being closed with the message: _____________ / Exit / Closed. Place a PCMS at a location on the ramp or connector for 7 days before the date of the planned closure with the following message:

Message type Message

Weekend Ramp / Will Be / Closed – Next / Weekend

Weekday Ramp / Will Be / Closed – This / Weekend

NOTE: "/" separates each line of text on the PCMS display. "-" denotes where the PCMS display flashes the next line of text.



XE "12-4.02C(3)(b)_A10-30-15__2015"

Page 1 of 1

Section 12-4.02C(3)(b). Use for a complete closure of a freeway or expressway.

Replace Reserved in section 12-4.02C(3)(b) with:

1. Insert the locations requiring a complete closure and the applicable chart numbers. Add paragraphs as necessary. Edit for the type of route.

You may close Route 680 and Route 4 to traffic at 1 location in each direction of travel at a time as shown on charts no.7 to 10.

2. Edit the list for the type of activities requiring a complete freeway or expressway closure.

Add HMA paving, methacrylate, and Type B joint seal if the work zone has only 3 lanes and the shoulder is not available to be used as a traffic lane.

Add striping if all lanes must be restriped in 1 work shift to avoid undesirable lane widths.

A complete freeway or expressway closure is allowed for the following activities:

1. Falsework erection and removal 2. Girder erection 3. Bridge demolition 4. Installation and removal of a 2-post overhead sign 5. Installation of a loop detector

3. Use for falsework erection or removal.

Erect and remove falsework at 1 location and at 1 span at a time. During falsework erection and removal, detour the traffic in the lanes over which falsework is being erected or removed.

4. Use for a District 7 project to allow the use of a flip-flop operation for loop detector installation at locations where no suitable detour for a complete freeway closure is available.

When you are installing loop detectors at location ____________, close freeway lanes as shown on the traffic handling details plan titled "Traffic Control System for "Flip-Flop" Operations."

5. Use on undivided highways as needed. Edit as recommended by the transportation management plan manager or the district traffic manager for the type of activity that requires the stopping of traffic.

During blasting, hauling, and slide removal excavation activities, you may close the road and stop traffic for periods not to exceed _____ hours _____ minutes. After each closure, all accumulated traffic must pass through the work zone before another closure is allowed.



XE "12-4.02C(3)(g)_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 4

Section 12-4.02C(3)(g). Use for multilane closures on a freeway or expressway.

Edits do not require the approval of the specification owner but must be verified by the transportation management plan manager or district traffic manager.

Do not duplicate the revision clause for multiple charts. Each chart must have a unique chart number, not a duplicate number from another section.

Replace Reserved in section 12-4.02C(3)(g) with:

1. Use for freeways and expressways except for those in District 7. Edit the introductory clause and chart title for the type of highway. Insert freeway or

expressway. Insert the chart number, starting with G1. Use additional charts as needed and number them G2, G3, G4, etc. Change chart to charts if additional

charts are added.

Freeway lane closures must comply with the requirements shown in the following chart:

Chart No. 1 Freeway/Lane Requirements

County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: I-680 Northbound

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: within SR4/I-680 Interchange

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon –Thu

1 1 1 1 1 2 2

Fri 1 1 1 1 1 2

Sat 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

Sun 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

Legend:

Delete any legend not used. Do not use shading or crosshatching. Half-hour increments can be accomplished by splitting the appropriate cell. Place the cursor inside the cell, right click on the mouse, and select Split Cells. Edit for the type of highway. Insert freeway or expressway. Edit for a right or left shoulder closure. Do not edit if both shoulder closures apply.

1 Provide at least 1 through freeway lane open in the direction of travel.

2 Provide at least 2 adjacent through freeway lanes open in the direction of travel.

3 Provide at least 3 adjacent through ____________________ lanes open in the direction of travel.





S Shoulder closure is allowed (right / left).

N No work is allowed.

Work is allowed within the highway where a shoulder or lane closure is not required.

REMARKS:




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: I-680 Southbound

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: within SR4/I-680 Interchange

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon –Thu

1 1 1 1 1 2

Fri 1 1 1 1 1

Sat 2 1 1 1 1 1 2

Sun 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2

Legend:










REMARKS:




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR-4 Eastbound, at I-680 Crossing

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: SR4 Eastbound at I-680 Crossing

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon –Thu

1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1

Fri 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2

Sat 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Sun 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1

Legend:










REMARKS:




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR 4 Westbound, at I-680 Crossing

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: SR4 Westbound at I-680 Crossing

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon –Thu

1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1

Fri 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1

Sat 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

Sun 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1

Legend:










REMARKS:




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR 4 Westbound, between Solano Way and I-680

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: SR4 Westbound between Solano Way and I-680

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon –Thu

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Fri 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sat 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sun 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Legend:










REMARKS:




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR 4 Eastbound, between I-680 and Solano Way

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: SR4 Eastbound between I-680 and Solano Way

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon –Thu

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Fri 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sat 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sun 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Legend:










REMARKS:




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR 4 Eastbound, West of I-680 interchange

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: SR 4 Eastbound, West of I-680 interchange

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon –Thu

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Fri 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sat 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sun 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Legend:










REMARKS:




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR 4 Westbound, West of I-680 interchange

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: SR 4 Westbound, West of I-680 interchange

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon –Thu

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Fri 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sat 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sun 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Legend:










REMARKS:



XE "12-4.02C(3)(h)_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 12-4.02C(3)(h). Use for a complete closure of a freeway or expressway.



Replace Reserved in section 12-4.02C(3)(h) with:

1. Use for freeways and expressways except for those in District 7. Edit the introductory clause and chart title for the type of highway. Insert freeway or expressway. Insert the chart number, starting with H1. Use additional charts as needed and number them H2, H3, H4, etc. Change chart to charts if additional charts are added.

Comply with the requirements for the complete freeway closure shown in the following chart:

Chart No. 9 Complete Freeway Closure Hours

County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: I-680 Northbound and Adjacent Ramps

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: Within SR4/I-680 Interchange

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon-Thu

C C C C

Fri C C C C

Sat C C C C

Sun C C C C

Legend:

Do not use shading or crosshatching. Half-hour increments can be accomplished by splitting the appropriate cell. Place the cursor inside the cell, right click on the mouse, and select Split Cells. Edit for the type of highway. Insert freeway or expressway.

C Freeway may be closed completely.

No complete freeway or expressway closure is allowed.

Specify the detour route or reference the applicable detour or traffic handling plans.

REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan B, E




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: I-680 Southbound and Adjacent Ramps

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: Within SR4/I-680 Interchange

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon-Thu

C C C C C

Fri C C C C

Sat C C C C C

Sun C C C C C

Legend:




Specify the detour route or reference the applicable detour or traffic handling plans. Edit for the number of signs.

REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan C, G




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR4 Westbound between Solano Way and I-680

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: SR4 Westbound, between Solano Way and I-680

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon-Thu

C C C C

Fri C C C C

Sat C C C C

Sun C C C C

Legend:





REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan O




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR4 Eastbound between I-680 and Solano Way

Post Mile: 12.6

Closure limits: SR4 Eastbound, between I-680 and Solano Way

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon-Thu

C C C C

Fri C C C C

Sat C C C

Sun C C C C

Legend:





REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan P



XE "12-4.02C(3)(j)_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 3

Section 12-4.02C(3)(j). Use for a complete ramp closure or a ramp lane closure.



Replace Reserved in section 12-4.02C(3)(j) with:

1. Use for a complete ramp closure or a ramp lane closure except for those in District 7. Edit the introductory clause and chart title for the type of closure. Insert complete ramp closure or ramp lane closure in the introductory clause. For the chart title, insert Complete Ramp Closure Hours for a complete ramp closure or Ramp Lane Closure Requirements for a lane closure on a ramp with multiple lanes. Insert the chart number, starting with J1. Use additional charts as needed and number them J2, J3, J4, etc. Change chart to charts if additional charts are added.

Comply with the requirements for the complete ramp closure shown in the following chart:

Chart No. 13 Complete Ramp Closure Hours

County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: I-680 Northbound to SR-4 Westbound Loop

Post Mile: SR-4 12.705 I-680 21.235

Closure limits: I-680 Northbound to SR-4 Westbound Loop

Hour24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–

Thu

C C C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C C

Sat C C C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C C C

Legend:

Delete any legend not used. Do not use shading or crosshatching. Half-hour increments can be accomplished by splitting the appropriate cell. Place the cursor inside the cell, right click on the mouse, and select Split Cells. Edit for a right or left shoulder closure. Do not edit if both shoulder closures apply.

1 Provide at least 1 ramp lane, not less than 11 feet in width, open in the direction of travel. 2 Provide at least 2 adjacent ramp lanes open in the direction of travel.

C Ramp may be closed completely.

S Shoulder closure is allowed (right/left).

N No work is allowed. Work is allowed within the highway where a shoulder or lane closure is not required.




REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan D


County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR-4 Eastbound to I-680 Northbound Loop

Post Mile: SR-4 12.724 I-680 21.132

Closure limits: SR-4 Eastbound to I-680 Northbound Loop

Hour24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–

Thu

C C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C

Sat C C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C C

Legend:







REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan E




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: I-680 Southbound to SR-4 Eastbound Loop

Post Mile: SR-4 12.627 I-680 21.138

Closure limits: I-680 Southbound to SR-4 Eastbound Loop

Hour24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–

Thu

C C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C

Sat C C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C

Legend:







REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan F




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR-4 Westbound to I-680 Southbound Loop

Post Mile: SR-4 12.602 I-680 21.362

Closure limits: SR-4 Westbound to I-680 Southbound Loop

Hour24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–

Thu

C C C C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C C C

Sat C C C C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C C C C C C

Legend:







REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan G




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR-4 Eastbound to I-680 Southbound Diagonal

Post Mile: SR-4 12.532 I-680 21.031

Closure limits: SR-4 Eastbound to I-680 Southbound Diagonal ramp

Hour24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–

Thu

C C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C

Sat C C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C C

Legend:







REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan J




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: I-680 Northbound to SR4 Eastbound Diagonal

Post Mile: SR-4 12.796 I-680 21.043

Closure limits: I-680 Northbound to SR4 Eastbound Diagonal Connector

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Mon–Thu

C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C

Sat C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C C

Legend:


1 Provide at least 1 connector lane open in the direction of travel.

2 Provide at least 2 adjacent connector lanes open in the direction of travel.




Work is allowed within the highway where shoulder or lane closure is not required.


REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan K




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR-4 Westbound to I-680 Northbound Diagonal

Post Mile: SR-4 12.790 I-680 21.394

Closure limits: SR-4 Westbound to I-680 Northbound Diagonal Ramp

Hour24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–

Thu

C C C C C C

Fri C C C C

Sat C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C

Legend:


1 Provide at least 1 ramp lane, not less than 11 feet in width, open in the direction of travel.

2 Provide at least 2 adjacent ramp lanes open in the direction of travel.





REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan L




County: Contra Costa Route/Direction: SR-4 Westbound from Solano Way

Post Mile: 13.706

Closure limits: Solano Way to SR-4 Westbound On Ramp

Hour24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–

Thu

C C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C C

Sat C C C C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C C C C

Legend:








REMARKS: Refer to Detour Plan Q



XE "12-4.02C(3)(m)_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 12-4.02C(3)(m). Use for a city street closure.



Edit the introductory clause and chart title for the type of closure. Insert complete city street closure or city street lane closure in the introductory clause. For the chart title, insert Complete City Street Closure Hours for a complete city street closure or City Street Lane Requirements and Hours of Work for a lane closure on a city street with multiple lanes. Insert the chart number, starting with M1. Use additional charts as needed and number them M2, M3, M4, etc. Change chart to charts if additional charts are added.

Replace Reserved in section 12-4.02C(3)(m) with:

Comply with the requirements for a complete city street closure shown in the following chart:

Chart No. 21 Complete City Street Closure Hours

Location: Pacheco Blvd Direction:

Closure limits: Between Muir Road and Blum Road

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–Thu

C C C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C C C C C

Sat C C C C C C C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C C C C C C

Legend:

Do not use shading or crosshatching. Half-hour increments can be accomplished by splitting the appropriate cell. Place the cursor inside the cell, right click on the mouse, and select Split Cells.

1 Provide at least 1 city street lane open in the direction of travel.

C Street may be closed.


R Provide at least 1 through traffic lane not less than 10 feet in width for use by both directions of travel.

(Reversing Control)

Insert the number of through traffic lanes.

REMARKS: The number of through traffic lanes in each direction of travel is 2.. Refer to Detour Plan A




Location: Solano Way Direction:

Closure limits: Between Marsh Road and Imhoff Drive

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–Thu

C C C C C C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C C C C C C C

Sat C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

Legend:






(Reversing Control)


REMARKS: The number of through traffic lanes in each direction of travel is 2. Refer to Detour Plan H




Location: Peralta Road Direction:

Closure limits: Between Arnold Industrial Place and Arnold Industrial Way

Hour 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Mon–Thu

C C C C C C C C C

Fri C C C C C C C C C C

Sat C C C C C C C C C C C C

Sun C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

Legend:






(Reversing Control)


REMARKS: The number of through traffic lanes in each direction of travel is 2.



XE "12-4.02C(7)_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 3

Section 12-4.02C(7). Use for miscellaneous traffic control system requirements.

1. Use if moving lane closures are allowed during striping and pavement marker placement using a bituminous adhesive but not when grinding for recessed striping and markers.

Add to the end of the 1st paragraph of section 12-4.02C(7)(a):

except you may use a moving closure during traffic striping and pavement marker placement using a bituminous adhesive. Do not use a moving lane closure when grinding for recessed striping and recessed markers.


2. Edit to include the highway types, shoulder widths, or other requirements as recommended by District Construction. For example: "Do not use an impact attenuator vehicle to place, remove, or place and remove components of a stationary traffic control system on a 2-lane, two-way highway where the useable shoulder width is less than 10 feet unless authorized."

Do not use an impact attenuator vehicle to place, remove, or place and remove components of a stationary traffic control system on _____ where the useable shoulder width is less than _____ feet.

3. Edit as necessary for compatibility with par. 2. Delete item 2 in the list if a moving closure is not allowed.

Except where prohibited, use an impact attenuator vehicle:

1. To follow behind equipment and workers who are placing and removing components of a closure. Operate the flashing arrow sign in the arrow or caution mode during this activity, whichever applies. Follow at a distance that prevents intrusion into the work space from passing traffic.

2. As a shadow vehicle in a moving lane closure.

4

After placing components of a stationary traffic control system, you may place the impact attenuator vehicle in advance of the work area or at another authorized location to protect traffic and workers.

5. Use for a seal coat project.

For seal coat maintenance, control traffic using pilot cars as specified in section 37-2.01C(7). Pilot cars must have cellular or radio contact with other pilot cars and personnel in the work zone. The maximum speed of the pilot cars convoying or controlling traffic through the traffic control zone must be 15 mph on 2-lane, two-way highways and 25 mph on multilane divided and undivided highways. Pilot cars must only use traffic lanes open to traffic.

6. Use to allow moving closures for the maintenance of seal coat surfaces.

On the days that closures are not allowed, you may use a moving closure to maintain the seal coat surface as specified in section 37-2.01C(7). The moving closure is only allowed during daylight hours when traffic will be the least inconvenienced and delayed. The Engineer determines the hours for the moving closure.



Add to the end of section 12-4.02C(7)(b):

7. Use if the closure of multiple lanes is required on freeways and expressways and a continuous closure taper without the 2L tangent section between tapers is required.

For multilane freeway or expressway lane closures, do not place the 2L tangent section shown along lane lines between the lane closure tapers.

8. Use if lane closures are to be made on freeways and expressways and the district elects to omit the cones across the closed lanes.

For multilane freeways and expressways, do not place the traffic cones shown to be placed transversely across closed traffic lanes and shoulders.

9. Use if additional advance flaggers are required. Edit as necessary.

Additional advance flaggers are required.

10. Use to limit the length of the work area for closures other than one-way-reversing traffic control. Insert the maximum length of the work area. Change 2 as necessary.

Except for one-way-reversing traffic-control lane closures, the maximum length of the work area inside a closure is 2 miles.

11–14. Use to limit the number and spacing of stationary closures in the same direction. The number of closures may be higher for slab replacement projects, multiple bridge activities, or other activities that require multiple closures.

11. Change 2 as necessary. Change closures to closure if only 1 closure is allowed. For a District 7 project, allow only 1 closure if the project limits are less than 8 miles.

Not more than 2 stationary closures are allowed in each direction of travel at one time.

12. Except for a District 7 project, use if more than 1 closure is allowed in the same direction of travel. Change 2 as necessary.

Concurrent stationary closures in the same direction of travel must be spaced no closer than 2 miles apart. Closures in the same direction of travel on alternating inside lanes and outside lanes must be spaced by an additional 2 miles.

13. Use for a District 7 project if more than 1 closure is allowed in the same direction of travel.

Concurrent stationary closures in the same direction of travel must be spaced no closer than 5 miles apart.

14. Use if more than 1 closure is allowed in the same direction of travel.

Closure spacing is the distance between the last cone of the upstream closure and the temporary sign W20-1 of the downstream closure. The number of lanes open in the upstream closures must be less than or equal to the number of lanes open in the downstream closures. For multiple closures in each direction of travel, pick up the downstream closures first.

15–19. Use a for stationary one-way-reversing traffic-control lane closure.

15. Use to limit the time allowed for stopping traffic for a stationary one-way-reversing traffic-control lane closure. Insert the time.

For a stationary one-way-reversing traffic-control lane closure, you may stop traffic in 1 direction for periods not to exceed _____ minutes. After each stoppage, all accumulated traffic for that direction must pass through the work zone before another stoppage is made.



16. Use to limit the length of a one-way-reversing lane closure. Change 2 as necessary. Replace flaggers with signals if temporary signals are used to control traffic.

The maximum length of a single stationary one-way-reversing traffic-control lane closure is 2 miles between flaggers.

17. Use to limit the number and spacing of one-way-reversing traffic-control lane closures in the same direction. Insert the number of stationary lane closures allowed and the minimum spacing. If the number of closures allowed is 1, change closures to closure and delete the 2nd sentence.

Not more than ____ stationary one-way-reversing traffic-control lane closures will be allowed at one time. Concurrent closures in the same direction of travel must be spaced no closer than ____ miles apart.

18. Use and edit as recommended by the transportation management plan manager or district traffic manager.

Transport bicyclists through the one-way-reversing traffic-control work zone.

19. Use if traffic will be carried through grading in unpaved areas.

For traffic under one-way-reversing traffic control on unpaved areas, the cones shown along the centerline are not required.

20. Edit for the type of highway and maximum speed. Delete you may in the 1st sentence if a pilot car is required.

You may use a pilot car to control traffic. If a pilot car is used to control traffic, the cones shown along the centerline are not required. Pilot cars must have cellular or radio contact with other pilot cars and personnel in the work zone. The maximum speed of the pilot cars convoying or controlling traffic through the traffic control zone is 25 mph. Pilot cars must only use traffic lanes open to traffic.

21. For a District 7 project, use if the median is less than 8 feet wide and a left side closure is required. Edit the paragraph as appropriate.

If traffic control is performed for a stationary closure where median shoulders are less than 8 feet, the closure must comply with the plan sheet titled "Traffic Control System for Median Shoulders Less Than 8 Feet" or "Traffic Control System for High Occupancy Vehicle Lanes with Median Shoulders Less Than 8 Feet."

22. Use for a District 7 project if additional capacity is needed to minimize traffic delays or to comply with Standard Plan T10A. Typically use for a slab replacement project or extended weekend closure activity. The shoulder width must be at least 8 feet. Do not use the right shoulder as a traffic lane if an on-ramp or off-ramp is within the shoulder limits.

Before using a shoulder as a traffic lane for the duration of a work shift closure as shown on chart no. _____ or table no. _____, fill all impacted pull boxes with sand and pave over them with 1 inch of commercial-quality HMA extending at least 6 inches beyond the edges of the pull boxes. Sweep and clear the shoulder of debris before traffic use. After completing work requiring the use of the shoulder as a traffic lane, restore the pull boxes to their original condition.

Using the Extra Storage facility driveways on Solano Way to construct Solano Way Undercrossing widening and the bridge retrofit work are not allowed. You may need to construct a temporary ramp/path to access the site from the freeway median. After completing work requiring the use of the temporary ramp, remove the ramp and restore the freeway median to original condition.

You will be responsible to protect the storage units at the Extra Storage facility during construction and secure the work area at the end of each construction shift and provide adequate measures to avoid public access to the construction site.



XE "12-4.02C(8)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 12-4.02C(8). Use for traffic control system signs.


1. Use for a complete freeway closure. Edit as recommended by the transportation management plan manager or district traffic manager.

For a complete freeway closure, install the closure signs at least 7 days before closing the freeway. Notify the Engineer at least 5 business days before installing the signs. If the freeway is not closed on the posted day, change the closure to allow for a 3-business-day advance notice before closure.

2–3. Use if Standard Plan T10 is not listed on the Standard Plans List or if Standard Plan T10 is listed but does not apply to some locations. Insert the locations.

2. Use if more than 1 sign is required. Delete list items for signs that are not required.

If shoulders are closed at _______________, use the following advance warning signs:

1. W21-5 (Shoulder Work) 2. W21-5b (Right/Left Shoulder Closed Ahead) 3. C30A(CA) (Shoulder Closed)

3. Use if only 1 sign is required.

If shoulders are closed at _______________, use one of the following advance warning signs:

1. W20-1 (Road Work Ahead) 2. W21-5b (Right/Left Shoulder Closed Ahead) 3. C24(CA) (Shoulder Work Ahead)

4. Use for concrete pavement and approach slab replacement activities. If only 1 sign is required, (1) delete and at every 500 feet throughout the entire length of the closure and (2) change signs to sign in the last sentence.

For concrete pavement and approach slab replacement activities, place a Fresh Concrete (C43(CA)) sign at the start of the work area and at every 500 feet throughout the entire length of the closure. Keep the signs in place during the curing period.



5–8. Use for a District 7 project for ramp and connector closures.

Replace the paragraphs of section 12-4.02C(8)(b) with:

5. Use for ramp or connector closures.

If a ramp or connector closure is allowed, post a special advance notice publicity sign, SP-1, at an authorized location at least 7 days before the ramp or connector closure.

6. Use for ramp closures if a ramp closure chart is not included in the project. Insert the number of signs.

For each ramp closed, post at least _____ portable freeway detour signs, SP-2, along the detour route and remove them at the end of each closure.

7. Use if 2 or more consecutive on-ramps are allowed or specified to be closed.

If 2 or more consecutive on-ramps are allowed or specified to be closed, install SP-4 signs for the entrance ramp closures.

8. Use if off-ramps are allowed to be closed.

If an off-ramp is allowed to be closed, install an SP-3 or SP-5 sign for the exit ramp closure. Place the sign on the right shoulder of the freeway upstream of the preceding off-ramp.

XE "12-4.03_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 3

Section 12-4.03. Use for falsework openings.

Replaced Reserved in section 12-4.03 with:

12-4.03A General

1

Section 12-4.03 includes specifications for providing falsework openings.

12-4.03B Materials

2

Not Used



12-4.03C Construction

3. Add the location and spacing of falsework pavement lighting from the table below. Omit the spacing of falsework pavement lighting if the pavement length between portals is expected to be 30 feet or less.

The width shown is for standard width openings. For nonstandard widths, use the location and spacing of pavement lighting for the next wider opening.

R=Right side of traffic L=Left side of traffic C=Centered overhead

Freeway Traffic Opening

1 Lane 25 ft R 30 2 Lanes 37 ft R and L 40 staggered 1/2 space 3 Lanes 49 ft R and L 30 4 Lanes 61 ft R and L 40 with C 40 staggered 1/2 space

Nonfreeway Traffic Opening

1 Lane 20 ft R 22.5 2 Lanes 32 ft R and L 30 staggered 1/2 space 2 Lanes 40 ft R and L 22.5 with 8 ft shoulders 3 Lanes 52 ft R and L 22.5 4 Lanes 64 ft R and L 22.5 with C 22.5 staggered 1/2 space

At each location where falsework is constructed over a street or route shown in the following table, provide openings through the bridge falsework. The type, minimum width, height, and number of openings at each location, and the location and maximum spacing of the falsework lighting if required for each opening, must comply with the requirements shown in the following table. The width of vehicular openings is the clear width between temporary railings or other protective work.

Pacheco Blvd UC (Widen) (Br. No. 28-0182)

Number Width (feet)

Height (feet)

Vehicle openings 2

22

15

Pedestrian openings 1

8

10

Location

Spacing

a

(feet) Falsework pavement lighting

R and L

30 stagger 1/2 space NOTE: R = Right side of traffic L = Left side of traffic C = Centered overhead aSpacing is the maximum distance from center to center between fixtures.



Route 4/ 680 Separation (Widen) (Mainline) (Br. No. 28-0179)

Number Width

(feet) Height (feet)

Vehicle openings 2

46

15


Location

Spacing

a


R and L

C 40

40 staggered 1/2 space NOTE: R = Right side of traffic L = Left side of traffic C = Centered overhead aSpacing is the maximum distance from center to center between fixture

Route 4/ 680 Separation (Widen) (C-D Rd) (Br. No. 28-0179)

Number Width


Vehicle openings 1

22

15


Location

Spacing

a


R and L

40 staggered 1/2 space

NOTE: R = Right side of traffic L = Left side of traffic C = Centered overhead aSpacing is the maximum distance from center to center between fixture



Southbound Peralta Road OC (Widen)

(Br. No. 28-0242)

Number Width (feet)

Height (feet)

Vehicle openings 1

33

15


Location

Spacing

a


R and L

22.5


Northbound Peralta Road OC (Widen) (Br. No. 28-0242)

Number Width


Vehicle openings 1

22

15


____4__

10______

Location

Spacinga


R and L





Southbound Solano Way OC (Widen)

(Br. No. 28-0241)

Number Width (feet)

Height (feet)

Vehicle openings 1

22

15


Location

Spacing

a


R and L



Northbound Solano Way OC (Widen) (Br. No. 28-0241)

Number Width


Vehicle openings 1

33

15


4

10

Location

Spacing

a


R and L

22.5

NOTE: R = Right side of traffic L = Left side of traffic C = Centered overhead aSpacing is the maximum distance from center to center between fixtures.



4. Use only for special roadways (e.g., fire utility access, quasi-public roads) with very light traffic. Falsework lighting is required and no temporary railing is provided in falsework openings. Add the location and spacing of falsework pavement lighting from the table below.

1 Lane 20 ft R 22.5 2 Lanes 32 ft R and L 22.5 staggered 1/2 space

Temporary railing is not required at the locations shown in the following table. In addition to the falsework pavement lighting shown, illuminate each side of each vehicular passageway between portals with a string of yellow 25 W lamps spaced at 12-foot intervals, mounted at a height from 8 to 8-1/2 feet above the pavement.

________________________________ Structure identification

(e.g., Str. no., Street name, Route no.)

Number Width (feet)

Height (feet)

Vehicle openings ______

______

______

Pedestrian openings ______

______

______

Location

Spacing

a


____________

___________ NOTE: R = Right side of traffic L = Left side of traffic aSpacing is the maximum distance from center to center between fixtures.

5

The Engineer determines the exact location of the openings.

12-4.03D Payment

6

Not Used



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

13 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

XE "13-1_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 5

Section 13-1. Use for a project requiring a WPCP or SWPPP to specify requirements for water quality monitoring or inspection schedules different from those in the Standard Specifications.

1–16. Use if water quality monitoring is required by PLACs, such as a Section 401 Certification for work in water. Work in water includes the installation of clear water diversions and temporary creek diversions, pile driving, and bridge scour repair.


1. Insert the construction activities requiring water quality monitoring. Add list items as needed.

The specifications in section 13 for water quality monitoring apply to the following work activities whenever they occur in water:

1. Pile driving activities 2. Temporary Creek Diversion 3. Bridge Scour Protection

2. Insert the name of the receiving water provided in the PLAC. If there are different receiving waters or different locations along the same receiving water, replace the paragraph with a table introduction and a table identifying the receiving waters and locations.

The receiving water for this project is Suisun Bay.

3. Use to specify a submittal date other than the 7th of the month for water quality reports.

Replace 7th in the 1st sentence in the 1st paragraph of section 13-1.01C(4)(c) with:

_____

4. Use if the PLAC has different requirements for photographic documentation of water quality. Edit the list items as needed.

Replace items 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3 in the list in the 1st paragraph of section 13-1.01C(4)(c) with:

3.1. ________________ 3.2. ________________ 3.3. ________________

5. Use if the PLAC has reporting requirements other than 24 hours for notifying the RWQCB of exceedances.

Replace 6 in the introductory clause of the 2nd paragraph of section 13-1.01C(4)(c) with:

_____

6. Use if the PLAC requires the submittal of additional reports. Insert the names of the reports.

Add to the end of section 13-1.01C(4)(c):

Include the following additional reports with your submittal of the monthly water quality monitoring report:



1. ______________ 2. ______________ 3. ______________

7–8. Use if the PLAC requires a reporting period other than July 1st to June 30th and different documentation in the report.

Replace the 2nd and 3th paragraphs in section 13-1.01C(4)(d) with:

7. Insert the dates for the reporting period.

Submit a water quality annual report for each reporting period from______________ to ____________.

8. Insert a description of the documentation required by the PLAC. Add list items as needed.

The report must be in an authorized format and include:

1. _____________ 2. _____________ 3. _____________

9–12. Use if the PLAC requirements for water quality monitoring differ from those in the Standard Specifications.

9. Use if the PLAC has a different reporting requirement for unauthorized discharges. Insert the number of hours.

Replace 6 in the 5th paragraph of section 13-1.01D(5)(a) with:

_______

10. Use if the PLAC requires different visual inspections for nonstormwater discharges.

Replace the items in the list in the 6th paragraph of section 13-1.01D(5)(a) with:

1. _______________ 2. _______________

11. Use to modify any of the following if the PLAC shows different requirements from those in the Standard Specifications:

1. Water-quality sampling locations for in-water work

2. Distance upstream of the discharge point

3. Distance from the discharge point

Add list items as needed.

Replace the items in the list in the 3rd paragraph of section 13-1.01D(5)(b) with:

1. ________________ 2. ________________ 3. ________________

12. Use to modify the timing and locations of water quality sampling during work in water.

Replace the items in the list in the 4th paragraph of section 13-1.01D(5)(b) with:

1. _______________ 2. _______________



13–15. Edit the tables for the WQOs given in the PLAC. Modify the table format as needed.

If there are different WQOs for different receiving waters or different locations along the same receiving water, insert additional tables identified by the receiving water and location.

Add between the 4th and 5th paragraphs of section 13-1.01D(5)(b):

13. Use for District 4, San Francisco Bay and North Coast Region RWQCBs.

Test the receiving water under the test methods for the WQOs shown in the following table:

Water Quality Objectives Quality characteristic Test method Detection limit

(min) Requirement

Turbidity during activities for in-water work (NTU)

Field test with a calibrated portable instrument (Measured at downstream sampling location)

1 Must not exceed 20 percent above natural background

pH


0.2

Lower WQO = 6.5 Upper WQO = 8.5 And any change greater than 0.5 units from the natural background

Temperature (°F) Field test with a calibrated portable instrument

0.1 Must not be increased 5 degrees above the natural background

Dissolved oxygen (mg/L) Field test with a calibrated portable instrument

1 Must not be reduced below 7 mg/L

14. Use for District 10, Central Valley RWQCB.




Water Quality Objectives

Quality characteristic Test method Detection limit

(min) Requirement

Turbidity during activities for in-water work (NTU)


1 15 above natural background

Turbidity during activities excluding in-water work (NTU)


1

1. Where natural turbidity is less than 1 NTU, increases must not exceed 2 NTU. 2. Where natural turbidity is from 1 to 5 NTUs, increases must not exceed 1 NTU. 3. Where natural turbidity is from 5 to 50 NTUs, increases must not exceed 20 percent. 4. Where natural turbidity is from 50 to 100 NTUs, increases must not exceed 10 NTUs. 5. Where natural turbidity is greater than 100 NTUs, increases must not exceed 10 percent.

Settleable material (ml/L) Observed -- Greater than 0.1 ml/L

15. Use for District 1, 2, and 3, North Coast Region RWQCB.




Water Quality Objectives

Quality characteristic Test method Detection limit

(min) Requirement

pH Field test with a calibrated portable instrument

0.2

Lower NAL = 6.5 Upper NAL = 8.5 And any change greater than 0.5 units from natural background

Turbidity (NTU) Field test with a calibrated portable instrument

1 20 percent above natural background

Temperature (°F) Field test with a calibrated portable instrument

1 1 degree above natural background

Dissolved oxygen (mg/L) Field test with a calibrated portable instrument

1 Must not be reduced below 7 mg/L

Total dissolved solids (mg/L)

Field test with a calibrated portable instrument

a

1 Greater than 100 mg/L

Specific conductance (μΩ)

Field test with a calibrated portable instrument

0.1 Must not exceed 175 μΩ at 77 °F

JN

aThe portable instrument must provide an estimate of the total dissolved solids.

16. Use to modify sampling activities for monitoring exceedances.

JN Replace the 5th paragraph of section 13-1.01D(5)(b) with:

If a WQO is exceeded, the water quality monitor must notify the Engineer by phone or electronic media within _________ minutes and:

1. _____________ 2. _____________

17–20. Use to modify any of the following:

1. Inspection schedule for temporary concrete washouts

2. Schedule for street sweeping

3. Inspection schedule for the active treatment

17. Edit the item numbers as necessary to suit project conditions. Add or delete items as necessary.

JN Delete items 4, 5, and 7 in the list in the last paragraph of section 13-1.03C.

Add to end of section 13-1.03C:

18. Use to modify the inspection schedule for concrete washouts. Insert daily or weekly as necessary to suit project conditions.

JN Inspect the concrete washouts _____ if concrete work occurs _____ or _____ if it does not occur _____.



19. Use to modify the inspection schedule for street sweeping. Insert daily or weekly as necessary to suit project conditions.

JN Inspect paved roads at job site access points for street sweeping _____ if earthwork and other sediment- or debris-generating activities occur _____, _____ if the activities do not occur _____, or if the NWS predicts precipitation.

20. Use to modify the inspection schedule for the temporary ATS. Insert daily or weekly as necessary to suit project conditions.

Inspect the temporary ATS_____ if ATS activities occur _____ or _____ if activities do not occur _____.

XE "13-3_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 13-3. Use for a project that requires a SWPPP to specify any of the following:

1. Risk level for a project subject to the NPDES Construction General Permit

2. Names of the RWQCBs requesting a review of the SWPPP

3. Permit-specific information for a project under a project-specific permit or the RWQCB general permit other than the Lake Tahoe regional general permit

1. Use for a project subject to the NPDES Construction General Permit. Insert 1, 2, or 3 as established by the district or regional stormwater coordinator.

Add to section 13-3.01A:

This project's risk level is 2.

2. Insert the names of all RWQCBs requesting review of the SWPPP as determined by the district or regional stormwater coordinator to determine the review requirements for the project. Edit and reformat the paragraph as necessary if only one RWQCB is listed. Do not use this paragraph if the Lahontan RWQCB is the only RWQCB.

Add between the 4th and 5th paragraphs of section 13-3.01C(2)(a):

The following RWQCBs will review the authorized SWPPP:

1. San Francisco Bay, (Region 2) 2. ________ 3. ________

3. Use if stormwater is regulated under a project-specific permit or RWQCB general permit (other than the Lake Tahoe regional general permit or the NPDES general permit). Insert the name of the RWQCB that issued the permit, permit title, permit number, and address where a copy of the permit is available. Edit as necessary.

To determine whether a project-specific permit or RWQCB general permit applies, contact the applicable RWQCB. Contact information for the RWQCBs is available on the SWRCB's website at http://www.waterboards.ca.gov/water_boards.shtml.

JN Replace the paragraphs in section 13-3.01D(2) with:

Discharges of stormwater from the job site must comply with the permit issued by the ___ RWQCB for National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permit ___, Permit No. ___. The ___ RWQCB permit governs stormwater and nonstormwater discharges resulting from construction activities at the job site. The ___ RWQCB permit may be viewed at _____.



XE "13-8_N06-10-15" Page 1 of X

JN

Replace section 13-8 with:

13-8 TEMPORARY DEWATERING AND NON-STORM WATER DISCHARGE CONTROL SYSTEM

13-8.01 GENERAL 13-8.01A Summary

Section 13-8 includes specifications for designing, installing, operating, monitoring, maintaining, and removing temporary dewatering and non-storm water discharge control system (TDNWCS) for the collection, conveyance, treatment and disposal of contaminated groundwater and accumulated stormwater from excavations or other areas requiring dewatering including impounded construction site water, water resulting from piling work, and stormwater combined with groundwater.

Design, installation, operation, and monitoring of a TDNWCS and monitoring and disposal of the treated effluent must comply with San Francisco Bay Regional Water Quality Control Board NPDES General Permit for Discharge or Reuse of Extracted and Treated Groundwater Resulting from the Cleanup of Groundwater Polluted by Volatile Organic Compounds, Fuel Leaks and Other Related Wastes (Order No. R2-2012-0012, NPDES No. CAG912002). You are responsible for all costs and requirements related to obtaining coverage under the Order No. R2-2012-0012.

CAM 17 Metals (Chromium, copper, lead, mercury, nickel, silver, and zinc) were reported at concentrations exceeding their respective waste discharge requirements (WDRs) in groundwater collected at the job site. The soil and groundwater investigation report is listed in SSP 2-1.06B of the Supplemental Project Information and is included in the Water Quality Information Handout.

You may discharge into a publicly owned treatment works system instead of using a TDNWCS. If contaminated groundwater, stormwater, or both are discharged to a publicly owned treatment works, obtain a municipal batch discharge permit. You are responsible for all costs and requirements related to obtaining the municipal batch discharge permit and discharging the water.

13-8.01B Submittals

13-8.01B(1) Temporary Dewatering and Non-storm Water Discharge Control System Plan

Submit the TDNWCS plan at least 55 days prior to discharge activities:

1. Submit 3 copies of the TDNWCS plan. Allow 10 days for the Engineers' review. The Engineer provides comments and specifies the date when the review stopped if revisions are required.

2. Change and resubmit a revised TDNWCS plan within 5 days of receiving the Engineer's comments. The Engineer's review resumes when a complete TDNWCS plan has been resubmitted.

3. When the Engineer authorizes the TDNWCS plan, submit an electronic copy and 4 printed copies of the authorized TDNWCS plan.

4. Allow 30 days for the Engineer to submit the authorized TDNWCS plan to the RWQCB. 5. If the Engineer requests changes to the TDNWCS plan based on the RWQCB's comments,

amend the TDNWCS plan within 5 business days.

The TDNWCS plan must include:

1. Title sheet. 2. Table of contents. 3. Certification and approval sheet described in the Department's Storm Water Prevention Plan

(SWPPP) and Water Pollution Control Plan (WPCP) Preparation Manual. 4. Amendment log and format described in the Department's Storm Water Prevention Plan

(SWPPP) and Water Pollution Control Plan (WPCP) Preparation Manual.



5. Description and schedule of the discharge activities. 6. Discharge alternatives, including:

6.1. Dust control 6.2. Percolation 6.3. Storm sewers 6.4. Surface waters

7. Treatment system description and components. 8. Anticipated flow rates. 9. Operation and maintenance manual for equipment. 10. Monitoring, sampling, and reporting plan, including quality assurance and quality control. 11. Health and safety plan. 12. Spill prevention plan. 13. Field-recorded data, visual inspection, calibration procedures, and examples of logs. 14. Measuring equipment descriptions. 15. Shop drawings showing:

15.1. Section and plan views of stormwater effluent treatment systems 15.2. Location of sampling points for water quality measurements 15.3. Flow path and placement of pipes, hoses, pumps, holding tanks, and other equipment

used to convey water 15.4. General position of treatment components relative to excavations or other areas requiring

dewatering 15.5. Point of stormwater discharge

16. Daily inspection report form. The daily inspection report must include: 16.1. Discharge volumes 16.2. Water quality monitoring records 16.3. Discharge point information that includes:

16.3.1. Date and time 16.3.2. Weather conditions, including wind direction and velocity 16.3.3. Presence or absence of water fowl or aquatic wildlife 16.3.4. Color and clarity of the effluent discharge 16.3.5. Erosion or ponding downstream of the discharge site 16.3.6. Photographs labeled with the time, date, and location

17. Municipal batch discharge permit from a publicly owned treatment works if required. 18. Coagulant pollution prevention plan with the TDNWCS plan if you use chemical coagulants, in-line

flocculants, or both, in the treatment system. Chemical coagulants and flocculants proposed for use in TDNWCS must comply with all provisions under "Active Treatment System (TDNWCS) Requirements" within Attachment F Provisions D and E, in the NPDES General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction and Land Disturbance Activities (Order No. 2009-0009DWQ, NPDES No. CAS000002).The coagulant prevention work plan must include:

18.1. Description of BMPs to prevent accidental spillage, overfeeding into the treatment system, or other mishandling of coagulant agents

18.2. Monitoring plan for all coagulants, flocculants, or both 18.3. Description of the agents, including chemical and trade names 18.4. Determination of acute and chronic toxicity for aquatic organisms conforming to EPA

methods for the agents 18.5. Monitoring plan to detect a residual agent at concentrations at or below established acute

toxicity levels for freshwater and marine conditions for that agent

13-8.01B(2) Notice of Discharge Report

Whenever observations or measurements confirm that a residual chemical or water quality standard is exceeded:

1. Submit the notice of discharge within 48 hours after exceeding the limits



2. Document the reasons for exceeding the water quality standard and any corrective work performed to prevent a recurrence in the notice of discharge

13-8.01B(3) Other Active Treatment System Submittals

If the TDNWCS discharges treated effluent, submit a daily inspection report within 24 hours.

Submit records of delivery and removal of TDNWCS components.

13-8.01C Quality Control and Assurance

A residual chemical for coagulants must be less than 10 percent of the maximum allowable threshold concentration for the most sensitive species.

Discharges from a TDNWCS must comply to Order No. R2-2012-0012 and other applicable permits.

13-8.02 MATERIALS

13-8.02A General

Design and implement a system for the site conditions and anticipated flow rate.

System must include:

1. Treatment system 2. Collection and conveyance system 3. Temporary holding tanks 4. Sampling methods 5. Discharge methods

13-8.02B Treatment System

Primary and secondary treatment may be required, or the design of the treatment system may require combined use of the various treatment components in series to achieve effective treatment. The treatment system must have components to:

1. Remove sediment, turbidity-producing suspended solids, petroleum hydrocarbon, volatile organic compounds (VOCs), and metals, Components may include desilting basins, weir tanks, settling tanks, sediment traps, gravity bag filters sand media filters, pressurized bag filters, cartridge filters, inline chemical coagulants and flocculants, activated clay filters, activated carbon filters or any combination necessary to provide primary and secondary treatment.

2. Adjust pH or dissolved oxygen by: 2.1. Addition of sulfuric, phosphoric, citric, or nitric acid under the supplier's specifications for

treatment of water with high pH. You may use hydrochloric acid if the water is dechlorinated before discharge.

2.2. Filtration through a limestone bed or addition of sodium hydroxide for treatment of water with a low pH. You may use carbon dioxide diffusion that produces carbonic acid for pH adjustment.

2.3. Aeration for treatment of water with low dissolved oxygen.

13-8.02C Collection and Conveyance System

Provide pumps and piping to convey the water from the point of dewatering or stormwater capture to the treatment system and to the point of discharge. Pumps and piping must comply with section 74-2.

Use a flow meter to measure all discharges from treatment activities.



13-8.02D Temporary Holding Tank System

Store water pumped during dewatering activities that is not diverted to other in temporary holding tanks placed at the work area for treatment.

Use temporary holding tanks including transportable closed-top holding tanks or tanker trucks. Provide a sufficient number of holding tanks based on:

1. Anticipated flow rate 2. Pumping rates 3. Capacity inefficiencies due to sediment retention within the holding tanks 4. Sediment settling rates 5. Sediment removal frequency 6. Anticipated water loss or reuse rates

Temporary holding tanks must have holding capacity sufficient to handle the water removed from dewatering activities and to prevent delay of work.

Each temporary holding tank must have an inlet and outlet capable of receiving and discharging flows at a sufficient rate to handle the water removed from dewatering activities.

Maintain a minimum freeboard of 1 foot in each of the temporary holding tanks at all times. Clean the holding tanks when 25 percent of the tank's volume is filled with sediments.

13-8.02E Discharge Method

Provide a method for discharging treated water or uncontaminated ground or surface water and include a discharge location. Do not discharge treated water in a way that impacts the natural bedding and aquatic life.

Discharge treated water:

1. To control dust in active work areas. 2. To land where the grade allows sheet flow and the soil allows infiltration. 3. In a way that does not cause erosion and scour. Whenever scour occurs, repair the damage and

install a velocity dissipater.

13-8.03 CONSTRUCTION

13-8.03A General

Water quality must comply with limits for discharge effluents and the receiving waters. Whenever observations or measurements under section 13-8.03B determine the water quality limits are exceeded:

1. Stop the discharge immediately 2. Notify the Engineer 3. Start corrective measures to change, repair, or replace the equipment and procedures used to

treat the water

After the Engineer inspects and authorizes your corrective measures, resume treatment and discharge activities under the startup-phase sampling requirements before resuming regular-phase sampling.

Maintain the TDNWCS to provide required function and prevent leaks. Whenever a component of the system is not functioning properly, discontinue treatment activities and repair or replace the component.

Sediments removed from uncontaminated areas during maintenance of the treatment system must be dried, distributed uniformly, and stabilized at a location within the project limits where authorized.

Relocate the TDNWCS as needed.



13-8.03B Monitoring

13-8.03B(1) General

Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for all calibrations of the flow meter. Perform calibrations in the presence of the Engineer.

While the system in operation, monitor in conformance with the Monitoring and Reporting Program included in Attachment E of the Order R2-2012-0012 for discharging treated water.

Monitoring equipment for the TDNWCS must record data at least once every 15 minutes. Cumulative flow data must be recorded daily. The recording system must have the capacity to record a minimum of 7 days of continuous data.

Monitoring equipment must be interfaced with the control system of the TDNWCS to provide shutoff or recirculation whenever effluent readings exceed limits for applicable constituents. The control system must default to recirculation or shutoff during a power failure or other catastrophic event.

The control system must control the dose of the coagulant, flocculent, or both to prevent overdosing.

Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for the use and calibration of meters and devices for taking water quality measurements. Perform calibrations in the presence of the Engineer.

You may discharge into a publicly owned treatment works (POTW) system instead of using a dewatering and non-storm water discharge system. If contaminated groundwater, storm water, or both are discharged to a POTW, obtain a municipal batch discharge permit. You are responsible for all costs and requirements related to obtaining the municipal batch discharge permit and discharging the water.

13-8.03B(2) Flow Rate Monitoring

A flow meter that has been approved by the Engineer for exclusive use in dewatering during construction must be used to measure all excavation discharges. All calibrations must be done in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions in the presence of the Engineer.

Record the flow-meter totalize readings and compute average daily volumes for every day that dewatering is performed.

13-8.03C Inspection

Perform compliance monitoring in conformance with the Monitoring and Reporting Program (MRP) included in Attachment E of the Order No. R2-2012-0012 for discharging treated water. If a batch discharge permit is obtained from a POTW, comply with the provisions contained in the batch discharge permit including all monitoring and reporting requirements.

While TDNWCS is being operated, document the results in a Daily Inspection Report (DIR). The DIR form must include the discharge volume records and water quality monitoring records. In developing the DIR, refer to the Department's Dewatering Guide. The DIR form must be approved by the Engineer before use. The DIR must be provided weekly or as directed to the Engineer.

All information and recorded data collected or submitted as part of the DIR must be certified as true and accurate and signed by those who gather the information.

13-8.03C(1) Visual Inspection

During each day of discharge, perform daily inspection of the effluent at the discharge site and include, in the DIR, observations of:

1. Date and Time 2. Weather conditions 3. Wind direction and velocity 4. The presence or absence of water fowl or aquatic wildlife



5. The color and clarity of the effluent discharge 6. Erosion or ponding downstream of the discharge site

The DIR must include photographs of the discharge point and areas downstream of the discharge location. These photographs must be labeled with the time, date, and location.

13-8.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

NSPS Temporary Creek Diversion System

JN

Add to section 13:

13-12 TEMPORARY CREEK DIVERSION SYSTEM

13-12.01 GENERAL

13-12.01A Summary

Section 13-12 includes specifications for constructing, maintaining, reconstructing, and later removing temporary creek diversion system.

Construction, use, and removal of the temporary creek diversion system is restricted to the time period from June 15 to October 15

13-12.01B Definitions

Not Used

13-12.01C Submittals

13-12.01C(1) Certificate of Compliance

Submit a Certificate of Compliance for:

1. Impermeable plastic membrane

13-12.01C(2) Temporary Creek Diversion System Plan

Submit Temporary Creek Diversion System Plan (TCDSP) including:

1. Installation and removal process, including equipment, platforms for equipment, and access locations

2. Calculations showing the basis of the sizing of the cofferdams and any piping or other conveyance materials used in the TCDS, with the resulting analysis providing assurance that the work area to be protected by the TCDS will remain dry during the duration of the work.

3. Plans showing location(s) of diversion, including layouts, cross sections, and elevations 4. Materials proposed for use, including Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and pumping system, if

used 5. Restoration plans showing before and after conditions, including photos of existing conditions for

areas disturbed during the installation, operation, and removal of the temporary creek diversion system

6. Monitoring and reporting plan to ensure applicable water quality objectives are met 7. Schedule of work, including BMP implementation

At least 55 days before temporary creek diversion system work in the creek:



1. Submit 3 copies of the TCDSP and allow 5 days for the Department's review. If revisions are required, the Department provides comments within the review time.

2. Change and resubmit the TCDSP within 5 days of the Department's comments. The Department's review resumes when the complete TCDSP is resubmitted. Allow 5 days for the Department's second review.

3. If additional comments are provided by the Department, revise and resubmit the TCDSP within 5 days of the Department's second review.

4. When the Department approves the TCDSP, submit an electronic file and 4 printed copies of the approved TCDSP.

The Department submits one copy of the approved TCDSP to the Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB) and one copy to the Department of Fish & Game (DFG) for their review and comment at least 30 days before installation. If the Department requests changes to the TCDSP based on the agencies comments, amend the TCDSP within 5 days. Submit 4 copies of the final TCDSP upon notification of approval.

13-12.02 MATERIALS

13-12.02A Gravel

Gravel must

1. Be river run gravel obtained from a river or creek bed or mechanically rounded and washed.

2. Sizes shown in the following table

Square screen size (inch) Percentage passing Percentage retained 1-1/2 100 0 3/4 0 100

3. Be clean, hard, sound, durable, uniform in quality, and free of any detrimental quantity of soft, thin, elongated or laminated pieces, disintegrated material, organic matter, or other deleterious substances

4. Be composed entirely of particles that have no more than one fractured face

5. Have a cleanliness value of at least 85, as determined by the Cleanliness Value Test Method for California Test No. 227

13-12.02B Impermeable Plastic Membrane

Impermeable plastic membrane must be:

1. Single ply, commercial quality, non-photodegradable polyethylene with a minimum thickness of 10 mils under ASTM D 5199, and free of holes, punctures, tears or other defects that compromise the impermeability of the material.

2. Suitable for use as an impermeable membrane liner.13-12.02C Gravel-filled Bags

Gravel-filled bags must comply with section 13-5.02G.

The 2nd paragraph of section 13-5.02G does not apply.

Gravel for gravel-filled bags must comply with section 13-12.02A.


13-12.03A General

Do not use motorized vehicles and equipment in areas of flowing or standing water for the construction of the temporary creek diversion system. Comply with section 13-4.03.



Remove vegetation to ground level and clear away debris.

Place temporary or permanent fill as allowed by PLACs

Do not construct temporary creek diversion system if the 72-hour forecast predicts a 50% or greater chance of rain.

Stop all work and remove all material and equipment from the creek between upstream and downstream cofferdams if the 72-hour forecasts predict a 50% or greater chance of a 0.25 inch rain event in the project area and the predicted rainfall is to be estimated to produce a flow volume exceeding the design capacity of the TCDS. The temporary creek diversion system must be constructed within the temporary impact footprint allowed in the PLAC impact maps.

If the work requires more than one restricted period, the temporary creek diversion system must be removed at the conclusion of the restricted period and reconstructed during the following restricted period. If necessary, reconstruct or relocate portions of the temporary creek diversion system during the progress of the work with approval for the location.

Lap and join all joints between the edges of impermeable plastic membrane with commercial quality waterproof tape with minimum 4-inch lapping at the edges.

13-12.03B Maintenance

The temporary creek diversion system must be maintained to provide adequate holding capacity with a minimum freeboard of 12 inches between the upstream water surface and the top of the cofferdam.

Prevent leakage in the temporary creek diversion system that may interfere with the work.

Patch and repair holes and rips in the impermeable plastic membrane by taping or replacing the impermeable plastic membrane. Replace impermeable plastic membrane when patches or repairs compromise the impermeability of the material.

Repair temporary creek diversion system immediately when the damage occurs. Prevent project debris from entering the creek.

Remove and replace gravel, gravel-filled bags, or impermeable plastic membrane contaminated by construction activities immediately.

Remove sediment deposits and debris from temporary creek diversion system including the work areas between the cofferdams. If removed sediment is deposited within project limits, it must be stabilized and not subject to erosion by wind or water.

13-12.03C Removal

When no longer required, remove and dispose all components of temporary creek diversion system.

Do not excavate the native creek material. Backfill ground disturbance, including holes and depressions caused by the installation and removal of the temporary creek diversion system with gravel. Maintain the original line and grade of the creek bed.

13-12.04 PAYMENT

Not Used



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

14 ENVIRONMENTAL STEWARDSHIP

XE "14-1.02_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 14-1.02. Use if there is an ESA for the management of environmental, biological, or cultural resources, such as archaeological sites, existing vegetation, or biological habitats.

Do not edit this SSP to include district biologist approvals or mitigation measures, such as revegetation methods or wildlife relocation.

Add to the end of section 14-1.02:

1–9. Use if only 1 ESA exists on the project.

1

An ESA exists on this project.

2. Use if the Contractor must enclose the ESA with a barrier, such as a high-visibility fence. Insert the type of barrier.

Before starting job site activities, install Temporary Fence (Type ESA) or Temporary Reinforced Silt Fence (Type 1) to protect the ESA and mark its boundaries.

3–8. Use if the Contractor must install signs on the ESA barrier.

3. Edit the spacing of the signs if needed and insert the type of barrier.

Install signs 100 feet apart along the length and at the ends of the _______________ identifying the area as an ESA. Place the top of each sign flush with the top of the ______________.

4. Insert the message for the ESA signs.

The signs must:

1. Be weatherproof and fade-proof 2. Be from 8-1/2 to 11 inches high and from 11 to 14 inches wide 3. Have the following message in black letters: ______________________________________

5

The message must be legible from a distance of 20 feet by persons with 20/20 vision or vision corrected to 20/20.

6

The signs may be made of laminated printed paper attached to an inflexible weatherproof backer board.

7. Insert the type of barrier.

Attach the signs to the ______________ with tie wire or locking plastic fasteners.

8

Maintain the signs until Contract acceptance.

9. Use if the Contractor is allowed limited access to the ESA for activities such as biological monitoring, water sampling, or release of encroaching wildlife. Insert the activity and number of business days (5 or less).

JN Limited access to the ESA is allowed for biological monitoring and water sampling. Notify the Engineer 5 business days or less before the planned entry date. Any other access to the ESA is prohibited.



10–13. Use if different ESAs on the project have different fence or limited access conditions (e.g., project includes both riparian and archaeological ESAs that have different requirements for monitoring or access).

10. Complete the table to identify each ESA, location, and the corresponding management measures. If limited access is allowed, include advance notification of 5 business days or less. Add rows as needed. Some example management measures are:

A. Before starting work, install a high-visibility fence to protect the ESA and mark its boundaries.

B. Install signs 100 feet apart along the length and at the ends of the high-visibility fence identifying the area as an ESA. The signs must have the following message in black letters: ___________________________. Place the top of each sign flush with the top of the fence.

C. Limited access to the ESA is allowed for water quality monitoring. Notify the Engineer ____ business days or less before the planned entry date.

D. Limited access to the ESA is allowed from February 1 to September 10 for water quality monitoring. Notify the Engineer ____ business days or less before the planned entry date.

More than one ESA exists on the job site. Use the management measures for the corresponding ESA shown in the following table:

ESA Management Identification Location Management measures

11–12. Use if signs are required to identify any of the ESAs listed in the table above.

11

ESA signs must:

1. Be weatherproof and fade-proof 2. Be from 8-1/2 to 11 inches high and from 11 to 14 inches wide 3. Have a message that is legible from a distance of 20 feet by persons with 20/20 vision or vision

corrected to 20/20 4. Be attached to the ESA barrier with tie wire or locking plastic fasteners

12

The signs may be made of laminated printed paper attached to an inflexible weatherproof backer board.

13

Access to an ESA other than that described is prohibited.



XE "14-6.03A_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 14-6.03A. Use for species protection if a district biologist has determined that the project is occurring in or adjacent to regulated species' habitat.

Use to identify the regulated species, protective radius, species protection areas, protocols, protection measures, and monitoring requirements.

1. Insert names of regulated species with habitat in or near the job site. Add or delete rows as needed.

Add to the 1st paragraph of section 14-6.03A:

This project is within or near habitat for the regulated species shown in the following table:

Regulated Species California red-legged frog Steelhead Migratory and nongame birds

2. Use to specify a protective radius other than 100 feet or alternate protective radii for different regulated species. Insert a radius determined by the project biologist in the sentence in item 1. Add or delete rows to the table as needed. Delete except as shown in the following table if the table is deleted.

Replace item 1 in the 2nd paragraph of section 14-6.03A with:

1. Stop all work within a ___50_-foot radius of the discovery except as shown in the following table:

Regulated species Protective radius (feet)

Raptors and owls 300

3-7. Use to specify additional species protection requirements.


3. Use if a district biologist requires that species protection be performed in designated areas. Edit the table as needed. Add rows for additional species protection areas. Identification is a name shown on the plans such as Species Protection Area 1, etc. Descriptive names may be used.

Species protection areas within the project limits are as specified in the following table:

Species Protection Areas Identification Location

Species Protection Area 1 Entire project limits

4. Use if requiring protocols other than those listed in PLACs.

Use the protocols for the corresponding regulated species shown in the following table:

Regulated species name Protocol



5. Use if PLAC requirements are not clear and a biological resource information program is not required. Add or delete rows as needed.

JN Comply with the following biological resource information requirements:

1. ________________________________________________________ 2. ________________________________________________________ 3. ________________________________________________________

6. Use to specify protection measures for species protection areas. If the entire job site is designated as a species protection area, name the area Species Protection Area 1 or use a descriptive name. Insert handling, relocation, and monitoring requirements and restrictions. Provide a Monitoring type name for any monitoring requirements. Add or delete rows as needed. Add paragraphs for additional species protection areas.

JN Within Species Protection Area 1, implement the following protection measures:

1. ________________________________________________________ 2. ________________________________________________________ 3. ________________________________________________________

7. Use if a natural resources protection plan is not required. Edit the table as needed. The Monitoring type name must be listed in PLACs or the protection measures listed above.

JN Monitor regulated species according to the schedule shown in the following table:

Monitoring type Schedule

XE "14-8.02_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 14-8.02. Use for noise control and monitoring for work in a residential or urban area (1) at night or (2) if night or Sunday noise restrictions exist. Use either par. 1 or 2.

Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 14-8.02 with:

1. Edit to include (1) local noise ordinances that the project manager has agreed to comply with or (2) work with noise restrictions that differ from those specified in section 14-3.04. List exceptions in the table. Delete " except . . . table:" and the table if exceptions are not needed. Delete par. 2 if using par. 1.

Noise from job site activities must not exceed 86 dBA Lmax at 50 feet from the job site from 9 p.m. to 5 a.m., except the following activities may exceed this noise restriction during the hours and on the days shown in the following table:



Noise Restriction Exceptions Activity Hours Days

From To From Through

Sawcutting 9.00 p.m 5:00 a.m Monday Saturday Pile Driving 9.00 p.m 5:00 a.m Monday Saturday Cold Planing 9.00 p.m 5:00 a.m Monday Saturday

2. Use if night or Sunday noise restrictions exist. Delete par. 1 if using par. 2.

JN Do not operate construction equipment or run equipment engines from 7:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. or on Sundays at the job site except to:

1. Service traffic-control facilities 2. Service construction equipment


3. Use if a sound meter is required.

Furnish 1 Type 1 sound-level meter and 1 acoustic calibrator for the Department to use until Contract acceptance to monitor noise.

The sound-level meter must:

1. Be calibrated and certified by the manufacturer or an independent acoustical laboratory before delivery to the Department

2. Be capable of taking measurements using the A-weighting network and the slow-response settings 3. Have a microphone fitted with a windscreen 4. Be recalibrated annually by the manufacturer or an independent acoustical laboratory Provide training in noise monitoring to 1 Department employee designated by the Engineer. The person delivering the training must be trained in noise monitoring.

The Department returns the equipment to you at Contract acceptance.



XE "14-8.03_N6-19-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW BR**

By Ben Razeghi., (408) 971-7300, 6/19/2016

NSSP to include vibration monitoring for pile driving at Solano


Monitor vibration to protect the following properties and underground facilities from excess vibration from construction activities:

Property Underground Facility

Extra Storage structures on Solano Way Kinder Morgan pipelines within Extra Storage property near Solano Way UC

The maximum velocity of vibration shall not exceed 0.5 inch/second at these locations.

Yu must record vibration measurements before and during pile driving, excavation or other significant activity when that activity occurs within 200 feet of the above listed properties or underground utilities.

You must conduct baseline vibration monitoring at each site prior to the start of construction activities or when there is a break in the construction activities.

You must furnish and install vibration monitoring instrument that are capable of continuous operation with instant monitoring results. The vibration monitoring must capable of measuring peak particle velocity and frequency levels as low as 0.1 inch per second to 4 inches per second using a 3-axis geophone. The vibration monitoring system must undergo certified laboratory calibration conformance at least once a year. At the time of measurement the vibration monitoring system must have a certificate that is not expired.

You must have the instrument in place and functioning properly prior to any construction activities adjacent to the above listed properties or underground utilities. The vibration monitoring instrument must be stationed on the side of the structure facing the work site.

Install the vibration monitoring instrument in a manner such that an immediate warning is given when peak particle velocity equal to or exceeding 75% of the maximum values is measured as shown in the table above. When any reading on the vibration monitoring instrument equals or exceeds values as shown in the above table, work must immediately cease and you must immediately take whatever action is necessary to reduce and maintain the peak particle velocity to below the maximum values as shown in the above table.

You must prepare a report to tabulate the measured vibration levels at three axes and associated frequencies. The report must include information such as measurement location, date, and source of vibration. The highest measured vibration levels for each axis and their relationship to the criteria must also be included in the report. You must submit the report no later than 24 hours after each monitoring.

The person who is responsible for the vibration monitoring and analysis must have the following qualifications:

A. Professional Engineer, Geologist, Bachelor of Science or higher degree from a qualified program in engineering, physics or geology offered by an accredited university or college, and five years experience in vibration monitoring and control.



B. Demonstrated substantial and responsible experience in preparing and implementing construction vibration monitoring plans and analyzing vibration impacts in an urban setting.

A technician under the supervision of the qualified person may conduct the actual measurements.

XE "14-9.02_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 2

14-9.02. Use for the demolition or rehabilitation of a bridge or building requiring notification to the US EPA, California Air Resources Board, APCD, or AQMD to comply with air quality regulations.

Do not use this SSP for naturally occurring asbestos, which is not part of a structure.

Add to the end of section 14-9.02:

1

The US EPA has established the National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP). Under the Health & Safety Code § 39658(b)(1), your demolition and rehabilitation activities must comply with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M (National Emission Standard for Asbestos).

2

The asbestos survey and sampling report for this project is included in the Information Handout.

3–7. Use in a nondelegated APCD or AQMD for Asbestos NESHAP enforcement identified on the California Air Resources Board's website http://www.arb.ca.gov/enf/asbestos/asbestos.htm.

3

Notify the US EPA and the California Air Resources Board of your demolition activities even if the activities will not disturb asbestos-containing material.

4

You may obtain an Asbestos NESHAP Notification of Demolition and Renovation Form at the California Air Resources Board's website:

http://www.arb.ca.gov/enf/asbestos/asbestos.htm

5

Instead of the 10 working days specified at the website, mail or deliver the form with the necessary attachments at least 15 days before starting demolition or rehabilitation activities to:

US EPA - REGION IX ASBESTOS NESHAP NOTIFICATION (AIR-5) 75 HAWTHORNE ST SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105

6

Mail or fax a copy of the notification form to:



CALIFORNIA AIR RESOURCES BOARD ENFORCEMENT DIVISION ASBESTOS NESHAP NOTIFICATION P.O. BOX 2815 SACRAMENTO, CA 95812 FAX: (916) 229-0645

7

Submit a copy of the notification form and attachments as informational submittals before starting demolition or rehabilitation activities.

8–11. Use in a delegated APCD or AQMD for Asbestos NESHAP enforcement identified on the California Air Resources Board's website http://www.arb.ca.gov/enf/asbestos/asbestos.htm.

8. Insert the name of the APCD or AQMD in which the project is located.

You must notify the Bay Area Air Quality Management District of your demolition activities even if the activities will not disturb asbestos-containing material.

9. Insert the name, address, and website of the APCD or AQMD in which the project is located. The local air district directory is available at http://www.arb.ca.gov/capcoa/roster.htm.

You may obtain the notification form, submittal instructions, and other information from:

BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT 375 BEALE ST, SUITE 600

SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 http:// www.baaqmd.gov

10. Edit 10 working days as needed to match the APCD or AQMD website. Insert the name of the APCD or AQMD.

JN Instead of the 10 working days specified at the website, submit a notification form to the _____________ at least 15 days before starting demolition or rehabilitation activities.

11

Submit a copy of the notification form and the necessary attachments as informational submittals before starting demolition or rehabilitation activities.

12–13. Use in District 4.

12

Submit a copy of the acknowledgement letter from the Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD) as an informational submittal.

13

Do not start demolition or rehabilitation activities before the date specified in BAAQMD's acknowledgement letter.

XE "14-11.08_A10-30-15__2015"

Page 1 of 5

Section 14-11.08. Use if material containing ADL at hazardous waste concentrations is present at the job site and will be stockpiled, transported in the



right of way, placed within project limits using the DTSC variance, or disposed of in a landfill.

1. Insert the RWQCB region number and name. Insert the AQMD name. Add item numbers and agencies if needed.

Add to the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 14-11.08A:

9. RWQCB, Region 2 10. Bay Area Air Quality Management District

2. Use to delete agencies for the list if needed. Insert the item number and description. If more than one item is to be deleted, change item to items and insert the item numbers and descriptions to be deleted.

Delete the following item from the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 14-11.08A:

__ ________________________________________________________________________


3. Delete the last sentence if perimeter air monitoring is not required under par. 14.

Hazardous waste concentrations of ADL are present within the project limits. Management of this material exposes workers to health hazards that must be addressed in a lead compliance plan. Include perimeter air monitoring under section 14-11.08F as part of your lead compliance plan.

4. Edit to include the location for review of the variance or to explain that it has been included as part of the Information Handout. If the variance is not being invoked, delete the 3rd sentence. If the variance is being invoked, show Type Y-1, Type Y-2, or both on the plans.

The Department has received a variance from the DTSC regarding the use of material containing ADL. The variance applies if Type Y-1 or Type Y-2 material is shown. The variance is available for inspection at the Department of Transportation, District 4, 111 Grand Ave, Oakland, California.

Add to section 14-11.08C:

5. Use for Type Y-1 material, which is reusable beneath soil under the DTSC variance. Insert the width, length, and depth of excavation based on the site investigation report and the design engineer's decision regarding use of the material. Delete the width, length, and depth of excavation if the plans show the complete information and you do not want to describe the dimensions here.

Type Y-1 material exists along Route 4 shoulders at Grayson Creek between 0 and 15 feet, measured horizontally from the edges of the existing pavement, along Route 4 westbound median from Sta 147+00 to Sta 211+00 and from a depth of 0 to 1 foot below existing grade as shown.

6. Use for Type Y-2 material, which is reusable beneath pavement under the DTSC variance. Insert the width, length, and depth of excavation based on the site investigation report and the design engineer's decision regarding use of the material. Delete the width, length, and depth of excavation if the plans show the complete information and you do not want to describe the dimensions here.

Type Y-2 material exists between ____ and ____ feet, measured horizontally from the edges of the existing pavement, from ____ to ____ station, and from a depth of ____ to ____ feet below existing grade as shown.

7. Use for Type Z-2 material, which is subject to California hazardous waste regulations and cannot be re-used on Caltrans right of way. Insert the width, length, and depth of excavation based on the site investigation report and the design engineer's decision. Delete the width, length, and depth of excavation if the



plans show the complete information and you do not want to describe the dimensions here.

Type Z-2 material exists between ____ and ____ feet, measured horizontally from the edges of the existing pavement, from ____ to ____ station, and from a depth of ____ to ____ feet below existing grade as shown.

8. Use for Type Z-3 material, which is subject to federal hazardous waste regulations. California regulations are different. Insert the width, length, and depth of excavation based on the site investigation report and the design engineer's decision. Delete the width, length, and depth of excavation if the plans show the complete information and you do not want to describe the dimensions here.

Type Z-3 material exists between ____ and ____ feet, measured horizontally from the edges of the existing pavement, from ____ to ____ station, and from a depth of ____ to ____ feet below existing grade as shown.

9. For less complex projects, fast-track schedules, or short construction periods, you may reduce the time for submittal and/or the time to review the excavation and transportation. Insert no less than 7 days.

Replace the 1st paragraph of section 14-11.08D(2) with:

Within ____ days of Contract approval, submit 3 copies of an excavation and transportation plan for material containing hazardous waste concentrations of ADL. Allow ____ days for review.

10. Add or delete list items as needed.

Add after the 2nd paragraph of section 14-11.08D(2):

The excavation and transportation plan must include:

1. Procedures for excavating, stockpiling, transporting, placing and disposing of the material 2. Excavation schedule by location and date

Use if temporary stockpiling is likely to be needed.

3. Locations for temporary stockpiles if stockpiling is ordered

Use if sampling is needed after stockpile removal to confirm that all Type Y-1 or Type Y-2 material has been removed.

4. Sampling and analysis plans for areas after removal of a stockpile if sampling is ordered, including: 4.1 Location and number of samples. 4.2 Name and address of the laboratory that will perform the analysis. The laboratory must be

certified under the SWRCB ELAP.

Use for projects with Type Y-1, Type Y-2, or both materials.

5. Survey methods for burial locations for Types Y-1 or Y-2 materials

Use with Type Y-1 material if needed. Confer with the district's hazardous waste technical specialist.

6. Sampling and analysis plan for soil cover

Use with all material if needed. Confer with the district's hazardous-waste technical specialist.

7. Sampling and analysis plan for post excavation from ____ to ____ station as shown 78. Dust control measures

Use if air monitoring is required. Use with par. 14.

89. Air monitoring procedures, including: 9.1 Location and type of equipment 9.2 Sampling frequency 9.3 Name and address of the laboratory that will perform the analyses

910. Transportation equipment and routes 1011. Method for preventing spills and tracked material onto public roads



1112. Truck waiting and staging areas

Use for projects with Type Z-2 or Type Z-3 material.

13. Name and address of the hazardous waste disposal facility

Use for Type Y-1 or Type Y-2 material moving from this project to another project.

14. Example of a bill of lading to be carried by trucks transporting Type Y-1 or Y-2 material from the job site to another project. The bill of lading must include: 14.1. US Department of Transportation description, including shipping name 14.2. Hazard class 14.3. Identification number 14.4. Handling codes 14.5. Quantity of material 14.6. Volume of material

15. Spill contingency plan for material containing ADL

Replace Reserved in section 14-11.08D(3) with:

11–13. Use for Type Y-1 or Type Y-2 material.

11

Within 5 business days of completing placement of Type Y-1 or Type Y-2 material, submit a report for each burial location that includes:

1. Burial Location of Soil Containing Aerially Deposited Lead form 2. Electronic geospatial vector data shapefiles of the top and bottom perimeters of the burial location

12

Submit the report to the Engineer and to:

[email protected].

13

The Engineer notifies you of acceptance or rejection of the burial location report within 5 business days of receipt. If the report is rejected, submit a corrected report within 5 business days of receiving notification.

Replace Reserved in section 14-11.08F with:

14. Use if excavation of material containing ADL borders on land used for schools, daycare centers, hospitals, or areas of special community concern. Consult with district environmental staff to determine if this paragraph is needed. Use with item 9 in par. 10.

Conduct perimeter air monitoring at upwind and downwind locations as detailed in the authorized lead compliance plan. Monitor using personal air samplers by the National Institute of Safety and Health Method 7082. Your sampling procedures must achieve a detection limit of 0.05 µg/ m

3 of air per day.

Under the direction of a CIH, monitor the air daily while clearing and grubbing and performing earthwork activities. Analyze a single representative daily sample for lead and provide results within 24 hours. Analyses must be performed by a laboratory accredited by the Environmental Lead Laboratory-Accreditation Program of the American Industrial Hygiene Association.

15. Edit if needed to comply with more strict requirements of the local AQMD or APCD.

Average lead concentrations must not exceed 1.5 µg/ m3 of air per day and 0.15 µg/ m

3 per day on a

rolling 90-day basis. Calculate average daily concentrations based on accumulated monitoring data and projections based on monitoring trends for the next 90 days or to the end of work subject to the lead compliance plan if less than the specified averaging period. If concentrations exceed these levels, stop work and modify the work to prevent release of lead. The air monitoring data must be reviewed and signed by the CIH.



Replace Reserved in section 14-11.08G with:

16–19. Use all paragraphs that apply.

16. Use for Type Y-1 material, which is reusable under the DTSC variance under soil.

Insert the thickness of the nonhazardous soil cover.

Use a minimum cover of 1 foot except use a minimum cover of 2 feet for planned landscaping areas.

Place Type Y-1 material and cover with a minimum 2 foot layer of nonhazardous soil or pavement. Temporary surplus material may be generated by stage construction. Do not transport temporary surplus outside the job site. It may be necessary to:

1. Stockpile material for subsequent stages 2. Construct some embankments out of stage 3. Handle temporary surplus material more than once

17. Use for Type Y-2 material, which is reusable under the DTSC variance under pavement.

Place Type Y-2 material and cover with pavement. Temporary surplus material may be generated by stage construction. Do not transport temporary surplus material outside the job site. It may be necessary to:

1. Stockpile material for subsequent stages 2. Construct some embankments out of stage 3. Handle temporary surplus material more than once

18. Use for Type Z-2 material, which is subject to California hazardous waste regulations and cannot be re-used on Caltrans right of way.

Transport excavated Type Z-2 material using:

1. Hazardous waste manifest 2. Hazardous waste transporter with a current DTSC registration certificate and CA Highway Patrol

(CHP) Biennial Inspection of Terminals (BIT) Program compliance documentation.

19. Use for Type Z-3 material, which is subject to federal hazardous waste regulations.

Transport excavated Type Z-3 material using:

1. Hazardous waste manifest 2. Hazardous waste transporter with a current DTSC registration certificate and CHP BIT Program

compliance documentation

Add to the beginning of section 14-11.08I:

20. Use in District 4 for Type Z-2 and Z-3 material only. Delete for all other districts. District 4 uses the Board of Equalization number for administrative convenience.

The Engineer obtains the State of California Board of Equalization identification number for hazardous waste disposal and signs all hazardous waste manifests. Notify the Engineer 5 business days before the manifests are to be signed.

Add to section 14-11.08J:

21. Use if the project has surplus excavated material.

Analyze surplus excavated material for which the lead content is unknown before removing it from the job site. The analysis must be performed by a laboratory certified by the SWRCB ELAP. Submit a sampling and analysis plan and the name of the laboratory at least 15 days before beginning sampling and analysis. Sample at a minimum rate of 1 sample for each 200 cu yd of surplus material and test for lead



using US EPA Method 6010B or 7000 series. Sampling, analyses, and reporting of results for surplus material not previously sampled is change order work.


14-11.11 MANAGEMENT OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS IN BRIDGES

14-11.11A General 14-11.11A(1)

Summary

Section 14-11.11 includes specifications for surveying, sampling, analysis, removing, and disposing of asbestos-containing material (ACM) in bridges.

Friable ACM generated as part of this project is Department-generated hazardous waste as specified in section 14-11.02F.

14-11.11A(2) Definitions.

asbestos: Any of several minerals that readily separate into long flexible fibers. Includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite, anthrophyllite, actinolite and any of these minerals that has been chemically treated, altered, or both.

asbestos-containing material (ACM): Building material, including asbestos cement pipe, containing commercial asbestos in an amount greater than 1 percent by weight, area, or count under 40 CFR §61.145.

certified asbestos consultant: Asbestos consultant certified by Cal/OSHA under 8 CA Code of Regs § 341.15 and § 1529.

friable ACM: Material containing more than 1 percent asbestos as determined by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) that, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure as defined in 22 CCR §66261.24.

nonfriable ACM: Material containing more than 1 percent asbestos by area with asbestos fibers that:

1. Are tightly bound into the matrix of the material 2. Should not become an airborne hazard as long as the material remains intact and undamaged

and is not sawed, sanded, drilled or otherwise abraded during removal

regulated asbestos-containing material (RACM) as defined under 40 CFR §61.145(b): Material containing more than 1 percent of any of the following in excess of 260 linear ft., 160 sq. ft., or 35 cu. ft.:

1. Friable asbestos, as determined using PLM, that can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry

2. Category I nonfriable ACM that has become friable or will be subjected to sanding, grinding, cutting or abrading

3. Category II nonfriable ACM that may become or has become friable

14-11.11A(3) Submittals

Submit a work plan for asbestos surveying and sampling at least 15 days before starting bridge removal or renovation. The plan must be prepared and signed by a certified asbestos consultant and include:



1. ACM sampling procedures, complying with US EPA, SW-846, "Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste," Volume II: Field Manual, Physical/Chemical, Chapter 9, Section 9.1

2. Method for analyzing samples under 40 CFR 763 Subpart F, appendix A, Polarized Light Microscopy, Analytical Method 600/R-93-116

3. Name and address of the laboratory that will perform the asbestos analyses and a copy of the laboratory’s CDPH Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (ELAP) certification

4. Procedures for handling and preserving samples

Submit a sampling and analysis report within 10 days of sampling ACM. The report must be prepared and signed by a certified asbestos consultant and include:

1. Sampling protocols 2. Photographs of the structures and of the locations where samples were taken 3 Classification of the ACM as friable or nonfriable

4. Quantification of ACM 5. Recommendations for the removal and disposal of confirmed ACM 6. Documentation of the chain of custody 7. Laboratory test data

Allow 15 days for review. Submit a revised sampling and analysis report within 5 days of receiving the Department's comments. Submit 2 copies of the final report.

Submit a copy of the National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Notification of Demolition and Renovation form and attachments before submittal to the Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD) under 40 CFR §61.145(b).

If the authorized sampling and analysis report identifies ACM, submit an asbestos compliance plan for preventing or minimizing workers' exposure to asbestos during demolition or renovation activities. Submit the plan at least 15 days before starting bridge demolition or renovation activities in areas containing or suspected to contain asbestos. The plan must be prepared by a CIH and include:

1. Identification of key personnel for the project 2. Scope of work and equipment to be used 3. Job hazard analysis for work assignments 4. Summary of risk assessment 5. Description of personal protective equipment 6. Delineation of work zones at the job site 7. Decontamination procedures 8. General safe work practices 9. Security measures 10. Emergency response plans 11. Worker training 12. Certification of completed safety training for personnel before starting work in areas containing or

suspected to contain asbestos

If the authorized sampling and analysis report identifies ACM, submit a work plan for the removal, storage, transportation, and disposal of ACM. The work plan must include:

1. Locations at the perimeters of abatement work areas where asbestos warning signs will be installed

2. Summary of methods and techniques for handling, packaging, labeling, storing, transporting, and disposing of waste materials

3. Instructions for wetting asbestos materials with sprayers



4. Description and locations of disposal bins to be used for temporary storage of ACM until removal from the job site

5. Name and address of the hazardous waste transporter registered with the DTSC that will transport the ACM to a DTSC permitted hazardous waste facility. The transporter must be registered to transport hazardous waste in California under the Health and Safety Code, Div 20, Ch 6.5 and 22 CA Code of Regs, Div 4.5.

6. Name and address of the disposal facility in California permitted for the disposal of ACM 7. Documentation of compliance with federal, state, and local requirements for asbestos work,

transport, and disposal

If the authorized sampling and analysis report identifies ACM, submit an asbestos removal report documenting your compliance with the asbestos removal work plan. Submit the report to the Engineer and the BAAQMD within 30 days after removing ACM from the job site.

Submit a copy of the hazardous waste manifest for each shipment of ACM.

Within 5 business days of transporting hazardous and nonhazardous ACM waste, submit documentation of proper disposal from the receiving disposal facility.

14-11.11A(4) Quality Control and Assurance

The laboratory that performs the asbestos analysis must be certified by the CDPH ELAP for all analyses to be performed.

Sampling and analysis must comply with US EPA's “Asbestos/NESHAP Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials Guidance.”

The removal and disposal of materials containing asbestos must comply with:

1. Health and Safety Code, Div 20, Ch 6.5, "Hazardous Waste Control" 2. 8 CA Code of Regs, § 5208 3. 8 CA Code of Regs § 1529 and § 341 4. 22 CA Code of Regs, Div 4.5 5. 29 CFR 26 6. 40 CFR 61 Subpart M

A certified asbestos consultant must be registered under Labor Code § 6501.5 and certified under Bus & Prof Code § 7058.6.

14-11.11B Materials

Not Used


14-11.11C(1) General

Notify the BAAQMD of changes in work locations or conditions such as changes to removal or demolition plans, including discovery of ACM during demolition, within 2 days of the change.

14-11.11C(2) Asbestos Survey

Perform surveying, sampling, and analysis of ACM under the authorized work plan.

Collect a minimum of 3 samples for each part of the bridge, such as the deck or railing, where ACM is suspected to be present. For pipes and other linear parts, collect enough samples to determine the suspected asbestos content of the material.

Collect samples of:



1. Exposed suspected ACM on the structure 2. Bridge concrete that will be disturbed during demolition or renovation. Identify concrete samples

by: 2.1. Concrete color 2.2. Concrete texture 2.3. Type of structure component to be impacted

3. Suspected ACM encapsulated in concrete when exposed during demolition

Transport ACM samples under chain of custody to the authorized laboratory within 24 hours of sampling. The laboratory must test the samples within 48 hours of receiving them.

14-11.11C(3) Discovery of Unanticipated ACM

If during demolition or renovation you discover ACM not identified by your asbestos survey, stop work in that area and notify the Engineer.

14-11.11C(4) Health and Safety

Before starting work in areas containing or suspected to contain asbestos, provide safety training complying with 8 CA Code of Regs § 1529 to State personnel who may enter the work area.

Provide training, personal protective equipment, and medical surveillance as required by the asbestos compliance plan to 2 State personnel.

14-11.11C(5) Removal of ACM

Remove ACM under 8 CA Code of Regs § 1529 and 341 et seq. Remove friable ACM using the wetting method. Remove and handle nonfriable ACM such that you prevent breakage.

You are not required to remove ACM encased in concrete or similar structural material before demolition, but the ACM must be adequately wetted whenever exposed during demolition. Prevent visible emissions from ACM removal activities.

Mark regulated work areas with the warning information, "Danger, Asbestos, Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard, Authorized Personnel Only."

14-11.11C(6) Packaging and Temporary Storage of ACM

Package and label removed ACM under 22 CA Code of Regs § 66262.30 et seq. Place the removed

ACM in minimum 0.06-inch-thick, double-ply, plastic bags with clearly visible labels affixed to the bags. The labels must have legible lettering with the information, "Danger/ Contains Asbestos Fibers/ Avoid Creating Dust/ Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard." Wet the waste before putting it in the plastic bag to prevent fibers from blowing around if the bag is broken.

For bulk waste that will not fit into a plastic bag without additional breaking, wet it, wrap it with plastic and seal it with packaging or duct tape until it is leak-tight. Place the wrapped and sealed ACM directly into a covered, lockable, roll-off or drop box lined with plastic sheeting and labeled on all sides. The labels must have legible lettering with the information: “Danger/ Contains Asbestos Fibers/ Avoid Creating Dust/ Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard.”

14-11.11C(7) Transport and Disposal of ACM

Dispose of friable and nonfriable ACM at a California disposal facility operating under a Regional Water Quality Control Board permit that authorizes it to accept asbestos waste. Notify the facility at least 5 days before delivery of ACM.

14-11.11C(7)(a) Friable ACM

The Engineer provides the Department's EPA Identification Number for hazardous waste disposal.



The Engineer signs the hazardous waste manifests. Notify the Engineer 5 days before the manifests are to be signed.

All transporters of friable ACM must:

1. Have current DTSC registration for transporting hazardous waste 2. Have a US EPA Identification Number 3. Be in compliance with the CA Highway Patrol Biennial Inspection of Terminals Program

Vehicles used to transport the hazardous waste must carry a valid registration during transport.

14-11.11C(7)(b) Nonfriable ACM

Transport nonhazardous, nonfriable ACM to the disposal facility with a shipping document or waste shipment record.

14-11.11D Payment

The following are change order work:

1. Asbestos compliance plan 2. Work plan for the removal, storage, transportation, and disposal of ACM 3. Removal of ACM and related manifest and disposal reporting 4. Asbestos removal report

XE "14-11.12_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 14-11.12. Use if yellow residue, expected to be a hazardous waste (lead concentration equal to or greater than 1,000 mg/kg total lead or 5 mg/l soluble lead), will be produced.

Add after the 2nd paragraph of section 14-11.12A:

1 Insert yellow painted traffic stripe, yellow painted pavement marking, yellow thermoplastic traffic stripe, or yellow thermoplastic pavement marking or all as needed.

This project includes removal of yellow painted traffic stripe that will produce hazardous waste residue.

Add after the 1st paragraph of 14-11.12E:

2. Insert the time limit for the disposal of accumulated residue. Contact the district hazardous-waste technical specialist to determine the number of days based on the disposal facility's location and the necessary storage time for hazardous waste. Allow time for analysis and scheduling disposal with the landfill. Minimum recommended storage time is 30 days; maximum storage time allowed by law is 90 days.

After the Engineer accepts the analytical test results, dispose of yellow thermoplastic and yellow paint hazardous waste residue at a Class 1 disposal facility located in California 30 days after accumulating 220 lb of residue.

3. Insert the maximum storage time. Recommended storage time if less than 220 lb is generated is 30 days; maximum storage time allowed by law is 90 days.

If less than 220 lb of hazardous waste residue and dust is generated in total, dispose of it within 30 days after the start of accumulation of the residue.



XE "14-11.13_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 4

Section 14-11.13. Use if work will disturb the existing paint system on a bridge.

Add to the 1st paragraph in section 14-11.13A:

1. List the bridge numbers and insert the names of hazardous materials. Hazardous materials are usually heavy metals such as lead, zinc, or chromium.

JN The existing paint system on bridge no. 28-0242 and no. 28-0415 will be disturbed as part of the work activities. The paint system contains lead.


2–3. Use if work activities that disturb the existing paint system have the potential to release lead into the air. This includes activities such as sanding, sand blasting, and drilling through painted surfaces. Delete for minor disturbances, such as the removal of 50 or fewer rivets. Contact the district 's hazardous waste technical specialist to help make this determination.

2

JN Air monitoring reports, including test results for samples taken after corrective action, must be prepared by the CIH and submitted:

1. Orally within 48 hours after sampling 2. As an informational submittal within 5 days after sampling

3

Air monitoring reports must include:

1. Date and location of sample collection, sample number, Contract number, bridge number, name of the structure, and District-County-Route-Post Mile

2. Name and address of the certified laboratory that performed the analyses 3. Chain of custody documentation 4. List of emission control measures in place when air samples were taken 5. Air sample results compared to the appropriate permissible exposure limit (PEL) 6. Corrective action recommended by the CIH to ensure exposure to airborne metals outside

containment systems and work areas is within specified limits 7. Signature of the CIH who reviewed the data and made recommendations




4–5. Use if work activities that disturb the existing paint system have the potential to release lead onto soils below the bridge. This includes activities that abrade, chip, cut, heat, or sand a painted surface. Delete if there is no exposed soil beneath the bridge or for minor disturbances, such as the removal of 50 or fewer rivets. Contact the district's hazardous waste technical specialist to help make this determination.

4. For a project in a remote area, edit 48 hours to allow up to 4 days to orally report the results.

JN Submit test results of soil analyses verifying debris containment, including results for soil samples taken after corrective action:

1. Orally within 48 hours after sampling 2. Within 5 days after sampling

5

Soil sampling results must include:

1. Date and location of sample collection, sample number, Contract number, bridge number, name of the structure, and District-County-Route-Post Mile

2. Concentrations of heavy metals expressed in mg/kg and mg/L 3. Name and address of the certified laboratory that performed the analyses 4. Chain-of-custody documentation

Replace Reserved in section 14-11.13D with:

6–7. Use if work activities that disturb the existing paint system have the potential to release lead into the air or to release lead onto soils below the bridge. Delete for minor disturbances, such as the removal of 50 or fewer rivets. Contact the district's hazardous waste technical specialist to help make this determination.

6

JN 14-11.13D(1) General

Monitor the ambient air and soil in and around the work area to verify the effectiveness of the containment system. Work area monitoring includes:

1. Collecting, analyzing, and reporting air and soil test results 2. Recommending corrective action whenever specified air or soil concentrations are exceeded

7

Collect air and soil samples at locations designated by the Engineer.

8–11. Use if work activities that disturb the existing paint system have the potential to release lead into the air. This includes activities such as sanding, sand blasting, and drilling through painted surfaces. Delete for minor disturbances, such as the removal of 50 or fewer rivets. Contact the district 's hazardous waste technical specialist to help make this determination.

8

JN 14-11.13D(2) Air Monitoring

Air monitoring must be performed under the direction of a CIH.



9

Collect and analyze air samples to detect lead under the NIOSH Method 7082 using a detection limit of at least 0.05 µg/m

3. Collect and analyze air samples to detect other metals under NIOSH Method 7300

using a detection limit of at least 1 percent of the appropriate PEL specified by Cal/OSHA. You may use alternative methods of sampling and analysis with equivalent detection limits.

10. Edit if needed to comply with more strict requirements of the local AQMD or APCD.

Concentrations of airborne metals outside containment systems and work areas must not exceed any of the following:

1. Average of 1.5 µg/m3 of air per day and 0.15 µg/m

3 per day on a rolling 90-day basis. Calculate the

average daily concentrations based on accumulated monitoring data and projections based on monitoring trends for the next 90 days or to the end of the work subject to the lead compliance plan if less than the specified averaging period.

2. 10 percent of the action level specified for lead by 8 CA Code of Regs §1532.1. 3. 10 percent of the appropriate PELs specified for other metals by Cal/OSHA.

11

Collect air samples daily during work activities that disturb the existing paint system. Air samples must be analyzed within 48 hours by a facility accredited by the Environmental Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program of the American Industrial Hygiene Association. If concentrations of airborne metals exceed allowable levels, modify the containment system or work activities to prevent further release of metals. If the CIH recommends corrective action, collect and analyze additional samples after implementing the corrective action unless ordered otherwise.

12–14. Use if work activities that disturb the existing paint system have the potential to release lead onto soils below the bridge. This includes all activities that abrade, chip, cut, heat, or sand a painted surface. Delete if exposed soil is not beneath the bridge or for minor disturbances, such as the removal of 50 or fewer rivets. Contact the district's hazardous waste technical specialist to help make this determination.

12. Specify 4 to 20 samples per bridge. Insert lead, chromium, zinc, or any combination of these depending on the paint system in par. 1.

JN 14-11.13D(3) Soil Sampling for Debris Containment

Collect ___ soil samples before starting work and collect ____ soil samples within 36 hours after cleaning existing steel. A soil sample consists of 5 plugs, each 3/4 inch in diameter and 1/2 inch deep, taken at each corner and center of a 1 sq yd area. Analyze soil samples for:

1. Total ______ by US EPA Method 6010B or US EPA Method 7000 series 2. Soluble _______ by California Waste Extraction Test (CA WET)

13

The laboratory that analyzes the samples must be certified by the SWRCB's ELAP for all analyses to be performed.

14

Concentrations of heavy metals in the work area's soil must not increase when the existing paint system is disturbed. If soil sampling shows an increase in the concentrations of heavy metals after completing the work:

1. Clean the affected area 2. Resample until soil sampling and testing shows concentrations of heavy metals less than or equal to

the concentrations collected before the start of work



Add to the end of the 1st paragraph of section 14-11.13F:

15. Insert lead, chromium, zinc, or any combination of these depending on the paint system listed in par. 1.

This waste characterization testing must include:

JN 1. Total lead by US EPA Method 6010B 2. Soluble _______ by California Waste Extraction Test (CA WET) 3. Soluble _________ by Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)

Add to the beginning of section 14-11.13G(2):

16. Insert the time limit for the disposal of accumulated residue. Contact the district's hazardous-waste technical specialist to help determine the specific time limit for the disposal of accumulated debris. Determine the number of days based on the disposal facility's location and necessary storage time for hazardous waste. Allow time for analysis and scheduling the disposal with the landfill. The minimum recommended storage time is 30 days; the maximum storage time allowed by law is 90 days.

After the Engineer accepts the waste characterization test results, dispose of the debris:

1. Within 30 days after accumulating 220 lb of debris 2. At a DTSC-permitted Class I facility located in California Make all arrangements with the operator of the disposal facility.

17. Insert the maximum storage time. The recommended storage time if less than 220 lb is generated is 30 days; the maximum storage time allowed by law is 90 days.

If less than 220 lb of hazardous waste is generated in total, dispose of it within 30 days after the start of the accumulation of the debris.

XE "14-11.14_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 14-11.14. Use if the project will generate treated wood waste.

Add to the 1st paragraph of section 14-11.14A:

1. Insert the source of treated wood waste, such as guardrail, thrie beam barrier, and roadside sign.

Wood removed from guardrail, thrie beam barrier and roadside sign are is treated wood waste.



** KYC 6/3/16 Change to section 14-11.15 for 2015 standard XE "14-11.15_D09-26-12"

Page 1 of 2

Use for disposal of ballasts containing polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB)s and fluorescent or mercury lamps, or vehicle sensory nodes containing lithium thionyl chloride batteries. Special handling of these materials is required as described herein. HPS and LPS lamps do NOT require special handling.

Before PS&E, District must determine if polychlorinated biphenyl (PCBs) is involved.

Add to section 14-11.15 with:

14-11.15A General

Section 14-11.15 includes specifications for disposal of electrical equipment containing hazardous materials.

2

14-11.15B Waste Management

14-11.15B(1) Universal Waste

Management of universal waste must comply with 22 CA Code Regs § 66261.9.

3

Transport fluorescent tubes, bulbs, and lamps, and mercury lamps to an appropriately permitted facility.

4. Use pars. 4 to 7 if vehicle sensor nodes containing lithium thionyl chloride batteries are to be disposed of.

Vehicle sensor nodes (VSNs) contain lithium thionyl chloride (LTC) batteries. Thionyl chloride is designated as an extremely hazardous waste under 22 CA Code of Regs, Div. 4.5, Chp 11, Art. 5, App.10. Each VSN includes one integral LTC battery.

5

Package removed VSNs containing undamaged LTC batteries in sealed shipping containers and transport to a recycling or disposal facility. Notify the receiving facility 48 hours before delivery. Affix a label on packages of intact VSN that states the package contains lithium thionyl chloride batteries.

6

Shipments of VSN batteries to receiving facility for recycling or disposal that are separated from a VSN must comply with the requirement of 49 CFR 173.185. All batteries must be packaged in such a manner that prevents short circuits under conditions normally encountered during transportation.

1. Cover terminal ends to prevent them from touching one another 2. Place batteries in sealed plastic bags and pack with loose fill, such as vermiculite, to prevent

accidental contact.

7

The outer packaging must comply with 49 CFR 173.24 and 173.24a. Transport LTC batteries to an approved hazardous waste recycling/disposal facility. A partial list of facilities may be viewed at:

http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/upload/LIST_HWM_Commercial_Facilities.pdf

or

http://www.calrecycle.ca.gov/Electronics/Collection/RecyclerList.aspx



8

14-11.15B(2) Fluorescent light ballasts containing PCBs

8

Disposal of fluorescent light ballasts that contain PCBs must comply with 22 CA Code of Regs § 67426.1 et seq. Ballasts must be packaged and transported by a hauler with a current DTSC registration certificate and documentation of compliance with the CA Highway Patrol Biennial Inspection of Terminals Program to a DTSC permitted hazardous waste disposal facility.

9

14-11.15C Damaged Electrical Equipment

Damaged electrical equipment is a Department generated hazardous waste and must be transported to hazardous waste disposal facility under hazardous waste manifest.

PCB and thionyl chloride are designated as extremely hazardous wastes.

10

You are the generator of and responsible for cleanup, management, disposal and associated costs of hazardous waste generated as a result of mishandling electrical equipment.

11

14-11.15D Payment

Management of Department generated hazardous waste is change order work.



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

15 EXISTING FACILITIES

XE "15-1.03C_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 15-1.03C. Use for salvaged materials.


1. Insert telephone number.

** KYC 6/2/16 At least 2 business days before hauling the material to the salvaged material stockpile location, notify the Engineer and inform the district recycle coordinator at telephone no. (415) 330-6500.

2. Use if materials are to be stockpiled at 1 location. Insert address of stockpile location.

** KYC 6/2/16 The stockpile location is:

3. Use if materials are to be stockpiled at more than 1 location. Insert the material and corresponding address of its stockpile location. Add or delete rows as necessary.

** BR 6/19/16 The stockpile locations are as shown in the following table:

Stockpile Locations Material Location

Electrical equipment 30 Rickard Street, San Francisco, CA 94134

Bridge Metal Railing TBD



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION III EARTHWORK AND LANDSCAPE

17 GENERAL

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

18 DUST PALLIATIVES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

19 EARTHWORK

XE "19-2.03B_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 19-2.03B. Use if surplus material must be disposed of outside the project limits.

Replace the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th paragraphs of section 19-2.03B with:

Dispose of surplus material. Ensure enough material is available to complete the embankments before disposing of it.

XE "19-2.03G_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 19-2.03G. Use if the embankment surface must be roughened after constructing the embankment for the placement of erosion control materials.

Add between the 8th and 9th paragraphs of section 19-2.03G:

1. Use if only the slopes of the embankment must be roughened by either track-walking or a sheepsfoot roller.

Roughen embankment slopes to receive erosion control materials by either track-walking or rolling with a sheepsfoot roller. Track-walk slopes by running track-mounted equipment perpendicular to the slope contours.

2. Use if the slopes and flat surfaces must be roughened by scarifying. Insert the depth (typically 4 to 8 inches).

Roughen excavation slopes and flat surfaces to receive erosion control materials by scarifying to a depth of 4 inches.



XE "19-3.01A_A10-30-15__2015"

Page 1 of 1 Peter Park, Biggs Cardosa Associates (BCA), (408) 296-5515 04/22/2016

Section 19-3.01A. Use if a geocomposite drain system is shown and is to be included in the payment for structure backfill.


Structure backfill includes constructing the geocomposite drain system. The systems must comply with section 68-7.

XE "19-3.01C(1)_N5-10-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW HKP**

By Peter Park (HKP), Biggs Cardosa Associates, Inc., (408) 296-5515, 5/10/2016

NSSP to include shoring system calcs and plans at Pacheco, Route 4/680, and near oil lines at Solano

Add to section 19-3.01C(1):

Submit shoring system shop drawings for the excavations for Engineer’s review at the following locations.

1. Bent excavations near the existing footings at Pacheco Blvd UC (Widen) and Route 4/680 Separation (Widen).

2. Bent 4 excavation near the oil line (Kinder Morgan) at Solano Way UC (Widen). Include construction methods and calculations with the shop drawings. Shop drawings and calculations must be sealed and signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State.

XE "19-3.03B(1)_N4-22-16__2015"

Page 1 of 1 NEW HKP**


NSSP to include special shoring near oil lines at Solano

Add to section 19-3.03B(1):

Structure excavation adjacent to the oil lines (Kinder Morgan) at bent 4 of Solano Way UC (Widen) must meet the following requirements:

1. You must shore the sides of the bent 4 footings adjacent to the oil lines. The shoring must extend to the bottom of footing.

2. Sheet piling or any shoring that my damage the oil lines must not be used. 3. Any soldier piles used in the shoring system must be placed in predrilled holes to a minimum 5 feet

below the oil lines. Predrilled holes must comply with section 49-2.01C(4).



XE "19-3.04_N4-22-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW HKP**


NSSP to include payment for structure excavation (Type Y-1)(ADL)

Section 19-3.04. Add to include payment for structure excavation (Type Y-1) (aerially deposited lead).


Quantities of structure excavation (Type Y-1) (Aerially Deposited Lead) will be measured and paid for in the same manner specified for structure excavation.

XE "19-6.03D_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Peter Park, Biggs Cardosa Associates (BCA), (408) 296-5515 04/22/2016

Section 19-6.03D. Use for settlement periods and surcharges.

Add to section 19-6.03D:

1. Use for settlement periods at bridges. For embankments requiring settlement periods but no surcharge; insert 0.0

a in the surcharge height column. If no such

embankments exist, delete the note a at the bottom of the table.

HKP** Settlement periods and surcharges are required for bridge approach embankments as shown in the following table:

Bridge name or number Abutment number

Bent number

Surcharge height (feet)

Settlement period (days)

Grayson Creek Bridge (Replace) (Br. No. 28-0415)

1 and 4 0.0a 30

aAt this location, construct embankment by extending the grading plane (GP) in the elevation

view of the bridge embankment surcharge detail of standard plan A62B horizontally to the centerline of the abutment.

2. Use for settlement periods at earth retaining structures.

HKP** Settlement periods and surcharges are required for roadway embankments at the earth retaining structures as shown in the following table:

Earth retaining structure number

Surcharge height (feet)

Settlement period (days)



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

. XE "19-6.01_N6-19-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW BR**

By Ben Razeghi., (408) 971-7300, 6/19/2016

NSSP to add Temporary Shoring NSSP

Add to paragraph 2 of section 19-6.01A:

5. Designing, constructing, maintaining, and removing temporary shoring.


Submit a temporary shoring work plan within 120 days after Contract approval. At minimum, include the following:

1. 4 sets of shop drawings

2. 2 copies of design calculations

Allow 30 days for the Engineer's review. The Engineer provides comments and specifies the date when the review stopped if revisions are required.

Resubmit a revised temporary shoring work plan within 15 days of receiving the Engineer's comments. Allow 30 days for the Engineer's review of the revised plan.

Upon authorization, submit 4 additional set of drawings and 2 additional copies of the design calculations. Temporary shoring plan must comply with the following:

1. Drawings must be either 11 in x 17 in, or 22 in x 34 in in size

2. Drawings and calculation sheets must include the State-assigned designations Contract number and District-County-Route-Postmile

3. Drawings and calculation sheets must include design firm's name, address, and phone number

4. Each sheet numbered in the lower right hand corner and contain a blank space in the upper right hand corner for future sheet numbers

Verify the existing ground elevations at the site before preparing the temporary shoring work plan. Provide information for the proper construction of the temporary shoring, including existing ground line at face of wall as verified at the site and any required revisions or additions to drainage systems or other facilities. Supplement calculations as necessary for particular installations. Drawings and calculations must be stamped and signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State.

Do not construct temporary shoring until authorized.

You are responsible for the design, construction, maintenance, and removal of the temporary shoring.


When the Engineer determines that the temporary shoring is no longer required, you may remove the temporary shoring or leave it in place.

Temporary shoring in conflict with other items of work must be removed. If you leave the temporary



shoring in place, remove the top portion to a depth of 3 feet below finished grade.


Temporary shoring is measured by the area of shoring projected on a vertical plane between shoring length and the elevation lines, as shown.

XE "19-7.02C_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 19-7.02C. Use for specifying imported borrow.


1. Insert an R-value. Do not specify an R-value greater than that of the native material.

Imported borrow placed within 4 feet of the finished grade must have an R-value of at least 15.

2. Use if gradation requirements are specified.

Process the imported borrow to comply with the grading requirements.

3

Strip materials that adversely affect the imported borrow properties.

4–6. Use if the project has a mandatory source for imported borrow.

4. Insert the location of the mandatory local material source.

Obtain imported borrow from the mandatory local material source at_______________.

5. Insert the cost and unit.

The Department has arranged for you to obtain material from the mandatory source for $______ per ______ for material removed from the site and used in the work. The cost of the material removed is deducted.

6. Use if restoration of the borrow site and haul roads is required. Edit to suit the work.

After obtaining imported borrow, grade the borrow sites and associated haul roads such that sites drain and blend in with the surrounding area. Remove any equipment on the areas before grading.



XE "19-11.01_7-14-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW BR**

By Ben Razeghi., (408) 971-7300, 6/19/2016

NSSP to include Lightweight Embankment Material

Add to section 19:

19-11 LIGHTWEIGHT EMBANKMENT MATERIAL (CELLULAR CONCRETE)

19-11.01 GENERAL

19-11.01A Summary

Section19-11 includes specifications for constructing lightweight embankment material (cellular concrete).

19-11.01B Submittals

19-11.01B(1) General

Submit mix design and work plan at least 30 working days before work. Do not start work until authorized.

19-11.01B(2) Mix Design

Furnish a mix design which produces a cast density at point of placement of 23.55 to 35.65 lb/cu ft with a minimum compressive strength of 79.91 psi at 28 days.

19-11.01B(3) Work Plan

Provide a work plan, including the equipment and procedures proposed, working drawings for formwork for the lightweight embankment material (cellular concrete) showing work areas which must be formed in segments such that they can be filled in less than 2 hours.

19-11.02 MATERIALS

19-11.02A Admixtures

Admixtures for accelerating the set time must comply with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use a foaming agent and test under ASTM C 796.

19-11.02B Mixing Water

Use potable water, free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkali, salts, oils, and organic materials which would adversely affect the setting or strength of the lightweight embankment material (cellular concrete).

19-11.02C Portland Cement

Use Portland Cement complying with ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III. Use pozzolans and other cementitious materials only when specifically approved by the manufacturer.

19-11.02D Thickening Agent

Add a thickening agent specified by the manufacturer in the top 6 inches to obtain the desired tolerances.


At the point of placement, the density must comply with the specified cast density. A single cast density test must represent the lesser of 10,000 cubic feet or one day's production. Take compressive strength test under ASTM C 495 except as follows:



1. Unless otherwise authorized, the specimens must be 3 inches by 6 inches cylinders. During

molding, place the cellular concrete in 2 approximately equal layers; no rodding is allowed. Cover and protect the specimens immediately after casting to prevent damage and loss of moisture.

2. Specimens must be moist cured in the molds prior to the 28-day compressive strength test. Specimens must not be oven dried.

Place lightweight embankment material (cellular concrete) to the designated dimensions and grades as shown. Grades must not vary by 4 inches over 10 feet in length, in any direction. Any areas outside this tolerance must be ground down or filled in as needed. Lift thickness for lightweight embankment material (cellular concrete) must not exceed 4 feet. After curing for 12 hours, remove any crumbling area on the surface. Limit surface stepping to 6 inches. Provide a minimum 12-hour waiting time between lifts.

Reduce the minimum waiting time as directed by the Engineer. If ambient temperatures are anticipated to

be below 40 degrees F within 24 hours after placement, heat the mixing water when specifically approved by the manufacturer of the foaming agent, or stop placement during such period. Do not place on frozen ground. Lightweight embankment material (cellular concrete) must be job site batched, mixed with the foaming agent, and placed with specialized equipment certified by the manufacturer. Slurry coats and multilayer casting are acceptable methods of installation. Ensure subgrade to receive lightweight embankment material (cellular concrete) is free of all loose and extraneous material. Ensure subgrade is uniformly moist, and remove any excess water standing on the surface prior to placing lightweight embankment material (cellular concrete).

19-11.04 PAYMENT

Not Used



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

20 LANDSCAPE

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

21 EROSION CONTROL

. XE "21-3_N6-19-16__2015" NEW BR**

By Ben Razeghi., (408) 971-7300, 6/19/2016

NSSP to add Imported Biofiltration Soil NSSP

BR Replace “Reserved” in section 21-3 with:

21-3 IMPORTED BIOFILTRATION SOIL 21-3.01A Summary

Section 21-2 includes specifications for furnishing and applying biofiltration soil mix.

21-3.01B Submittals

Submit a certificate of compliance from the soil supplier.

Submit the compost producer's Compost Technical Data Sheet including test results and Seal of Testing Assurance certificate before mixing compost with sand and soil.

21-3.01C Quality Control and Assurance

Saturated hydraulic conductivity for imported biofiltration soil must be at least 5 inches per hour.

21-3.02 MATERIALS

21-3.02A General

Imported biofiltration soil consists of a uniform mixture of sand, compost, and topsoil. The ratio of the components of imported biofiltration soil by volume must consist of two-parts sand; one-part compost; 0.5-part topsoil.

21-3.02B Sand

Sand must be free of wood, waste, coating such as clay, stone dust, carbonate, or any other deleterious material. All aggregate passing No. 200 sieve size must be non-plastic. Sand must be graded within the following limits:

Sieve Sizes Percentage Passing

3/8" 100

No. 4 90-100

No. 8 70-100



Grain size analysis results of the sand component must be performed in accordance with ASTM D 422, Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils.

21-3.02C Compost

Compost must comply with section 21-2.02K.

21-3.02D Topsoil

Soil must be free of wood, waste or other deleterious material. The soil texture must be loamy. Overall dry weight percentages must be 60 to 90 percent sand, with less than 20 percent passing the No.200 sieve, less than 5 percent clay, and no gravel.


Site preparation must comply with section 21-2.03A. Place imported biofiltration soil after all other earthwork in an area is complete. Place imported biofiltration soil in lifts of 8 to 12 inches and spread to a uniform thickness. Lifts are not to be compacted.

21-3.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

No. 16 40-95

No. 30 15-70

No. 40 5-55

No. 100 0-15

No. 200 0-5



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

22 FINISHING ROADWAY

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION IV SUBBASES AND BASES

23 GENERAL

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

24 STABILIZED SOILS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

25 AGGREGATE SUBBASES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

26 AGGREGATE BASES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

27 CEMENT TREATED BASES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

28 CONCRETE BASES

XE "28-15.02_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 28-15. Use if (1) replacing the existing base in conjunction with an individual slab replacement and (2) the base and slab replacement must be completed during the same closure.

Do not use when replacing full lanes of pavement. In this case use a separate bid item for remove under section 15 and a separate bid item for base under the applicable section.


28-15.02A GENERAL

1

Section 28-15.02 includes specifications for replacing bases.

2

Section 15 does not apply to removing base.

3

RSC base must comply with section 28-3.



4

Lean concrete base rapid setting must comply with section 28-4.

28-15.02B MATERIALS

5

Base must be one of the following:

1. RSC base 2. Lean concrete base rapid setting 28-15.02C CONSTRUCTION

6

Do not remove the existing base with the overlying pavement. Remove only the portion that can be replaced during the same lane closure. If you fail to complete the replacement during the same lane closure, construct a temporary pavement structure under section 41-1.

7

The dimensions shown for replacing base are approximate. After you remove the overlying pavement, the Engineer determines the exact dimensions for replacing base. Obtain verbal authorization before saw cutting existing base.

8

Before removing existing base, saw-cut the outline of the base removal area using a power-driven saw. Cut on a neat line that is perpendicular to the pavement surface. Cut at least 2 inches deep except if the existing base is either CTB or any type of concrete base, cut full-depth.

9

Removal methods must not damage the existing base remaining in place. Do not impact existing base within 18 inches horizontally of the existing base to remain in place.

10

After removing existing base, grade the remaining underlying material under section 19-1.03C and compact it under section 19-5.03A.

11

If you remove material below the authorized depth, fill these areas by placing additional base material in the same operation as placing the new base at your expense.

28-15.02D PAYMENT

12

Not Used



29 TREATED PERMEABLE BASES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

30 RECLAIMED PAVEMENTS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

31–35 RESERVED

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION V SURFACINGS AND PAVEMENTS

36 GENERAL

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

37 BITUMINOUS SEALS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

38 RESERVED

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

39 ASPHALT CONCRETE

XE "39-2.01A(2)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 39-2.01A(2). Use for adding items to the definition of miscellaneous areas for locations to be paid as place hot mix asphalt (miscellaneous area).

Add to the list in the definition of miscellaneous areas in section 39-2.01A(2):

1. Side Gutter 2. Overside drain 3. Barrier Pad 9. _____________



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

40 CONCRETE PAVEMENT

XE "40-1_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 40-1. Use for concrete pavement.

1–7. Use for CRCP or if JIT training is recommended by District Construction.


1. Insert the type of concrete pavement subject to JIT training

At least 5 business days before Just-In-Time (JIT) training for _______, submit:

1. Instructor's name and qualifications 2. Training location 3. 1 copy of:

3.1. Course syllabus 3.2. Handouts 3.3. Presentation materials

2

The Engineer provides training evaluation forms. Each attendee must complete training evaluation within 5 business days after JIT training. Submit completed forms to the Engineer and the electronic mailbox address:

[email protected]

3

The Engineer may waive training for personnel who have completed equivalent training within the 12 months preceding JIT training. Submit certificates of completion for the equivalent training.

Replace Reserved in section 40-1.01D(2) with:

4. Insert type of concrete pavement subject to JIT training.

Your personnel required to attend the preconstruction meeting must also complete JIT training for ________. Provide the facility for the training.

5

JIT training may be an extension of the preconstruction meeting and must be:

1. At least 4 hours long 2. Conducted at a mutually agreed place 3. Completed at least 20 days before you start paving activities 4. Conducted during normal working hours

6

Provide a JIT training instructor who is experienced with the specified pavement construction methods, materials, and tests. The instructor must not be your employee or a Department field staff member. Upon JIT training completion, the instructor must issue a certificate of completion to each participant.



7

The Department pays you for 1/2 of the cost for providing the JIT training. The Engineer determines the costs under section 9-1.04 except no markups are added. The costs includes training materials, facility use, and the JIT training instructor's wages, including expenses for travel, lodging, meals and presentation materials. The Department does not pay your costs for attending JIT training.

8–9. Use if pavement is placed within 1,000 feet of a marine environment or other salt water body.

8. Edit to identify locations.


At the following locations, the dowel bars must be (1) plain bars complying with section 52 and (2) descaled solid stainless-steel bars under ASTM A955/A955M, UNS Designation S31603 or S31803:

1._________________ 2._________________ 3._________________

9. Edit to identify locations.


At the following locations, the tie bars must be (1) deformed bars and (2) descaled, solid stainless-steel bars under ASTM A955/A955M, UNS Designation S31603 or S31803:

1._________________ 2._________________ 3._________________



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

41 EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

42 GROOVE AND GRIND CONCRETE

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

43–44 RESERVED

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION VI STRUCTURES

45 GENERAL

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

46 GROUND ANCHORS AND SOIL NAILS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

47 EARTH RETAINING SYSTEMS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

48 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES

XE "48-2.01C(2)_A10-30-15__2015"


Section 48-2.01C(2). Use for additional falsework review time.

Use when more than 20 days is required for falsework review. Review time should be 30 to 35 days when complicated falsework is expected (i.e., very high, large traffic openings or heavy skews). When falsework is over a railway, provide at least 40 days additional time for the railway review process (at least 65 days total review time). Check the railway agreement; it may require more than 40 additional days for review.

HKP** Add to section 48-2.01C(2):

The review time for shop drawings for specific structures or portions of structures is shown in the following table:



Structure or portion of structure Total review time

Pacheco Blvd UC (Widen) (Br No. 28-0182)

30 days

Solano Way UC (Widen) (Br No. 28-0241L/R)

30 days

Peralta Road UC (Widen) (Br. No. 28-0242L/R)

30 days

XE "48-6_N4-22-16" Page 1 of 2 NEW HKP**


NSSP to include special falsework design criteria over oil lines at various bridges and near storage facilities at Solano.

Add to section 48:

48-6 SPECIAL FALSEWORK LOCATIONS

48-6.01 GENERAL

Section 48-6 includes specifications for constructing falsework near existing underground oil lines and adjacent to existing facilities at the following locations.

Bridge name Support location Utilities (Owner)


Bent 2 16” Oil (Kinder Morgan)


Bent 3 Unknown size Oil (Getty)


Bent 4 10” Oil (Kinder Morgan)

Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen) (Br. No. 28-0240L/R)

Bent 5 & Abut 6 8” Oil (Kinder Morgan)

Peralta Road UC (Widen) (Br. No. 28-0242L/R)

Abut 2 20” Oil (Shell Oil)

Bridge name Support location Facility (Address)


Bent 3 & 4 Extra Space Storage (1599 Solano Way, Concord, CA 94520)

The falsework design in this section must comply with section 48-2.

48-6.02 MATERIALS

Not Used


48-6.03A General

The Contractor has only limited night time right of entry to the access road of the storage facility at 1599 Solano Way.



48-6.03B Foundations

Falsework foundation pad or pile clearance must be at least 10 feet from the edge of oil lines.

Any piles used in the falsework foundation adjacent to the oil lines must be placed in predrilled holes to a minimum 2 feet below the oil line. Predrilling holes must comply with section 49-2.01C(4).

Do not place falsework foundation pads and/or falsework piles before shop drawings are authorized.

48-6.03C Erection

You may erect falsework from inside the storage facility right of way between 9:00 PM and 8:00 AM only. The number of nights you can operate construction equipment in the storage facilities access road is limited to 2 nights.

48-6.03D Removal

You may remove falsework from inside the storage facility right of way between 9:00 PM and 8:00 AM only. The number of nights you can operate construction equipment in the storage facilities access road is limited to 2 nights.

48-6.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

49 PILING

XE "49-1.01D(4)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Edited per input provided by Parikh Consultants via email on 4/25/16, and conf call on 6/1/16

Section 49-1.01D(4). Use for dynamic monitoring of driven piles.

Dynamic monitoring is usually performed on driven piling with a diameter from 18 to 36 inches. Geotechnical Services may request dynamic monitoring on piling larger than 36 inches or smaller than 18 inches in diameter.

Add to section 49-1.01D(4):

1. Modify or delete table as recommended by Geotechnical Services.

6/1/16 HKP** The Department performs dynamic monitoring of driven piling at the corresponding support locations or control zones shown in the following table:

Bridge no. Support location or control

zone

28-0179 Abut 1 Rt/Lt and Median 28-0179 Abut 5 Rt/Lt and Median



2. Use with driven load test piles and anchor piles.

6/1/16 HKP** Driven load test piles and anchor piles are monitored for dynamic response to the driving equipment during the final 25 feet of driving.

XE "49-1.03_A01-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1

Peter Park, Biggs Cardosa Associates (BCA), (408) 296-5515 04/22/2016 Edited based on input provided by Parikh Consultants via email on 4/25/2016

Section 49-1.03. Use for expected difficult pile installation. Use this SSP for all types of pile installation.

Insert the conditions that affect pile installation as described in the foundation report. Insert other conditions that may apply, such as: low overhead clearance, underground utilities, overhead utilities, noise control, vibration monitoring, staged construction, and traffic control.

Verify and obtain concurrence from Geotechnical Services.

Insert bridge no. and support locations for difficult pile installation. List specific conditions for each location.

5/20/16 HKP** Add to section 49-1.03:

Expect difficult pile installation due to the conditions shown in the following table:

Pile location Conditions Bridge no. Support location

28-0179

Abutment 1, Bent 2 & 3, 4, and Abutment 5

Hard driving/drilling/coring, underground utilities, overhead utilities, traffic control, close proximity of existing bridges, retaining walls, and ground anchors, vibration monitoring.

28-0182 Abutment 1, Bent 2, Abutment 3

Hard driving/drilling/coring, underground utilities, traffic control, close proximity of existing bridges.

28-0240L/R

Abutment 1, Bent 2, 3, 4 & 5, Abutment 6

Hard driving, close proximity of existing bridges.

28-0241L/R Abutment 1, Bent 2, Abutment 5

Hard driving, high groundwater, raveling or caving, underground utilities, overhead utilities, close proximity of existing bridges,

28-0241L/R Bent 3

Hard drilling, high groundwater, raveling or caving, close proximity of existing bridges and storage building, vibration monitoring if driving temporary CIDH casing.

28-0241L/R Bent 4

Hard driving, close proximity of existing bridges and storage building, close proximity of pressurized oil lines, vibration monitoring

28-0242L/R Abutment 1, Abutment 2

Hard driving, traffic control, close proximity of existing bridges, underground utilities.

28-0415 Abutment 1, Bent 2 & 3, Abutment 4

Raveling or caving, hard drilling/coring conditions, underground utilities, traffic control, stage construction, high groundwater,



XE "49-2.01A(3)_A01-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 2


Section 49-2.01A(3). Use for driven piles. Retain Pile and Driving Data Form.

1. Use for all driven piles except if a driving system submittal is requested by Geotechnical Services. Insert bridge number, pile type, and support location (e.g. Abutment 1, Bent 2) or control zone.

HKP** Add to section 49-2.01A(3)(a):

Before installing driven piles, submit a Pile and Driving Data Form for each pile type for each of the support locations or control zones shown in the following table:

Bridge no. Pile type Support location or control zone

28-0182 Alt “W” Abut 1, bent 2, and Abut 3 28-0179 Alt “W” Bent 2, 3, and 4 28-0240L/R Alt “W” Abut 1 & 6; bent 2, 3, 4, & 5 28-0241L/R Alt “W” Abut 1 & 5; bent 2 & 4 28-0242L/R Alt “W” Abut 1 and 2

2. Use if a driving system submittal is requested by Geotechnical Services. Insert bridge number, pile type, and support location (e.g. Abutment 1, Bent 2) or control zone.

05/20/2016 HKP** Add to section 49-2.01A(3)(b):

Before installing driven piles, submit a driving system submittal for each pile type for each of the support locations or control zones shown in the following table:

Bridge no. Pile type Support location or control zone

28-0179 CISS PP36 x 0.75 Abut 1 Rt/Lt & Abut 5 Rt/Lt 28-0179 PP18 x 0.625 Abut 1 Median & Abut 5 Median



Hammer Ram

Anvil

Manufacturer:________________________ Model:______________

Type:____________________________Serial No.:______________

Min Rated Energy: _____ at ___ Length of Stroke ____ Fuel Setting

Max Rated Energy: _____ at ___ Length of Stroke ____ Fuel Setting

Ram Weight:________________________________________kips

Modifications: ___________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________

Material:________________________________________________

Thickness:_______________in Area:____________________in2

Modulus of Elasticity - E:______________________________ksi

Coefficient of Restitution - e:________________________________

Capblock (Hammer Cushion)

Structure Name :_____________________

__________________________________

Structure No.:_______________________

Dist./Co./Rte./Post Mi:________________

Contract No.:_________________________

Project:______________________________

Pile Driving Contractor or

Subcontractor_____________

____________________________________ (Pile Driven By)

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

TRANSPORTATION LABORATORY

PILE AND DRIVING DATA FORM

DISTRIBUTE:

Translab,

Foundation Testing

Translab,

Geotechnical Design

Resident Engineer

Note: If mandrel or follower is used to drive the pile, attach separate

manufacturer's detail sheet(s) including weight and dimensions.

Submitted By:____________________________________

Date:_________________Phone No.:_________________

Helmet

Bonnet

Anvil Block

Drivehead

Weight:_________________________________ kips Pile Cap

Material:_________________________________________________

Thickness:_______________in Area: ______________________in2

Modulus of Elasticity - E:_________________________________ksi

Coefficient of Restitution - e:_________________________________

Pile Type:_________________________________________________

Length (In Leads):_________________________________________ft

Lb/ft.:_________________________Taper:______________________

Wall Thickness:__________________________________________in

Cross Sectional Area:_____________________________________ in2

Design Pile Capacity:_____________________________________kips

Description of Splice:________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

Tip Treatment Description:____________________________________

__________________________________________________________

Cushion

Pile Cushion

Pile



XE "49-2.01C(2)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 49-2.01C(2). Use if revising the specifications for driving equipment.


1. Use only for locations with low overhead clearance, generally less than 20 feet.

4/25/16 HKP** You may use internal drop hammers that strike the tip of closed ended piles or impact hammers that do not comply with the minimum energy requirements to advance piles to within 3 feet of the specified tip elevation at the locations shown in the following table:

Bridge name or no. Abutment no. Bent no.

2. Use only for sheet piles or for CISS piles that have no geotechnical capacity along the length of the pile or casing. If only 1 location, delete the table and delete at the locations shown in the following table:. Delete rotators, or oscillators if this paragraph is used only for sheet piles.

4/25/16 HKP** You may use vibratory hammers, rotators, or oscillators to install sheet piles or steel shells for CISS concrete piles at the locations shown in the following table:


3. Use for boulders, clay lenses, and other natural obstructions to pile driving, including abandoned culverts, slabs, footings, etc. Depth of excavation at uplift piles should be limited. Use only with steel piles. Edit as necessary.

6/1/16 HKP** If you encounter obstructions to driving, provide special driving tips or heavier pile sections, subexcavate below the bottom of footing, or take other measures to prevent damage to the pile during driving.





NSSP to not allow pile driving from existing bridges or retaining walls. Edited per Parikh’s input via email on 5/12/2016

Section 49-2.01C(2). Add to not allow pile driving from existing bridges or retaining walls.


Do not drive piles from existing bridges or within a horizontal distance behind the retained side equal to the design height of retaining walls.

Heavy construction equipment is not allowed to be placed within 25 feet of the retained side of the existing ground anchor walls at the Route 4/680 Separation.

XE "49-2.01C(3)_A01-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 49-2.01C(3). Use if drilling to assist pile driving is not allowed or is restricted by the foundation report.

Replace the paragraph in section 49-2.01C(3) with:

1. Use if drilling is not allowed for any structures on the project.

Do not use drilling to attain the specified tip elevation shown for driven piles.

2. Use if drilling is not allowed at specific locations and drilling is restricted at other locations. Insert locations.

HKP** For _________, do not use drilling to attain the specified tip elevation shown for driven piles.

3. Use if drilling is restricted. Insert locations.

HKP** Before driving piles, you may drill holes with a diameter not greater than the least dimension of the pile to attain the specified tip elevation shown for driven piles at the locations and to the bottom of hole elevations shown in the following table:

Bridge no. Abutment no. Bent no. Bottom of hole elevation




4. Use if drilling is not allowed at specific locations and may be allowed at other locations. Insert locations.

HKP** For _________, do not use drilling to attain the specified tip elevation shown for driven piles.

5. Use if center-relief drilling may be necessary for open-ended CISS and steel pipe piles. Insert depth not to be drilled. Check the plans and foundation report. If SSP 49-3.03C(2), par. 1 is used, match the depth with the clean out depth of the CISS piles.

5/31/16 HKP** Drilling through the center of open-ended steel shells or steel pipe piles to attain the specified tip elevation may be necessary. The diameter of the drilled hole must be less than the inside diameter of the pile. Equipment or methods used for drilling holes must not cause quick soil conditions or cause scouring or caving of the hole. Drilling must not be used within 6 __ feet of the specified tip elevation. Do not drill before driving piles.

XE "49-2.01C(4)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Peter Park, Biggs Cardosa Associates (BCA), (408) 296-5515 04/22/2016 Edited per Parikh’s input via email on 4/25/2016

Section 49-2.01C(4). Use for driven piles if predrilling is required.


1. Use for all piles in existing embankments and fills in excess of 5 feet or if predrilling is required due to a close proximity to an obstruction.

5/23/16 HKP** At existing embankments and fills, and adjacent to utilities, drive piles in predrilled holes at the locations and to the bottom of hole elevations shown in the following table:. Notify the Engineer before driving piles if any piles other than at the locations listed in the following table are to be driven within 30 ft of any underground utilities.



Bridge name or no. Abutment no. Bent no. Bottom of hole elevation

Pacheco Blvd UC (Widen) 1 and 3 36.0 ft Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen)

1 21.0 ft

Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen)

6 16.5 ft 1

Solano Way UC (Widen) 1 30.0 ft Solano Way UC (Widen) 2 Piles within 30' of existing oil

lines: 2 feet below the oil line invert elevation, no lower than 14.5 ft elevation

Solano Way UC (Widen) 4 Piles within 30' of existing oil lines: 2 feet below the oil line invert elevation, no lower than 10.5 ft elevation

Solano Way UC (Widen) 5 23.0 ft Peralta Road UC (Widen) 1 12.0 ft Peralta Road UC (Widen) 2 15.0 ft

1

1. Notify the Engineer if the elevations of the existing oil lines within 30 ft of the abutment piles are equal to or lower than the elevations shown.

2. Use if piles must be driven through concrete footings that are to remain structurally functional.

Predrill holes through existing concrete footings for driving of steel piles at the locations shown. Do not damage the existing concrete to remain in place. Drilling methods and equipment must be authorized before starting the drilling.

XE "49-2.01C(5)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 49-2.01C(5). Use if a pile set period is allowed as an option by Geotechnical Services instead of longer piling.


1. Insert location.

HKP** If piles at all driven pile locations, except for CISS piles,_____________ do not attain the nominal driving resistance at the specified tip elevation shown, you may allow them to stand for a set period without driving. The set period must be at least 24 12 hours.

2

After the set period has elapsed, redrive 2 piles or 10 percent of the piles in the footing, whichever is greater. The Engineer designates which piles are to be redriven. Redriving consists of operating the driving hammer at full rated energy on the pile and calculating the nominal driving resistance of the pile.

3

If the nominal driving resistance is attained for each pile designated to be redriven, the remaining piles in that footing are considered satisfactory and further driving is not required. If redriving the designated piles demonstrates that the nominal driving resistance has not been attained, redrive all piles in the footing until the nominal driving resistance is attained.



XE "49-2.02B(1)(a)_A01-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 49-2.02B(1)(a). Use for Class N steel pipe piling.

Examples of Class N steel pipe piling include:

1. Unfilled pipe piles or CISS piles installed in pile groups of less than 5 piles and designed to develop plastic hinges at displacement demand. A pile group is defined as all piles supporting a single column.

2. Permanent steel casings that are critical to the strength of Type I shafts.

3. Permanent steel casings used in Type II shafts supporting single column bents, only if casing contribution to strength of the shaft has been considered in design.

Add to section 49-2.02B(1)(a):

1. Edit Steel pipe piling as appropriate (e.g. Permanent steel casing). If only 1 row is used, change the format from a table to a normal sentence.

HKP** Steel pipe piling shown in the following table must comply with the specifications for Class N steel pipe piling:


28-0179 Abutment 1 Rt/Lt 28-0179 Abutment 5 Rt/Lt 28-0182 Abutment 1 Rt/Lt 28-0182 Abutment 3 Rt/Lt

XE "49-3.02B(6)(c)_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 3


Section 49-3.02B(6)(c). Use for CIDH piling at least 24 inches in diameter and 5 feet in length.

Add to section 49-3.02B(6)(c):

The synthetic slurry must be one of the materials shown in the following table:



Material Manufacturer

SlurryPro CDP KB INTERNATIONAL LLC 735 BOARD ST STE 209 CHATTANOOGA TN 37402 (423) 266-6964

Super Mud PDS CO INC 105 W SHARP ST EL DORADO AR 71731 (870) 863-5707

Shore Pac GCV CETCO CONSTRUCTION DRILLING PRODUCTS 2870 FORBS AVE HOFFMAN ESTATES IL 60192 (800) 527-9948

Terragel or Novagel Polymer

GEO-TECH SERVICES LLC 220 N. ZAPATA HWY STE 11A-449A LAREDO TX 78043 (210) 259-6386

Use synthetic slurries in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. Synthetic slurries shown in the above table may not be appropriate for a given job site.

Synthetic slurries must comply with the Department's requirements for synthetic slurries to be included in the above table. The requirements are available from the Offices of Structure Design, P.O. Box 168041, MS# 9-4/11G, Sacramento, CA 95816-8041.

SlurryPro CDP synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:

SlurryPro CDP

Quality characteristic Test method Requirement

Density Mud weight (density), API RP 13B-1,

section 4

During drilling (pcf)

≤ 67.0a

Before final cleaning and immediately before placing concrete (pcf)

≤ 64.0a

Viscosity Marsh funnel and cup. API RP 13B-1, section 6.2

During drilling (sec/qt) 50–120

Before final cleaning and immediately before placing concrete (sec/qt)

≤ 70

pH Glass electrode pH meter or pH paper

6.0–11.5

Sand content, percent by volume Sand, API RP 13B-1, section 9

Before final cleaning and immediately before placing concrete (%)

≤ 0.5

NOTE: Slurry temperature must be at least 40 °F when tested. aIf authorized, you may use slurry in salt water. The allowable density of slurry in salt water may

be increased by 2 pcf.



Super Mud synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:

Super Mud



section 4


≤ 64.0a


≤ 64.0a




≤ 60


8.0–10.0



≤ 0.5



Shore Pac GCV synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:

Shore Pac GCV



section 4


≤ 64.0a


≤ 64.0a




≤ 57


8.0–11.0



≤ 0.5





Terragel or Novagel Polymer synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:

Terragel or Novagel Polymer



section 4


≤ 67.0a


≤ 64.0a




≤ 104


6.0–11.5



≤ 0.5



XE "49-3.02C(5)_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 49-3.02C(5). Use for CIDH concrete piling 24 inches and greater in diameter.

1


After placing concrete and before requesting acceptance testing, test each inspection pipe in the presence of the Engineer by passing a rigid cylinder through the length of pipe. The cylinder must:

1. Be 1-1/4 inches in diameter and 4.5 feet long 2. Weigh 12 pounds or less 3. Freely pass through the entire length of pipe without the application of any force

2–3. Use if vertical inspection pipes are not shown.

2


If inspection pipes are not shown:

1. Include in the pile installation plan a plan view drawing of the pile showing reinforcement and inspection pipes.

2. Place inspection pipes around the pile reinforcing cage, in contact with the inside of the outermost spiral or hoop reinforcement.

3. Place inspection pipes around the pile at a uniform spacing not exceeding 33 inches measured along the circle passing through the centers of inspection pipes. Use at least 2 inspection pipes per pile.



Place inspection pipes to provide the maximum diameter circle that passes through the centers of the inspection pipes while maintaining the spacing required herein.

4. Place inspection pipes at least 3 inches clear of the vertical reinforcement. Where the vertical reinforcement configuration does not allow this clearance while achieving radial location requirements, maximize the distance to vertical rebar while still maintaining the requirement for radial location.

3

Where the dimensions of the pile reinforcement do not allow inspection pipes to be placed as specified above, submit a request for deviation before fabricating pile reinforcement.

XE "49-3.02C(6)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 49-3.02C(6). Use for permanent steel casings. Delete methods of installation not allowed per the Foundation Report.

HKP** Add to section 49-3.02C(6):

Install permanent steel casings by impact or vibratory hammers, oscillators, rotators, or by placing in a drilled hole.

XE "49-3.02C(7)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 49-3.02C(7). Use for Type II CIDH piling if (1) an optional construction joint is shown, (2) Geotechnical Services requires corrugated metal pipe for the casing, (3) Geotechnical Services allows the use of slurry cement backfill to backfill the casing, or (4) Geotechnical Services restricts the method of casing installation.

1. Use if an optional construction joint is shown.

Replace the 1st paragraph of section 49-3.02C(7) with:

Section 49-3.02C(7) applies to CIDH concrete piles if an optional construction joint is shown and you choose to construct the optional construction joint.

2–4. Use only one of these paragraphs.

Replace item 5 in the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 49-3.02C(7) with:

2. Use if corrugated metal pipe is required.

5/11/16 HKP** 5. Be corrugated metal pipe and placed in a drilled hole. Casings placed in a drilled hole must comply

with section 49-3.02C(6).



3. Use if slurry cement backfill is allowed. Add SSP 49-3.02B(7). Delete methods not allowed for the installation of the casing.

5/20/16 HKP** 5. Be installed by impact or vibratory hammers, oscillators, rotators, or by placing in a drilled hole.

Casings placed in a drilled hole must comply with section 49-3.02C(6) except slurry cement backfill may be used instead of grout.

4. Use if not all methods listed are allowed for the installation of the casing. Delete methods not allowed.

5/20/16 HKP** 5. Be installed by impact or vibratory hammers, oscillators, rotators, or by placing in a drilled hole.

Casings placed in a drilled hole must comply with section 49-3.02C(6).

XE "49-3.03C(2)_A01-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 49-3.03C(2). Use to revise the clean out depth of open-ended CISS piles.

Insert the number of feet that should not be cleaned out at the bottom of the pile. Eight feet is specified in the Standard Specifications. Generally, use at least 2 times the pipe diameter. Check the plans and foundation report.

5/20/16 HKP** Replace item 4 in the list in the 3rd paragraph of section 49-3.03C(2) with:

4. Bottom 6___ feet of the pile must not be cleaned out.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

50 PRESTRESSING CONCRETE



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

51 CONCRETE STRUCTURES

XE "51-1.01C(1)_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 51-1.01C(1). Use to revise submittal requirements.

1-2. Use if new bridge decks are within 100 feet of a residence, business, or public space.


1

If the methacrylate crack treatment is performed within 100 feet of a residence, business, or public space, submit a public safety plan that includes:

1. Public notification letter with a list of delivery and posting addresses. The letter must describe the work to be performed and state the treatment work locations, dates, and times. Deliver the letter to residences and businesses within 100 feet of overlay work and to local fire and police officials not less than 7 days before starting overlay activities. Post the letter at the job site.

2. Airborne emissions monitoring plan. A CIH certified in comprehensive practice by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene must prepare and execute the plan. The plan must have at least 4 monitoring points including the mixing point, application point, and point of nearest public contact. Monitor airborne emissions during overlay activities.

3. Action plan for protecting the public if levels of airborne emissions exceed permissible levels. 4. Copy of the CIH's certification.

2

After completing methacrylate crack treatment activities, submit results from monitoring production airborne emissions as an informational submittal.

3. Use for projects with new bridge decks and PCC overlays.

Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 51-1.01C(1) with:

Submit a deck placement plan for concrete bridge decks. Include in the placement plan your method and equipment for ensuring that the concrete bridge deck is kept damp by misting immediately after finishing the concrete surface.



XE "51-1.01D(2)(b)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 51-1.01D(2)(b). Use for RSC if a strength greater than 1,200 psi at the age of break is required. Insert location. Edit if the designer requires a value different than 2,500 psi.

HKP** Add to section 51-1.01D(2)(b):

For RSC used at Approach Slab Type R(30D) for Route 4/680 Separation (Widen)__________, the average strength of the 5 test cylinders must be at least 3,600 2,500 psi. Not more than 2 test cylinders may have a strength of less than 3,450 2,400 psi.

XE "51-1.02B_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 2


Section 51-1.02B. Use for special concrete requirements.


1–6. Use for bridges in freeze-thaw areas.

1. Use for normal 6.0 ± 1.5 percent air-entrained concrete. Insert bridge or retaining wall name and number. Generally, use extra cementitious material in all portions of structures except underground portions.

HKP** For the portions of structures shown in the following table, concrete must contain at least 675 pounds of cementitious material per cubic yard:

Bridge name and no. Portion of structure

2. Use if air content for regular strength concrete is recommended by METS to be other than 6.0 ± 1.5 percent. Insert bridge or retaining wall name and number. Generally, use extra cementitious material in all portions of structures except underground portions.

HKP** For the portions of structures shown in the following table, concrete must contain at least 675 pounds of cementitious material per cubic yard and have air entrainment of __ ±1.5 percent:

Bridge name and no. Portion of structure

All except footings and piles All except footings and piles



3. Use if HS concrete is shown. Check with METS for a recommended air content. Insert recommended air entrainment.

HKP** Air entrainment must be __ ±1.5 percent for concrete with a compressive strength greater than 4,500 psi.

4. Use with the tables above if a water-reducing admixture is recommended by METS. Insert the recommended nominal penetration range.

HKP** Use a water-reducing chemical admixture with air-entrained concrete. Chemical admixtures must not cause an increase in drying shrinkage exceeding the limits specified in ASTM C494. Nominal penetration of concrete must be from ____ to ____ inches.

5–6. Use for projects in Modoc, Lassen, Plumas, eastern Siskiyou, eastern Shasta Counties, or other locations where local aggregate is volcanic or other absorbent type.

5

HKP** Concrete in superstructures and barriers for the bridges shown in the table above must:

1. Contain no more than 360 pounds of total water per cubic yard. Total water is the combined total of free water and water absorbed by aggregates in reaching a saturated surface-dry condition.

2. Be prequalified under section 90-1.01D(5)(b). Include water absorbed by the aggregates and free water in the certified test data and trial batch test reports. You must (1) submit a certificate of compliance for the workability of concrete with the prequalification test reports or (2) demonstrate the workability of trial batches in the Engineer's presence.

6

If authorized, you may use concrete from trial batches in structures at locations where concrete without a total water requirement is allowed. Concrete from trial batches used in structures at locations where air entrainment is not required must have air entrainment as specified for the trial batch instead of the requirements in section 90-1.02E(3).

7. Use on short-time-limit projects to waive the compressive strength testing requirements of section 90 due to time constraints. Use only for projects without CIDH piling or if air entrainment is not required and the quantity is not more than 1,500 cubic yards.

HKP** For concrete shown with a 28-day compressive strength greater than 3,600 psi:

1. Concrete must contain at least 675 pounds of cementitious material per cubic yard 2. Section 90-1.01D(5)(b) does not apply

8. Use for Union Pacific railroad structures only. Insert structure name. If f'c exceeds 4,500 psi. Check with METS and OSD.

HKP** Concrete used in the superstructure of ________ must have air entrainment. The air content after mixing and before placing must be 6.0 ± 1.5 percent.

9. Fill in the components of the concrete work and the appropriate aggregate gradation where the 1 inch, 1/2-inch, or 3/8-inch maximum combined aggregate gradation is required. Obtain concurrence from the Reinforced Concrete Technical Specialist and OSC if steel spacing in columns is at a minimum.

HKP** Aggregate for _________ must be the ____-inch combined aggregate gradation complying with section 90-1.02C(4)(d).



10-11. Use for projects with new bridge decks and PCC overlays. Use Bid Item 510054 Structural Concrete, Bridge (Polymer Fiber).

10

Concrete for concrete bridge decks must contain polymer fibers. Each cubic yard of concrete must contain at least 1 pound of microfibers and at least 3 pounds of macrofibers.

11

Concrete for concrete bridge decks must contain a shrinkage reducing chemical admixture. Each cubic yard of concrete must contain at least 3/4 gallon of a shrinkage reducing admixture. If you use the maximum dosage rate shown on the Authorized Material List for the shrinkage reducing admixture, your submitted shrinkage test data does not need to meet the shrinkage limitation specified.

XE "51-1.03C(2)(c)(i)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 51-1.03C(2)(c)(i). Use for permanent steel deck forms if the plans include structures with PC or steel superstructures designed with an allowance for additional deck load but permanent steel deck forms are not shown.

Do not use in freeze-thaw areas or marine environments.

Add to section 51-1.03C(2)(c)(i):

1. List structures or portions of structures. See MTD 8-7, Case B.

HKP** You may use permanent steel deck forms for the deck slabs between the girders of Grayson Creek Bridge (Replace) (Br No. 28-0415)._____________.

XE "51-1.03D(7)_N5-10-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW HKP**


NSSP to brace columns left in winter without superstructure.

Add to section 51-1.03D(7):

You must brace columns to prevent stream pressure from pushing over columns if columns are left in place in winter without superstructure. Submit shop drawings and calculations to Engineer for approval. Shop drawings and calculations must be sealed and signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State.



XE "51-1.03F(5)(b)(i)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 51-1.03F(5)(b)(i). Use for new bridge decks and approach slabs in noise-sensitive areas. Do not use in freeze-thaw areas.

The Memo to Specification Engineer/Estimator should state whether the deck surfaces are in a noise-sensitive area. Except for bridge widenings, longitudinal tining of deck surfaces is not allowed in noise-sensitive area

Replace the 1st paragraph of section 51-1.03F(5)(b)(i) with:

1. Use if all roadway surfaces are in a noise-sensitive area. Delete par. 2.

Except for bridge widenings, texture the bridge deck surfaces longitudinally by grinding and grooving.

2. Use if some roadway surfaces are in a noise-sensitive area and others are not. Insert names of bridges that are not in a noise-sensitive area. Create a list if necessary. Delete par. 1.

HKP** Except for bridge widenings, texture the bridge deck surfaces longitudinally by grinding and grooving. You may texture the deck surface at _______ by longitudinal tining.

XE "51-1.03H_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 51-1.03H. Use for projects with new bridge decks and PCC overlays.

1

Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 51-1.03H with:

Cure the top surface of bridge decks by (1) misting and (2) the water method using a curing medium under section 90-1.03B(2). After strike off, immediately and continuously mist the deck with an atomizing nozzle that forms a mist and not a spray. Continue misting until the curing medium has been placed and the application of water for the water method has started. At the end of the curing period, remove the curing medium and apply curing compound on the top surface of the bridge deck during the same work shift under section 90-1.03B(3). The curing compound must be curing compound no. 1.

2

Delete the 4th paragraph of section 51-1.03H.



XE "51-2.01B(1)_N5-9-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW HKP**


NSSP to include low compressive strength expanded polystyrene at Route 4/680 Separation (Widen), between the front face of proposed abutment diaphragm and back face of existing

ground anchor wall.

Add to section 51-2.01B(1):

Low compressive strength expanded polystyrene at Route 4/680 Separation (Widen), between the front face of proposed abutment diaphragm and back face of existing ground anchor wall, must be commercially available polystyrene board with (1) a flexural strength of at least 25 psi when tested under ASTM C203 and (2) a compressive yield strength from 8 to 13 psi at 10 percent compression. Face the surfaces of expanded polystyrene that concrete is placed against with 1/8-inch-thick hardboard complying with ANSI A135.4. You may use other facing materials that provide equivalent protection. Secure the hardboard using nails, waterproof adhesive, or other authorized means.



NSSP to include supporting design calculations in girder erection work plan if PC girders need to be erected from the existing bridges at Route 4/680.

Replace the 2nd paragraph in section 51-4.01C(1) with:

For PC PS concrete girders, submit a girder erection work plan. Include procedures, details, sequences for unloading, lifting, and erection girders and for temporary bracing installation, and supporting design calculations demonstrating the existing structure has adequate capacity to support all applied loads. The work plan must be signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State.

XE "51-4.01C(2)(a)_N5-10-16__2015"



NSSP to include calcs and plans if PC girders are erected by placing a crane on existing bridges.

Add to section 51-4.01C(2)(a):

Submit shop drawings if PC girders are to be erected by placing a crane on the existing bridge or behind a new abutment or existing ground anchor wall. Include all planned outrigger locations and calculations with the shop drawings. Calculations must demonstrate that the existing bridge, ground anchor wall, or a new abutment has the capacity to support the outrigger loads. Shop drawings and calculations must be sealed and signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State.



XE "51-4.03A_N5-10-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW HKP**


NSSP to include restrictions if PC girders are erected by placing a crane behind the existing tie-back wall.


If PC girders are to be erected by placing a crane behind the existing wall, you must not place an outrigger within 25 feet of the retained side of the existing ground anchor wall at Route 4/680 Separation.

XE "51-4.03B_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 51-4.03B. Use for PC PS girders, box girders, and double T girders.

Replace item 3 in the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 51-4.03B with:

1. Use if other than 1 inch minimum concrete thickness for I or double T girders is shown. Edit to match plans.

HKP** 3. Except for box girders, a minimum of __ inch of deck slab concrete is maintained between deck slab

reinforcement and the top of PC I and double T girders.

Replace item 4 in the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 51-4.03B with:

2. Use if other than 1 inch minimum concrete thickness for box girders is shown; edit to match plans.

HKP** 4. For box girders, a minimum of __ inch of deck slab concrete is maintained between the deck slab

reinforcement and the top of expanded polystyrene in the area between the girder webs:

Replace the 4th paragraph of section 51-4.03B with:

3. Use if the designer recommends using a grout mix other than ASTM C1107. Railway bridges may require an epoxy mortar instead.

HKP** Grout keyways after precast members are in final position. Grout must comply with ______. Before grouting, abrasive blast clean the keyways to expose clean aggregate and flush with water. Allow to dry to a surface dry condition immediately before placing the grout.



4–5. Use when I or T girders are erected over roadways, railways, or other locations where there is public access.


4. Edit and describe bridge as needed. Edit bracing requirements and add special clauses for girders that are unstable due to curvature, shape, support conditions, or other reasons.

HKP** Except for box girders and double T girders, provide temporary lateral bracing for girders over I-680, Pacheco Blvd, and Grayson Creek_____________________. Install bracing at each end of the girder segments and at the midspan. Bracing must be in place before releasing erection equipment and must remain in place until 48 hours after concrete diaphragms are placed.

5

Design temporary bracing to prevent overturning and resist the lateral pressures shown in the following table:

Structure height, H (feet above ground) Lateral pressurea (psf)

0 < H ≤ 30 15

30 < H ≤ 50 20

50 < H ≤ 100 25

H > 100 30 aApply the lateral pressure at the top of the girder in either direction.

XE "51-7.02_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 51-7.02. Use for PC drainage inlets.


51-7.02A General

51-7.02A(1) Summary

1

Section 51-7.02 includes specifications for constructing PC drainage inlets.

2

51-7.02A(2) Definitions

Not Used

3


For inlets with oval or circular cross sections, submit shop drawings with calculations. Shop drawings and calculations must be sealed and signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State. Allow 15 days for the Engineer's review.

4

Submit field repair procedures and a patching material test sample before repairs are made. Allow 10 days for the Engineer's review.



5

51-7.02A(4) Quality Assurance

The Engineer may reject PC drainage inlets exhibiting any of the following:

1. Cracks passing through walls more than 1/16 inch wide 2. Nonrepairable honeycombed or spalled areas of more than 6 square inches 3. Noncompliance with reinforcement tolerances or cross sectional area shown 4. Wall or lid less than minimum thickness 5. Internal dimensions less than plan dimensions by 1 percent or 1/2 inch, whichever is greater 6. Defects affecting performance or structural integrity

6

51-7.02B Materials

51-7.02B(1) General

Concrete for basin or inlet floors placed in the field must comply with the specifications for minor concrete.

7

Joint sealant must be butyl-rubber complying with ASTM C990. Joint primer must be recommended by the joint seal manufacturer.

8

Resilient connectors must comply with ASTM C923.

9

Sand bedding must comply with section 19-3.02F.

10

Bonding agents must comply with ASTM C1059, Type II.

11

51-7.02B(1) Fabrication

If oval or circular shape cross-sections are furnished, they must comply with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Fourth Edition with California Amendments.

12

Wall and slab thicknesses may be less than the dimensions shown by at most 5 percent or 3/16 inch, whichever is greater.

13

Reinforcement placement must not vary more than 1/2 inch from the positions shown.

14

Cure PC drainage inlets under section 90-4.03.

15


Repair PC drainage inlet sections to correct damage from handling or manufacturing imperfections before installation.

16

Center pipes in openings to provide a uniform gap. Seal gaps between the pipe and the inlet opening with nonshrink grout under the grout manufacturer's instructions. For systems designated as watertight, seal these gaps with resilient connectors.



17

Match fit keyed joints to ensure uniform alignment of walls and lids. Keys are not required at the inlet floor level if the floor is precast integrally with the inlet wall. Seal keyed joint locations with preformed butyl rubber joint sealant. You may seal the upper lid and wall joint with grout.

18

Clean keyed joint surfaces before installing sealant. Joint surfaces must be free of imperfections that may affect the joint. Use a primer if surface moisture is present. Use a sealant size recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Set joints using sealant to create a uniform bearing surface.

19

Flat drainage inlet floors must have a field-cast topping layer at least 2 inches thick with a slope of 4:1 (horizontal:vertical) toward the outlet. Use a bonding agent when placing the topping layer. Apply the bonding agent under the manufacturer's instructions.

20

51-7.02D Payment

Not Used

21. Use if drainage inlets must be PC and CIP construction is not allowed. Edit for type of drainage inlet shown. Delete par. 20 if this par is used.

51-7.02D Payment

The quantity of concrete for drainage inlets is based on the quantities shown for drainage inlets.



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

52 REINFORCEMENT

XE "52-2.01_A01-15-16__2015"


Section 52-2.01. Use if epoxy-coated reinforcement (ASTM A775, green) or epoxy-coated prefabricated reinforcement (ASTM A934, purple) is specified or shown.


52-2.01A(3)(c) Certificates

Submit a certificate of compliance for each shipment of dual-coated bar reinforcing steel. Include the following with the submittal:

1. Certification that the reinforcement complies with ASTM A1055 2. All certifications specified in ASTM A1055


You may use dual-coated bar reinforcing steel complying with ASTM A1055 as an alternative to epoxy-coated reinforcement or epoxy-coated prefabricated reinforcement. Bar reinforcing steel to be dual-coated must be deformed, Grade 60 bars complying with ASTM A706.

Dual-coated bar reinforcement must be the same bar size and must be placed at the same spacing as described for epoxy-coated reinforcement and epoxy-coated prefabricated reinforcement.


Do not bend bar reinforcing steel complying with ASTM A1055 after coating application if used as an alternative to epoxy coated prefabricated reinforcement.

Job site and PC plant practices for substituted bar reinforcement must comply with appendix X1 of ASTM A1055, except replace "should" with "must."



XE "52-2.03A(1)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 52-2.03A(1). Use for epoxy-coated prefabricated reinforcement for:

1. Portions of structures that are in direct contact with marine or brackish water. Epoxy-coated prefabricated reinforcement should be used in the water and extend 20 feet above the mean higher high tide water level.

2. Reinforcement in concrete barriers on structures located within 1,000 feet of ocean or tidal water.

Plans must clearly show where epoxy-coated prefabricated reinforcement is to be used.

Reinforcement inside CISS piles should NOT be epoxy coated.


1. Edit to match plans.

HKP** Epoxy coat reinforcement at the following locations:

1. Where shown 2. Concrete barriers at Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen) and Grayson Creek Bridge (Replace)._____

2. List description of a structure, portion of structure, wingwall, retaining wall, or other location where epoxy-coated prefabricated reinforcement is required but not shown on the plans.

3. ____

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

53 SHOTCRETE

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

54 WATERPROOFING



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

55 STEEL STRUCTURES

XE "55-1.02E(7)(b)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 55-1.02E(7)(b). Use if backing for welds is allowed.

Use for orthotropic girders or other types where backing for welds is shown or allowed. Discuss with OSD; do not use unless backing strips are shown or they must remain in place due to fabrication procedures.

Replace Reserved in section 55-1.02E(7)(b) with:

1

For welds subject to computed stresses, backing for welds that is left in place in the completed structure must be (1) a single length and (2) the same material as the structural steel being welded.

2

Single length backing may be either a continuous strip or multiple lengths joined by complete joint penetration butt welds before being installed as backing.

3

Butt welds in backing material are subject to the same type and frequency of testing as specified for the type of joint in the material being joined. Grind butt welds in backing material flush as necessary to obtain proper inspection and fit-up in the welded joint where backing is used.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

56 OVERHEAD SIGN STRUCTURES, STANDARDS, AND POLES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

57 WOOD AND PLASTIC LUMBER STRUCTURES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

58 SOUND WALLS



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

59 STRUCTURAL STEEL COATINGS

XE "59-2.01A(3)(b)_A01-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 59-2.01A(3)(b). Use for mandatory SSPC-QP certifications.

Verify SSPC-QP certification requirements with the OSM&I Bridge Paint Program Advisor.

Replace Reserved in section 59-2.01A(3)(b) with:

1. Use if SSPC-QP 1, QP 2, or QP 3 certification is mandatory for structural steel painting projects. Use with SSP 8-1.04C.

Delete SSPC-QP 1 if the work does not include field painting of structural steel.

Delete SSPC-QP 2, Category A if the work does not include removing hazardous coatings from structural steel.

Delete AISC-420-10/SSPC-QP 3, enclosed shop if the work does not include shop painting of structural steel.

Delete SSPC-QP certifications waived by (1) paragraphs 2, 3, or 4 of this SSP or (2) paragraphs 2 or 3 of SSP 60-4.06.

Renumber if necessary.

Do not include this paragraph if no SSPC-QP certifications are listed.

HKP** Submit proof of each required SSPC-QP certification as specified in section 8-1.04C. Required certifications are:

1. SSPC-QP 1 2. SSPC-QP 2, Category A 1.3. AISC-420-10/SSPC-QP 3, enclosed shop

2–4. Use for bridges and soldier piles to waive the proof of the SSPC-QP certifications listed in paragraph 1.

2. Use if the area to be painted in the field is 30,000 sq ft or less. Delete SSPC-QP 1 from the list in paragraph 1.

Instead of submitting proof of the certification complying with SSPC-QP 1, you may submit documentation with the painting quality work plan showing compliance with the requirements in section 3 of SSPC-QP 1.

3. Use if the area of hazardous paint to be removed is 500 sq ft or less. Delete SSPC-QP 2, Category A from the list in paragraph 1.

HKP** Instead of submitting proof of the certification complying with SSPC-QP 2, you may submit documentation with the painting quality work plan showing compliance with the requirements in sections 4.2 through 4.4 of SSPC-QP 2, Category A.



4. Use if the area to be painted in a shop is 500 sq ft or less. Delete AISC-420-10/SSPC-QP 3, enclosed shop from the list in paragraph 1.

HKP** Instead of submitting proof of the certification complying with AISC-420-10/SSPC-QP 3, enclosed shop, you may submit documentation with the painting quality work plan showing compliance with the requirements in sections 5 through 18 of AISC-420-10/SSPC-QP 3.

XE "59-2.03_N4-22-16"



NSSP to include coating of steel pipe pipes within isolation casings, as a means of corrosion protection.


59-2.03 COATING STEEL PIPE PILES

59-2.03A General

Section 59-2.03 includes specifications for preparing and coating steel pipe piles.

Where shown, prepare and coat pipe piles under the specifications for painting new structural steel in section 59-2.01.

Steel pipe piling shown in the following table must be coated per the limits shown on the plans:


Route 4/680 Separation (Widen) (Br. No. 28-0179)

Abutment 1 Median

Route 4/680 Separation (Widen) (Br. No. 28-0179)

Abutment 5 Median

59-2.03B Materials

Not Used


Repair damaged areas of the undercoat before installing piles.

59-2.02D Payment

The payment for coating pipe piling is included in the payment for furnish piling.



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

60 EXISTING STRUCTURES

XE "60-2.01A_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 60-2.01A. Use for removing structures or portions of structures, including bridges, retaining walls, sound walls, and other concrete or masonry structures.

Insert bridge number and a description of the bridge removal work or structure name and the description of the removal work.

For bridge removal work, include in the description the removal of retaining walls, slope paving, sound walls, barriers, etc. that are located on or attached to the bridge and are included in the bridge removal bid item. Delete table and edit introductory clause if a table is not needed.


5/20/16 HKP** Remove the following structures or portions of structures:

Bridge no./Structure name Description of work

Br No. 28-0179 / Route 4/680 Separation (Widen)

Remove concrete barriers type 1, overhangs, and portion of wingwalls as shown on the plans. Remove

fence, concrete ditch and top portion of retaining walls. Br No. 28-0182 / Route 4/Pacheco Blvd

UC (Widen) Remove concrete barriers type 1, overhangs, and

portion of wingwalls. Br No. 28-0240L/R / Walnut Creek

Bridge (Widen) Remove concrete barriers type 25 and electrolier on barriers, overhangs, and portion of abutments and

wingwalls. Br No. 28-0241L/R / Solano Way UC

(Widen) Remove concrete barriers type 25, overhangs, and

portion of wingwalls. Br No. 28-0242L/R / Peralta Road UC

(Widen) Remove concrete barriers type 25, overhangs, and

portion of wingwalls. Br No. 28-0415 / Grayson Creek Bridge

(Replace) Remove entire bridge.



XE "60-2.02_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2


Section 60-2.02. Use for bridge removal work.

1. Use if a 20-day review time is not enough. Allow 25 to 35 days if the removal is complicated (e.g., very high, large traffic openings or heavy skews). Where removal is over a railroad, allow at least 40 days. Check the railroad agreement; it may require more than 40 days.

HKP** Add to section 60-2.02A(3):

For the following bridges or portions of bridges, allow the days shown in the following table for the review of the bridge removal work plan:

Bridge or portion of bridge Review time (days)

2. Use if the percentage of dead load used for horizontal load design is more than 5 percent; check with designer (OSD may want a higher percentage). Insert percent.

HKP** Replace the 1st paragraph of section 60-2.02B(2) with:

The horizontal load to be resisted in any direction for temporary support shoring and temporary bracing must be (1) the sum of actual horizontal loads due to equipment, construction sequence, or other causes plus an allowance for wind and (2) not less than ____ percent of the total dead load of the structure being removed.

3. Use if the clearance to traffic or shoulders is not 8 feet horizontally or 15 feet vertically at removal locations. Insert required clearances.

HKP** Replace the 5th paragraph of section 60-2.02C(1) with:

Temporary support shoring, temporary bracing, and protective covers must not encroach within ____ feet horizontally or ____ feet vertically of any traffic lane or shoulder open to traffic.

4. Modify clearances for protective covers to agree with approved available dimensions if other than 15 feet vertical or 32 feet horizontal.

HKP** Replace item 4 in the list in the 1st paragraph in section 60-2.02C(2) with:

4. Provide the openings specified in section 12-4. If no openings are specified for removal work, provide a vertical opening of ____ feet and a horizontal opening of _____ feet for traffic.



5. Use for bridge railing removal or when feasible to support protective covers from the superstructure to eliminate a traffic hazard.

Add to the list in the 1st paragraph in section 60-2.02C(2):

6. Falsework or supports for protective covers must not extend below the vertical clearance level or to the ground line at any location within the roadbed.

6. Use if protective covers do not need to extend 10 feet beyond the railing face; insert a length proportionate to the magnitude of removal work.

HKP** Replace the 3rd paragraph in section 60-2.02C(2) with:

At locations where entire girders are removed, protective covers must extend at least _____ feet beyond the outside face of the bridge railing.

XE "60-3.02A_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 60-3.02A. Use if removing unsound concrete and placing rapid setting concrete patches is change order work.


If ordered, remove unsound concrete and place rapid setting concrete patches. This is change order work.

XE "60-4.06_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 60-4.06. Use for steel column casings. Use with SSP 59-2.01A(3)(b) unless pars. 2 and 3 in this SSP are both used.

1. Use if thermal spray coating is shown.

HKP** Add to section 60-4.06A(1) with:

Where shown, clean and paint column casings using a thermal spray coating under section 59-5.

Replace Reserved in section 60-4.06A(3) with:

2. Use if the area to be painted in the field is 30,000 sq ft or less.

Instead of submitting proof of certification complying with SSPC-QP 1, you may submit documentation showing compliance with section 3 of SSPC-QP 1.

3. Use if the area to be painted in a shop is 500 sq ft or less.

HKP** Instead of submitting proof of certification complying with AISC-420-10/SSPC-QP 3 (Enclosed Shop), you may submit documentation showing compliance with sections 5 through 18 of AISC-420-10/SSPC-QP 3.



4. Use if finish coats are required. Edit color if required.

Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 60-4.06C(2) with:

Apply finish coats to exterior casing surfaces after completing installation. The 1st finish coat color must match color no. 36628 of FED-STD-595. The 2nd finish coat color must match color no. 26408 of FED-STD-595.

XE "60-6_N4-22-16" Page 1 of 1 NEW HKP**


NSSP to locate the existing ground anchors via non-destructive testing at Route 4/680.

Add to section 60:

60-6 Locating Existing Ground Anchors

60-6.01 GENERAL

60-6.01A General

60-6.01A(1) Summary

Section 60-6 includes specifications for locating the existing ground anchors.

You must survey the location of the existing ground anchors, via non-destructive testing, at the retaining walls listed in the table below or as directed by the Engineer.

Structure Retaining Wall No. 8 at 680/4 Separation (Br. No. 28-0179) Retaining Wall No. 9 at 680/4 Separation (Br. No. 28-0179)


Not Used


Submit a list of testing equipment to be used, including recent project samples in which the equipment was used successfully. The Department’s review time to review the submittal for adequacy is 5 days.

Notify the Department 48 hours prior to beginning of the work.

Inform the Department immediately in writing of any damage to the specified structures and other facilities or properties.

Provide the location of the existing ground anchors on 11x17 plan sheets (elevation views) to the Engineer 6 weeks prior to the beginning of isolation casing and pile installation at the abutments of the Route 4/680 Separation (Widen).


Not Used

60-6.02 MATERIALS

Not Used


Not Used



60-6.04 PAYMENT

Full compensation for work involved in section 60-6 is included in the payment for the bid items involved in driving piles.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION VII DRAINAGE FACILITIES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

61 GENERAL

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

62–63 RESERVED

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

64 PLASTIC PIPE

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

65 CONCRETE PIPE

XE "65-2_06-19-16 -" Page 1 of 1

NEW JN**

By John Nguyen (JN), WMH, (408) 971-7300, 6/19/2016 NSSP to include Jacked Reinforced Concrete Pipe


65-2.02B(4) JACKED REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE

The work shall be performed to the requirements in Section 623.1, “Bore and Jack” of the Encroachment Permit Manual and in accordance with the applicable federal and state codes and laws which pertain to such work and supplemental regulations which are contained in these special provisions. In case of conflict between these specifications and any federal or state codes or laws, the most stringent requirements shall govern. You will have sole responsibility for the safety of the tunnel and shafts and all personnel engaged in the work. Your attention is directed to the latest edition of the Construction Industry OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1926.800) as published by the U.S. Department of Labor.

Tunneling operations shall be performed by a qualified Contractor with at least five (5) years recent experience prior to start of work on similar projects using the methods that will be employed for this project. At all times, perform the work under the direction of an experienced project superintendent with at least three (3) years of recent on-the-job supervision experience on similar projects involving tunnels of similar size constructed by similar methods. You must submit evidence of the required qualifications and demonstrate recent experience installing similar pipelines in tunnels.



Design Requirements

You will be fully responsible for the selection and design of open face tunnel boring machine or open shield and of the tunnel construction means and methods. The open face tunneling method and machine selected by the you will be compatible with the equipment, procedures and personnel to produce a safe tunnel excavation. The finished tunnel shall meet the full intent of the Drawings and Specifications.

You will be responsible for design of the open face tunnel boring machine or open shield, main jacking system, annular space lubrication system, and other related items necessary to install the pipe as described in the Contract Documents.

You will be responsible for the design of the jacking pipe to withstand all installation loads created by jacking or other construction activities and to accommodate the carrier pipe.

You will be responsible for the design of the ventilation and lighting system. The ventilation system shall conform with OSHA requirements and the lighting system shall allow safe entry into the pipe.

Tolerances

Variations from line shall not exceed 3 inches at any point along the alignment between the origin and terminal ends. Variations from grade shall not exceed 1 inch at any point.

Submittals

1. Tunneling and Pipe Jacking Plan: Tunneling system plan shall include, but not be limited to:

a. Tunnel machine manufacturer’s literature describing in detail the equipment and the proposed tunneling system including the machine’s dimensions, weight, power, torque capabilities, rotational capabilities, configuration of cutting head, articulation, and steering capabilities if a tunnel machine is used.

b. Open shield dimensions and excavation equipment if an open shield is used. c. Grade and alignment control system d. Spoils removal system, including material transport equipment e. Method of face stabilization f. Method of groundwater control g. Description of proposed ventilation system h. Description and details of any temporary underground facility proposed for operation

including lights, sump pits, and mud slabs i. Jacking mechanism including ultimate jacking capacity. j. Safe jacking capacity of jacking pipe k. Anticipated jacking forces for each drive l. Jacking force monitoring and recording details m. Thrust block design calculations and safe capacity n. Provisions for injecting pipe lubricants o. Intermediate jacking station design, including maximum stroke, ultimate and safe

capacity of jacking pipe, jacking force monitoring and recording details p. Pipe jacking lubricant mix design, including lubricant type, injection volume and

measurement procedures, pumps, piping, valve arrangements, and pressure gages. q. Calibration table correlating jacking pressure gage readings and applied load in tons.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. Layout drawings showing general tunneling and pipe jacking operation set-up, including locations of all equipment, staging and storage areas, and emergency access around the tunnel operations.

b. Hydraulic Jacking System, including hydraulic jack configuration and frame dimensions c. Thrust Block design and configuration



d. Intermediate Jacking Station Detail e. Detailed drawings of pipe seals, pipe joints, collars, cushioning materials, and reinforcing

details.

3. Progress Reports and Records: You must submit to the Engineer daily tunnel progress logs in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet electronic format and hard copy by the beginning of each following work day. Reporting of all information does not relieve the you the responsibility for control and protection of the work. The information on the progress report shall include but not be limited to:

a. Time and stationing for each push of the machine and jacked pipe. b. Description and volume of soils excavated per jacked pipe section. c. Line and grade measurements taken and recorded a minimum of 3 times per pipe

segment. d. Jacking pressures recorded a minimum of 3 times per pipe segment e. Quantity of lubrication and location of application for each jacked pipe segment f. Incidence of ground loss, heave, boulders, water or soil inflows, and any other unusual

events. g. Location of inserted intermediate jacking stations and whether in use. h. Detailed time record of excavation and pipe change-out times, including delays and

causes of delays. i. Description of any worker safety concern or accident.

4. Tunneling Construction Safety Plan 5. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit complete operations and maintenance manuals for all open face tunneling equipment proposed for use. 6. Pavement Monitoring: Monitor pavement settlement or heave during the jacking process. Heave and settlement of the road surface above the pipe shall not exceed 0.02 feet. If heave or settlement exceeds 0.02 feet revise the operations to reduce such induced movement. If heave or settlement exceeds 0.04 feet cease operations and submit to the Engineer a Work Plan to repair damage and limit such movement. Make repairs as directed by the Engineer to the roadway surface as required to correct damage from the jacking operation. Repairs to the roadway surface or subsurface grouting of voids created by the jacking process will be at your expense and will not be measured nor paid for.

Safety Requirements

Methods of construction for the tunneled pipe shall be such as to ensure the safety of the work, your employees, and the Authority’s employees and inspectors, the public, and the adjacent property, whether public or private. All work must conform with OSHA standards.

The Safety Officer shall administer an accident prevention program and shall prepare a code of safe practices and an emergency plan. Hold safety meetings weekly and provide safety instruction for new employees as required by OSHA.

Conduct all tunneling operations by methods and with equipment that will positively control dust, fumes, vapors, gases, and other atmospheric impurities. Provide approved instrumentation for testing the quality of the air in manned work areas and man-entry pipelines. Obtain samples under working conditions at prescribed intervals in accordance with the above referenced requirements. Submit the results of the air quality tests each week.

All underground work areas shall have sufficient lighting to facilitate proper performance and inspection of work and safe passage between the shafts and tunnel headings in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local laws.

All underground construction shall be performed in accordance with the applicable fire prevention and control requirements of Cal OSHA and local Fire Department ordinances.



Tunnel Boring Machine

The tunnels shall be driven using an open face tunnel boring machine or open shield as defined herein and as specified in the Contract documents. The open face tunneling method shall be used in combination with dewatering wells, eductor wells, and/or sump pumps as needed to control groundwater conditions and create stable ground conditions at the face of the machine. Dewatering shall be performed to the requirements set forth in “Job Site Management of these special provisions.

The tunnel boring machine or open shield shall be capable of accommodating the soil, rock, and groundwater conditions as described in the Geotechnical Report. If the machine or shield is not capable of accommodating the ground conditions as described in the Geotechnical Report, you must provide suitable alternative means for accommodating the ground conditions. You will be fully responsible for the success of construction methods selected to complete the work.

The tunnel machine or open shield shall be operated at the front face of the machine.

Cutterheads, if used, shall be capable of rotating in both directions.

The system shall be steerable at the front face of the tunnel excavation and shall be capable of maintaining the specified line and grade within the specified tolerances.

A laser guidance system shall be used to track the line and grade of the machine relative to the laser.

Stability of the tunnel face shall be maintained at all times, even during shutdowns of the tunneling machine.

The maximum allowable radial overcut shall be one inch.

The machine or shield shall be designed and constructed to allow for lubrication behind the over-cut ring and around the machine from inside the tunnel.

A gasketed seal between the tunnel boring machine and the jacking pipe shall be provided to ensure a competent watertight seal

Jacking System

The tunnel machine or open shield shall be designed to be propelled forward by pipe jacked into place by thrust cylinders.

The jacking system shall have an even number of thrust cylinders, arranged symmetrically. The thrust cylinders shall have individual actuation, synchronized actuation, and individual maximum thrust control. Thrust cylinders shall not exert forces when idle, but shall resist displacements.

Control gages shall be accessible to allow the Project Representative to check readings during excavation.

The maximum thrust at any point and any time on the jacked pipe shall not exceed the safe jacking capacity of the pipe.

The thrust cylinders shall be equipped with a push ring to equally distribute the jacking forces to the jacking pipe.

Guidance System and Alignment Control

A laser guidance system shall be used to determine the location of the tunnel boring machine or open shield relative to the laser.

The guidance system shall include a target to indicate deviations in line and grade.

The system shall be equipped with means by which the Project Representative can verify tunnel alignment and grade, such as access to the tunnel shield guidance system.

Submit the inintial alignment of the equipment to the Engineer for approval.



A certification by a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the state of California for the final casing alignment will be submitted to the Engineer within three (3) days after the completion.

Construction

At locations shown on the plans, or specified, reinforced concrete pipe shall be jacked into place between the limits shown, or specified, in accordance with these specifications. The strength of pipe designated in the contract item will be determined for vertical load only. Additional reinforcement or strength of pipe required to withstand jacking pressure will be determined and furnished by you at your expense. Variations from theoretical alignment and grade at the time of completion of jacking shall not exceed one percent of the distance from the jacking point. The diameter of the excavated hole shall not be more than 0.1-foot greater than the outside limits of the pipe. Sluicing or jetting with water will not be permitted. When material tends to cave in from outside these limits, a shield shall be used ahead of the first section of pipe or the face of excavation shall not extend beyond the end of pipe more than 11/2 feet, unless permitted by the Engineer. Areas resulting from caving or excavating outside the above limits shall be backfilled with sand or mortar by a method which will fill the voids. The annular space in the inside joints of the pipe shall be filled with jointing material and finished smooth. The space shall be finished as each section of pipe is installed for pipe 24 inches in diameter and smaller, and after the entire installation is completed for larger pipe.

Annular Space Lubrication

1. Lubricants shall be non-toxic, environmentally safe materials 2. Water used for pipe lubrication shall be clean, fresh, and free from oil, organic matter, or

other deleterious matter and of neutral pH.

Pressure Grout:

1. Pressure grouting of the space between the jacking pipe and the surrounding ground. 2. Develop one or more grout mixes designed to completely fill the voids outside the pipe and to

provide acceptable strength. All grout mix proportions shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer.

3. The maximum sustained grouting pressure shall be 15 pounds per square inch (psi) at the grout hole.

Backfill Sand or Annular Space Sand: Mortar sand.

Installation

General:

1. Observe work requirements stipulated in any permit condition. 2. Consult Contract Drawings for limitation of construction right-of-way. 3. Tunneling work shall be executed in accordance with the approved working hours established

for the project. Notify the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of a change in working hours.

4. Prior to the start of tunnel excavation, conduct a pre-job safety conference in accordance with OSHA requirements and the project Safety and Health Program. Arrange this conference and inform the Engineer at least seven (7) days in advance.



5. When the work is interrupted for 4 hours or more, support face in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings.

6. Once the jacking has commenced, the operation shall be continuous until the pipe has been jacked to its final location as shown on the plans.

Tunneling Requirements:

1. Perform tunneling operations in a manner that will minimize the movement of the ground in front of and surrounding the tunnel excavation. Take all necessary measures to minimize subsidence that can cause damage or disruption of the ground surface, road crossings and utilities above or in the vicinity of the tunnel. Support the ground in a manner to prevent loss of ground and keep the perimeters and tunnel face stable.

2. Pressure grout all voids outside jacking pipe. 3. Provide electrical, water, lighting and other facilities required to complete the tunnel. 4. Proper ventilation shall be maintained to keep the atmosphere free of toxic or flammable

gases and particulate matter. The ventilation system shall have sufficient capacity and shall meet all applicable ventilation requirements of OSHA and supplemental ventilation requirements contained herein.

5. Maintain clean working conditions inside the tunnel, and at the surface work areas. Immediately remove muck, slush, grout spills and any other material not required for tunneling from the tunnel and surface work areas.

6. Methods of excavation, equipment and procedures shall be selected to produce and maintain a stable excavated surface around the tunnel and portal perimeters, and to limit loosening and deterioration of the ground around the excavations to the maximum extent practical.

7. There will be no differentiation of soil and rock in the excavated materials for payment purposes. The term “excavation” shall include all materials excavated or removed from the tunnel, shafts, and pipeline excavations.

8. You must keep the tunnel invert free from standing water. All water removed from the tunnel and associated construction locations shall be free of suspended solids, oil, or any other deleterious substances and shall meet minimum water quality discharge requirements prior to discharge in accordance with the Contract Documents. All work and materials in connection with water inflow removal shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and no separate payment will be made for such work and materials.

9. All water removed from the tunnel shall be disposed in a safe and approved manner.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The length of jacked pipe to be paid for will be the slope length as designated on the plans and confirmed by the Engineer.



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

66 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

67 STRUCTURAL PLATE CULVERTS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

68 SUBSURFACE DRAINS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

69 OVERSIDE DRAINS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

70 MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE FACILITIES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

71 EXISTING DRAINAGE FACILITIES

XE "71-6.03_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 2

Section 71-6.03. Use for abandoning culverts and pipelines.

If the pipe to be abandoned is composed of hazardous material, such as asbestos, removal (instead of abandonment) may be required. Contact the district hazardous materials coordinator.


71-6.03A General

1

Abandon culverts or pipelines by removing portions of the culverts or pipelines, filling the inside, and backfilling the depressions and trenches to grade. As an alternative to abandoning a culvert or pipeline, you may remove the culvert or pipeline, dispose of it, and backfill.

2

Notify the Engineer before abandoning a culvert or pipeline.

71-6.03B Materials

3

Openings into existing structures that are to remain in place must be plugged with minor concrete under section 90.




4

Wherever culverts or pipelines intersect side slopes, remove them to a depth of at least 3 feet. Measure the depth normal to the plane of the finished side slope. Abandon the remaining portion of the culvert or pipeline.

5

Culverts or pipelines that are 12 inches or more in diameter must be completely filled by authorized methods. Backfill with sand that is clean, free draining, and free from roots and other deleterious substances. As an alternative to sand, you may backfill with one of the following:

1. Controlled low-strength material under section 19-3.02F 2. Slurry cement backfill under section 19-3.02D

6

Ends of culverts and pipelines must be securely closed by a 6-inch-thick, tight-fitting plug or wall of commercial-quality concrete.

71-6.03D Payment

7. Use if the backfill quantity for filling the culvert or pipeline is less than 5 cu yd.

If backfilling inside the culvert or pipeline is required, payment for backfilling inside the culverts or pipelines is included in the payment for abandon culvert or abandon pipeline. Payment for backfilling outside the culvert or pipeline is included in the payment for abandon culvert or abandon pipeline.

8. Use if the backfill quantity for filling the culvert or pipeline is over 5 cu yd. Include the bid item for sand backfill.

If backfilling inside the culvert or pipeline is required, payment for backfilling inside the culvert or pipeline is paid for as sand backfill. Payment for backfilling outside the culvert or pipeline is included in the payment for abandon culvert or abandon pipeline.



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION VIII MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

72 SLOPE PROTECTION

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

73 CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

74 PUMPING EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

75 MISCELLANEOUS METAL

XE "75-3.01A_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 75-3.01A. Use for miscellaneous bridge metal and deck drainage systems.

5/12/16 HKP** Add to the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 75-3.01A:

1. List items not listed in the 2nd paragraph in section 75-3.01A. Include anchor bolts for components to be placed under a subsequent contract. Do not include anchor bolts for components placed under the same contract as these are included in the payment for the component.

6. Bolts in concrete structures_____ 7. HS bolts in PC concrete members _____

2. List bridge deck drainage system components.

HKP** Add to the end of section 75-3.01A:

Bridge deck drainage system consists of:

1. Frames and grates______ 2. Pipes______ 3. Screws, Nuts, bolts and other assemblages 4. Expansion couplings 5. Anchor studs and other bars 6. Steel I-beams 7. U-bolts, thread locking system and other assemblages 8. Threaded rods and expansion anchors



XE "75-3.02D(2)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 75-3.02D(2). Use for a bridge deck drainage system on a project within 2 miles of ocean or tidal waters.

5/20/16 HKP** Replace items 3 and 4 in the list in the 1st paragraph of section 75-3.02D(2) with:

3. Comply with ASTM A276, Type 316 at Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen) and Gayson Creek Bridge (Replace). Comply with ASTM A276, Type 304 at other locations.

XE "75-3.04_N5-20-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW HKP**


NSSP to include the payment for grinding and removing the existing bridge deck to place deck drains at Solano Way UC (Widen).

Add to Section 75-3.04:

Payment for grinding the existing bridge deck to slope around deck drains and removing concrete to place bonding materials around deck drains at Solano Way UC (Widen) is included in the payment for bridge deck drainage system.

XE "75-7_N4-22-16__2015" Page 1 of 1 NEW HKP**


NSSP to include non-SSP isolation casings. Modified from SSP 75-7.

Section 75-7. Use for isolation casings.

Replace Reserved in section 75-7 with:

75-7.01 GENERAL

Section 75-7 includes specifications for installing isolation casings.

Earthwork must comply with section 19-3.

75-7.02 MATERIAL

Smooth pipes, 30” x 0.625 at median & 48”x 0.75 at outside widening.

Smooth steel pipe must comply with section 49-2.02.


Install isolation casings in predrilled holes. Do not leave the predrilled holes open without isolation casings being placed. The hole diameter must be equal to the outer diameter of the isolation casing.



Place structure backfill under section 19-3.03E. Compact structure backfill to a relative compaction of at least 95 percent. Do not pond or jet the backfill.

75-7.04 PAYMENT

Full compensation for work involved in section 75-7 is included in the payment for the bid items involved in isolation casing.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

76 WELLS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

77 LOCAL INFRASTRUCTURE

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

78 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

79 RESERVED

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

80 FENCES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION IX TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

81 MISCELLANEOUS TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

82 SIGNS AND MARKERS



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

83 RAILINGS AND BARRIERS

XE "83-2.01B_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 4

Section 83-2.01B. Use for minor concrete vegetation control.

Replace Reserved in section 83-2.01B with:

83-2.01B(1) General

83-2.01B(1)(a) Summary

1

Section 83-2.01B includes specifications for constructing vegetation control XE "Vegetation Control" around railing and barrier posts.

83-2.01B(1)(b) Definitions

2

Not Used

83-2.01B(1)(c) Submittals

3

Submit a mix design for the minor concrete to be used for vegetation control. The mix design must show proportions of:

1. Coarse aggregate 2. Fine aggregate 3. Cementitious material 4. Reinforcing fiber 5. Water

4

Include compressive strength test results with the mix design.

5

Submit a certificate of compliance for the crumb rubber aggregate if used. Include the quantity in pounds of crumb rubber.

83-2.01B(1)(d) Quality Assurance

6

Not Used

83-2.01B(2) Materials

83-2.01B(2)(a) General

7

Not Used

83-2.01B(2)(b) Minor Concrete

83-2.01B(2)(b)(i) General

8



Concrete for vegetation control must comply with the specifications for minor concrete, except the concrete:

1. Must include reinforcing fibers 2. May include crumb rubber aggregate 3. Must contain:

3.1. At least 505 pounds of cementitious material per cubic yard if crumb rubber aggregate is used 3.2. At least 400 pounds of cementitious material per cubic yard if crumb rubber aggregate is not

used 4. Must have a maximum aggregate size of 3/8 inch

9

All ingredients must be added at the concrete plant before delivery to the job site.

10

You may use volumetric proportioning complying with ASTM C685/C685M or as specified.

11

The minor concrete must have a 28-day compressive strength from 1,400 to 1,800 psi.

83-2.01B(2)(b)(ii) Crumb Rubber Aggregate

12

Crumb rubber aggregate must consist of ground or granulated scrap tire rubber from automobile and truck tires. Do not use tire buffings.

13

Crumb rubber aggregate must be ground and granulated at ambient temperature.

14

The crumb rubber aggregate gradation must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:

Gradation Requirements Sieve size Percentage passing

1/2" 100 3/8" 90–100 1/4" 35–45

No. 4 5–15 No. 8 0–5 No. 16 0

15

Crumb rubber aggregate must not contain more than 0.01 percent of wire by mass and must be free of oils and volatile organic compounds.

16

Do not commingle crumb rubber from different sources.

17

The crumb rubber aggregate must be 3.5 ± 0.5 percent by weight of the concrete.

83-2.01B(2)(b)(iii) Reinforcing Fibers

18

Reinforcing fibers for minor concrete must be:



1. Manufactured specifically for use as concrete reinforcement from one of the following: 1.1. Polypropylene, polyethylene, or a combination of both. 1.2. Copolymer of polypropylene and polyethylene.

2. Blended ratio from 4 to 5.67 parts by weight of macro synthetic fibers to 1 part by weight of micro synthetic fibers. Synthetic fibers must be: 2.1. Nonfibrillated macro fibers with individual fiber lengths less than 2 ± 1/2 inches. 2.2. Fibrillated or monofilament micro fibers of various lengths and thicknesses.

3. Supplied in sealed, degradable bags of appropriate size for adding whole bags to concrete batches. 4. From a commercial source.

19

The reinforcing fiber content of the minor concrete must be from 5 to 6 lb/cu yd.

83-2.01B(2)(b)(iv) Coloring Agent

20. Use if colored concrete is not required.

Not Used

21–22. Use if colored concrete is required.

21. Insert the color.

The concrete color must match color no. ________of FED-STD-595.

22

The coloring agent must be integral to the concrete mix and added at the concrete plant.

83-2.01B(2)(c) Block-Out Material

23

The block-out material must be a commercially available expanded polystyrene foam with a compressive strength of 13 ± 5 psi at 10 percent deformation when tested under ASTM D1621.

24

If authorized, you may substitute an alternative block-out material that complies with the compressive strength requirements of the expanded polystyrene foam.

83-2.01B(3) Construction


25

Not Used

83-2.01B(3)(b) Clearing

26

Clear areas to receive vegetation control of vegetation, trash, and debris. Dispose of the removed material.

83-2.01B(3)(c) Earthwork

27

Excavate areas to receive vegetation control.

28

If the vegetation control abuts the existing surfacing and the edge of the existing surfacing is not on a neat line, cut the surfacing on a neat line to a minimum depth of 2 inches before removing the surfacing.



29

The finished elevation of the excavated area to receive vegetation control must maintain the job site's planned flow lines, slope gradients, and contours.

30

Grade the areas to receive vegetation control to a smooth, uniform surface and compact to a relative compaction of at least 95 percent.

83-2.01B(3)(d) Block Outs

31

For block-out material supplied in more than 1 piece, tape the pieces together to make a smooth surface on the top and sides.

32

Ensure that the block-out material does not move during concrete placement

83-2.01B(3)(e) Minor Concrete

33

Place the minor concrete for vegetation control by hand.

34

Strike off and compact the minor concrete with a mechanical or vibratory screed device. Apply a broom finish. Match the finished grade to the adjacent section of vegetation control, pavement, shoulder, or existing grade.

35. Use if colored concrete is required.

If the curing compound method is used for colored concrete, use curing compound no. 6.

83-2.01B(4) Payment

36

Not Used

XE "83-2.02C(3)_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1

Section 83-2.02C(3). Use for Type WB-31 transition railings.


The offset from the face of the Type WB-31 transition railing to the hinge point must be at least 3'-6".

The offset from the face of the adjacent midwest guardrail system to the hinge point must be transitioned from the offset at the Type WB-31 transition railing to 4'-0" using a ratio of 6:1.



XE "83-2.04C_A10-30-15__2015"

Page 1 of 2

Section 83-2.04C. Use for alternative flared terminal systems. If fewer than 2 models are specified (or fewer than 3 models for federally funded projects), preparation of a FHWA Public Interest Finding is required.

Replace Reserved in section 83-2.04C with:

83-2.04C(1) General

83-2.04C(1)(a) Summary

1

Section 83-2.04C includes specifications for constructing alternative flared terminal systems.

83-2.04C(1)(b) Definitions

2

Not Used

83-2.04C(1)(c) Submittals

3

Submit a certificate of compliance for alternative flared terminal systems.

83-2.04C(1)(d) Quality Assurance

4

Not Used

83-2.04C(2) Materials

5

Alternative flared terminal systems must be one of the following or a Department-authorized equal:

1. Type FLEAT terminal system. Type FLEAT terminal system must be a FLEAT-350 manufactured by Road Systems, Inc., located in Big Spring, Texas, and must include the connection components. The FLEAT-350 can be obtained from the following distributors:

Address Telephone no.

UNIVERSAL INDUSTRIAL SALES PO BOX 699 PLEASANT GROVE UT 84062

(801) 785-0505

GREGORY INDUSTRIES INC 4100 13TH ST SW CANTON OH 44708

(330) 477-4800

2. Type SRT terminal system. Type SRT terminal system must be an SRT-350 Slotted Rail Terminal (8-

post system) manufactured by Trinity Highway Products, LLC, and must include the connection components. The SRT-350 Slotted Rail Terminal (8-post system) can be obtained from the manufacturer:




TRINITY HIGHWAY PRODUCTS LLC PO BOX 99 CENTERVILLE UT 84012

(800) 772-7976

83-2.04C(3) Construction

6

Install alternative flared terminal systems under the manufacturer's installation instructions.

7

Identify each terminal system by painting the type of terminal system in 2-inch-high, neat, black letters and figures on the backside of the rail element between system posts number 4 and 5.

8

For Type SRT terminal systems, drive the steel foundation tubes with soil plates attached with or without pilot holes, or place them in drilled holes. Backfill the space around the foundation tubes with selected earth that is free of rock. Place the earth in 4-inch-thick layers. Moisten and thoroughly compact each layer. Coat the inside surfaces of the foundation tubes to receive wood terminal posts with grease. Insert the posts into the tubes by hand. Do not drive the posts. You may slightly round the post edges to facilitate insertion.

9

For Type FLEAT terminal systems, drive the steel foundation tubes with or without pilot holes, or place them in drilled holes. Backfill the space around the foundation tubes with selected earth that is free of rock. Place the earth in 4-inch-thick layers. Moisten and thoroughly compact each layer. Coat the inside surfaces of the foundation tubes to receive wood terminal posts with grease. Insert the posts into the tubes by hand. Do not drive the posts. You may slightly round the post edges to facilitate insertion.

83-2.04C(4) Payment

10

Not Used

XE "83-3.02C_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 83-3.02C. Use for concrete barriers located within 1,000 feet of ocean or tidal water. If not all concrete barriers are in a marine environment, edit to specify the location.

5/31/16 HKP** Add to section 83-3.02C:

Bar reinforcing steel for concrete barriers at Grayson Creek Bridge (Replace) and Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen) must be epoxy coated under section 52-2.03.



XE "83-3.04_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 83-3.04. Use to pay for one type of concrete barrier as another type. Edit for the appropriate barrier types. Add clauses for other barrier types as appropriate.

4/22 HKP** Add to section 83-3.04:

Concrete barrier (Type 732 Mod __) is paid for as concrete barrier (Type 732__). Concrete barrier (Type 60A Mod) is paid for as concrete barrier (Type 60A).

XE "83-4.02_A10-30-15__2015"

Page 1 of 2

Section 83-4.02. Use to specify a Type CAT crash cushion as a sole source item. Preparation of a FHWA Public Interest Finding is required, regardless of the funding source.


83-4.02 TYPE CAT CRASH CUSHIONS

83-4.02A General

83-4.02A(1) Summary

1

Section 83-4.02 includes specifications for constructing Type CAT crash cushions.


2

Not Used


3

Submit a certificate of compliance for Type CAT crash cushions.


4

Not Used

83-4.02B Materials

5

Type CAT crash cushions must be CAT-350 crash cushion attenuating terminals manufactured by Trinity Highway Products, LLC, and must include the connection components.

6

Type CAT crash cushion backups must consist of the items shown for the Type CAT crash cushion backups and must comply with section 83-2.02.

7



The successful bidder can obtain the CAT-350 crash cushion attenuating terminal, excluding the Type CAT crash cushion backup, from the manufacturer:


TRINITY HIGHWAY PRODUCTS LLC PO BOX 99 CENTERVILLE UT 84012

(800) 772-7976

8–9. Contact the vendor to get the latest price quote just before finalizing the package for advertisement.

8. Insert the price.

The price quoted by the manufacturer for the CAT-350 crash cushion attenuating terminal, excluding the Type CAT crash cushion backup, FOB Centerville, Utah, is $3000.00________, not including sales tax.

9. Insert the expiration date.

The above price is firm for orders placed on or before December 31, 2016______________, provided you accept delivery within 90 days after you place the order.

10

The grease used to coat the inside surfaces of the foundation tubes to receive wood posts must not melt or run at a temperature of 149 degrees F.


11

Install Type CAT crash cushions under the manufacturer's instructions.

12

Drive the steel foundation tubes with soil plates attached with or without pilot holes, or place them in drilled holes. Backfill the space around the foundation tubes with selected earth that is free of rock. Place the earth in 4-inch-thick layers. Moisten and thoroughly compact each layer. Coat the inside surfaces of the foundation tubes to receive wood posts with grease. Insert the posts into the tubes by hand. Do not drive the posts. You may slightly round the post edges to facilitate insertion.

83-4.02D Payment

13

Not Used

84 MARKINGS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

85 RESERVED



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION X ELECTRICAL WORK

86–88 RESERVED

XE "86-1_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 3

Section 86-1. Use to modify the requirements for the schedule of values, testing location for material and equipment, pull box cover markings, signal interconnect cable, circuit breakers capacity and mounting, telephone demarcation cabinets, signal face material, and push button housing.

1. Use to modify the number of days for submitting a schedule of values.

** KYC 6/2/16 use 15 days in RSS Replace 15 in the 6th paragraph of section 86-1.01C(1) with:

___

2. Insert the address of the testing location.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace the 1st paragraph in 86-1.01D(3) with:

Deliver the material and equipment for testing to the following location:

30 Rickard Street, San Francisco, CA 94134

3. Insert additional cover markings as needed.

** KYC 6/2/16 Add to the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 86-1.02C(1):

13. _________________ 14. _________________ 15. _________________

4. Use if 3-pair signal interconnect cable is required.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace the 1st sentence of the 1st paragraph of section 86-1.02F(2)(d)(v) with:

A signal interconnect cable must be a 3-pair type with stranded, tinned, copper no. 20 conductors.



5–6. Use to change the minimum interrupting capacity of the circuit breakers for a service equipment enclosure.

5. Insert the required minimum interrupting capacity.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace 10,000 in the 14th paragraph of section 86-1.02P(2) with:

____________

6. Use if circuit breakers are used as disconnects.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace the 14th paragraph of section 86-1.02P(2) with:

Circuit breakers used as disconnects must have a minimum interrupting capacity of 42,000 A, rms, for 120/240 V(ac) services and 30,000 A, rms, for 480 V(ac) services.

7. Use to specify the required circuit-breaker mounting for a service equipment enclosure. Edit as needed.

Replace the 1st sentence of the 15th paragraph of section 86-1.02P(2) with:

The interior of the enclosure must accept cable-in/cable-out circuit breakers. The circuit breakers must be mounted on nonenergized clips and vertically with the up position of the handle being the ON position.

8–17. Use for alternative types of telephone demarcation cabinets.

8–10. Use if a Type A telephone demarcation cabinet is required.

** KYC 6/2/16 No new TDC for this project Replace Reserved in section 86-1.02Q(4)(b) with:

8

A Type A telephone demarcation cabinet consists of mounting boards, a junction box, a circuit breaker, outlets, a terminal block, and an outlet plate.

9

The mounting backboard, bottom shelf, and shelf supports must be made of 1/2-inch-thick ACX-grade plywood.

10

The cabinet and hinged cover must be a NEMA 3R type with a minimum material thickness of 0.080 inch. The cabinet must have a hasp lock and a bolted slip fitter that allows mounting to a 4-1/2-inch-diameter steel pedestal.

11–17. Use if a Type C telephone demarcation cabinet is required.

Replace Reserved in section 86-1.02Q(4)(d) with:

11

A Type C telephone demarcation cabinet consists of mounting boards, a thermostat, fan, an outlet box, a circuit breaker, and an outlet plate.

12

The mounting panel must be 3/4-inch-thick ACX-grade plywood.



13

The cabinet must be made of 0.125-inch-thick anodized aluminum.

14

Ventilation louvers must be located on the door.

15

The cabinet door must be secured with drawn latches, lockable with padlock.

16

The fan must be located in a ventilator housing and be controlled thermostatically. The thermostat control must have a range from 80 to 130 degrees F.

17

The thermostat and fan circuit must be protected with a fuse rated for 175 percent of the motor capacity. The fan capacity must be a minimum of 25 cfm.

18. Use if a specific material is required for the signal face. Insert metal or plastic.

** KYC 6/2/16 No new signal face for this project Add to the beginning of section 86-1.02R(4):

The signal face must be made of _____.

19. Use if a plastic push button housing is required.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace the 1st sentence of the 1st paragraph of section 86-1.02U with:

The housing for a push button assembly must be made of UV-stabilized, self-extinguishing structural plastic.

XE "87-1_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 4

Section 87-1. Use for traffic signal shutdown, equipment identification characters for electrical equipment, conduit installation, pull box installation, conductors for detectors, edge sealant, splicing, service for irrigation, accessible pedestrian signal programming, slot sealant, and saw cut requirements.

1. Use for shutting down traffic signal systems during specific hours. Edit the hours and time of day.

** KYC 6/2/16 no signal work Replace the 1st sentence of the 9th paragraph of section 87-1.03A with:

You may shut down the traffic signal system between the hours of _____ and _______.

2. Use if equipment identification characters are to be placed by the Department.

Replace the 21st paragraph of section 87-1.03A with:

The Department places identification characters on the electrical equipment.



3. Use for conduit installation in corrosive soil.

Add to the beginning of section 87-1.03B(3)(a):

Use Type 3 conduit for underground installation.

4. Use if concrete backfill is required in a trench.

Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 87-1.03B(3)(a) with:

Place a minimum of 2 inches of sand bedding in a trench before installing Type 2 or Type 3 conduit and 4 inches of minor concrete over the conduit before placing additional backfill material. The concrete must contain at least 421 pounds of cementitious material per cubic yard.

5. Use to specify the allowable delay to vehicles. Edit the 5-minute delay as needed. For delays greater than 15 minutes, provide written authorization from the district traffic manager.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace 5 minutes in item 2 in the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 87-1.03B(3)(b) with:

____________

6. Use if the bottom of a pull box is not to be grouted.


Install a pull box on a bed of crushed rock.

7. Use if the contractor is not required to install a no. 7 pull box adjacent to each soffit luminaire.

** KYC 6/2/16 Add to the end of section 87-1.03C(4):

You are not required to install a no. 7 pull box adjacent to each soffit luminaire.

8. Use if only 1 type of detector lead-in cable is allowed for loop detectors. Insert Type B or Type C.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace the 1st paragraph of section 87-1.03F(2)(c)(ii) with:

Install a Type B loop detector lead-in cable in conduit.

9. Use if only 1 type of wire is allowed for loop detectors. Insert Type 1 or Type 2.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace the 1st paragraph of section 87-1.03F(3)(c)(ii) with:

Use a Type 2 loop wire. Use only Type 2 loop wire for Type E loops detectors.



10. Use if edge sealant is not required for equipment identification characters.

** KYC 6/2/16 Delete the 3rd paragraph of section 87-1.03G.

11. Insert Method B or heat-shrink tubing if only 1 insulation method is allowed.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 87-1.03H(2) with:

Use Method B to insulate a splice.

12–14. Use for electric service for irrigation. Insert the irrigation controller identification characters.

12–13. Use for a new service installation.

** KYC 6/2/16 No irrigation Add to the end of section 87-1.03L(2)(b):

12

Install a Type III service equipment enclosure for irrigation controllers_____.

13

Install a metered 120/240 V(ac), single-phase service with service disconnects in a NEMA 3R enclosure and surface mounted on a pole for irrigation controllers________. You may locate the service disconnects and metering equipment in a common enclosure if approved by the service utility.

14. Use if there is power from an existing service. Insert the irrigation controller and the existing service equipment enclosure identification characters.

For irrigation controller _______, install a single-pole, 15 A circuit breaker in the existing service equipment enclosure _______________. The circuit breaker must be of the same manufacturer, model, and interrupting capacity as the existing circuit breakers.

15–19. Use where accessible pedestrian signals will be programmed with messages or tones.

** KYC 6/2/16 No APS Add to the end of section 87-1.03T:

15–17. Use for intersections where the accessible pedestrian signals are to be programmed with messages or tones.

15. Insert the names of the streets for each intersection. Add or delete list items as needed.

A manufacturer's representative must program the accessible pedestrian signals with messages or tones at:

1. Intersections where the accessible pedestrian signals at 1 corner are less than 10 feet apart: 1.1. Intersection of ________________________and _______________________ 1.2. Intersection of _______________________ and _______________________

2. Intersections where the accessible pedestrian signals at all corners are 10 feet or more apart: 2.1. Intersection of _______________________and ________________________ 2.2. Intersection of ______________________ and ________________________



16. Use for intersections where the accessible pedestrian signals at 1 corner are less than 10 feet apart.

At intersections where the accessible pedestrian signals at 1 corner are less than 10 feet apart, program the signals with messages for each street as follows:

1. .During the pedestrian clearance interval, the message heard must be Wait to cross <name of street>_______. Wait.

2. During the beginning of the walk interval and repeated for its duration, the message heard must be <name of street>__. Walk sign is on to cross <name of street>______.

17. Use for intersections where the accessible pedestrian signals at all corners are 10 feet or more apart.

At intersections where the accessible pedestrian signals at all corners are 10 feet or more apart, program the signals with messages for each street:

1. During the pedestrian clearance interval, the message heard must be Wait to cross <name of street>_______. Wait.

2. During the beginning of the walk interval and repeated for its duration, the percussive tone must be heard.

18–19. Use for mid-block locations where the accessible pedestrian signals are to be programmed with messages.

18. Insert the name of the street for each mid-block location. Add or delete list items as needed.

** KYC 6/2/16 A manufacturer's representative must program the accessible pedestrian signals with messages at:

1. ________ 2. ________

19. Use where accessible pedestrian signals are programmed for mid-block crosswalks. Insert the message.

Program the accessible pedestrian signals for a mid-block crosswalk with the message "<name of street>_______. Cross with caution.

20. Use for deeper sawed slots.

** KYC 6/2/16 Replace the 1st sentence in the 2nd paragraph of section 87-1.03V(2) with:

Saw the slots to allow a minimum of 2 inches of sealant above the top of the uppermost loop wire in the slot.

21. Use to restrict the type of sealant that may be applied. Insert elastomeric sealant, asphaltic emulsion sealant, or hot-melt rubberized sealant.

** KYC 6/2/16 Add between the 11th and 12th paragraphs of section 87-1.03V(2):

Use ____________________to fill slots.



XE "87-21.03C_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 3

Section 87-21.03C. Use when modifying existing electrical systems.


1-8. Select the electrical systems to be modified.

1. Use for lighting system. Edit to suit.

** KYC 6/2/16 Modifying a lighting system includes removing, adjusting, or adding:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Standards 6. Luminaires 7. Service equipment enclosure 8. Photoelectric control 9. Fuse splice connectors 10. High mast lighting assemblies 11. Sign lights

2. Use for sign illumination system. Edit to suit.

** KYC 6/2/16 Modifying a sign illumination system includes removing, adjusting, or adding:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Sign lighting fixtures 6. Enclosure for the disconnect circuit breaker 7. Service equipment enclosure 8. Photoelectric control

3. Use for signal and lighting system. Edit to suit.

** KYC 6/2/16 Modifying a signal and lighting system includes removing, adjusting, or adding:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Cables 6. Standards 7. Signal heads 8. Internally illuminated street name signs 9. Service equipment enclosure 10. Department-furnished controller assembly 11. Detectors 12. Telephone demarcation cabinet 13. Accessible pedestrian signals



14. Push button assemblies 15. Pedestrian signal heads 16. Luminaires 17. Photoelectric control 18. Fuse splice connectors 19. Battery backup system 20. Flashing beacons 21. Flashing beacon control assembly

4. Use for ramp metering system. Edit to suit.

** KYC 6/2/16 Modifying a ramp metering system includes removing, adjusting, or adding:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Standards 6. Signal heads 7. Service equipment enclosure 8. Department-furnished controller assembly 9. Detectors 10. Telephone demarcation cabinet

5. Use for traffic monitoring station. Edit to suit.

** KYC 6/2/16 Modifying a traffic monitoring station includes removing, adjusting, or adding:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Cables 5. Conductors 6. Service equipment enclosure 7. Controller cabinet 8. Detectors 9. Telephone demarcation cabinet

6. Use for flashing beacon system. Edit to suit.

** KYC 6/2/16 Modifying a flashing beacon system includes removing, adjusting, or adding:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Standards 6. Service equipment enclosure 7. Signal heads 8. Flashing beacon control assembly

7. Use for changeable message system. Edit to suit.

** KYC 6/2/16 Modifying a changeable message sign system includes removing, adjusting, or adding:



1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Service equipment enclosure 6. Department-furnished controller cabinet 7. Department-furnished changeable message sign 8. Department-furnished wiring harness 9. Service equipment enclosure 10. Sign disconnect

8. Use for interconnection conduit and cable. Edit to suit.

** KYC 6/2/16 Modifying interconnection conduit and cable includes removing, adjusting, or adding:

1. Pull boxes 2. Conduit 3. Signal interconnect cables

** KYC 6/2/16 NSSP

9. Use for Traffic Operations System.

Modifying a traffic operations system includes removing, adjusting, or adding:

1. Foundations

2. Pull boxes

3. Conduits

4. Conductors/cables

5. Standards

6. Service equipment enclosures

7. Controller cabinet

8. Telephone demarcation cabinet

9. Detectors

10. Department-furnished controller units

11. Department-furnished CCTV routers

12. Department-furnished loop detector sensor units

13. Closed circuit televisions (CCTV)

14. General packet radio system (GPRS) wireless modem assemblies



** KYC 6/2/16 Add to section 87-22

Edited by NP** XE "87-22_N07-30-14"

Page 1 of 4

Section 87-22. Use for GPRS wireless modem assembly.


87-22 GENERAL PACKET RADIO SYSTEM WIRELESS MODEM ASSEMBLY

87-22A General

87-22A(1) Summary

1

Section 87-22 includes specifications for installing the general packet radio system (GPRS) wireless modem assembly at the controller cabinet.

87-22A(2) Submittals

2

Submit warranty documentation before installation.

87-22A(3) Warranty

3

Furnish a 1-year replacement warranty from the manufacturer of the modems and power supplies against any defects or failures. The effective date of the warranty is the date of installation. Furnish replacement modems and power supplies within 5 days after receipt of the failed parts. The Department does not pay for the replacement parts. Deliver replacement modems and power supplies to:

CALTRANS MAINTENANCE ELECTRICAL SHOP 30 RICKARD STREET SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94134-1224 (415) 330-6500

87-22B Materials

87-22B(1) General

4

The GPRS wireless modem assembly consists of a modem, power supply, mounting bracket and hardware, serial communication cable, or RJ-45 ethernet cable, and antenna.

87-22B(2) Modem

5

The modem must:

1. Be configurable remotely through the wireless network and through multiple communication ports including serial, Ethernet and USB ports.

2. Be configured before acceptance. 3. Have a minimum 53.6 Kbps raw data transfer rate. 4. Have a full duplex transceiver. 5. Have 1900/850 MHz dual band networking. 6. Have an integrated transmission control/internet protocol (TCP/IP) stack with user datagram protocol

(UDP). 7. Have a user-settable password to prevent unauthorized access.



8. Include a DC power cable at least 3 feet long with a connector compatible with the modem power connector.

9. Have a packet buffering and forwarding feature that provides discipline to the output of the serial port. The packet forwarding time interval must be configurable from a rate of 0 (undisciplined) to 400 ms in increments of 100 ms or less.

10. Have a choice of "Friends Only" access mode. 11. Comply with TIA-678. 12. Have an operating temperature range from -30 to +70 degrees C with humidity from 5 to 95 percent

(non-condensing) and have transmissions at 10 percent duty cycle above 60 degrees C. 13. Weigh less than 1 pound and have overall dimensions of 3.0 by 3.5 by 1.0 inches. 14. Have the following status indicators:

14.1. Network 14.2. Signal 14.3. Activity 14.4. Power

15. Operate in a static IP addressing environment of GPRS networks and meet the operational parameters shown in the following table:

Operational parameter Requirements

Transmit power at antenna port 1.0 W for 1900 MHz 0.8 W for 850 MHz

Receiver sensitivity -107 dBm (2.439 % bit error rate) Input voltage 3.3 to 30 V(dc) Input current 200 mA @ 30 V(dc)

16. Have the following standard interfaces: 16.1. Host communicates with modem using either UDP or TCP packet modes. 16.2. Computer terminal platform using dial-up networking communicates with the modem using

point to point protocol (PPP).

6

Provide the Engineer with the modem serial number, and international mobile equipment identification (IMEI) number 30 days before requiring the packet data protocol (PDP) context. The Engineer will program the PDP context comprising of the assigned IP and access point name (APN) obtained from service provider and other features Department will enable the modem on the Department network.

7

The modem and associated firmware, software, hardware, protocol, and other features must be fully compatible with the existing GPRS network. The existing GPRS network utilizes the AT&T Wireless cellular system (3G and later) and the AirLink Gateway. Demonstrate the compatibility to the Engineer by actual installation or by other authorized means.

87-22B(3) Power Supply

8

The power supply must:

1. Be vertically mountable on a 19-inch standard rack rail using 2 machine screws and 2 wing nuts. 2. Have provisions to attach the modem power cable securely without the modifying the cable. 3. Meet the requirements shown in the following table:



Characteristics Requirements

Power cord Standard 120 V(ac), 3 prong cord, at least 3 feet long (may be added by Contractor)

Type Switching type Power rated 40 W minimum with no minimum load required Input voltage From 85 to 264 V(ac) or 120 to 370 V(dc) Input frequency From 47 to 63 Hz Inrush current Cold start, 25 A at 115 V Output voltage 12 V(dc), adjustable over a ±10 percent range Overload protection From 105 to 150 percent in output pulsing mode Over voltage protection From 115 to 135 percent of output voltage Setup, rise, hold up time 800 ms, 50 ms,15 ms at 115 V(ac) Withstand voltage I/P-0/P:3 kV, I/P-FG:1.5 kV, for 60 seconds Safety standards UL 1012, UL 60950

87-22B(4) Mounting Bracket and Hardware

9

The mounting bracket must:

1. Be stainless steel 2. Securely hold the modem in a vertical position with all cables and conductors installed 3. Contain the modem using a method that allows the removal of the modem without tools or without

removing the bracket from its attachment to the cabinet frame 87-22B(5) Serial Communication Cable

10

If the modem is designed to interface with a Department-furnished Model 170E controller, provide a C2 cable. The C2 cable interfaces the controller C2 connector and the GPRS modem and includes all conductors and connectors required for that purpose. The GPRS modem connector must comply with TIA-232 standard using a 9-pin D shell miniature connector. The Department-furnished controller end connector must comply with AMP 201360-2 or equivalent. All pins in both connectors must be gold plated. The cable must have 4 no. 20 AWG conductors with (UL) Type CM shielded or AWM 2464 80C 300 Volts. The cable must be at least 3 feet long. The cable wiring must comply with the following:

1. AMP 201360-2-ND -L to DE9-P - 2 2. AMP 201360-2-ND -K to DE9-P - 3 3. AMP 201360-2-ND -N to DB9-P - 5 4. AMP 201360-2-ND -D to AMP 201360-2-ND - H 5. AMP 201360-2-ND -J to AMP 201360-2-ND – M 87-22B(6) RJ-45 Ethernet Cable

11

If the modem is designed to interface with a Department-furnished Model 2070E controller, provide a 10/100 Base-T, RJ-45 Ethernet cable. The cable must be at least 3 feet long.

87-22B(7) Antenna

12

The antenna must:

1. Be the low profile disc type, and adhere to the cabinet using a factory installed double-sided waterproof acrylic foam adhesive. The coax cable must be at least 3 feet long and have a 50 Ω SMA connector on the modem end.

2. Meet the requirements shown in the following table:



Parameter Requirements

VSWR (at resonant point) 2:1 or less Frequency 1850-1990 MHz and 824-894 MHz Nominal impedance 50 Ω Gain 2 dB Radiation pattern Omni-directional Polarization Vertical Ground plane

Required

a

a The antenna requires a reflective ground plane to function properly.

The required ground plane must extend beyond the antenna at least 8 inches in all directions.

87-22C Construction

13

Install the modem under the manufacturer's instructions.

You may adjust the modem Installation for field conditions if authorized.

87-22D Payment

14

Not Used

** KYC 6/2/16 Clean up and add to section 87-23 and clean up XE "87-23_NSSP

Page 1 of 24 10/09/13 Pierre Lassalle

Section 87-23. Use for Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)

Add to section 87-23

87-23 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

87-23A General

87-23A(1) Summary

1.

Section 87-23 includes specifications for installing closed circuit television (CCTV) system.

87-23A(2) Definitions and Abbreviations

87-23A(2)(a) Definitions

2

APA: Aluminum polyolefin and aluminum with adhesive

CCU: The Camera Control Unit is a part of a live television broadcast "chain". It is responsible for powering the professional video camera, handling signals sent over the camera cable to and from the camera.

CLI: A Command-Line Interface is a means of interaction with a computer program where the user issues commands to a program in the form of successive lines of text.

DE9: D-sub 9 male and female connectors for network cable connection.



DHCP: The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a network protocol to configure network devices so that they can communicate on an IP network.

EIA: Electronic Industries Association is an organization who developed a common interface standard for data communications equipment.

ETPC: Ethernet Twisted Pair Cable is a network cable.

HCC: Hybrid Camera Cable is a power and communication cable for CCTV system.

MPEG-4-ISO/IEC 14496-2: A Moving Picture Expert Group is a method of defining compression of audio and visual digital data.

PE: Polyethylene is an insulated material for the cables and conductors.

PTZ: Pan/Tilt/Zoom is a function for the CCTV camera.

SD: Secure Digital memory card format

SMPTE-170M: Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Committee on Television Technology. SMPTE 170M is used for TV broadcasts

SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol is an Internet-standard protocol for managing devices on IP networks.

TDR: Time-domain reflectometer is an electronic instrument used to characterize and locate faults in metallic cables and connectors.

TELNET: Network protocol used on the Internet or local area networks to provide a bidirectional interactive text-oriented communication facility using a virtual terminal connection.

TDC: A Time-Domain Reflectometer is an electronic instrument used to characterize and locate faults in metallic cables. It can also be used to locate discontinuities in a connector, printed circuit board, or any other electrical path.

UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair cable. UTP cable is a 100 ohm copper cable that consists of 2 to 1800 unshielded twisted pairs surrounded by an outer jacket. They have no metallic shield. This makes the cable small in diameter but unprotected against electrical interference. The twist helps to improve its immunity to electrical noise.

VEU: Video Encoder Unit is a device enables compression or decompression of digital video.

87-23A(2)(b) Abbreviations

3

AC Alternating Current

BNC Bayonet Nut Connector

bps Bits Per Second

CIF Common Intermediate Format

CLI Command Line Interface

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DiffServ (QoS) DIFFerentiated SERVices (Quality Of Service)



fps Frame Per Second

HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IP Internet Protocol

ISO International Organization for Standardization

LED Light Emitting Diode

MIL Military

MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group

NTSC National Television System Committee

QCIF Quarter Common Intermediate Format

QSIF Quarter Source Input Format

RJ Registered Jack

RTCP Real-time Transport Control Protocol

RTP Real-time Transport Protocol

RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol

SIF Source Input Format

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

TELNET Network Virtual Terminal

UDP User Datagram Protocol

87-23A(3) Submittals

4.

Submit copies of the industry standards and specifications to the extent referenced in these special provisions.

5. Edit if not applicable.

** KYC 6/3/16 Submit 3 copies of service manuals for the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit, fixed camera unit, CCU,MCTU, and VEU. The manual must include the following:

1. General information including: 1.1 A list of applicable subassemblies that comprise the specified equipment 1.2. Overall description of the equipment design features (including all enhance D features),

performance, and applications. 1.3. Equipment installation instructions.

2. Theory of operations including: 2.1. Theory of operation of the standard equipment, with unique or unusual circuitry described in

detail. 2.2. Theory of operation reflecting any modifications to the standard equipment.

3. Maintenance including:



3.1. Recommended test equipment and fixtures, or minimum operational and performance requirements for appropriate test equipment.

3.2. Troubleshooting information and charts. 3.3. Removal and installation procedures for replacing assemblies and subassemblies, if not

obvious or if improper sequencing of steps may result in component damage. 4. Replacement parts including:.

4.1. Each manual must contain an equipment replacement parts list including electrical parts, mechanical parts and assemblies.

4.2. Identify all semiconductors by the supplier's numbers and by Joint Electron Device Council (JEDEC) numbers if applicable.

5. Diagram and physical requirements including: 5.1. Schematic diagram(s) identifying all circuit components and showing normal test voltages and

levels. 5.2. An overall functional block diagram. 5.3. Detailed interconnecting diagram(s) showing wiring between modules, circuit boards and major

components. 5.4. Pictorial circuit board layout diagram(s) showing both component placement and printed wiring

detail. 5.5. Diagram(s) showing location of circuit boards and other subassemblies. 5.6. Exploded view diagram(s) of complex mechanical assemblies.

6. Physical requirements including: 6.1. Securely fasten all pages, including latest revisions, together between protective covers (loose-

leaf ring binding is acceptable). 6.2. Do not subject any page to fading from exposure to any normal source of ambient lighting

(ozalid reproduced pages are not acceptable).

87-23A(4) Quality Control and Assurance

87-23A(4)(a) General

6

Not Used

87-23A(4)(b) Camera Station Equipment


** KYC 6/3/16 Deliver the following items to METS for acceptance testing:

1. CCTV PTZ Camera Unit and fixed camera unit 2. CCU 3. VEU 4. High Mast Camera Lowering Device System 5. Fiber Optic Transmitter And Receiver 6. Multiple camera termination unit (MCTU) 87-23A(4)(c) Inspecting and Testing Cable and Connectors

8

Before starting work, test the entire length of HCC for attenuation and faults using a TDR. One or more of the following defines a fault in a long length of cable:

1. Return loss measurements indicating that attenuation exceeds 3 dB in the band from 5 MHz to 30 MHz in a portion of cable less than 10 feet long.

2. A return loss measurement indicating that there is a short in the cable. 3. A return loss measurement indicating a cut or open circuit in the cable. 4. A visual inspection that reveals exposure of or damage to the cable shielding.



9

Testing of HCC and connectors must comply with section 86-2.14B. Replace and retest any cable lengths found to have faults. Dispose of the removed faulty cable. Randomly inspect the cable termination for contact crimping quality control. Reject any contact found not crimped with the correct crimping tool and is defective. Redo the termination until all defects are corrected.

** KYC 6/3/16 87-23A(4)(d)..TESTING FOR EXISTING CCTV PTZ AND FIXED CAMERA STATION

10. Use this paragraph when the camera station is existing, and equipment is schedule to be relocated and reused.

Delete “AND FIXED” in the heading if not using fixed camera station.

Before removal or relocation of existing CCTV equipment including cables, pole, camera, pan and tilt unit, controller cabinet, etc., the Contractor Engineer in the presence of the Engineer Contractor will test the camera station in the field. Existing equipment that fail during this test period will be replaced or repaired by the Contractor, and such work will be paid for as extra work. Notify the Engineer fifteen days before the scheduled testing.

** KYC 6/3/16 87-23A(4)(e d) Testing CCTV PTZ and Fixed Camera Station

11

Inspect for correct wiring terminations, correct cable interconnections, and good workmanship.

12

Perform functional testing to verify:

1. All local mode CCTV operations using the CCU front panel controls. 2. Video signal output from CCU with NTSC monitor. 3. The correct operation of the auto/manual iris and focus, and manual zoom functions. 4. The correct operation of the pan/tilt function. The pan/tilt function must be tested over 355 degrees in

the horizontal plane and +20 to -90 degrees in the vertical plane 5. The correct operation of the preset positions.

13. Delete “AND FIXED” in the heading. Delete the fixed camera station if not applicable.

** KYC 6/3/16 Upon completion of work, the Department will test each CCTV (PTZ) and fixed camera station. Provide and load all software before the start of testing. The District Electrical Systems Branch personnel, arranged by the Engineer and in the presence of the Contractor, must perform all tests. The Contractor must provide all necessary equipment required to access the CCTV equipment for testing.

14

The testing includes continuous satisfactory operation of each camera station for 5 consecutive days. Replace any material and equipment found to be defective, unsuitable, or violating standards. The Department does not pay for replacement parts.

15

After you correct all defects, the Department will re-test the camera station.

16. Delete if not using fixed camera station.

** KYC 6/3/16 Functional Testing for CCTV Fixed Camera Station must include the following:

1. Verify video signal output from fixed camera with a NTSC monitor. 2. Verify the correct operation of the auto/manual iris and focus, and manual zoom functions with a

laptop PC software.



3. Verify the correct operation of the preset positions.

87-23A(4)(f e) Traffic Operations Testing

17

Allow 30 days for the camera station equipment testing. You will be notified upon satisfactory completion of the testing. Pick up the equipment from the Laboratory and deliver it to a Department owned storage location designated by the Engineer. You are responsible for the costs of shipping, handling, and the transportation of equipment to and from the Laboratory.

87-23A(5) Warranty

18. Insert year of warranty and address of district maintenance electrical shop.

** KYC 6/3/16 Furnish a 1 year replacement written warranty from the manufacturer of the camera station equipment against any defects or failures. The effective date of the warranty is the date of installation. Replace camera station equipment within 10 days after receipt of the failed camera station equipment. The Department does not pay for the replacement. Deliver replacement camera station to the following department maintenance electrical shop:

Caltrans Electrical Maintenance Station 30 Rickard Street San Francisco, CA 94134 Telephone: (415) 330-6500

87-23B Materials

87-23B(1) General

19

The camera station must include the CCTV pole and camera mounting adapter; CCTV (PTZ) camera unit; HCC, connectors and fittings; interface cable and conductors; CCU; VEU; equipment shelf with brackets; and rack-mount power strip.

** KYC 6/3/16 87-23B(2) CCTV PTZ AND FIXED Camera Station


Each camera must comply with the following:



Imager Interline transfer Progressive Scan CCD with mosaic-type color compensating filter

Image Area 1/4 inch Format, 0.14 inch (H) by 0.11 inch (V) Resolution 540 horizontal; 350 vertical Picture Elements 811 (H) x 508 (V), Total 411,988 Video Output NTSC, 1 V p-p at 75 ohms, unbalanced Lens Aperture: f/1.4 (wide angle) to f/4.2 (telephoto) Optical Zoom Range 35X, 0.13" to 4.68 inches Digital Zoom Range 1X (Off) through 210X, Smooth transition from Optical to Digital Zoom Horizontal Angle of View

Optical: From 55.8 to 1.7 degrees; At 10X Digital: From 55.8 to 0.17 degrees.

Focus Distance. 40 inches in telephoto, 0.4 inch in wide angle Digital Compass 8 or 16 direction point compass annotation with primary direction spelled

out and intermediate directions abbreviated with two letters Auto Focus Selectable Auto/Manual Manual Focus Speed

Approximately 2.0 seconds to full range

Minimum Scene Illumination

For Reliable Auto Focus, 30 percent video

Zoom & Focus Presets

64 preset positions with auto focus and ID

Flash Memory Update firmware and new features via serial communication Shutter speeds 1/60; 1/120; 1/180; 1/250; 1/500; 1/1,000; 1/2,000; 1/4,000; 1/10,000;

1/30,000 second Auto Iris Automatically adjusts to compensate for changes in scene illumination to

maintain constant video level output within sensitivity specifications Manual Iris Changing the video level to give the effect of open iris/close iris Gamma 0.45 AGC From 0 to 28 dB Color Balance Auto Tracking Color Balance/Manual with adjustable Red and Blue

Levels Signal to Noise Ratio

>50 dB

Synchronization Crystal or Phase-Adjust Line Lock on 60 Hz Sensitivity At F1.4, Wide Angle 35 IRE

0.5-Lux at 1/60 s, F1.4, Shutter, Color I.R. Cut On 0.05-Lux at 1/2 s, F1.4, Shutter, Color I.R. Cut On 0.2-Lux at 1/60 s, F1.4, Shutter, monochrome mode I.R. Cut Off 0.01-Lux at 1/4 s, F1.4, Shutter, monochrome mode I.R. Cut Off

21

Pan and tilt function must comply with the following:

87-23B(3) CCTV (PTZ) Camera Unit

1 Continuous rotation capability in either direction 2 110 degrees of tilt movement, +20 degree to –90 degree

unobstructed 3 Pan Speed (Operator Control): Variable from 0.1 degree/s to 80

degree/s 4 Pan Speed (Preset Control): >140 degree/s 5 Tilt Speed (Operator Control): Variable from 0.1 degree/s to 40

degree/s



87-23B(3)(a) General

22

Each CCTV (PTZ) camera unit consists of a camera, lens, receiver/driver, pan/tilt assembly, environmental housing, sunshield and pigtail cable with connector. The CCTV (PTZ) camera unit must automatically switch to monochrome mode when ambient light level is at 20 foot-candles and switch back to color at 180 foot-candles.

23

The CCTV (PTZ) camera unit must have 8 programmable camera movement sequences. Each sequence is programmed by selecting the preset position by number, and then selecting a dwell time. The presets can be used in any order, and the same preset may be used more than once as long as the total number of preset positions used does not exceed 32. The dwell time defines the length of time paused at each preset position. It can be from 1 second to 60 seconds. The dwell time can be changed individually for all stops on the sequence. If the appropriate preset ID is programmed, it must be displayed for each preset position used on the sequence. The sequence must stop upon receipt of a pan command. All programmable functions must be stored in non-volatile memory.

24

Preset ID must be 1 line, up to 24 characters long, user programmable for each of the 64 preset positions. When a preset position is recalled the corresponding preset ID must be displayed. The preset ID must remain displayed until a pan, tilt, zoom, manual focus, auto focus select, or another preset command is received.

87-23B(3)(b) CCTV (PTZ) Camera Pigtail Cable and Connector

25

The camera pigtail cable must comply with the specifications for HCC. The length of the camera pigtail cable must not be less than 32 inches.

26

The contact pin assignment of the connector is as shown in the following table:

Position Function Position Function 1 Video, 75 ohm 9 Not Used 2 Video Ground 10 Not Used 3 Data Ground 11 Not Used 4 Tx- 12 115 V(ac) Line, Hot 5 Tx+ 13 115 V(ac), Neutral 6 Rx+ 14 Not Used 7 Rx- 15 115 V(ac), Ground 8 Not Used 16 Not Used

27

Furnish a mating connector and 16 contact crimping sockets for each CCTV (PTZ) camera unit supplied.

87-23B(3)(c) CCTV (PTZ) Camera Physical and Mechanical Requirements

28

Each CCTV (PTZ) camera unit must weigh less than 20 pounds. Its dimensions must be less than 14" inches in length, 7 inches in width and 12 inches in height, including mounting base. The CCTV (PTZ)

6 Tilt Speed (Preset Control): 140 degree/s 7 64 Pan and Tilt preset positions with repeatability within ±0.5

degree 8 The positioning system must be invertible if inverse mounting is

required



camera unit must be a pole mount version. There must be 4 equally spaced mounting holes on the mounting base. Each CCTV (PTZ) camera unit must be provided with 4 stainless steel hex head bolts to secure the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit to the camera mounting plate. Use grade 18-8 stainless steel for all fasteners and nuts used in attaching the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit to the mounting plate. Provide a camera-mounting adapter as shown.

** KYC 6/3/16 87-23B(3)(d) CCTV Fixed Camera Unit connector

87-23B(3)(d)(i) General

29. Delete Para. 29 through 35 if no CCTV fixed camera unit.

Each CCTV fixed camera unit must consists of a camera, lens, receiver/driver, environmental housing, sunshield and a cable connector. The CCTV fixed camera unit must automatically switch to monochrome mode when ambient light level is at 20 foot-candles and switch back to color at 180 foot-candles.

30.

The CCTV fixed camera unit must have eight programmable camera sequences. Each sequence is programmed by selecting the preset position by number, and then selecting a dwell time. The presets can be used in any order, and the same preset may be used more than once as long as the total number of preset positions used does not exceed 32. The dwell time defines the length of time paused at each preset position. It can be from 1 second to 60 seconds. The dwell time can be changed individually for all stops on the sequence. If the appropriate preset ID is programmed, it must be displayed for each preset used on the sequence. The sequence must stop upon receipt of a control command. All programmable functions must be stored in non-volatile memory.

31

Preset ID must be 1 line, up to 24 characters long, user programmable for each of the 64 presets. When a preset is recalled the corresponding preset ID must be displayed. The preset ID must remain displayed until a zoom, manual focus, auto focus select, or another preset command is received.

32

Camera connector must be mounted on the backplate of the camera housing. The camera connector must be equivalent to an Amphenol PT07-14-18P.

33

The contact pin assignment of the connector must be:

Position Function Position Function S Video, 75 Ω J Not Used H Video Ground K Not Used G Data Ground R Not Used F Tx- T Not Used E Tx+ L Not Used M Rx+ D 115 V(ac) Line, Hot N Rx- C 115 V(ac), Neutral A Not Used P 115 V(ac), Ground B Not Used U Overall Shield

34

The Contractor You must furnish a mating connector, AMP PT06A-14-18S (SR) with 90 degree back shell.



87-23B(3)(d) Fixed camera unit Physical and Mechanical Requirements for Fixed Camera Unit

35

Each CCTV fixed camera unit must weigh less than 10 pounds. Each camera and lens must be mounted in a sealed, cylindrical, environmental housing which must be less than: 5 inches in diameter and 15 inches in length. The CCTV fixed camera unit must have three equal spaced mounting holes on the mounting base. Each CCTV fixed camera unit must be provided with three stainless steel hex head bolts to secure the CCTV fixed camera unit to the camera mounting plate. All fasteners and nuts used in attaching the CCTV fixed camera unit to the mounting plate must be of grade 18-8 stainless steel. A camera-mounting bracket must be provided as shown on the plans

87-23B(3)(de) Camera Unit Features Common

36

The camera housing must be a corrosion resistant and tamper proof sealed and pressurized housing with 5 pounds dry nitrogen with purge fitting and 20 psi relief valve for each camera. The size of the housing must be 3-1/2 inch diameter or smaller. Finish the housing exterior by pre-treatment with conversion coating and baked enamel paint. Design the camera enclosure to withstand the effects of sand, dust and hose-directed water.

37

The internal humidity of the housing must be less than 10 percent, when sealed and pressurized. Place desiccant packs securely inside the housing to absorb any residual moisture and maintain internal humidity at 10 percent or less. The housing must include a thermostatically controlled heating pad rated at 115 V(ac) 100 W maximum.

38

Provide a sun shield or visor to shield the lens from direct sunlight.

39

The camera unit must include a character generator. The text characters must be uppercase white with black border impose on the video stream. A maximum of 6 lines of user programmable alphanumeric text must be displayed through serial communications. Messages may be positioned at either the top or the bottom of display. The right side positioning is accomplished by padding left side of message with spaces. Blank lines must not be displayed. Any programmed line being displayed must fill in toward the top if top positioning is selected or toward the bottom if bottom position is selected.

40

Camera ID must be used for upper 2 lines with each up to 24 characters long. If both lines are programmed, line 1 of camera ID must always appear above line 2 of camera ID regardless of top or bottom selection.

41

An 8-point or 16-point compass annotation must be settable for a true north position. Display must include North, NE, East, SE, South, SW, West and NW. Position must be able to be grouped with the site location or separated from site location. Azimuth position must be displayed in 0 to 359 degrees and elevation position must be displayed in +95 to –95 degrees. All display must be user selectable for enable/disable, 3-second time out or permanent display. Sector message of up to 16 sectors in 360 degrees must be defined with up to 24 characters long.

42

Low-pressure indicator must use 1 line with messages displayed in "blinking" or "non-blinking" mode when activated by low internal pressure. Provide adjustable set points by altitude via the serial port to activate low-pressure. Message must be enabled or disabled. In maintenance mode, readings of the internal pressure of the camera housing must be displayed from 5 psi down to 1 psi, in 0.1-psi increments.



43

Internal temperature indicator must use 1 line with messages displayed in "blinking" or "non-blinking" mode. Message must be enabled or disabled. In maintenance mode, camera readings of the internal temperature of the camera housing must be in 1-degree increments.

44

Provide video blanked for up to 8 privacy. One line numeric messages must be displayed. Message must be displayed in "blinking" or "non-blinking" mode and be enabled or disabled. Program privacy zones through serial communications.

45

Control and addressing the camera unit must be done through EIA-422 optically isolated serial communications. Additional protocols must consist of Cohu, American Dynamics, Javelin, Philips/Bosch, Vicon and Pelco-D. Include the National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol (NTCIP) 1205 protocol communications protocol as an option.

46

The camera unit must respond in less than 1.0 second upon receipt of any given command.

47

All programmable functions including camera last operating position must be stored in non-volatile memory and must not be lost if a power failure occurs. Upon power restoration, the camera must go through a series of self-testing/calibration and return to the same position it left before the power interruption. System configurations such as video privacy zones, preset text and sector I.D. must be able to be stored in a computer file and uploaded into a camera in the event that a camera replacement is necessary.

87-23B(3)(ef) Power Requirements

48

The camera unit must operate between 89 to 135 V(ac), 120 V(ac) nominal voltage and 50 or 60 Hz. (±3.0 Hz). The camera unit must comply with NEMA standard TS-2 for traffic control system 2.1.2. The camera unit must comply with the requirements of Section 2.1.6 "transients, power service" of the NEMA standard TS-2. Test the line variation and surge performance to comply with these specifications. The power consumption must not exceed a total of 200 watts

1. 100 watts for camera, receiver, pan/tilt driver 2. 100 watts for heater on 87-23B(3)(fg) Environmental Requirements

49

The camera unit must operate in ambient temperature range from -34 to +74 degrees C, in relative humidity up to 100 percent. The unit must operate when exposed to sand, dust, fungus and salt atmosphere under MIL-E-5400T, and with shock for up to 10 Gs, 11 ms, in any axis under non-operating conditions, under MIL-E-5400T. The unit must not be damaged with sine vibration from 5 to 30 Hz, ½ G, 3 axis in 1 hour.

87-23B(3)(gh) Hybrid Camera Cable and Connectors

50

HCC consists of 1 RG-59/U type analog video coaxial cable, one of 6 - No. 22 AWG conductor group, one of 8 - No. 26 AWG conductor group and 2 twist pair 4 - No. 26 AWG conductor group in a common outer jacket.



87-23B(3)(hi) Electrical Requirements

51

The coaxial cable must comply with:

Electrical Coaxial

Capacitance (picofarads/ft nominal) 17.3 Impedance (ohms-nominal) 75 Velocity of propagation (nominal) 78 percent Nominal Diameter (inch) 0.242 Insulation Rating 300 V

52

Component Nominal OD (inches)

Copper center conductor 0.040

Foam polyethylene dielectric 0.180 Sealed APA tape with 0.06-inch overlap

0.216

Woven aluminum braid 0.241 PVC outer jacket 0.297

53

The cable attenuation at 20 degrees C must comply with:

Frequency (MHz) Nominal dB/ 100 ft

1 0.30 10 0.90 50 2.10

54

The 6 - No. 22 AWG must be stranded 7 x 30, tinned copper insulated with 0.009 inch nominal wall of S-R PVC and a nominal OD of 0.048 inch. The 6 conductors must be color coded as follows:

1. Black 2. Red 3. Green 4. White 5. Blue 6. Yellow

55

The 8 - No. 26 AWG must be stranded 7 x 34, tinned copper insulated with 0.009 inch nominal wall of S-R PVC and a nominal OD of 0.037 inch. The 8 conductors must be color coded as follows:

1. Brown 2. Blue 3. Orange 4. Yellow 5. Purple 6. Gray 7. White with Black Stripe 8. Red with Green Stripe



56

The 4 - No. 26 AWG in 2 twisted pairs must be stranded 7 x 34, tinned copper insulated with 0.009 inch nominal wall of S-R PVC and a nominal OD of 0.037 inch. The 4 conductors must be color coded as follows:

1. Pair No. 1: 1.1. Black 1.2. White

2. Pair No. 2: 2.1. Red 2.2. Green

57

The HCC must have a 36 AWG tinned copper braid with 90 percent coverage, an O/A binder of 0.001 inch polyester 25 percent overlap, and an outer jacket color complying with Fed-Std-595 color #No.24091, material 0.032 inch dark gray UV resistant PVC to 0.425 inch OD and must pass the VW-1 vertical flame test. Use fillers as required to form a uniform round cable. The insulation rating of the overall cable jacket must be 300 V.

58

The manufacture identification must be surface printed in white ink every foot along the length of the cable.

87-23B(3)(ij) Interface Cables

59

All interface cables when required to interface with other equipment as shown must be minimum of 6 feet in length. All interface cables must be commercially made high quality type with appropriate connectors on the cable ends as shown.

87-23B(3)(jk) Network Straight Through Data Cable

60

The network straight through data cable must be made of Ethernet twisted pair cable (ETPC) and terminated with an 8 - conductor, 8P8C modular plug on both ends. ETPC must consist of 4 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) No. 24 AWG stranded copper conductors insulated with high-density polyethylene (PE). The insulated conductors must be tightly twisted into individual pairs and jacketed with PE or PVC.

87-23B(3)(kl) Video Patch Cable

61

The video patch cable must be RG-59/U coaxial cable terminated at both end with BNC connectors. The coaxial cable must comply with:

Electrical Coaxial

Capacitance (picofarads/ft nominal) 17.3 Impedance (ohms-nominal) 75 Velocity of propagation (nominal) 78 percent Nominal Diameter (inch) 0.242



62

Component Nominal OD (inches)

Copper center conductor 0.040 Foam polyethylene dielectric 0.146 Sealed APA tape with 0.06-inch overlap

0.216

Bare copper braid 0.241 PVC outer jacket 0.297

63

The cable attenuation at 20 degrees C must measure at maximum as follows:

Frequency (MHz) Nominal dB/ 100 ft

1 0.30 10 0.90 50 2.1

87-23B(3)(lm) EIA-232 Data Patch Cable

64

The EIA-232 data patch cable must comply with EIA-232 standard. The data cable must have multiple No. 20 AWG conductors with (UL) Type CM shielded or AWM 2464 80C 300 Volts – C (UL). One end of data cable must be terminated with a DE9 female connector. All contact socket pins must be gold plated. The contact pin assignment is as shown. The other end of the data cable must be either terminated with an 8P8C modular plug or not terminated. When there is no connector required on the other end of cable, each conductor's insulation must be stripped 1/4 inch from the end of cable and the bare conductor must be tinned with solder.

87-23B(3)(mn) Camera Control Unit

65

Install CCU to laptop PC cable at each CCTV (PTZ) camera station. The CCU consists of a rack-mounted field unit. The CCU must have the same manufacturer as the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit. The CCU must be designed to provide on-site camera control functions. The control functions must include pan/tilt positioning, zoom in/out control, auto/manual focus, and auto/manual iris.

66

CCU must include a local/remote switch that transfers control from the remote system to local. This allows the remote control system and the CCU to remain connected while transferring the control function without disconnection of the camera site equipment. The local function must time-out and return to remote mode in 10 minutes.

67

LED indicators on the CCU must provide positive feedback of the automatic and manual mode status of the camera focus and iris functions, and the manual mode status of the pan/tilt function.

68

Each CCU must mount in 2 inches (1 rack unit) of EIA-310 rack space with a maximum depth of 14 inches. The front panel must be black gloss color Number 17986 under Federal Standard Color Chart 595B. The front and rear panel lettering must be white color Number 17886 under Federal Standard Color Chart 595B.



69

A high-impedance front and rear panel jack BNC must be installed on the front and rear panel as shown. These connectors must provide video input to a test monitor without affecting the remainder of the CCTV system. These connectors must be directly monitoring the video input from the camera. The connectors must be of copper material with bright nickel (tarnish resistant) finish for the body and silver finish for the contact.

70

An automobile glass (AG), size 1/4 by 1-1/4 inches, slow blow fuse must be installed and replaceable from the outside of the unit.

71

Switches must protrude no more than 0.5 inch from the front panel and must be mounted as shown on the plans. Each switch must be labeled as to its functions.

72

Each LED must be High Intensity Untinted, Non-diffused LED. Mount each LED as shown.

73

An on/off switch to turn the CCU on/off must be provided. An LED to indicate the AC power is on must be provided.

74

Each CCU must not weight more than 5 pounds.

87-23B(4) Electrical Requirements

87-23B(4)(a) Camera Control Functions

87-23B(4)(a)(i) General

75

Each CCU must have circuitry to detect the absence and presence of video sync on its video input. Each CCU must have auto-iris override. Each CCU must have a transfer switch between local and remote mode. The local function must time-out and return to the remote mode within 5 minutes. A system-reset switch with momentary-pushbutton type must be mounted on the front panel to function as external reset input to the microprocessor. The system-reset must exercise the pan and tilt movements through their ranges and return the camera to the prior position. The system-reset function must allow remote execution.

76

The CCU must have, as a minimum, control and drive circuits for the following camera control functions:

Control Function Switch Position

Pan momentary toggle switch Left-Stop-Right Tilt momentary toggle switch Up-Stop-Down Zoom In/Out momentary toggle switch Telephoto-Stop-Wide

Angle Focus Automatic/Manual momentary toggle Switch Auto Focus -Manual Manual Focus toggle Switch Near-Stop-Far Iris Automatic/Manual toggle Switch Auto Iris -Manual Override Manual Iris toggle Switch Open-Stop-Close Remote/Local momentary toggle Switch (Local function must time-out and return to remote mode in 10 minutes)

Remote-Local

Reset momentary push button switch Reset



77

Camera connector contact assignment is as follows:

Position Function Position Function

1 Video, 75 Ω 9 Not Used

2 Video Ground 10 Not Used

3 Data Ground 11 Not Used

4 Rx- 12 115 V(ac), Hot

5 Rx+ 13 115 V(ac), Neutral

6 Tx+ 14 Not Used

7 Tx- 15 115 V(ac), Ground

8 Not Used 16 Not Used

78

EIA-232 Connector contact assignment (DE9 Pins) is as follows:



2 Receive Data, Rx 7 RTS

3 Transmit Data, Tx 8 CTS


5 Signal Ground

79

EIA-422 Connector contact assignment (DE9 Sockets) is as follows:


1 Tx+ 6 Signal Ground

2 Tx- 7 Not Used

3 Signal Ground 8 Not Used

4 Rx+ 9 Not Used

5 Rx-

87-23B(4)(a)(ii) Communication and Camera Addressing Protocol

80

The execution of CCU functions, other than the hardware controls on the front panel, must be done through either EIA-232 or EIA-422 optically isolated serial communication ports on the back panel. Use a



minimum 9,600-baud data rate. The CCU must have a front panel EIA-232 port for connection to a local laptop computer. Include the (NTCIP) 1205 MIB communications protocol.

81

Conduct the communications between CCU and the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit through an EIA-422 circuit with full handshake support. Use a minimum 9,600-baud data rate.

87-23B(5) Power Consumption

82

The maximum power consumption for the CCU must not exceed 45 W. Power consumption of equipment attached to CCU must not exceed 250 W.

87-23B(6) Environmental Requirements

83

Each CCU must:

1. Operate in an ambient temperature environment from –34 to +74 degrees C and up to 90 percent relative humidity

2. Pass 5 Gs, 11 ms, in any axis under non-operating conditions, MIL-E-5400T 3. Pass vibration tests:

3.1. Sine vibration from 5 to 60 Hz with 0.082-inch total excursion without damage 3.2. Random vibration from 60 to 1,000 Hz, 5 Gs RMS (0.027-G

2/Hz) without damage

87-23B(7) Video Encoder Unit

87-23B(7)(a) General

84

Do not use a prototype of the VEU. All equipment must be off-the-shelf production units.

85

All equipment must be new.

86

Provide all necessary interface cables to connect communication equipment and the CCU for a complete and successful installation and operation of the VEU, and as shown.

87-23B(7)(b) Physical and Mechanical Requirements

87

The VEU must be mountable in a standard EIA-310 equipment rack.

88

The VEU and shelf if any must fit in 5.25 inches of a standard EIA-310 equipment rack space.

89

Each VEU must have all the cable connections on the rear of the unit.

90

Provide a main power switch to turn the unit on/off.

91

Provide an LED to indicate the AC power on.

87-23B(7)(c) Electrical Requirements

92

The VEU must:



1. Be able to be remotely managed, configured, and maintained without the use of any third party software with the management and performed using SNMP, TELNET, and CLI

2. Operate with both color and black/white video input signal without modification to the hardware.

93

The input video resolution of the VEU must be as follows:

Video Resolution NTSC SIF 352 x 240 QSIF 176 x 128 CIF N/A QCIF N/A Custom 64 x 48 Custom 128 x 96 Custom 192 x 144 Custom 256 x 192 Custom 352 x 240

94

The input video formats of the VEU must be composite NTSC with 525 lines at 60 Hz.

95

The VEU must have 2 composite video input channels.

96

The input video connector must be compatible with SMPTE-170M at 75 Ω impedance with BNC type.

97

The network communication interface of the VEU must be Ethernet 10/100 Mbps through 8P8C connector port, either in static IP or assigned through DHCP.

98

The camera control data interface must include a maintenance serial port for local maintenance and a control serial port for data transport. The port must be EIA-232 at a user selectable data rate from 1,200 to 56,000 bps, asynchronous. The connector type for the port must be a DE9 pin type.

99

The VEU must provide bandwidth for camera control within the bandwidth allocated for video only when bandwidth is needed for camera control/status data transmission.

100

The video compression of the VEU must comply with MPEG 4-ISO/IEC 14496-2 standard and H.264 standard. The MPEG-4 compliant levels are:

1. Level 1 – up to 64 kbps 2. Level 2 – up to 128 kbps 3. Level 3 – up to 384 kbps

101

The video rates of the VEU must be scaleable from 1 fps to 30 fps and from 8 kbps to 2 Mbps. User selectable options are:

1. Constant bit rate at constant frame rate 2. Variable bit rate at constant frame rate



3. Constant bit rate at variable frame rate

102

The video delivery options of the VEU must be either unicast or multicast with protocols DiffServ (QoS), UDP, IP, RTP, RTSP, RTCP, HTTP, SNMP, and TELNET.

103

87-23B(7)(d) Power Requirements

104

The VEU must:

1. Operate from 89 to 135 V(ac), 120 V(ac) nominal voltage and 50 or 60 Hz (±3.0 Hz). 2. Comply with NEMA standard TS-2 for Traffic Control System 2.1.2. The VEU must 3. Comply with the requirements of section 2.1.6 "Transients, Power Service," of the NEMA standard

TS-2. 87-23B(7)(e) Environmental Requirements

105

Each VEU must:

1. Operate in an ambient temperature environment range from –20 to +70 degrees C and up to 90 percent relative humidity

2. Pass 5 Gs, 11 ms, in any axis under non-operating conditions, MIL-E-5400T shock test 3. Pass vibration tests:

3.1. Sine vibration from 5 to 60 Hz with 0.082-inch total excursion without damage 3.2. Random vibration from 60 to 1,000 Hz, 5 G's RMS (0.027-G

2/Hz) without damage

87-23B(8) Equipment Shelf With Brackets

106

Furnish and install each equipment shelf as shown.

107. Delete if shelf to be installed on brackets furnished with control cabinet.

Furnish each shelf with 2 mounting brackets.

108

Each mounting bracket must extend from the front to back mounting rails of the controller cabinet rack cage. Each bracket must be designed to support a minimum of 50 pounds. The horizontal side of each bracket must be a minimum of 3 inches. Attach each bracket to front and rear of the rack cage with four 10-32 stainless steel Phillips round head bolts.

109

Each shelf must be fabricated of 0.125-inch cold rolled sheet or 0.125-inch aluminum sheet. Each shelf must be the width of the control cabinet rack cage and 18 inches deep. Each shelf must have equally distributed holes or slots throughout the shelf that must provide 40 percent minimum open area for vertical flow-through ventilation. Each hole or slot must not exceed 0.75-square inches in area. Each shelf must be cadmium-plated or zinc-plated after cutting and drilling.

110. Delete if shelf doesn't need to be permanently attached.

Each shelf must be attached to the top of its pair of brackets in all 4 corners with stainless steel hardware, with the front of the shelf abutting against the front rail of the control cabinet rack cage.



87-23B(9). Rack-Mount Power Strip

87-23B(9)(a) Electrical

111

Each rack-mount power strip must comply with the following requirements:

1. A maximum rating of 15 A, 120 V(ac), 60 Hz 2. A surge protection with UL 1449 Clamping Level of 400 V, an IEEE Let-Through Voltage rating of less

than 336 V, a single-pulse energy rating of 210 J and EMI/RFI noise protection rating of 40 dB 3. 1-15 A circuit breaker. 4. 1 internally illuminated switch to cut off power to all outlets. 5. 6 NEMA 5-15R outlets. 87-23B(9)(b) Mechanical

112

Each rack-mount power strip must comply with the following requirements:

1. Dimensions of 2 inches (H) by 19 inches (W) by 2-4/5 inches (D) maximum and must not weigh more than 4.5 pounds.

2. The front plate of the rack-mount power strip must have 2 cut-off EIA mounting screw holes on each end.

3. Each outlet must have 1-1/2 inch minimum spacing center-to-center to its adjacent outlet. 4. The power cord must enter from the rear with a length of 7 feet minimum. 5. The clearance between the power cord entrance and the nearest outlet must be 3-3/8 inches

minimum. 6. Both the circuit breaker and the switch must be front-mounted. 7. Each outlet must be rear-mounted. 87-23C Construction

87-23C(1) General

113

Not used

87-23C(2) Installation of CCTV (PTZ) Camera Station

114

Install CCTV pole with foundation, conduits, and pull boxes as required and as shown. The type of CCTV pole is shown. Install and terminate the HCC with connectors as shown. The HCC must connect to camera pigtail cable and secure to the pole as shown for strain-relief.

115

Install the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit on camera mounting plate as shown. Secure the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit to the mounting plate using the stainless steel bolts provided with the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit. Before each bolt is fastened, apply a locking type coating to the threads. The coating must lock the bolt and nut in place, making it impossible to turn the bolt or nut without tools. This coating must last through and be effective through at least 10 insertions and withdrawals of the bolt or nut.

116

Install CCU, VEU, router, rack-mount power strip, equipment shelves, and all the interface cables in the controller cabinet as shown. Mount the rack-mount power strip on the rear mounting rack of the controller cabinet.

117. Delete Para. 117 and 1118 if not using fixed camera.

** KYC 6/3/16 87-23C(3) Installation of CCTV Fixed Camera Station

Install fixed camera with mounting hardwares. Install and terminate the HCC with connectors as shown.



118

Install VEU, router, rack-mount power strip, equipment shelves and all the interface cables in the controller cabinet as shown. The rack-mount power strip must be mounted on the rear mounting rack of the controller cabinet.

87-23C(34) Installation of HCC

119

The HCC must be continuous from the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit to CCU in the controller cabinet without splicing, unless shown. The maximum length of HCC is 750 feet.

120

For the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit, the HCC must be terminated with cable connectors on both ends. Connector with a full set crimp contact pins and strain relief back shell must be installed on the cable end toward CCU. Connector with a full set crimp contact sockets and strain relief back shell must be installed on the cable end toward the CCTV (PTZ) camera unit. All connector contact must be of brass contact body material and with stainless steel spring that is electroless nickel plated with coating thickness of 0.00050 inch under MIL-C-26074B, grade B and plated with 0.00030 inch under MIL-G-45204B, class 4. Contact size must be 16.

121. Delete if not using fixed camera unit.

** KYC 6/3/16 For a fixed camera unit, the camera end of HCC must be terminated with a cable connector AMP PT06A-14-18S (SR), which will mate with the connector on the fixed camera.

87-23C(45) Installation of Camera Control Unit

87-23C(45)(a) General

122

Install CCU and CCU to laptop PC cable at each CCTV (PTZ) camera station.

Switches must protrude no more than 0.5" from the front panel and must be mounted as shown. Label each switch according to its function.

123

The rear panel connectors must be mounted as shown and must comply with the following requirements:

1. Camera connector must be square flange type. The socket contacts for camera connector must be of brass contact body material and with stainless steel spring that is electroless nickel plated with coating thickness of 0.00050 inch under MIL-C-26074B, grade B and plated with 0.00030 inch under MIL-G-45204B, class 4. Contact size must be No. 16. Use contact extraction tool to replace contact.

2. The EIA-232 connector must be a DE9 pin connector. EIA-422 connector must be a DE9 socket connector.

3. Provide 1 mating connector with a full set crimp contact pins and strain relief back shell with each CCU.

124

Provide all necessary interface cables for CCU to connect to all other camera equipment.

87-23C(45)(b) CCU to Laptop PC Cable

125

Install a USB to EIA-232 serial adapter at each PTZ camera location. The adapter must have a DE9 socket connector for EIA-232 and Type A plug connector for USB. Supply a 6-feet straight-through USB extension cable. The USB function must be version 2.0. Furnish the adapter software in 1 GB secure digital (SD) memory card format.



87-23C(56) Rack-Mount Power Strip

126

Plug the rack-mount power strip into the non-GFCI duplex outlet normally labeled with "Controller Unit Receptacle" in the back of the power distribution assembly (PDA). Mount the rack-mount power strip on the rear of the standard EIA-310 rack cage and across the 2two vertical back rails with 4four stainless steel EIA mounting screws, 2 on each side. The rack-mount power strip must not hinder the accessibility to the back of all existing electrical equipment. Plug all power cords for permanently field installed electrical equipment into the power strip.

87-23D Payment

127

Not Used



^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION XI MATERIALS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

89 AGGREGATE

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

90 CONCRETE

XE "90-1.01C_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 90-1.01C. Use for projects with new bridge decks and PCC overlays.


90-1.01C(11) Polymer Fibers

Submit fiber manufacturer's product data and instructions for use.

Submit a certificate of compliance for each shipment and type of fibers.

XE "90-1.02A_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 90-1.02A. Use for projects with new bridge decks and PCC overlays.

Replace the row for bridge deck concrete in the table in the 1st paragraph of section 90-1.02A with:

Bridge deck concrete 0.032

XE "90-1.02H_A10-30-15__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 90-1.02H. Use for concrete in direct contact with a corrosive environment.

The following are corrosive environments:

1. Atmosphere within a horizontal distance of 1,000 feet from marine or brackish water. Marine or brackish water has a chloride concentration of 500 ppm or greater.



2. Splash zone for marine or brackish water. The splash zone is defined as the region from the mean lower low water elevation to 20 feet above the mean higher high water elevation or a horizontal distance of 20 feet from the edge of water at the mean higher high water elevation.

3. Soil or water with a chloride concentration of 500 ppm or greater, a sulfate concentration of 2,000 ppm or greater, or a pH of 5.5 or less.

4. Areas exposed to deicing salt, snow run-off, or snow blower spray.

Information regarding the chloride concentration, sulfate concentration, and pH level of soil and water should be found in the Foundation Report.

Add to section 90-1.02H:

1. Use for (1) steel-reinforced concrete in a corrosive environment or (2) any concrete in direct contact with soil or water having a sulfate concentration of 2,000 ppm or greater or a pH of 5.5 or less. List only the specific elements or portions that are directly exposed to corrosive environment; use a table if necessary.

HKP** Entire cConcrete at Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen) and Grayson Creek Bridge (Replace)________ is in a corrosive environment.

2. Use for concrete requiring footnote (d) of Table 5.12.3-1 of the California Amendments to AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications or footnote (2) of Table 855.4B of the Highway Design Manual. List the elements; use a table if necessary.

HKP** For entire concrete at Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen) and Grayson Creek Bridge (Replace)________, the cementitious material must be composed of one of the following, by weight:

1. 20 percent natural pozzolan or fly ash with a CaO content of up to 10 percent, 5 percent silica fume, and 75 percent portland cement

2. 12 percent silica fume, metakaolin, or UFFA, and 88 percent portland cement 3. 50 percent GGBFS and 50 percent portland cement

3. Use for concrete in all corrosive environments. List only the specific element or portion that is exposed. Examples of elements exposed to deicing salt are concrete in barrier rails, deck slabs and slab spans of bridges, roof sections of exposed top box culverts, concrete pavement surfaces, and sidewalks and other minor structures adjacent to the traveled way in an area that deicing chemicals will be applied.

HKP** For entire concrete at Walnut Creek Bridge (Widen) and Grayson Creek Bridge (Replace)________, the ratio of the quantity of free water to the quantity of cementitious material must not exceed 0.40.



XE "90-1.02K_A04-15-16__2015" Page 1 of 1


Section 90-1.02K. Use for projects with new bridge decks and PCC overlays.


90-1.02K Polymer Fibers

Fibers must comply with ASTM D 7508. Microfibers must be from 1/2 to 2 inches long. Macrofibers must be from 1 to 2-1/2 inches long.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

91 PAINT

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

92 ASPHALT BINDERS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

93 RESERVED

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

94 ASPHALTIC EMULSIONS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

95 EPOXY

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

96 GEOSYNTHETICS

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

97–98 RESERVED

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION XII BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

99 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION


Revised Standard Specifications 248

XE "RSS_A05-06-16__2015" Page 1 of 79

RSS. Use in all projects. Do not add. Inserted by boilerplate merge.

REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DATED

05-06-16

ORGANIZATION Revised standard specifications are under headings that correspond with the main-section headings of the Standard Specifications. A main-section heading is a heading shown in the table of contents of the Standard Specifications. A date under a main-section heading is the date of the latest revision to the section.

Each revision to the Standard Specifications begins with a revision clause that describes or introduces a revision to the Standard Specifications. For a revision clause that describes a revision, the date on the right above the clause is the publication date of the revision. For a revision clause that introduces a revision, the date on the right above a revised term, phrase, clause, paragraph, or section is the publication date of the revised term, phrase, clause, paragraph, or section. For a multiple-paragraph or multiple-section revision, the date on the right above a paragraph or section is the publication date of the paragraphs or sections that follow.

Any paragraph added or deleted by a revision clause does not change the paragraph numbering of the Standard Specifications for any other reference to a paragraph of the Standard Specifications.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION I GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 GENERAL

04-15-16 Add to the 1st table in section 1-1.06:

04-15-16

APCD air pollution control district AQMD air quality management district

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC

05-06-16 Replace the paragraphs in section 7-1.02I(2) with:

05-06-16

Under 2 CA Code of Regs § 11105:

1. During the performance of this contract, the recipient, contractor, and its subcontractors shall not deny the contract's benefits to any person on the basis of race, religious creed, color, national origin,



ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition, genetic information, marital status, sex, gender, gender identity, gender expression, age, sexual orientation, or military and veteran status, nor shall they discriminate unlawfully against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition, genetic information, marital status, sex, gender, gender identity, gender expression, age, sexual orientation, or military and veteran status. Contractor shall insure that the evaluation and treatment of employees and applicants for employment are free of such discrimination.

2. Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Fair Employment and Housing Act (Gov. Code, § 12900 et seq.), the regulations promulgated thereunder (Cal. Code Regs., tit. 2, § 11000 et seq.), the provisions of Article 9.5, Chapter 1, Part 1, Division 3, Title 2 of the Government Code (Gov. Code, §§ 11135-11139.5), and the regulations or standards adopted by the awarding state agency to implement such article.

3. Contractor or recipient shall permit access by representatives of the Department of Fair Employment and Housing and the awarding state agency upon reasonable notice at any time during the normal business hours, but in no case less than 24 hours' notice, to such of its books, records, accounts, and all other sources of information and its facilities as said Department or Agency shall require to ascertain compliance with this clause.

4. Recipient, contractor and its subcontractors shall give written notice of their obligations under this clause to labor organizations with which they have a collective bargaining or other agreement.

5. The contractor shall include the nondiscrimination and compliance provisions of this clause in all subcontracts to perform work under the contract.

Under 2 CA Code of Regs § 11122:

STANDARD CALIFORNIA NONDISCRIMINATION CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS (GOV. CODE SECTION 12990)

These specifications are applicable to all state contractors and subcontractors having a construction contract or subcontract of $5,000 or more.

1. As used in the specifications: a. "Act" means the Fair Employment and Housing Act. b. "Administrator" means Administrator, Office of Compliance Programs, California Department of

Fair Employment and Housing, or any person to whom the Administrator delegates authority; 2. Whenever the contractor or any subcontractor subcontracts a portion of the work, it shall include in

each subcontract of $5,000 or more the nondiscrimination clause in this contract directly or through incorporation by reference. Any subcontract for work involving a construction trade shall also include the Standard California Construction Contract Specifications, either directly or through incorporation by reference.

3. The contractor shall implement the specific nondiscrimination standards provided in paragraphs 6(a) through (e) of these specifications.

4. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a union with whom the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer members of any group protected by the Act shall excuse the contractor's obligations under these specifications, Government Code section 12990, or the regulations promulgated pursuant thereto.5. In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted, such apprentices and trainees must be employed by the contractor during the training period, and the contractor must have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be trained pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor or the California Department of Industrial Relations.

5. In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted, such apprentices and trainees must be employed by the contractor during the training period, and the contractor must have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be trained



pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor or the California Department of Industrial Relations.

6. The contractor shall take specific actions to implement its nondiscrimination program. The evaluation of the contractor's compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results from its actions. The contractor must be able to demonstrate fully its efforts under steps a. through e. below: a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation, and coercion at

all sites, and at all facilities at which the contractor's employees are assigned to work. The contractor shall specifically ensure that all foremen, superintendents, and other on-site supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the contractor's obligations to maintain such a working environment.

b. Provide written notification within seven days to the director of the DFEH when the referral process of the union or unions with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has impeded the contractor's efforts to meet its obligations.

c. Disseminate the contractor's equal employment opportunity policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and training, recruitment and outreach programs and requesting their cooperation in assisting the contractor to meet its obligations; and by posting the company policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location where construction work is performed.

d. Ensure all personnel making management and employment decisions regarding hiring, assignment, layoff, termination, conditions of work, training, rates of pay or other employment decisions, including all supervisory personnel, superintendents, general foremen, on-site foremen, etc., are aware of the contractor's equal employment opportunity policy and obligations, and discharge their responsibilities accordingly.

e. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments, and other personnel practices, do not have a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring all personnel and employment related activities to ensure that the equal employment opportunity policy and the contractor's obligations under these specifications are being carried out.

7. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations that assist in fulfilling their equal employment opportunity obligations. The efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor-union, contractor-community, or other similar group of which the contractor is a member and participant, may be asserted as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under these specifications provided that the contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on equal employment opportunity in the industry, ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the contractor's workforce participation, and can provide access to documentation that demonstrates the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the contractor. The obligation to comply, however, is the contractor's.

8. The contractor is required to provide equal employment opportunity for all persons. Consequently, the contractor may be in violation of the Fair Employment and Housing Act (Government Code section 12990 et seq.) if a particular group is employed in a substantially disparate manner.

9. The contractor shall not use the nondiscrimination standards to discriminate against any person because race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition, genetic information, marital status, sex, gender, gender identity, gender expression, age, sexual orientation, or military and veteran status.

10. The contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with any person or firm decertified from state contracts pursuant to Government Code section 12990.

11. The contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specifications and the nondiscrimination clause, including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered pursuant to Government Code section 12990 and its implementing regulations by the awarding agency. Any contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and Government Code section 12990.

12. The contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to ensure that the company equal employment opportunity policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be required by OCP and to keep records. Records shall at



least include for each employee the name, address, telephone numbers, construction trade, union affiliation if any, employee identification number when assigned, status, (e.g., mechanic, apprentice trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes in status, hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed. Records shall be maintained in any easily understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing records satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be required to maintain separate records.

Add to the end of the 2nd sentence in the 1st paragraph of section 7-1.02K(1): 04-22-16

, and hauling and delivery of ready-mixed concrete.

Add between the 4th and 5th paragraphs of section 7-1.02K(3): 04-22-16

Submitted certified payrolls for hauling and delivering ready-mixed concrete must be accompanied by a written time record. The time record must include:

1. Truck driver's full name and address 2. Name and address of the factory or batching plant 3. Time the concrete was loaded at the factory or batching plant 4. Time the truck returned to the factory or batching plant 5. Truck driver's signature certifying under penalty of perjury that the information contained in this written

time record is true and correct

Replace § 337.15 in the 3rd item in the list in the paragraph of section 7-1.06B with: 05-06-16

§ 337.1

Add between the 1st and 2nd paragraphs of section 7-1.11A: 02-12-16

Comply with 46 CFR 381.7(a)–(b).

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

9 PAYMENT

01-15-16 Replace may withhold in the 1st paragraph of section 9-1.16E(4) with:

01-15-16

withholds

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^



DIVISION II GENERAL CONSTRUCTION 10 GENERAL

04-15-16 Replace section 10-1.02B with:

04-15-16

10-1.02B Traffic Elements

Before starting the operational test of a traffic management system that directly impacts traffic, the system must be ready for operation, and all signs, pavement delineation, and pavement markings must be in place at the system's location.

If maintaining existing traffic management system elements during construction is shown on the Bid Item List, a list of the systems shown within the project limits and their operational status is included in the Information Handout. Before starting job site activities, conduct a preconstruction operational status check of the existing system's elements and each element's communication status with the transportation management center to which it communicates. If an existing system element is discovered and has not been identified, the Department adds the element to the list of systems. The pre- and postconstruction operational status check of the discovered elements is change order work.

If maintaining existing traffic management system elements during construction is not shown on the Bid Item List and an existing system element is discovered during the work, notify the Engineer. The Engineer orders a pre- and postconstruction operational status check of the discovered elements. The status check of the discovered elements is change order work.

Conduct the status check with the Engineer and an electrical representative from the traffic operations office of the district in which the work is located. The Department provides you a list of the preconstruction operational status-check results, including:

1. Existing traffic management system elements and their locations within the project limits 2. Fully functioning elements 3. Nonoperational elements Before Contract acceptance, conduct a postconstruction operational status check of all elements shown on the list with the Engineer and an electrical representative from the traffic operations office of the district in which the work is located.

Replace 10-3 of section 10 with: 04-15-16

10-2–10-3 RESERVED

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

12 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

04-15-16 Replace section 12-3.32 with:

04-15-16

12-3.32 PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGNS

12-3.32A General

12-3.32A(1) Summary

Section 12-3.32A includes specifications for placing portable changeable message signs.




Reserved


If requested, submit a certificate of compliance for each PCMS.

Submit your cell phone number before starting the first activity that requires a PCMS.


Reserved

12-3.32B Materials

Each PCMS must have a message board, controller unit, power supply, and a structural support system. The unit must be assembled to form a complete self-contained PCMS that can be delivered to the job site and placed into immediate operation. The sign unit must be capable of operating at an ambient air temperature from -4 to 158 degrees F and must be unaffected by mobile radio transmissions other than those required to control the PCMS.

A PCMS must be permanently mounted on a trailer, truck bed, or truck cab under the manufacturer's instructions. The PCMS must be securely mounted on the support vehicle such that it remains attached during any impact to the vehicle. If it is mounted on a trailer, the trailer must be capable of being leveled and plumbed.

A minimum of 3 feet of retroreflective material must be permanently affixed on all 4 sides of the trailer. The retroreflective material need not be continuous but must be visible on the same plane.

The sign panel must be capable of displaying a 3-line message with at least 7 characters per line. The characters must be at least 18 inches in height where the useable shoulder area is at least 15 feet wide. To prevent encroachment onto the traveled way where the useable shoulder area is less than 15 feet wide, you may use a smaller message panel with at least 12-inch-high characters.

The message displayed on the sign must be visible from a distance of 1,500 feet and legible from a distance of 750 feet at noon on a cloudless day and during the night by persons with 20/20 vision or vision corrected to 20/20.

The characters on a sign panel may be 10 inches in height if:

1. PCMS is mounted on a service patrol truck or other incident response vehicle or used for traffic control operations on a highway facility where the posted speed limit is less than 40 mph

2. Message is legible from a distance of at least 650 feet at noon on a cloudless day and during the night by persons with 20/20 vision or vision corrected to 20/20

A matrix sign must provide a complete alphanumeric selection.

A PCMS must automatically adjust its brightness under varying light conditions to maintain the legibility of the message. The sign must be equipped with an automatic-dimming mode that automatically compensates for the influence of temporary light sources or abnormal lighting conditions. The sign must have 3 or more manual dimming modes of different intensities.

During the hours of darkness, a matrix sign not using lamps must be either internally or externally illuminated.

The controller must be an all solid-state unit containing the necessary circuitry for the storage of at least 5 preprogrammed messages. The controller must be installed at a location that allows the operator to perform all functions from a single position. The controller must have a keyboard entry system that allows the operator to generate an infinite number of additional messages in addition to the preprogrammed stored messages. The keyboard must be equipped with a security lockout feature to prevent unauthorized use of the controller.



The controller must have:

1. Nonvolatile memory that stores keyboard-created messages during periods when the power is not activated

2. Variable display rate that allows the operator to match the information display to the speed of approaching traffic

3. Screen upon which messages may be reviewed before being displayed on the sign The flashing-off time must be adjustable from within the control cabinet.


Place a PCMS as far from the traveled way as practicable where it is legible to approaching traffic without encroaching on the traveled way. Where the vertical roadway curvature restricts the sight distance of approaching traffic, place the sign on or before the crest of the curvature where it is most visible to the approaching traffic. Where the horizontal roadway curvature restricts the sight distance of approaching traffic, place the sign at or before the curve where it is most visible to approaching traffic. Where practicable, place the sign behind guardrail or Type K temporary railing.

Make a taper consisting of 9 traffic cones placed 25 feet apart to delineate the location of a PCMS except where the sign is placed behind guardrail or Type K temporary railing.

When in full operation, the bottom of a sign must be at least 7 feet above the roadway in areas where pedestrians are anticipated and 5 feet above the roadway elsewhere, and the top of the sign must be not more than 14.5 feet above the roadway.

Operate the PCMS under the manufacturer's instructions.

Keep the PCMS clean to provide maximum visibility.

If multiple signs are needed, place each sign on the same side of the road at least 1,000 feet apart on freeways and expressways and at least 500 feet apart on other types of highways.

If more than one PCMS is simultaneously visible to traffic, only 1 sign may display a sequential message at any time. Do not use dynamic message displays, such as animation, rapid flashing, dissolving, exploding, scrolling, horizontal movement, or vertical movement of messages. The message must be centered within each line of the display.

You may use an additional PCMS if more than 2 phases are needed to display a message.

Display only messages shown or ordered.

Repeat the entire message continuously in not more than 2 phases of at least 3 seconds per phase. The sum of the display times for both of the phases must be a maximum of 8 seconds. If more than 2 phases are needed to display a message, use an additional PCMS.

You must be available by cell phone during activities that require a sign. Be prepared to immediately change the displayed message if ordered. You may operate the sign with a 24-hour timer control or remote control if authorized.

After the initial placement, move a sign from location to location as ordered.

When a PCMS is not in use, move it to an area at least 15 feet from the edge of the traveled way or remove it from the job site away from traffic.

12-3.32D Payment

Not Used



Replace section 12-4.02C(2) with: 01-15-16

12-4.02C(2) Lane Closure System

12-4.02C(2)(a) General

The Department provides LCS training. Request the LCS training at least 30 days before submitting the 1st closure request. The Department provides the training within 15 days after your request.

LCS training is web-based or held at a time and location agreed upon by you and the Engineer. For web-based training, the Engineer provides you the website address to access the training.

With 5 business days after completion of the training, the Department provides LCS accounts and user IDs to your assigned, trained representatives.

Each representative must maintain a unique password and current user information in the LCS.

04-15-16

The project is not accessible in LCS after Contract acceptance.

01-15-16

12-4.02C(2)(b) Status Updates for Authorized Closures

Update the status of authorized closures using the LCS Mobile web page.

For a stationary closure, use code:

1. 10-97 immediately before you place the 1st advance warning sign 2. 10-98 immediately after you remove all of the advance warning signs For a moving closure, use code:

1. 10-97 immediately before the actual start time of the closure 2. 10-98 immediately after the actual end time of the closure Cancel an authorized closure by using code 10-22 within 2 hours after the authorized start time.

If you are unable to access the LCS Mobile web page, immediately notify the Engineer of the closure's status.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

13 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

05-06-16 Replace General Industrial Permit in the 2nd item in the list in the paragraph of section 13-1.01C(3)

with: 05-06-16

Industrial General Permit

Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 13-1.01D(2) with: 05-06-16

Discharges from manufacturing facilities, such as batch plants and crushing plants, must comply with the discharge requirements in the NPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Industrial Activities; Order No. 2014-0057-DWQ, CAS000001 (Industrial General Permit), issued by the SWRCB. For the Industrial General Permit, go to the SWRCB website.



Replace General Industrial Permit in the 3rd paragraph of section 13-1.01D(2) with: 05-06-16

Industrial General Permit

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

04-15-16 Add between the 1st and 2nd sentences of section 16-2.03A(1):

04-15-16

Constructing a high-visibility fence includes the installation of any signs specified in the special provisions.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION III EARTHWORK AND LANDSCAPE 20 LANDSCAPE

04-15-16 Replace 86 in the 1st paragraph of section 20-2.01C(2) with:

04-15-16

87

Replace 86 in the 1st paragraph of section 20-2.01C(3) with: 04-15-16

87

Replace section 20-2.04A(4) with: 04-15-16

Perform conductors test. The test must comply with the specifications in section 87.

Where the conductors are installed by trenching and backfilling, perform the test after a minimum of 6 inches of backfill material has been placed and compacted over the conductors.

Replace the 1st paragraph of section 20-2.04C(4) with: 04-15-16

Splice low voltage control and neutral conductors under section 87, except do not use Method B.

Replace 86 in the 2nd paragraph of section 20-2.06C with:

87

Replace section 20-2.07B(5) with: 04-15-16

20-2.07B(5) PVC Pipe Conduit Sleeve

PVC pipe conduit sleeves must be schedule 40 complying with ASTM D1785.



Fittings must be schedule 80.

Replace section 20-2.07C(3) with: 04-15-16

20-2.07C(3) PVC Pipe Conduit Sleeve

Where PVC pipe conduit sleeves 2 inches or less in outside diameter is installed under surfacing, you may install by directional boring under section 20-2.07C(2)(b).

For sleeves 2 inches or less in diameter, the top of the conduit must be a minimum of 18 inches below surfacing.

Extend sleeves 6 inches beyond surfacing. Cap ends of conduit until used.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION V SURFACINGS AND PAVEMENTS 39 ASPHALT CONCRETE

04-15-16 Replace SP-2 at each occurrence in section 39 with:

01-15-16

MS-2

Add between the 3rd and 4th paragraphs of section 39-2.01A(1): 04-15-16

For HMA that uses asphalt binder containing crumb rubber modifier, submit a Crumb Rubber Usage Report form monthly and at the end of the project.

Add to the table in the 4th paragraph of section 39-2.01A(1): 01-15-16

Asphalt Institute MS-2 7th edition (2015)

Replace the headings and paragraphs of section 39-2.01A(3)(i) with: 01-15-16

39-2.01A(3)(i) Reserved

Replace the 2nd sentence in the 3rd paragraph of section 39-2.01A(4)(b) with: 01-15-16

Submit 3 parts and keep 1 part.

04-15-16

Delete the 1st paragraph of section 39-2.01B(11).



Add after the 2nd paragraph of section 39-2.01B(11): 04-15-16

For miscellaneous areas and dikes:

1. Choose the aggregate gradation from: 1.1. 3/8-inch Type A HMA aggregate gradation 1.2. 1/2-inch Type A HMA aggregate gradation 1.3. 1/2-inch dike mix aggregate gradation

2. Choose asphalt binder Grade PG 64-10, PG 64-16 or PG 70-10. 3. Minimum asphalt binder content must be:

3.1. 6.40 percent for 3/8-inch Type A HMA aggregate gradation 3.2. 5.70 percent for 1/2-inch Type A HMA aggregate gradation 3.3. 6.40 percent for 1/2-inch dike mix aggregate gradation

If you request and the Engineer authorizes, you may reduce the minimum asphalt binder content.

Aggregate gradation for 1/2-inch dike mix must be within the TV limits for the specified sieve size shown in the following table:

Aggregate Gradation for 1/2-inch Dike Mix (Percentage Passing)

Sieve size Target value limit Allowable tolerance

3/4" 100 -- 1/2" 90–95 TV ± 5

No. 4 70–75 TV ± 5 No. 8 23–25 TV ± 5 No. 50 15–35 TV ± 5 No. 200 7.0–13.0 TV ± 2.0

Replace 39-2.01A(3)(m)(iv) in the 6th paragraph of section 39-2.01C(3)(e) with: 01-15-16

36-3.01C(3)

Add between rectangles and with in the 4th paragraph of section 39-2.01C(16): 04-15-16

, half the lane width,

Add between to and the in item 1 of the 4th paragraph of section 39-2.01C(16): 04-15-16

and along

Replace section 39-2.02A(3)(b) with: 01-15-16

The JMF must be based on the superpave HMA mix design as described in MS-2 Asphalt Mix Design Methods by the Asphalt Institute.



Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 39-2.03A(3)(b) with: 01-15-16

The JMF must be based on the superpave HMA mix design as described in MS-2 Asphalt Mix Design Methods by the Asphalt Institute.

Replace the requirement in the row for Voids in mineral aggregate on plant produced HMA in the 2nd table in section 39-2.03A(4)(e)(i) with:

01-15-16

18.0-23.0

Add before the 1st paragraph of section 39-2.03A(4)(e)(ii)(C): 04-15-16

CRM used must be on the Authorized Materials List for Crumb Rubber Modifier.

CRM must be a ground or granulated combination of scrap tire crumb rubber and high natural scrap tire crumb rubber, CRM must be 75.0 ± 2.0 percent scrap tire crumb rubber and 25.0 ± 2.0 percent high natural scrap tire crumb rubber by total weight of CRM. Scrap tire crumb rubber and high natural scrap tire crumb rubber must be derived from waste tires described in Pub Res Code § 42703.

Replace the row for Hamburg wheel track in the table in section 39-2.03B(2) with: 01-15-16

Hamburg wheel track (min, number of passes at the inflection point)

Binder grade: PG 58 PG 64 PG 70

AASHTO T 324 (Modified)

d

10,000 12,500 15,000

Add to the 2nd paragraph of section 39-2.05A(3)(b): 01-15-16

The material transfer vehicle must receive HMA directly from the truck.

Replace Table 6.1 at each occurrence in the table in section 39-2.05B(2) with: 01-15-16

Table 8.1

Replace SP-2 Asphalt Mixture in the 1st footnote in the table in the 2nd paragraph of section 39-2.05B(2)(b) with:

01-15-16

MS-2 Asphalt Mix Design Methods

Replace Manual Series No. 2 (MS-2) in the 1st footnote in the table in the 2nd paragraph of section 39-2.05B(2)(b) with:

01-15-16

MS-2 Asphalt Mix Design Methods



Replace 39-3.05 in the 1st paragraph of section 39-3.04A with: 01-15-16

39-3.04

Replace 39-3.06 in the 1st paragraph of section 39-3.05A with: 01-15-16

39-3.05

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION VI STRUCTURES 49 PILING

04-15-16 04-15-16

Delete the 2nd paragraph of section 49-1.01A.

04-15-16

Delete the 3rd paragraph of section 49-1.03.

04-15-16

Delete the 2nd paragraph of section 49-1.04.

01-15-16

Delete the 4th paragraph of section 49-2.01C(5).

Replace the 1st paragraph of section 49-3.02A(4)(d)(i) with: 04-15-16

Section 49-3.02A(4)(d) applies to CIDH concrete piles except for piles (1) less than 24 inches in diameter, (2) constructed in dry holes without the use of slurry, or (3) constructed in holes dewatered without the use of temporary casing to control ground water.

Replace low in the last sentence of item 2 in the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 49-3.02C(5) with:

02-12-16

below

Replace the 2nd sentence of the 3rd paragraph of section 49-3.02C(9) with: 04-15-16

Do not vibrate the concrete.



Add to section 49-3.03A(3): 01-15-16

Submit a Pile and Driving Data Form under section 49-2.01A(3)(a) if specified in the special provisions.

Replace section 49-4.03 with: 01-15-16


49-4.03A General

Reserved

49-4.03B Drilled Holes

Drill holes for steel soldier piles into natural foundation material. Drilled holes must be accurately located, straight, and true.

Furnish and place temporary casings or tremie seals where necessary to control water or to prevent caving of the hole.

Before placing the steel soldier pile, remove loose materials existing at the bottom of the hole after drilling operations have been completed.

Do not allow surface water to enter the hole. Remove all water in the hole before placing concrete.

If temporary casings are used, they must comply with section 49-3.02C(3).

49-4.03C Steel Soldier Piles

Plumb and align the pile before placing concrete backfill and lean concrete backfill. The pile must be at least 2 inches clear of the sides of the hole for the full length of the hole to be filled with concrete backfill and lean concrete backfill. Ream or enlarge holes that do not provide the clearance around steel piles.

Maintain alignment of the pile in the hole while placing backfill material.

Clean and prepare piles in anticipated heat affected areas before splicing steel piles or welding concrete anchors.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

51 CONCRETE STRUCTURES

04-15-16 Add to the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 51-1.01A:

04-15-16

8. Pile extensions

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

52 REINFORCEMENT

01-15-16 Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 52-6.03B with:



01-15-16

For uncoated and galvanized reinforcing bars complying with ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, ASTM A706/A706M, or ASTM A767/A767M, Class 1, the length of lap splices must be at least:

1. 45 diameters of the smaller bar spliced for reinforcing bars no. 8 or smaller 2. 60 diameters of the smaller bar spliced for reinforcing bars nos. 9, 10, and 11 For epoxy-coated reinforcing bars and alternatives to epoxy-coated reinforcing bars complying with ASTM A775/A775M, ASTM A934/A934M, ASTM A1035/A1035M, or ASTM A1055/A1055M, the length of lap splices must be at least:

1. 65 diameters of the smaller bar spliced for reinforcing bars no. 8 or smaller 2. 85 diameters of the smaller bar spliced for reinforcing bars nos. 9, 10, and 11

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

53 SHOTCRETE

01-15-16 Replace 632 in item 1 in the list in the 3rd paragraph of section 53-1.02 with:

01-15-16

675

Replace item 2 in the list in the 3rd paragraph of section 53-1.02 with: 01-15-16

2. You may substitute a maximum of 30 percent coarse aggregate for the fine aggregate. Coarse aggregate must comply with section 90-1, except section 90-1.02C(4)(d) does not apply. The gradation for the coarse aggregate must comply with the gradation specified in section 90-1.02C(4)(b) for the 1/2 inch x No. 4 or the 3/8 inch x No. 8 primary aggregate nominal size.

Replace shotcrete in the 2nd sentence of the 4th paragraph of section 53-1.02 with: 01-15-16

concrete

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

59 STRUCTURAL STEEL COATINGS

01-15-16 Replace Type S in the 2nd paragraph of section 59-1.02A with:

01-15-16

Type M or Type S

Replace the paragraphs in section 59-2.01C(1) with: 01-15-16

Clean and paint all exposed structural steel and other metal surfaces.



Cleaning and painting of new structural steel must be performed in an enclosed shop as defined in AISC-420-10/SSPC-QP 3.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION VII DRAINAGE FACILITIES 71 EXISTING DRAINAGE FACILITIES

01-15-16 Replace items 5 and 6 in the list in the 1st paragraph of section 71-3.01D with:

01-15-16

5. Performing postrehabilitation inspection

Add after the 4th paragraph of section 71-3.01D: 01-15-16

Record the quantity of grout that is installed and submit this quantity. The Department does not pay for grout that leaks through to the inside of the culvert. The Department does not pay for grout material that is wasted, disposed of, or remaining on hand after the completion of the work.

Replace the 2nd heading in section 71-5.03 with: 01-15-16

71-5.03B Frames, Covers, Grates, and Manholes

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION VIII MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION 74 PUMPING EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS

04-15-16 Replace 87-1.03K in the 4th paragraph of section 74-3.03B(2) with:

04-15-16

87

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION IX TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

83 RAILINGS AND BARRIERS

04-15-16 04-15-16

Delete to in the 4th paragraph of section 83-1.02B.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^



84 MARKINGS

04-15-16 Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 84-9.03B with:

04-15-16

Completely remove traffic stripes and pavement markings, including any paint in the gaps, by methods that do not remove pavement to a depth of more than 1/8 inch.

Add between the 2nd and 3rd paragraphs of section 84-9.03B: 04-15-16

Submit your proposed method for removing traffic stripes and pavement markings at least 7 days before starting the removal work. Allow 2 business days for the review.

Remove pavement marking such that the old message cannot be identified. Make any area removed by grinding rectangular. Water must not puddle in the ground areas. Fog seal ground areas on asphalt concrete pavement.

04-15-16

Delete materially in the 1st paragraph of section 84-9.03D.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION X ELECTRICAL WORK Replace section 86 with:

04-15-16

86 GENERAL

04-15-16 86-1.01 GENERAL

86-1.01A Summary

Section 86 includes general specifications for furnishing electrical equipment and materials.

Electrical equipment and materials must comply with part 4 of the California MUTCD and 8 CA Code of Regs, chapter 4, subchapter 5, "Electrical Safety Orders."

Galvanized equipment and materials must comply with section 75-1.02B.


accessible pedestrian signal: Accessible pedestrian signal as defined in the California MUTCD.

accessible walk indication: Activated audible and vibrotactile action during the walk interval.

actuation: Actuation as defined in the California MUTCD.

ambient sound level: Background sound level in dB at a given location.

ambient sound sensing microphone: Microphone that measures the ambient sound level in dB and automatically adjusts the accessible pedestrian signal speaker's volume.

audible speech walk message: Audible prerecorded message that communicates to pedestrians which street has the walk interval.

channel: Discrete information path.



CALiPER: Commercially Available LED Product Evaluation and Reporting. A U.S. Department of Energy program that individually tests and provides unbiased information on the performance of commercially available LED luminaires and lights.

controller assembly: Assembly for controlling a system's operations, consisting of a controller unit and auxiliary equipment housed in a waterproof cabinet.

controller unit: Part of the controller assembly performing the basic timing and logic functions.

correlated color temperature: Absolute temperature in kelvin of a blackbody whose chromaticity most nearly resembles that of the light source.

detector: Detector as defined in the California MUTCD.

electrolier: Assembly of a lighting standard and luminaire.

flasher: Device for opening and closing signal circuits at a repetitive rate.

flashing beacon control assembly: Assembly of switches, circuit breakers, terminal blocks, flasher, wiring, and other necessary electrical components housed in a single enclosure for operating a beacon.

house side lumens: Lumens from a luminaire directed to light up areas between the fixture and the pole, such as sidewalks at intersection or areas off the shoulders on freeways.

illuminance gradient: Ratio of the minimum illuminance on a 1-foot square of sign panel to that on an adjacent 1-foot square of sign panel.

inductive loop detector: Detector capable of being actuated by an inductance change caused by a vehicle passing or standing over the loop. An inductive loop detector includes a loop or group of loops installed in the roadway and a lead-in cable installed and connected inside a controller cabinet.

junction temperature: Temperature of the electronic junction of the LED device. The junction temperature is critical in determining photometric performance, estimating operational life, and preventing catastrophic failure of the LED.

L70: Extrapolated life in hours of the luminaire when the luminous output depreciates 30 percent from the initial values.

lighting standard: Pole and mast arm supporting the luminaire.

LM-79: Test method from the Illumination Engineering Society of North America specifying the test conditions, measurements, and report format for testing solid state lighting devices, including LED luminaires.

LM-80: Test method from the Illumination Engineering Society of North America specifying the test conditions, measurements, and report format for testing and estimating the long-term performance of LEDs for general lighting purposes.

luminaire: Assembly that houses the light source and controls the light emitted from the light source.

National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program: U.S. Department of Energy program that accredits independent testing laboratories.

powder coating: Coating applied electrostatically using exterior-grade, UV-stable, polymer powder.

power factor: Ratio of the real power component to the complex power component.

pretimed controller assembly: Assembly operating traffic signals under a predetermined cycle length.

programming mechanism: Device to program the accessible pedestrian signal operation.



pull box: Box with a cover that is installed in an accessible place in a conduit run to facilitate the pulling in of wires or cables.

push button information message: Push button information message as defined in the California MUTCD.

push button locator tone: Push button locator tone as defined in the California MUTCD.

signal face: Signal face as defined in the California MUTCD.

signal head: Signal head as defined in the California MUTCD.

signal indication: Signal indication as defined in the California MUTCD.

signal section: Signal section as defined in the California MUTCD.

signal standard: Pole with or without mast arms carrying 1 or more signal faces.

street side lumens: Lumens from a luminaire directed to light up areas between the fixture and the roadway, such as traveled ways and freeway lanes.

surge protection device: Subsystem or component that protects equipment against short-duration voltage transients in power line.

total harmonic distortion: Ratio of the rms value of the sum of the squared individual harmonic amplitudes to the rms value of the fundamental frequency of a complex waveform.

traffic-actuated controller assembly: Assembly for operating traffic signals under the varying demands of traffic as registered by detector actuation.

traffic phase: Traffic phase as defined in the California MUTCD.

vehicle: Vehicle as defined in the California Vehicle Code.

vibrotactile pedestrian device: Vibrotactile pedestrian device as defined in the California MUTCD.

86-1.01C Submittals

86-1.01C(1) General

Within 15 days after Contract approval, submit a list of equipment and materials you propose to install.

Submit the list before shipping equipment and materials to the job site. The list must include:

1. Manufacturer's name 2. Make and model number 3. Month and year of manufacture 4. Lot and serial numbers 5. Contract number 6. Your contact information Submit confirmation of the vendor's acceptance of the order for the electrical equipment and materials as an informational submittal.

Submit 3 sets of computer-generated, schematic wiring diagrams for each cabinet.

Diagrams, plans, and drawings must be prepared using graphic symbols in IEEE 315, "Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronic Diagrams."

Submit a schedule of values within 15 days after Contract approval.

Do not include costs for the traffic control system in the schedule of values.



Submit a manufacturer's maintenance manual or combined maintenance and operation manual as an informational submittal. The manual must have a master item index that includes:

1. Specifications 2. Design characteristics 3. General operation theory 4. Function of all controls 5. Troubleshooting procedure 6. Parts list, descriptions, stock numbers, and settings 7. Block circuit diagram 8. Layout of components 9. Schematic diagrams 86-1.01C(2) Pull Boxes

Submit the manufacturer's installation instructions for pull boxes, including:

1. Quantity and size of entries that can be made without degrading the strength of the pull box below the load rating

2. Locations where side entries can be made 3. Acceptable method for creating the entry Submit load-rating test reports for pull boxes from a NRTL.

86-1.01C(3) LED Luminaires

Submit for an LED luminaire:

1. Maximum power in watts 2. Maximum designed junction temperature 3. Heat sink area in square inches 4. Designed junction-to-ambient thermal resistance calculation with thermal resistance components

clearly defined 5. L70 in hours when extrapolated for the average nighttime operating temperature 6. Life expectancy based on the junction temperature 7. Manufacturer's data sheet for the power supply, including the rated life Submit the manufacturer's QC test data for LED luminaires as an informational submittal.

86-1.01C(4) Low-Pressure Sodium Luminaires

Submit the manufacturer's QC test data for low-pressure sodium luminaires as an informational submittal.

86-1.01C(5) Service Equipment Enclosures

Submit shop drawings for a service equipment enclosure to METS.

86-1.01C(6) Signal Heads

Submit a certificate of compliance and the manufacturer's QC test data for signal heads as an informational submittal.

86-1.01C(7) LED Signal Modules

Submit the manufacturer's QC test data for LED signal modules as an informational submittal.

86-1.01C(8) Visors

Submit a certificate of compliance and the manufacturer's QC test data for visors as an informational submittal.



86-1.01C(9) LED Countdown Pedestrian Signal Face Modules

Submit the manufacturer's QC test data for LED countdown pedestrian signal face modules as an informational submittal.

86-1.01C(10) Accessible Pedestrian Signals

Submit the manufacturer's QC test data for accessible pedestrian signals as an informational submittal.

86-1.01D Quality Assurance

86-1.01D(1) General

Electrical equipment must comply with one or more of the following standards:

1. ANSI 2. ASTM 3. EIA/ECIA 4. NEMA 5. NETA 6. UL/NRTL 7. TIA Materials must comply with:

1. FCC rules 2. ITE standards 3. NEC 4. California Electrical Code 86-1.01D(2) Source Quality Control

Service equipment enclosures and cabinets must be inspected and tested at the source.

86-1.01D(3) Department Acceptance

Deliver material and equipment for testing to METS.

Allow 30 days for testing. The Department notifies you when testing is complete.

If the Department accepts the material or equipment, you must pick it up from the test site and deliver it to the job site.

If the Department rejects material or equipment, remove it within 5 business days after you are notified it is rejected. If it is not removed within that period, the Department may remove it and ship it to you and deduct the costs of labor, material and shipping.

Resubmit a new sample and allow 30 days for retesting. The retesting period starts when the replacement material or equipment is delivered to METS.

86-1.02 MATERIALS

86-1.02A General

Anchor bolts, anchor bars or studs, and nuts and washers must comply with section 75-1.02.

Bolt threads must accept galvanized standard nuts without requiring tools or causing removal of protective coatings.

86-1.02B Conduit and Accessories

86-1.02B(1) General

Conduit and fittings must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:



Conduit and Fitting Requirements Type Requirement

1 Must be hot-dip galvanized rigid steel complying with UL 6 and ANSI C80.1. The zinc coating must comply with copper sulfate test requirements in UL 6. Fittings must be electrogalvanized and certified under UL 514B.

2 Must comply with requirements for Type 1 conduit and be coated with PVC or polyethylene. The exterior thermoplastic coating must have a minimum thickness of 35 mils. The internal coating must have a minimum thickness of 2 mils. Coated conduit must comply with NEMA RN 1, or NRTL PVC-001.

3 Must be Type A, extruded, rigid PVC conduit complying with UL 651 or must be HDPE conduit complying with UL 651A.

4 Must have an inner, flexible metal core covered by a waterproof, nonmetallic, sunlight-resistant jacket, and must be UL listed for use as a grounding conductor. Fittings must be certified under UL 514B.

5 Must be intermediate steel complying with UL 1242 and ANSI C80.6. The zinc coating must comply with copper sulfate test requirements specified in UL 1242. Fittings must be electrogalvanized and certified under UL 514B.

Bonding bushings installed on metal conduit must be insulated and either a galvanized or zinc-alloy type.

86-1.02B(2) Structures Accessories

Steel hangers, steel brackets, and other fittings used to support conduit in or on a wall or bridge superstructure must comply with section 75-3.

Precast concrete cradles for conduit must be made of minor concrete and commercial-quality welded wire fabric. The minor concrete must contain a minimum of 590 lb of cementitious material per cubic yard. The cradles must be moist cured for a minimum of 3 days.

86-1.02C Pull Boxes

86-1.02C(1) General

Pull box cover must have a marking on the top that is:

1. Clearly defined 2. Uniform in depth 3. Parallel to either side 4. 1 to 3 inches in height Cover marking must be:

1. SERVICE for service circuits between a service point and service disconnect 2. SERVICE IRRIGATION for circuits from a service equipment enclosure to an irrigation controller 3. SERVICE BOOSTER PUMP for circuits from a service equipment enclosure to the booster pump 4. TDC POWER for circuits from a service equipment enclosure to telephone demarcation cabinet 5. LIGHTING for a lighting system 6. SIGN ILLUMINATION for a sign illumination system 7. SIGNAL AND LIGHTING for a signal and lighting system 8. RAMP METER for a ramp metering system 9. TMS for a traffic monitoring station 10. FLASHING BEACON for a flashing beacon system 11. CMS for a changeable message sign system 12. INTERCONNECT for an interconnect conduit and cable system The load rating must be stenciled on the inside and outside of the pull box and the cover.

If a transformer or other device must be placed in the pull box, include recesses for a hanger.



The hardware must be stainless steel with 18 percent chromium and 8 percent nickel content.

86-1.02C(2) Nontraffic Pull Boxes

A nontraffic pull box and cover must comply with ANSI/SCTE 77, "Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity," for Tier 22 load rating and must be gray or brown.

Each new pull box must have a cover with an electronic marker cast inside.

A pull box extension must be made of the same material as the pull box. The extension may be another pull box if the bottom edge of the pull box fits into the opening for the cover.

The bolts, nuts, and washers must be a captive design and galvanized. Captive bolts for securing the cover of nontraffic pull boxes must be capable of withstanding a torque from 55 to 60 ft-lb and a minimum pull-out strength of 750 lb.

86-1.02C(3) Traffic Pull Boxes

A traffic pull box and cover must comply with ASTM C857 for HS20-44 loading.

The frame must be anchored to the box with 2-1/4-inch-long concrete anchors with a 1/4 inch diameter. A no. 3-1/2(T) pull box must have 4 concrete anchors, one placed in each corner. No. 5(T) and no. 6(T) pull boxes must have 6 concrete anchors, one placed in each corner and one near the middle of each of the longer sides.

Nuts must be vibration-resistant, zinc-plated, carbon steel and have a wedge ramp at the root of the thread.

Before galvanizing a steel or cast iron cover, the manufacturer must apply the cover marking by one of the following methods:

1. Use a cast iron strip at least 1/4 inch thick with letters raised a minimum of 1/16 inch. Fasten the strip to the cover with 1/4-inch, flathead, stainless steel machine bolts and nuts. Peen the bolts after tightening.

2. Use a sheet steel strip at least 0.027 inch thick with letters raised a minimum of 1/16 inch. Fasten the strip to the cover by spot welding, tack welding, or brazing with 1/4-inch stainless steel rivets or 1/4-inch, roundhead, stainless steel machine bolts and nuts. Peen the bolts after tightening.

The steel cover must be countersunk approximately 1/4 inch to accommodate the bolt head. When tightened, the bolt head must be no more than 1/8 inch above the top of the cover.

86-1.02C(4) Reserved

86-1.02D Tapes

86-1.02D(1) General

Reserved

86-1.02D(2) Pull Tape

Pull tape must be a flat, woven, lubricated, soft-fiber, polyester tape with a minimum tensile strength of 1,800 lb. The tape must have sequential measurement markings every 3 feet.

86-1.02D(3) Reserved

86-1.02E Reserved

86-1.02F Conductors and Cables

86-1.02F(1) Conductors

86-1.02F(1)(a) General

Reserved



86-1.02F(1)(b) Reserved

86-1.02F(1)(c) Copper Conductors

86-1.02F(1)(c)(i) General

Copper wire must comply with ASTM B3 and B8.

Conductor must be clearly and permanently marked the entire length of its outer surface with:

1. Manufacturer's name or trademark 2. Insulation-type letter designation 3. Conductor size 4. Voltage 5. Temperature rating 6. Number of conductors for a cable The minimum insulation thickness and color code requirements must comply with NEC.

A conductor must be UL listed or NRTL certified and rated for 600 V(ac).

Insulation for no. 14 to no. 4 conductors must be one of the following:

1. Type TW PVC under ASTM D2219 2. Type THW PVC 3. Type USE, RHH, or RHW cross-linked polyethylene The insulation for no. 2 and larger conductors must be one of the above or THWN.

Conductors must be identified as shown in the following table:



Conductor Identification

Circuit Signal phase or function

Identification

Size

Insulation colord

Band symbols Base Stripea

Signals (vehicle)

a, b

2, 6 Red, yel, brn Blk 2, 6 14 4, 8 Red, yel, brn Ora 4, 8 14 1, 5 Red, yel, brn None 1, 5 14 3, 7 Red, yel, brn Pur 3, 7 14

Ramp meter 1 Red, yel, brn None NBR 14 Ramp meter 2 Red, yel, brn Blk NBR 14

Pedestrian signals

2p, 6p Red, brn Blk 2p, 6p 14 4p, 8p Red, brn Ora 4p, 8p 14 1p, 5p Red, brn None 1p, 5p 14 3p, 7p Red, brn Pur 3p, 7p 14

Pedestrian push buttons

2p, 6p Blu Blk P-2, P-6 14 4p, 8p Blu Ora P-4, P-8 14 1p, 5p Blu None P-1, P-5 14 3p, 7p Blu Pur P-3, P-7 14

Traffic signal controller cabinet

Ungrounded circuit conductor Blk None CON-1 6

Grounded circuit conductor Wht None CON-2 6

Highway lighting pull box

to luminaire

Ungrounded - line 1 Blk None NBR 14 Ungrounded - line 2 Red None NBR 14

Grounded Wht None NBR 14 Multiple highway lighting

Ungrounded - line 1 Blk None ML1 10

Ungrounded - line 2 Red None ML2 10

Lighting control Ungrounded - PEU Blk None C1 14

Switching leg from PEU unit or SM transformer Red None C2 14

Service

Ungrounded - line 1 (signals) Blk None NBR 6

Ungrounded - line 2 (lighting) Red None NBR 8

Sign lighting Ungrounded - line 1 Blk None SL-1 10 Ungrounded - line 2 Red None SL-2 10

Flashing beacons

Ungrounded between flasher and beacons Red or yel None F-Loc.

c 14

Grounded circuit

conductor

Pedestrian push buttons Wht Blk NBR 14 Signals and multiple

lighting Wht None NBR 10 Flashing beacons and

sign lighting Wht None NBR 12 Lighting control Wht None C-3 14

Service Wht None NBR 14 Railroad

preemption Blk None R 14 Spares Blk None NBR 14



NBR = No band required PEU=Photoelectric unit aOn overlaps, the insulation is striped for the 1st phase in the designation, e.g., phase (2+3) conductor is

striped as for phase 2. bBand for overlap and special phases as required

cFlashing beacons having separate service do not require banding.

dColor Code: Yel-Yellow, Brn-Brown, Blu-Blue, Blk-Black, Wht-White, Ora-Orange, Pur-Purple

The insulation color must be homogeneous throughout the full depth of the insulation. The identification stripe must be continuous throughout the length of the conductor.

86-1.02F(1)(c)(ii) Bonding Jumpers and Equipment Grounding Conductors

A bonding jumper must be copper wire or copper braid of the same cross-sectional area as a no. 8 conductor or larger.

An equipment grounding conductor may be bare or insulated.

86-1.02F(1)(c)(iii) Inductive Loop Conductors

Inductive loop conductor must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:

Conductor Requirements for Inductive Loop Detectors Loop wire Requirement

Type 1 Type RHW-USE neoprene-jacketed or Type USE cross-linked polyethylene, insulated, no. 12, stranded copper wire with a minimum 40-mils insulation thickness at any point.

Type 2

Type THWN or Type XHHW, no. 14, stranded copper wire in a plastic tubing. The plastic tubing must be polyethylene or vinyl rated for use at 105 °C and resistant to oil and gasoline. The outside diameter of the tubing must be at most 0.27 inch with a wall thickness of at least 0.028 inch.

86-1.02F(1)(d) Reserved

Reserved

86-1.02F(2) Cables


Reserved


Reserved

86-1.02F(2)(c) Reserved

86-1.02F(2)(d) Copper Cables

86-1.02F(2)(d)(i) General

The conductor wire size for a detector lead-in cable must comply with the requirements of ASTM B286.

Cable, except a detector lead-in cable, must be clearly and permanently marked the entire length of its outer surface with:

1. Manufacturer's name or trademark 2. Insulation-type letter designation 3. Conductor size 4. Voltage 5. Temperature rating 6. Number of conductors for a cable



86-1.02F(2)(d)(ii) Conductors Signal Cables

A conductors signal cable must have a black polyethylene jacket with an inner polyester binder sheath. The cable jacket must be rated for 600 V(ac) and 75 degrees C. Filler material, if used, must be polyethylene.

The individual conductors in the cable must be solid copper complying with ASTM B286 with Type THWN insulation. The minimum thickness of insulation must comply with NEC for conductor sizes no. 14 to no.10. The minimum thickness of the nylon jacket must be 4 mils.

Cable must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:



Cable type

a

Conductor quantity and

type

Cable jacket thickness (mils)

Maximum nominal outside

diameter (inch)

Conductor color code

Average Minimum

3CSC 3 no. 14 44 36 0.40 Blue/black, blue/orange, white/black stripe

5CSC 5 no. 14 44 36 0.50 Red, yellow, brown, black, white

9CSC 8 no. 14 1 no. 12

60 48 0.65 No. 12 - white, no. 14 - red, yellow, brown, black, and red/black, yellow/black, brown/black, white/black stripe

12CSC 11 no. 14 1 no. 12

60 48 0.80 No. 12 - white, no. 14 - red, yellow, brown, red/black stripe, yellow/black stripe, brown/black stripe, black/red stripe, black/white stripe, black, red/white stripe, brown/white stripe

28CSC 27 no. 14 1 no. 10

80 64 0.90 No. 10 - white no. 14 - red/black stripe, yellow/black stripe, brown/black stripe, red/orange stripe, yellow/orange stripe, brown/orange stripe, red/silver stripe, yellow/silver stripe, brown/silver stripe, red/purple stripe, yellow/purple stripe, brown/purple stripe, red/2 black stripes, brown/2 black stripes, red/2 orange stripes, brown/2 orange stripes, red/2 silver stripes, brown/2 silver stripes, red/2 purple stripes, brown/2 purple stripes, blue/black stripe, blue/orange stripe, blue/silver stripe, blue/purple stripe, white/black stripe, black/red stripe, black



86-1.02F(2)(d)(iii) Detector Lead-in Cables

Conductors for a loop detector lead-in cable must be two no. 16, 19-by-29, stranded, tinned copper wires with calculated cross-sectional areas complying with ASTM B286, table 1 and must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:

Conductor Requirements for Loop Detector Lead-In Cables Lead-in cable Requirement

Type B Insulated with 20 mils of high-density polyethylene. Conductors must be twisted together with at least 2 turns per foot, and the twisted pair must be protected with a copper or aluminum polyester shield. A minimum no. 20 copper drain wire must be connected to the equipment ground within the cabinet. Cable must have a high-density polyethylene or high-density polypropylene outer jacket with a nominal thickness of 32 mils. Include an amorphous, interior, moisture penetration barrier of nonhydroscopic polyethylene or polypropylene fillers.

Type C Comply with International Municipal Signal Association Specification no. 50-2. A minimum no. 20 copper drain wire must be connected to the equipment ground within the cabinet.

86-1.02F(2)(d)(iv) Reserved

86-1.02F(2)(d)(v) Signal Interconnect Cables

A signal interconnect cable must be a 6-pair type with stranded, tinned, copper no. 20 conductors. The insulation for each conductor must be color-coded polypropylene with a minimum 13-mils nominal thickness. The conductors must be in color-coded, twisted pairs. Each pair must be wrapped with an aluminum polyester shield and have a no. 22 or larger, stranded, tinned, copper drain wire inside the shielded pair.

The cable jacket must be black HDPE rated for a minimum of 300 V(ac) and 60 degrees C. The jacket must have a minimum nominal wall thickness of 40 mils.

86-1.02F(2)(e) Reserved

86-1.02G Equipment Identification Characters

Equipment identification characters must be 2-1/2 inch, series D lettering, except on wood poles, they must be 3-inch lettering.

The characters must be self-adhesive reflective labels or paint, except on wood poles, they must be embossed on aluminum.

86-1.02H Splicing Materials

Splicing materials include:

1. Connectors 2. Electrical insulating coating 3. PVC electrical tape 4. Butyl rubber stretchable tape 5. PVC pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 6. Heat shrink tubing Connectors must be C-shaped compression or butt type.

Electrical insulating coating must be a fast drying sealant with low nontoxic fumes.

PVC electrical tape must have a minimum thickness of 80 mils.

Butyl rubber stretchable tape with liner must have a minimum thickness of 120 mils.

PVC pressure-sensitive adhesive electrical tape must have a minimum thickness of 6 mils.



Electrical tapes must be self-fusing, oil- and flame-resistant, synthetic rubber and be UL listed or NRTL certified.

Heat-shrink tubing must be made of irradiated polyolefin tubing with a minimum wall thickness of 40 mils before contraction and an adhesive mastic inner wall. When heated, the inner wall must melt and fill the crevices and interstices of the covered splice area and the outer wall must shrink to form a waterproof insulation.

Heat-shrink tubing must comply with the requirements for extruded, insulating tubing at 600 V(ac) specified in UL Standard 468D and ANSI C119.1 and the requirements shown in the following table:

Heat-Shrink Tubing Requirements Quality characteristic Requirement

Shrinkage ratio of supplied diametera (max, %) 33

Dielectric strength (min, kV/in) 350 Resistivity (min, Ω/in) 25 x 10

13

Tensile strength (min, psi) 2,000 Operating temperature (°C) -40–90 (135 °C in emergency) Water absorption (max, %) 0.5 aWhen heated to 125 °C and allowed to cool to 25 °C

86-1.02I Connectors and Terminals

A connector and terminal must comply with SAE-AS7928 and be a crimp type, rated for 600 V(ac) and either UL listed or NRTL certified.

86-1.02J Standards, Poles, Pedestals, and Posts

Standards for signals, lighting, and flashing beacons, poles for closed circuit television, pedestals for cabinets, posts for extinguishable message sign and posts for pedestrian push button assemblies must comply with section 56-3.

86-1.02K Luminaires

86-1.02K(1) General

Luminaire must be either LED or low-pressure-sodium type.

86-1.02K(2) LED Luminaires

LED luminaire must be on the Authorized Material List for LED luminaires and must:

1. Be self-contained, not requiring assembly. 2. Comply with UL 1598 for luminaires in wet locations. 3. Have a power supply with:

3.1. ANSI/IEC rating of at least IP65. 3.2. 2 leads to accept standard 0-10 V(dc). 3.3. Dimming control compatible with IEC 60929, Annex E. If the control leads are open or the

analog control signal is lost, the circuit must default to 100-percent power. 3.4. Case temperature self rise of 77 degrees F or less above ambient temperature in free air with

no additional heat sinks. 4. Weigh no more than 35 lb. 5. Have a minimum operating life of 63,000 hours when operated for an average time of 11.5 hours at

an average temperature of 70 degrees F. 6. Be designed to operate over a temperature range from -40 to 130 degrees F. 7. Be operationally compatible with photoelectric controls. 8. Have a correlated color temperature range from 3,500 to 6,500 K and a color rendering index of 65 or

greater. 9. Have a maximum-effective projected area of 1.4 sq ft when viewed from either side or end.



10. Have a housing color that matches a color no. 26152 to 26440, 36231 to 36375, or 36440 of FED-STD-595.

11. Have an ANSI C136.41-compliant, locking-type, photocontrol receptacle with dimming connections and a watertight shorting cap.

12. Comply with LM-79, LM-80 and California Test 611. The individual LEDs must be connected such that a catastrophic loss or a failure of 1 LED does not result in the loss of more than 20 percent of the luminous output of the luminaire.

The luminaire must be permanently marked inside the unit and outside of its packaging box. Marking consists of:

1. Manufacturer's name or trademark 2. Month and year of manufacture 3. Model, serial, and lot numbers 4. Rated voltage, wattage, and power in VA An LED luminaire's onboard circuitry must include a surge protection device to withstand high-repetition noise transients caused by utility line switching, nearby lightning strikes, and other interferences. The device must protect the luminaire from damage and failure due to transient voltages and currents as defined in Tables 1 and 4 of ANSI/IEEE C64.41.2 for location category C-High. The surge protection device must comply with UL 1449 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45 based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2 definitions for standard and optional waveforms for location category C-High.

An LED luminaire and its associated onboard circuitry must comply with the Class A emission limits under 47 CFR 15(B) for the emission of electronic noise.

The fluctuations of line voltage must have no visible effect on the luminous output.

The operating voltage may range from 120 to 480 V(ac), 60 ± 3 Hz. Luminaire must operate over the entire voltage range or the voltage range must be selected from one of the following:

1. Luminaire must operate over a voltage range from 95 to 277 V(ac). The operating voltages for this option are 120 V(ac) and 240 V(ac).

2. Luminaire must operate over a voltage range from 347 to 480 V(ac). The operating voltage for this option is 480 V(ac).

LED luminaire must have a power factor of 0.90 or greater. The total harmonic distortion, current, and voltage induced into a power line by a luminaire must not exceed 20 percent. The L70 of the luminaire must be the minimum operating life or greater. Illuminance measurements must be calibrated to standard photopic calibrations.

The maximum power consumption and maintained illuminance of the LED luminaires must comply with the isofootcandle curves as shown.

LED luminaire must not allow more than 10 percent of the rated lumens to project above 80 degrees from vertical and 2.5 percent of the rated lumens to project above 90 degrees from vertical.

Luminaire must have passive thermal management with enough capacity to ensure proper heat dissipation and functioning of the luminaire over its minimum operating life. The maximum junction temperature for the minimum operating life must not exceed 221 degrees F.

The junction-to-ambient thermal resistance must be 95 degrees F per watt or less. The use of fans or other mechanical devices is not allowed for cooling the luminaire. The heat sink must be made of aluminum or other material of equal or lower thermal resistance. The luminaire must contain circuitry that automatically reduces the power to the LEDs so the maximum junction temperature is not exceeded when the ambient temperature is 100 degrees F or greater.



The luminaire's housing must be fabricated from materials designed to withstand a 3,000-hour salt spray test under ASTM B117. All aluminum used in housings and brackets must be made of a marine-grade alloy with less than 0.2 percent copper. All exposed aluminum must be anodized. A chromate conversion undercoating must be used underneath a thermoplastic polyester powder coat.

The housing must be designed to prevent the buildup of water on its top surface. Exposed heat sink fins must be oriented to allow water to run off the luminaire and carry dust and other accumulated debris away from the unit. The optical assembly of the luminaire must be protected against dust and moisture intrusion to at least an UL 60529 rating of IP66. The power supply enclosure must be protected to at least an UL 60529 rating of IP43.

The housing must have a slip fitter capable of being mounted on a 2-inch-diameter pipe tenon. Slip fitter must:

1. Fit on mast arms with outside diameters from 1-5/8 to 2-3/8 inches 2. Be adjustable to a minimum of ±5 degrees from the axis of the tenon in a minimum of 5 steps: +5,

+2.5, 0, -2.5, -5 3. Have clamping brackets that:

3.1. Are made of corrosion-resistant materials or treated to prevent galvanic reactions 3.2. Do not bottom out on the housing bosses when adjusted within the designed angular range 3.3. Do not permanently set in excess of 1/32 inch when tightened

Each refractor or lens must be made of UV-inhibiting high-impact plastic, such as acrylic or polycarbonate, or heat- and impact-resistant glass. The refractor or lens must be resistant to scratching. Polymeric materials, except for the lenses of enclosures containing either the power supply or electronic components of the luminaire, must be made of UL94 V-0 flame-retardant materials.

An LED luminaire and its internal components must be able to withstand mechanical shock and vibration.

If the components are mounted on a down-opening door, the door must be hinged and secured to the luminaire's housing separately from the refractor or flat lens frame. The door must be secured to the housing to prevent accidental opening. A safety cable must mechanically connect the door to the housing.

An LED luminaire must have a barrier-type terminal block secured to the housing to connect field wires. The terminal screws must be captive and equipped with wire grips for conductors up to no. 6.

The conductors and terminals must be identified and marked.

86-1.02K(3) Low-Pressure Sodium Luminaires

A low-pressure sodium luminaire must be an enclosed cutoff or semi-cutoff type and be self-contained, not requiring assembly.

The housing must be either (1) a minimum 1/16-inch-thick, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminum sheet and plate with concealed continuous welds or (2) a minimum 3/32-inch-thick, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene sheet material on a cast aluminum frame. The housing must provide mounting for all electrical components and a slip fitter. The housing must be divided into optical and power compartments that are individually accessible for service and maintenance.

The painted exterior surface of the luminaire must be finished with a fused coating of electrostatically applied polyester powder paint or other UV-inhibiting film. The color must be aluminum gray.

A sealing ring must be installed in the pipe tenon opening to prevent the entry of water and insects into the power and optical compartments. The ring must be made of high-temperature neoprene or equal material.

The power unit assembly must be accessible through a weather-tight, hinged cover secured to the housing with spring latches or captive screws.



The luminaire's hardware must be stainless steel or cadmium plated. Removable components must be secured with machine screws or bolts instead of sheet metal screws.

A semi-cutoff luminaire or a molded refractor-style cutoff luminaire must include a refractor. Other cutoff luminaires must include a flat lens. The refractor assembly and flat lens assembly must be designed to rigidly maintain their shape and be hinged and secured to the housing with spring latches.

The refractor must be either a 1-piece injection-molded polycarbonate with a minimum thickness of 3/32 inch or a 1-piece injection-molded acrylic with a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch. Alternate methods of manufacturing the refractor may be authorized provided minimum specified thicknesses are maintained.

The flat lens must be a 1-piece polycarbonate with a minimum thickness of 3/32 inch, mounted to a metal frame.

The lamp socket must be made of high-temperature, flame-retardant, thermoset material with self-wiping contacts or an equal. The socket must be rated for 660 W and 1,000 V(ac). The position of the socket and support must maintain the lamp in the correct relationship with the reflector and refractor for the designed light distribution pattern. The reflector may be an integral part of the housing.

The luminaire must comply with the isofootcandle curves as shown.

Low-pressure sodium lamp must:

1. Be a 180 W, single-ended, bayonet-base, tubular, gas-discharge lamp 2. Maintain a minimum of 93 percent of its initial lumens over its rated life 3. Reach 80 percent of its light output within 10 minutes 4. Restrike within 1 minute after a power outage or voltage drop at the lamp socket 5. Have ANSI L74/E designation The lamp operating position must be at ±20 degrees from the horizontal.

Lamp must comply with the minimum performance requirements shown in the following table:

Minimum Performance Requirements Quality characteristic Requirement

Initial lumens (lm) 33,000 Rated average life at 10 h/start (h) 18,000

The low-pressure sodium lamp ballast must be an autotransformer or high-reactance type. The power factor must be not less than 90 percent when the ballast is operated at the nominal line voltage with a nominally-rated reference lamp. The lamp wattage regulation spread must not vary by more than ±6 percent for ±10 percent input voltage variation from nominal through life.

At the line voltage, the ballast must have a lamp current crest factor not exceeding 1.8 and ballast loss not exceeding 24 percent for a 180 W ballast.

The ballast must include a multi-circuit connector for quick disconnection.

86-1.02K(4) Reserved

86-1.02L Reserved

86-1.02M Photoelectric Controls

Photoelectric control types are as shown in the following table:



Photoelectric Control Types Control type Description

I Pole-mounted photoelectric unit. Test switch housed in an enclosure. II Pole-mounted photoelectric unit. Contactor and test switch located in a service

equipment enclosure. III Pole-mounted photoelectric unit. Contactor and a test switch housed in an enclosure. IV A photoelectric unit that plugs into a NEMA twist-lock receptacle, integral with the

luminaire. V A photoelectric unit, contactor, and test switch located in a service equipment

enclosure.

The pole-mounted adaptor for Type I, II, and III photoelectric controls must include a terminal block and cable supports or clamps to support the wires.

The enclosure for Type I and III photoelectric controls must be a NEMA 3R type. The enclosure must have a factory-applied, rust-resistant prime coat and finish coat. The enclosure must be hot-dip galvanized or painted to match the color of the lighting standard.

Photoelectric unit must:

1. Have a screen to prevent artificial light from causing cycling. 2. Have a rating of 60 Hz, 105-130 V(ac), 210-240 V(ac), or 105-240 V(ac). 3. Operate at a temperature range from -20 to 55 degrees C. 4. Consume less than 10 W. 5. Be a 3-prong, twist-lock type with a NEMA IP 65 rating, ANSI C136.10-compliant 6. Have a fail-on state 7. Fit into a NEMA-type receptacle 8. Turn on from 1 to 5 footcandles and turn off from 1.5 to 5 times the turn-on level. Measurements must

be made by procedures in EEI-NEMA Standards for Physical and Electrical Interchangeability of Light-Sensitive Control Devices Used in the Control of Roadway Lighting.

Type I, II, III, and V photoelectric controls must have a test switch to allow manual operation of the lighting circuit. Switch must be:

1. Single-hole mounting, toggle type 2. Single pole and single throw 3. Labeled Auto-Test on a nameplate Photoelectric control's contactor must be:

1. Normally open 2. Mechanical-armature type with contacts of fine silver, silver alloy, or equal or better material 3. Installed to provide a minimum space of 2-1/2 inches between the contactor terminals and the

enclosure's sides The terminal blocks must be rated at 25 A, 600 V(ac), molded from phenolic or nylon material, and be the barrier type with plated-brass screw terminals and integral marking strips.

86-1.02N Fused Splice Connectors

The fused splice connector for 240 and 480 V(ac) circuits must simultaneously disconnect both ungrounded conductors. The connector must not have exposed metal parts except for the head of the stainless steel assembly screw. The head of the assembly screw must be recessed a minimum of 1/32 inch below the top of the plastic boss that surrounds the head.

The connector must protect the fuse from water or weather damage. Contact between the fuse and fuse holder must be spring loaded.



Fuses must:

1. Be standard, midget, ferrule type 2. Have a nontime-delay feature 3. Be 3/32 by 1-1/2 inches 86-1.02O Grounding Electrodes

Grounding electrode must be:

1. 1 piece 2. Minimum 10-foot length of one of the following:

2.1. Galvanized steel rod or pipe not less than 3/4 inch in diameter 2.2. Copper clad steel rod not less than 5/8 inch in diameter

86-1.02P Enclosures

86-1.02P(1) General

The enclosures must be rated NEMA 3R and include a dead front panel and a hasp with a 7/16-inch-diameter hole for a padlock.

The enclosure's machine screws and bolts must not protrude outside the cabinet wall.

The fasteners on the exterior of an enclosure must be vandal resistant and not be removable. The exterior screws, nuts, bolts, and washers must be stainless steel.

86-1.02P(2) Service Equipment Enclosures

A service equipment enclosure must be factory wired and manufactured from steel and galvanized or have factory-applied, rust-resistant prime and finish coats, except Types II and III.

Type II and III service equipment enclosures must:

1. Be made of 0.125-inch minimum thickness 5052-H32 aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B209. 2. Be manufactured using gas metal arc welding with bare aluminum welding electrodes. The electrodes

must comply with AWS A5.10 Class ER5356. 3. Be manufactured using welding procedures, welders, and welding operators that comply with the

requirements for welding procedures, welders, and welding operators in in AWS B2.1, "Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification."

4. Have full-seal weld exterior seams. 5. Exterior welds must be ground smooth and edges filed to a radius of at least 0.03 inch. 6. Have a surface finish that complies with MIL-A-8625 for a Type II, Class I coating, except the anodic

coating must have a minimum thickness of 0.0007 inch and a minimum coating weight of 0.001 oz/sq in.

If a Type III enclosure houses a transformer of more than 1 kVA, the enclosure must have effective screened ventilation louvers of no less than 50 sq. in for each louver. The framed screen must be stainless no. 304 with a no. 10 size mesh and secured with at least 4 bolts.

The dead front panel on a Type III service equipment enclosure must have a continuous stainless steel or aluminum piano hinge. The panel must be secured with a latch or captive screws. No live part must be mounted on the panel.

The enclosure must be watertight and marked as specified in NEC to warn of potential electric-arc flash hazards.

Internal conductors for the photoelectric control unit must be 600 V(ac), 14 AWG (THHN) stranded machine tool wire. Where subject to flexing, 19 stranded wire must be used.

The meter area must be have a sealable, lockable, weather-tight cover that can be removed without the use of tools.



For Type III-A, III-B, and III-C enclosures, the meter socket must be a 5-clip type, and the landing lug must be suitable for multiple conductors.

For a Type III-D enclosure, the meter socket must be a 7-clip type, and the landing lug must be suitable for multiple conductors. The pedestal must comply with the Electric Utility Service Equipment Requirements Committee drawing no. 308 or 309.

Landing lugs must be (1) sized for the incoming service utility conductors, (2) compatible with either copper or aluminum conductors, and (3) made of copper or tin-plated aluminum. Live parts of the electrical equipment must be guarded against accidental contact.

The main and neutral busses of the enclosure must be made of tin-plated copper, be rated for 125 A, and be suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.

Each service equipment enclosure must have up to 2 main circuit breakers that will simultaneously disconnect ungrounded service-entrance conductors.

Circuit breaker for a service equipment enclosure must:

1. Be quick-break on either automatic or manual operation 2. Be trip indicating 3. Be internal-trip type 4. Be UL listed or NRTL certified and comply with UL 489 or equal 5. Be clearly marked with the frame size 6. Have an operating mechanism that is enclosed and trip-free from the operating handle on overload 7. Have the trip rating clearly marked on the operating handle 8. Have an interior made of copper Circuit breakers used as disconnects must have a minimum interrupting capacity of 10,000 A, rms.

The interior of the enclosure must accept plug-in circuit breakers. A minimum of 6 standard single-pole circuit breakers, 3/4" nominal, must be provided for branch circuits.

Identify each circuit breaker and component by description using an engraved phenolic nameplate attached with stainless steel rivets or screws.

Nameplate must be installed:

1. Adjacent to the breaker on the dead front panel. The characters must be a minimum of 1/8 inch high. 2. Adjacent to the component on the back panel. The characters must be a minimum of 1/8 inch high. 3. At the top exterior of the door panel. The nameplate must include the system number, voltage, and

number of phases engraved in minimum 3/16-inch-high characters. A plastic-laminated wiring diagram must be attached inside the enclosure with brass eyelets by a UL-listed or NRTL-certified method.

86-1.02P(3) Lighting and Sign Illumination Enclosures

A lighting and sign illumination enclosure must be manufactured from steel and either galvanized, cadmium plated, or powder coated.

86-1.02Q Cabinets

86-1.02Q(1) General

Cabinets must be factory wired except for battery backup system cabinets.

The fasteners on the exterior of a cabinet, except for battery backup system cabinets, must be removable and vandal resistant. The exterior screws, nuts, bolts, and washers must be stainless steel.

Terminal blocks, circuit breakers, and a power supply must be UL approved.



86-1.02Q(2) Department-Furnished Controller Cabinets

A Department-furnished controller assembly consists of a Model 170E or 2070E controller unit, a wired controller cabinet, and all auxiliary equipment required to operate the system. The Department does not furnish anchor bolts.

86-1.02Q(3) Controller Cabinets

The controller cabinet must be a Model 334L, comply with TEES, and be on the Authorized Material List for traffic signal control equipment. The cabinet must have 3 drawer shelves. Each shelf must be attached to the tops of 2 supporting angles with 4 screws.

86-1.02Q(4) Telephone Demarcation Cabinets

86-1.02Q(4)(a) General

The doors of a telephone demarcation cabinet must be attached using continuous stainless steel piano hinges.

86-1.02Q(4)(b) Type A Telephone Demarcation Cabinets

Reserved

86-1.02Q(4)(c) Type B Telephone Demarcation Cabinets

A Type B telephone demarcation cabinet consists of a mounting panel, outlets, circuit breaker, fan, dead front plates, and fuse.

The mounting panel must be made of 3/4-inch-thick ACX-grade plywood.

The mounting panel must be fastened to the cabinet with nuts, lock washers, and flat washers to 10 welded studs.

The cabinet must be made of 0.125-inch-thick anodized aluminum.

The cabinet door must be hung and secured with drawn latches, lockable with a padlock. The padlock latches must each have a minimum 7/16-inch-diameter hole.

Ventilation louvers must be located on the door.

The fan must be located in a ventilator housing and be controlled thermostatically. The thermostat control must have a range from 80 to 130 degrees F.

The thermostat and fan circuit must be protected with a fuse rated for 175 percent of the motor capacity. The fan capacity must be a minimum 25 cfm.

86-1.02Q(4)(d) Type C Telephone Demarcation Cabinets

Reserved

86-1.02Q(5) Battery Backup System Cabinets

The cabinet for a battery backup system must comply with TEES and be on the Authorized Material List for traffic signal control equipment.

86-1.02R Signal Heads

86-1.02R(1) General

A signal head consists of a signal mounting assembly, backplate, and signal face.

The head must have a terminal block attached to the back of one housing. The terminal block must have enough positions to accommodate all indications. Each position must be permanently labeled for the indications used.

The metal signal heads must not fracture or deflect more than half the lens diameter when tested under California Test 666.



The plastic signal heads must not fracture or deflect when tested under California Test 605.

The deflection must not be more than 10 degrees in either the vertical or horizontal plane after the wind load has been removed from the front of the signal face or more than 6 degrees in either the vertical or horizontal plane after the wind load has been removed from the back of the signal face.

86-1.02R(2) Signal Mounting Assemblies

Signal mounting assembly must include:

1. 1-1/2-inch-diameter steel pipe or galvanized conduit 2. Pipe fitting made of ductile iron, galvanized steel, bronze, or aluminum alloy, Type AC-84B, no. 380 3. Mast arm and post-top slip fitters and terminal compartments made of cast bronze or hot-dip

galvanized ductile iron The horizontal distance between the vertical centerlines of the terminal compartment or slip fitter and of each signal face must not exceed 11 inches except where required for proper signal face alignment or to allow programming of programmed visibility signal sections.

The mounting assembly must be watertight and free of sharp edges or protrusions that might damage conductor insulation. The assembly must have positive-locking serrated fittings that prevent signal faces from rotating when the fittings are mated with similar fittings on the faces.

Each terminal compartment must be fitted with a terminal block having a minimum of 12 positions, each with 2 screw-type terminals. Each terminal must accommodate at least five no. 14 conductors. The terminal compartment must have a cover for easy access to the terminal block.

86-1.02R(3) Backplates

The backplate material must be a homogeneous black color with a lusterless finish.

A metal backplate must be made of a minimum 1/16-inch-thick 3001-14 aluminum.

A plastic backplate must have a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and be formed from sheet plastic or assembled from extruded, molded, or cast plastic sections. Sections must be factory joined using one of the following:

1. Appropriate solvent cement. 2. Aluminum rivets and washers painted or permanently colored to match the backplate. 3. No. 10 machine screws with flat washers, lock washers, and nuts painted to match the backplate. Each plastic backplate must be secured to the plastic signal face such that it resists removal or permanent deformation.

86-1.02R(4) Signal Faces

Signal face consists of signal sections with signal housings, LED modules, and visors.

Signal face must:

1. Be adjustable and allow for 360-degree rotation about the vertical axis 2. Comply with ITE publications ST-052-E, Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode

(LED) Circular Signal Supplement and ST-054, Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Vehicle Arrow Traffic Signal Supplement

3. Be sealed with a neoprene gasket at the top opening A metal signal face must have a metal backplate and visor.

A plastic signal face must have a plastic backplate and visor.

If a signal face is supported by a Type MAS slip fitter, spacers are required between the 2 sections. The spacers must be made of the same material as the housing. The vertical dimension of the spacers must



allow proper seating of the serrations between the slip fitter and the 2 sections. The 2 sections must be joined with at least two no. 10 minimum machine screws through holes near the front of the housing and the spacers and matching holes in a reinforcing plate installed in the housing.

86-1.02R(4)(a) Signal Sections

86-1.02R(4)(a)(i) General

Signal section must have:

1 Opening at the top and bottom for a 1-1/2-inch pipe 2. Maximum height of 10-1/4 inches for an 8-inch section and 14-3/4 inches for a 12-inch section 3. Hinge pins, door-latching devices, and other exposed hardware manufactured of Type 304/304L or

305 stainless steel 4. Interior screws and fittings manufactured of stainless steel or steel with a corrosion-resistant plating

or coating 5. Gaskets made of a material that is not degraded if installed in a section with metal or plastic housing Sections must be capable of being joined together to form a signal face in any combination. This interchangeability is not required between metal and plastic sections.

Each section must be joined to an adjacent section by one of the following:

1. Minimum of 3 machine screws for 8-inch sections and 4 machine screws for 12-inch sections, installed through holes near the front and back of the housing. Each screw must be a no. 10 and have a nut, flat washer, and lock washer.

2. 2 machine screws, each with a nut, flat washer, and lock washer, installed through holes near the front of the housing and a fastener through the 1-1/2-inch pipe opening. The fastener must have 2 large, flat washers to distribute the load around the pipe's opening and 3 carriage bolts, each with a nut and lock washer. The minimum screw size must be no. 10, and the carriage bolt size must be 1/4 inch.

The holes for the machine screws must be either cast or drilled during signal section fabrication. Each hole must be surrounded by a minimum 1/8-inch-wide boss to allow contact between signal sections about the axis of the hole.

A serrated nylon washer must be inserted between each plastic signal section and the metal mounting assembly. Each serrated nylon washer must be from 3/16 to 1/4 inch thick. The serrations must match those on the signal section and the mounting assembly.

86-1.02R(4)(a)(ii) Programmed Visibility Signal Sections

Programmed visibility signal section must have:

1. Nominal 12-inch-diameter circular or arrow indication 2. Cap visor 3. Adjustable connection that:

3.1. Provides incremental tilting from 0 to 10 degrees above or below the horizontal 3.2. Maintains a common vertical axis through couplers and mountings

The terminal connection must allow external adjustment about the mounting axis in 5-degree increments.

The visibility of each signal section must be capable of adjustment or programming within the section.

The adjustment for the section must be preset at 4 degrees below the horizontal.

86-1.02R(4)(a)(iii) Signal Housings

The signal housing must:

1. Be die-cast aluminum, permanent mold-cast aluminum, or if specified, structural plastic



2. Comply with ITE publications ST-052-E, Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Circular Signal Supplement and ST-054, Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Vehicle Arrow Traffic Signal Supplement if made of die-cast or permanent mold-cast aluminum

3. Have a 1-piece, hinged, square-shaped door that is: 3.1. Designed to allow access for replacement of modules without the use of tools 3.2. Secured such that it remains closed during loading tests

4. Have a watertight module or lens mounted in the door 5. Have a terminal block attached to the back, with the terminals permanently labeled for conductors to

facilitate field wiring Each housing must have reinforcement plates. Reinforcement plates must be either sheet aluminum, galvanized steel, or cast aluminum. Each plate must have a minimum thickness of 0.11 inch and a hole concentric with a 1-1/2-inch pipe-mounting hole in the housing. Reinforcement plates must be placed as specified in the following table:

Reinforcement Plate Placement Material Placement

Sheet aluminum Inside and outside of housing Galvanized steel Inside of housing Cast aluminum Outside of housing

Reinforcement plates placed outside of the housing must be finished to match the signal housing color and be designed to allow a proper serrated coupling between the signal face and the mounting hardware. A minimum of three no. 10 machine screws must be installed through holes in each plate and matching holes in the housing. Each screw must have a round or binder head, a nut, and a lock washer.

A metal housing must have a metal visor.

Plastic housing must:

1. Be molded in a single piece or fabricated from 2 or more pieces joined into a single piece 2. Be a black color throughout, including the door, matching color no. 17038, 27038, or 37038 of FED-

STD-595 3. Have UV stability 4. Be self-extinguishing If reinforcing webs are used to connect the back of the housing to the top, bottom, and sides of the adjacent housing, reinforcement plates are not required.

The exterior of the housing must be painted as specified in sections 78-4.08 and 59.

86-1.02R(4)(b) LED Signal Modules

An LED signal module must be on the Authorized Material List for LED traffic signal modules.

An LED signal module must comply with ITE publications ST-052-E, Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Circular Signal Supplement and ST-054, Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Vehicle Arrow Traffic Signal Supplement, except:

1. Maximum module weight must be 4 lb 2. Module must be a sealed unit with:

2.1. 2 color-coded conductors for the power connection except lane control modules must use 3 color-coded conductors

2.2. Printed circuit board that complies with TEES, chapter 1, section 6 2.3. Lens that is:

2.3.1. Convex or flat with a smooth outer surface 2.3.2. Made of UV-stabilized plastic or glass



2.4. 1-piece EPDM gasket 3. Module must include 3-foot-long conductors with attached quick-disconnect terminals 4. Identification must include:

4.1. Month and year of manufacture 4.2. 1-inch-diameter symbol of the module type with the module color written adjacent to the

symbol in 0.50-inch-high letters 5 LED must be the ultra-bright type rated for 100,000 hours of continuous operation 6. Module must have an integral power supply Individual LEDs must be wired such that a loss or failure of 1 LED will not result in a loss of more than 5 percent of the module's light output. Failure of an individual LED in a string must not result in a loss of an entire string or other indication.

The symbol for a 12-inch U-turn section must be a 15/16-inch-wide inverted U with an arrow on the left end.

A lane control section must be a combination module with a red X and green arrow. The conductor function and color code must be as shown in the following table:

Conductor Function and Color Code Function Color

Neutral White Red X Red

Green arrow Brown

The minimum power consumption for an LED signal module must be 5 W.

The maximum power consumption for an LED signal module must be as shown in the following table:

Maximum Power Consumption

LED signal module type

Power consumption (W) Red Yellow Green

25 °C 74 °C 25 °C 74 °C 25 °C 74 °C

8-inch circular 8 13 13 16 12 12 12-inch circular 11 17 22 25 15 15 12-inch arrow 9 12 10 12 11 11 12-inch U-turn 9 12 10 12 11 11

Bicycle 11 17 22 25 15 15 Programmed visibility 11 17 22 25 15 15

Lane control (X) 9 12 -- -- -- -- Lane control (Arrow) -- -- -- -- 11 11

Red and green LED signal modules operating over a temperature range from -40 to 74 degrees C and yellow LED signal modules operating at 25 degrees C must maintain the minimum illumination values for 48 months as shown in the following tables:



Minimum Maintained Intensities for Circular Indications

Angle (v,h)

Intensities (cd)

8-inch 12-inch

Red Yellow Green Red Yellow Green

2.5, ±2.5 133 267 267 339 678 678

2.5, ±7.5 97 194 194 251 501 501

2.5, ±12.5 57 113 113 141 283 283

2.5, ±17.5 25 48 48 77 154 154

7.5, ±2.5 101 202 202 226 452 452

7.5, ±7.5 89 178 178 202 404 404

7.5, ±12.5 65 129 129 145 291 291

7.5, ±17.5 41 81 81 89 178 178

7.5, ±22.5 18 37 37 38 77 77

7.5, ±27.5 10 20 20 16 32 32

12.5, ±2.5 37 73 73 50 101 101

12.5, ±7.5 32 65 65 48 97 97

12.5, ±12.5 28 57 57 44 89 89

12.5, ±17.5 20 41 41 34 69 69

12.5, ±22.5 12 25 25 22 44 44

12.5, ±27.5 9 16 16 16 32 32

17.5, ±2.5 16 32 32 22 44 44

17.5, ±7.5 14 28 28 22 44 44

17.5, ±12.5 10 20 20 22 44 44

17.5, ±17.5 9 16 16 22 44 44

17.5, ±22.5 6 12 12 20 41 41

17.5, ±27.5 4 9 9 16 32 32

Minimum Maintained Luminance for Indications

Indication type Luminance (fL)

Red Yellow Green

Arrow 1,610 3,210 3,210

U-turn 1,610 3,210 3,210

Bicycle 1,610 1,610 1,610

Lane control (X) 1,610 -- --

Lane control (Arrow) -- -- 1,610

Minimum Maintained Luminance for Programmed Visibility Indications

Indication type

Luminance (cd)

Red Yellow Green

PV at angle v=2.5, h=±2.5 314 314 314

Conductors must be prewired to the terminal block.

86-1.02R(4)(c) Visors and Directional Louvers

The visor must be a tunnel type.

The visor must have a downward tilt from 3 to 7 degrees with a minimum length of 9-1/2 inches for nominal 12-inch round lenses and 7 inches for nominal 8-inch round lenses.



A metal visor must be formed from minimum 0.050-inch-thick aluminum alloy sheet.

A plastic visor must be either formed from sheet plastic or blow-molded. The plastic must be a black homogeneous color with a lusterless finish. A visor must withstand a wind load applied to its side for 24 hours without permanent deformation or removal from its door when tested under California Test 605 for plastic visors and California Test 666 for metal visors.

If directional louvers are used, the louvers must fit into full-circular signal visors. Louvers must consist of one of the following:

1. Outside cylinder constructed of sheet steel with a minimum nominal thickness of 0.030 inch and vanes constructed of sheet steel with a minimum nominal thickness of 0.016 inch.

2. Outside cylinder and vanes constructed of 5052-H32 aluminum alloy of equal thickness. 86-1.02S Pedestrian Signal Heads

86-1.02S(1) General

A pedestrian signal head consists of a pedestrian signal mounting assembly and a pedestrian signal face comprising of a pedestrian signal housing, an LED countdown pedestrian signal face module, and a front screen.

86-1.02S(2) Pedestrian Signal Mounting Assemblies

A pedestrian signal mounting assembly must comply with the specifications for a signal mounting assembly in section 86-1.02R, except mast arm slip fitters are not required.

86-1.02S(3) Pedestrian Signal Faces

86-1.02S(3)(a) General

Each pedestrian signal face must include a light-duty terminal block rated at 5 A and have 12 positions with no. 6-by-1/8-inch binder head screws. Each position must have 1 screw-type terminal.

The wiring and terminal block must comply with ITE publication ST-055-E, Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indicators: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Signal Modules.

86-1.02S(3)(b) Pedestrian Signal Housings

Pedestrian signal housing must comply with the specifications for a signal housing in 86-1.02R(4)(a)(iii), except the maximum overall dimensions must be 18-1/2 inches wide, 19 inches high, and 11-1/2 inches deep and without:

1. Visor 2. Watertight module or lens mounted in the door 3. Reinforcement plates The housing must have a terminal block attached to the back. The terminal block must have enough positions to accommodate all indications. Each position must be permanently labeled for the indications used.

86-1.02S(3)(c) LED Countdown Pedestrian Signal Face Modules

An LED countdown PSF module must comply with ITE publication ST-055-E, Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indicators: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Signal Modules, except the material must comply with ASTM D3935 and the module must have:

1. Ultra-bright-type LED rated for 100,000 hours of continuous operation. 2. Lot number and month and year of manufacture permanently marked on the back of the module 3. Prominent and permanent vertical markings for accurate indexing and orientation within the

pedestrian signal housing if a specific mounting orientation is required. Markings must be a minimum of 1 inch in height and include an up arrow and the word up or top.

4. Circuit board complying with TEES, chapter 1, section 6.



Individual LEDs must be wired such that a loss or failure of 1 LED will not result in a loss of more than 5 percent of the module's light output. Failure of an individual LED in a string must not result in a loss of an entire string or other indication.

Each symbol must be at least 9 inches high and 5-1/4 inches wide. The 2-digit countdown timer, Upraised Hand, and Walking Person indications must be electronically isolated from each other. The 3 indications must not share a power supply or interconnect circuitry.

The module must operate over the specified ambient temperature and voltage range and be readable both day and night at distances up to the full width of the area to be crossed. Upon initial testing at 25 degrees C, the module must have at least the luminance values shown in the following table:

Luminance Values PSF module symbol Luminance

Upraised hand and 2-digit countdown timer (fL)

1,094

Walking person (fL) 1,547

The module must not exceed the power consumption requirements shown in the following table:

Maximum Power Consumption Requirements PSF module display At 24 ºC At 74 ºC

Upraised Hand 10.0 W 12.0 W Walking Person 9.0 W 12.0 W

2-digit countdown timer 6.0 W 8.0 W

86-1.02S(3)(d) Front Screen

Pedestrian signal face must have a front screen that is one of the following types:

1. 3/8-inch-thick aluminum honeycomb screen with 0.2-inch-wide cells or a 1/2-inch-thick plastic screen with 3/8-inch-wide squares with 1/16-inch wall thickness that: 1.1. Is installed so it tilts downward at an angle of 15 ± 2 degrees from the top and completely

covers the message plate. 1.2. Includes a clear front cover made of either a minimum 1/8-inch-thick acrylic plastic sheet or a

minimum 1/16-inch-thick polycarbonate plastic. 1.3. Is held firmly in place, including the cover, with stainless steel or aluminum clips or stainless

steel metal screws. 2. Polycarbonate screen that:

2.1. Has a nominal thickness of 1/32 inch. 2.2. Is a 1-1/2-inch-deep eggcrate or Z-crate type. 2.3. Is mounted in a frame constructed of aluminum alloy or polycarbonate with a minimum

thickness of 0.040 inch. 2.4. Is held in place with stainless steel screws.

The screen and frame of a pedestrian signal face must be made of either (1) plastic that is a flat black color or (2) anodized aluminum that is a flat black color or finished with lusterless, black, exterior-grade latex paint formulated for application to metal surfaces.

86-1.02T Accessible Pedestrian Signals

Accessible pedestrian signal must comply with the California MUTCD, chapter 4E, and have:

1. Audible speech message that plays when the push button is actuated. The message must include the name of the street to be crossed. The accessible pedestrian signal must have at least 5 audible message options.

2. Push button locator tone that clicks or beeps.



3. Feature that activates the pedestrian phase during a failure of the audible message, locator tone, or vibrotactile device.

An accessible pedestrian signal must function with the Department-furnished Model 170E/2070E controller assembly.

No part of the accessible pedestrian signal must be installed inside the controller cabinet. Power for the accessible pedestrian signal must be from the pedestrian signal housing terminal block.

The housing for the signal assembly must be made of corrosion-resistant material. Theft-proof bolts used for mounting the housing to the standard must be stainless steel with a content of 17 percent chromium and 8 percent nickel. The housing must be shaped to fit the pole's curvature.

The color of a metallic housing must match color no. 33538 of FED-STD-595.

The color of a plastic housing must match color no. 17038, 27038, or 37038 of FED-STD-595.

Accessible pedestrian signal must:

1. Have electronic switches, a potentiometer, or an access port for a device for controlling and programming the volume level and messaging

2. Be weatherproof and shockproof Enclosure for the accessible pedestrian signal must:

1. Weigh less than 7 lb 2. Measure less than 16 by 6 by 5 inches 3. Have a wiring hole with a diameter not exceeding 1-1/8 inches 5. Have a switch for a push button 6. Have a vibrotactile device on the push button or on the arrow 7. Have an internal weatherproof speaker and microphone that senses the ambient sound level The separation between adjacent holes used for conductors and mounting must be at least twice the diameter of the larger hole.

The speaker grills must be located on the surface of the enclosure. The speakers must not interfere with the housing or its mounting hardware.

The conductor cable between the accessible pedestrian signal assembly and the pedestrian signal head must be a 9 no. 20 conductor cable complying with MIL-W-16878D.

86-1.02U Push Button Assemblies

The housing for a push button assembly must be made of die-cast aluminum, permanent mold-cast aluminum, or UV-stabilized self-extinguishing structural plastic. The plastic housing must have a color throughout that matches color no. 17038, 27038, or 37038 of FED-STD-595.

If the push button is to be attached to a pole, the housing must be shaped to fit the pole's curvature.

The assembly must be waterproof and shockproof.

The push button's switch must be a single-pole, double-throw switching unit with screw-type terminals rated 15 A at 125 V(ac).

Switch for the push button must have:

1. Plunger actuator and a U frame to allow recessed mounting in the push button housing 2. Operating force of 3.5 lb 3. Maximum pretravel of 5/64 inch 4. Minimum overtravel of 1/32 inch 5. Differential travel from 0.002 to 0.04 inch



6. Minimum 2-inch diameter actuator 86-1.02V Reserved

86-1.02W Loop Detector Sealants

86-1.02W(1) General

Sealant for filling loop detector slots must be one of the following:

1. Asphaltic emulsion 2. Elastomeric sealant 3. Epoxy sealant for inductive loops 4. Hot-melt rubberized asphalt 86-1.02W(2) Asphaltic Emulsion Sealant

Asphaltic emulsion sealant must comply with the State Specification 8040-41A-15.

86-1.02W(3) Elastomeric Sealant

Elastomeric sealant must be a polyurethane material that cures only in the presence of moisture if used within the stated shelf life. The sealant must be suitable for use in both asphalt concrete and concrete pavement.

The cured elastomeric sealant must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:

Cured Elastomeric Sealant Requirements Quality characteristic Test method Requirement

Hardness ASTM D2240a 65–85

Tensile strength (min, MPa) ASTM D412

b

3.45 Elongation (min, %) 400 Flex at -40 °C

c -- No cracks

Weathering resistance ASTM D822d Slight chalking

Salt spray resistance: ASTM B117

e

Tensile strength (min, MPa) 3.45 Elongation (min, %) 400

Dielectric constant (%) ASTM D150f <25

aIndentation at 25 °C and 50% relative humidity (Rex. Type A, Model 1700 only)

bDie C pulled at 508 mm/minute

c0.6-mm free film bend (180°) over 13-mm mandrel

dWeatherometer 350 h, cured 7 days at 25 °C and 50% relative humidity

e28 days at 38 °C with 5% NaCl, Die C, and pulled at 508 mm/minute)

fChange over a temperature range from -30 to 50 °C

86-1.02W(4) Hot-Melt Rubberized Asphalt Sealant

Hot-melt rubberized asphalt sealant must:

1. Be in solid form at room temperature and fluid at an application temperature range from 190 to 205 degrees C

2. Not produce toxic fumes 3. Be suitable for use in both asphalt concrete and concrete pavement 4. Be packaged in containers clearly marked Detector Loop Sealant with the manufacturer's batch and

lot number. The cured hot-melt rubberized asphalt sealant must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:



Cured Hot-Melt Rubberized Asphalt Sealant Requirements Quality characteristic Test method Requirement

Cone penetration (max, 1/10 mm) ASTM D5329, sec. 6a 35

Flow (max, mm) ASTM D5329, sec. 8b 5

Resilience (min, %) ASTM D5329, sec. 12c 25

Softening point (min, °C) ASTM D36 82 Ductility (min, cm) ASTM D113

d 30

Flash point, Cleveland Open Cup (min, °C) ASTM D92 288 Viscosity (Pa·s) ASTM D4402

e 2.5–3.5

aAt 25 °C, 150 g, 5 s

bAt 60 °C

cAt 25 °C

dAt 25 °C, 5 cm/minute

eBrookfield Thermosel, no. 27 spindle, 20 rpm, 190 °C

86-1.02X Reserved

86-1.02Y Transformers

A transformer must be single-phase and may be a nonsubmersible or submersible type.

A transformer must be a dry type designed for operation on a 60 Hz supply. The transformer must have a decal showing a connection diagram. The diagram must show either color coding or wire tagging with primary (H1, H2) or secondary (X1, X2) markers and the primary and secondary voltage and volt-ampere rating. A transformer must comply with the electrical requirements shown in the following table:

Transformer Electrical Requirements Quality characteristic Requirement

Rating (V(ac)) 120/480, 120/240, 240/480, or 480/120

Efficiency (%) > 95 Secondary voltage regulation and tolerance from half load to full load (%)

±3

Secondary 240 and 480 V(ac) windings must be center tapped.

The transformer must withstand the application of 2,200 V(ac) from core to coils and from coil to coil for a 1-minute period when tested immediately after operation of the transformer at full load for 24 hours.

The external leads for the secondary connections must be no. 10 Type USE rated for 600 V(ac).

The transformer's leads must extend a minimum of 12 inches from the case.

The transformer's insulation must be NEMA 185 C or better.

Each transformer must:

1. Include metal half-shell coil protection. 2. Have moisture-resistant, synthetic-varnish-impregnated windings. 3. Be waterproof and suitable for outdoor operation. Each submersible transformer must:

1. Include a handle and a hanger. 2. Be securely encased in a rugged, corrosion-resistant, watertight case. 3. Have leads that extend out through 1 or more sealed hubs.



4. Be manufactured to withstand a 5-day test with 12-hour on and off periods submerged in 2 feet of salt water that is 2 percent salt by weight. The operating periods must be at full load.

86-1.02Z Batteries

Battery must:

1. Be deep-cycle, sealed, prismatic, lead-calcium-based, absorbed-glass-mat, valve-regulated, lead-acid type

2. Be rated for 12 V 3. Be rated for a temperature range from -25 to 60 degrees C 4. Be group size 24 5. Be commercially available and stocked locally 6. Be marked with a date code, maximum recharge data, and recharge cycles 7. Be new and fully charged when furnished 8. Be free from damage or deformities 9. Have a carrying handle 10. Have 2 top-mounted, threaded-stud posts that include all washers and nuts 11. Include insulating rubber covers for protecting the lugs, posts, and wiring: red for the positive terminal

and black for the negative terminal If a battery is used for a battery backup system, it must accommodate 3/8-inch ring lugs of a Department-furnished battery harness.


Not Used

86-1.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

Replace section 87 with: 04-15-16

87 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

04-15-16 87-1 GENERAL

87-1.01 GENERAL

87-1.01A Summary

Section 87 includes general specifications for constructing and installing electrical systems.

The Department deducts the cost for maintenance performed by the Department on new or portions of existing systems modified under the Contract.


Reserved

87-1.01C Submittals

Reserved


87-1.01D(1) General

Reserved

87-1.01D(2) Quality Control

Before shipping the material to the job site, submit to METS test samples of:

1. Accessible pedestrian signals



2. LED countdown pedestrian signal face modules 3. LED signal modules 4. LED luminaires Submit a sample size as shown in the following table:

Electrical Material Sampling

Contract quantity Test sample size

1–8 1

9–15 2

16–25 3

26–90 5

91–150 8

151–280 13

281–500 20

501–1200 32

Before starting operation of an electrical system, perform a conductor test in the presence of the Engineer.

Conductor test consists of testing each conductor and the conductors in cables for:

1. Continuity. 2. Grounds. 3. Insulation resistance at 500 V(dc) between the circuit and ground. The insulation resistance must be

a minimum of 10 MΩ on circuits, except it must be a minimum of 100 MΩ for inductive loop detector circuits.

Start the operational test of the system on any day except Friday or the day before a holiday. The operational test for signals must start from 9:00 a.m. to 2:00 p.m. Notify the Engineer 48 hours before starting the test.

An operational test consists of a minimum of 5 business days of continuous, satisfactory operation of the system. If the system fails, correct the problem and retest the system. A shutdown of the system caused by traffic, a power interruption, or unsatisfactory performance of Department-furnished materials does not constitute discontinuity of the test.

87-1.02 MATERIALS

Not Used


87-1.03A General

The Engineer determines the final locations of electrical systems.

Verify the locations of electrical systems and the depths of existing detectors, conduits, and pull boxes.

Notify the Engineer before performing work on the existing system.

You may shut down the system for alteration or removal.



Where an existing Department underground facility is shown within 10 feet of any excavation, locate and field mark the facility before performing work that could damage or interfere with the existing facility.

If an existing facility is within 2 feet of an excavation, determine the exact location of the facility by excavating with hand tools before using any power-operated or power-driven excavating or boring equipment. A vacuum excavator may be used if authorized.

Notify the Engineer immediately if an existing facility is damaged by your activities.

If existing underground conduit is to be incorporated into a new system, clean it with a mandrel or cylindrical wire brush and blow it clean with compressed air.

Limit the shutdown of traffic signal systems to normal working hours. Notify the local traffic enforcement agency before shutting down the signal.

Place temporary W3-1 and R1-1 signs in each direction to direct traffic through the intersection during shutdown of the signal. Place two R1-1 signs for 2-lane approaches. The signs must comply with part 2 of the California MUTCD.

Cover signal faces when the system is shut down overnight. Cover temporary W3-1 and R1-1 signs when the system is turned on.

If you work on an existing lighting system and the roadway is to remain open to traffic, ensure the system is in operation by nightfall.

Replace detectors you damage within 72 hours, or the Department replaces them and deducts the cost.

Work performed on an existing system not described is change order work.

Do not use electrical power from existing highway facilities unless authorized.

Maintain a minimum 48-inch clearance for a pedestrian pathway when placing equipment.

Except for service installation or work on service equipment enclosures, do not work above ground until all materials are on hand to complete the electrical work at each location.

Bond all metal components to form a continuous grounded system as specified in NEC.

Ground metallic equipment mounted less than 8 feet above the ground surface on a wood pole.

If you damage any portion of a concrete curb, sidewalk, curb ramp, driveway, or gutter depression, replace the entire section between contraction or expansion joints under section 73.

Apply equipment identification characters.

Orient louvers, visors, and signal faces such that they are clearly visible to approaching traffic from the direction being controlled.

Test loops and the detector lead-in cable circuit for continuity, ground, and insulation resistance at the controller cabinet before connecting detector lead-in cable to the terminal block.

Perform an operational test of the systems.

Before starting the operational test for systems that impact traffic, the system must be ready for operation, and all signs, pavement delineation, and pavement markings must be in place at that location.

87-1.03B Conduit Installation

87-1.03B(1) General

The installation of conduit includes installing caps, bushings, and pull tape and terminating the conduit in pull boxes, foundations, poles, or a structure.

Limit the number of bends in a conduit run to no more than 360 degrees between pull points.



Use conduit to enclose conductors except where they are installed overhead or inside standards or posts.

You may use a larger size conduit than specified for the entire length between termination points. Do not use a reducing coupling.

Extend an existing conduit using the same material. Terminate conduits of different materials in a pull box.

Install 2 conduits between a controller cabinet and the adjacent pull box.

Use a minimum trade size of conduit of:

1. 1-1/2 inches from an electrolier to the adjacent pull box 2. 1 inch from a pedestrian push button post to the adjacent pull box 3. 2 inches from a signal standard to the adjacent pull box 4. 3 inches from a controller cabinet to the adjacent pull box 5. 2 inches from an overhead sign to the adjacent pull box 6. 2 inches from a service equipment enclosure to the adjacent pull box 7. 1-1/2 inches if unspecified Use Type 1 conduit:

1. On all exposed surfaces 2. In concrete structures 3. Between a structure and the nearest pull box Ream the ends of shop-cut and field-cut conduit to remove burrs and rough edges. Make the cuts square and true. Do not use slip joints and running threads to couple conduit. If a standard coupling cannot be used for metal-type conduit, use a threaded union coupling. Tighten the couplings for metal conduit to maintain a good electrical connection.

Cap the ends of conduit to prevent debris from entering before installing the conductors or cables. Use a plastic cap for Type 1, 2, and 5 conduits and a standard pipe cap for all other types of conduit.

For Type 1, 2, and 5 conduits, use threaded bushings and bond them using a jumper. For other types of conduit, use nonmetallic bushings.

Do not install new conduit through foundations.

Cut Type 2 conduit with pipe cutters; do not use hacksaws. Use standard conduit-threading dies for threading conduit. Tighten conduit into couplings or fittings using strap wrenches or approved groove joint pliers.

Cut Type 3 conduit with tools that do not deform the conduit. Use a solvent weld for connections.

Protect shop-cut threads from corrosion under the standards shown in the following table:

Shop-Cut Thread Corrosion Protection Conduit Standard

Types 1 and 2 ANSI C80.1 Type 5 ANSI C80.6

Apply 2 coats of unthinned, organic zinc-rich primer to metal conduit before painting. Use a primer on the Authorized Material List for organic zinc-rich primers. Do not use aerosol cans. Do not remove shop-installed conduit couplings.

For conduits, paint:

1. All exposed threads



2. Field-cut threads, before installing conduit couplings to metal conduit 3. Damaged surfaces on metal conduit If a Type 2 conduit or conduit coupling coating is damaged:

1. Clean the conduit or fitting and paint it with 1 coat of rubber-resin-based adhesive under the manufacturer's instructions

2. Wrap the damaged coating with at least 1 layer of 2-inch-wide, 20 mils-minimum-thickness, PVC tape under ASTM D1000 with a minimum tape overlap of 1/2 inch

You may repair damaged spots of 1/4 inch or less in diameter in the thermoplastic coating by painting with a brushing-type compound supplied by the conduit manufacturer.

If factory bends are not used, bend the conduit to a radius no less than 6 times its inside diameter without crimping or flattening it. Comply with the bending requirements shown in the following table:

Conduit-Bending Requirements Type Requirement

1 Use equipment and methods under the conduit manufacturer's instructions.

2 Use a standard bending tool designed for use on thermoplastic-coated conduit. The conduit must be free of burrs and pits.

3 Use equipment and methods under the conduit manufacturer's instructions. Do not expose the conduit to a direct flame.

5 Use equipment and methods under the conduit manufacturer's instructions.

Install pull tape with at least 2 feet of slack in each end of the conduit that will remain empty. Attach the tape's ends to the conduit.

Install conduit terminating in a standard or pedestal from 2 to 3 inches above the foundation. Slope the conduit toward the handhole opening.

Terminate conduit installed through the bottom of a nonmetallic pull box 2 inches above the bottom and 2 inches from the wall closest to the direction of the run.

87-1.03B(2) Conduit Installation for Structures


Paint exposed Type 1 conduit the same color as the structure.

Install galvanized steel hangers, steel brackets, and other fittings to support conduit in or on a wall or bridge.

87-1.03B(2)(b) New Structures

Seal and make watertight the conduits which lead to soffits, wall-mounted luminaires, other lights, and fixtures located below the pull box grade.

If you place a conduit through the side of a nonmetallic pull box, terminate the conduit 2 inches from the wall and 2 inches above the bottom. Slope the conduit toward the top of the box to facilitate pulling conductors.

For ease of installation and if authorized, you may use Type 4 conduit instead of Type 1 conduit for the final 2 feet of conduit entering a pull box in a reinforced concrete structure.

Install an expansion fitting where a conduit crosses an expansion joint in a structure. Each expansion fitting for metal conduit must include a copper bonding jumper having the ampacity as specified in NEC.



Install an expansion-deflection fitting for an expansion joint with a 1-1/2-inch movement rating. The fitting must be watertight and include a molded neoprene sleeve, a bonding jumper, and 2 silicon bronze or zinc-plated iron hubs.

For an expansion joint with a movement rating greater than 1-1/2 inches, install the expansion-deflection fitting as shown.

For conduit installed inside of bridge structures, you must:

1. Install precast concrete cradles made of minor concrete and commercial-quality welded wire fabric. The minor concrete must contain a minimum of 590 lb of cementitious material per cubic yard. The cradles must be moist cured for a minimum of 3 days.

2. Bond precast concrete cradles to a wall or bridge superstructure with one of the following: 2.1. Epoxy adhesive for bonding freshly-mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2.2. Rapid-set epoxy adhesive for pavement markers. 2.3. Standard-set epoxy adhesive for pavement markers.

3. Use a pipe sleeve or form an opening for a conduit through a bridge superstructure. The sleeve or opening through a prestressed member or conventionally reinforced precast member must be: 3.1. Oriented transverse to the member. 3.2. Located through the web. 3.3. No more than 4 inches in size.

4. Wrap the conduit with 2 layers of asphalt felt building paper and securely tape or wire the paper in place for a conduit passing through a bridge abutment wall. Fill the space around the conduit with mortar under section 51-1, except the proportion of cementitious material to sand must be 1 to 3. Fill the space around the conduits after prestressing is completed.

Thread and cap a conduit installed for future use in structures. Mark the location of the conduit's end in a structure, curb, or wall directly above the conduit with a Y that is 3 inches tall.

87-1.03B(2)(c) Existing Structures

Run surface-mounted conduit straight and true, horizontal or vertical on the wall, and parallel to walls on ceilings or similar surfaces. Support the conduit at a maximum of 5-foot intervals where needed to prevent vibration or deflection. Support the conduit using galvanized, malleable-iron, conduit clamps, and clamp backs secured with expansion anchorage devices complying with section 75-3.02C. Use the largest diameter of galvanized, threaded studs that will pass through the mounting hole in the conduit clamp.

87-1.03B(3) Conduit Installation Underground


Install conduit to a depth of:

1. 14 inches for the trench-in-pavement method 2. 18 inches, minimum, under sidewalk and curbed paved median areas 3. 42 inches, minimum, below the bottom of the rail of railroad tracks 4. 30 inches, minimum, everywhere else below grade Place conduit couplings at a minimum of 6 inches from the face of a foundation.

Place a minimum of 2 inches of sand bedding in a trench before installing Type 2 or Type 3 conduit and 4 inches of sand bedding over the conduit before placing additional backfill material.

If installing conduit within the limits of hazardous locations as specified in NEC for Class I, division 1, install and seal Type 1 or Type 2 conduit with explosion-proof sealing fittings.

87-1.03B(3)(b) Conduit Installation under Paved Surfaces

You may lay conduit on existing pavement within a new curbed median constructed on top.



Install conduit under existing pavement by the jacking or drilling methods. You may use the trench-in-pavement method for either of the following conditions:

1. If conduit is to be installed behind the curb under the sidewalk 2. If the delay to vehicles will be less than 5 minutes Do not use the trench-in-pavement method for conduit installations under freeway lanes or freeway-to-freeway connector ramps.

87-1.03B(3)(c) Reserved

87-1.03B(3)(d) Conduit Installation under Railroad Tracks

Install Type 1 or Type 2 conduit with a minimum diameter of 1-1/2 inches under railroad tracks. If you use the jacking or drilling method to install the conduit, construct the jacking pit a minimum of 13 feet from the tracks' centerline at the near side of the pit. Cover the jacking pit with planking if left overnight.

87-1.03B(4) Reserved

87-1.03B(5) Conduit Installation by the Jacking or Drilling Method

Keep the jacking or drilling pit 2 feet away from the pavement's edge. Do not weaken the pavement or soften the subgrade with excessive use of water.

If an obstruction is encountered, obtain authorization to cut small holes in the pavement to locate or remove the obstruction.

You may install Type 2 or Type 3 conduit under the pavement if a hole larger than the conduit's diameter is predrilled. The predrilled hole must be less than one and half the conduit's diameter.

Remove the conduit used for drilling or jacking and install new conduit for the completed work.

87-1.03B(6) Conduit Installation by the Trenching-In-Pavement Method

Install conduit by the trenching-in-pavement method using a trench approximately 2 inches wider than the conduit's outside diameter but not exceeding 6 inches in width.

Where additional pavement is to be placed, you must complete the trenching before the final pavement layer is applied.

If the conduit shown is to be installed under the sidewalk, you may install it in the street within 3 feet of and parallel to the face of the curb. Install pull boxes behind the curb.

Cut the trench using a rock-cutting excavator. Minimize the shatter outside the removal area of the trench.

Dig the trench by hand to the required depth at pull boxes.

Place conduit in the trench.

Backfill the trench with minor concrete to the pavement's surface by the end of each work day. If the trench is in asphalt concrete pavement and no additional pavement is to be placed, backfill the top 0.10 foot of the trench with minor HMA within 3 days after trenching.

87-1.03C Installation of Pull Boxes

87-1.03C(1) General

Install pull boxes no more than 200 feet apart.

You may install larger pull boxes than specified or shown and additional pull boxes to facilitate the work except in structures.

Install a pull box on a bed of crushed rock and grout it before installing conductors. The grout must be from 0.5 to 1 inch thick and sloped toward the drain hole. Place a layer of roofing paper between the grout and the crushed rock sump. Make a 1-inch drain hole through the grout at the center of the pull box.



Set the pull box such that the top is 1-1/4 inches above the surrounding grade in unpaved areas and leveled with the finished grade in sidewalks and other paved areas.

Place the cover on the box when not working in it.

Grout around conduits that are installed through the sides of the pull box.

Bond and ground the metallic conduit before installing conductors and cables in the conduit.

Bond metallic conduits in a nonmetallic pull box using bonding bushings and bonding jumpers.

Do not install pull boxes in concrete pads, curb ramps, or driveways.

Reconstruct the sump of a pull box if disturbed by your activities. If the sump was grouted, remove and replace the grout.

87-1.03C(2) Nontraffic Pull Boxes

If you bury a nontraffic pull box, set the box such that the top is 6 to 8 inches below the surrounding grade. Place a 20-mil-thick plastic sheet made of HDPE or PVC virgin compounds to prevent water from entering the box.

Place mortar between a nontraffic pull box and a pull box extension.

Where a nontraffic pull box is in the vicinity of curb in an unpaved area, place the box adjacent to the back of the curb if practical.

Where a nontraffic pull box is adjacent to a post or standard, place the box within 5 feet upstream from traffic if practical.

If you replace the cover on a nontraffic pull box, anchor it to the box.

87-1.03C(3) Traffic Pull Boxes

Place minor concrete around and under a traffic pull box.

Bolt the steel cover to the box when not working in it.

Bond the steel cover to the conduit with a jumper and bolt it down after installing the conductors and cables.

87-1.03C(4) Structure Pull Boxes

Bond metallic conduit in a metal pull box in a structure using locknuts, inside and outside of the box, bonding bushings, and bonding jumpers connected to bonding wire running in the conduit system.

87-1.03D Reserved

87-1.03E Excavating and Backfilling for Electrical Systems

87-1.03E(1) General

Notify the Engineer at least 72 hours before starting excavation activities.

Dispose of surplus excavated material.

Restrict closures for excavation on a street or highway to 1 lane at a time unless otherwise specified.

87-1.03E(2) Trenching

Dig a trench for the electrical conduits or direct burial cables. Do not excavate until the conduit or direct burial cable will be installed.

Place excavated material in a location that will not interfere with traffic or surface drainage.



After placing the conduit or direct burial cable, backfill the trench with the excavated material. Compact the backfill placed outside the hinge point of slopes and not under pavement to a minimum relative compaction of 90 percent.

Compact the backfill placed within the hinge points and in areas where pavement is to be constructed to a minimum relative compaction of 95 percent.

Restore the sidewalks, pavement, and landscaping at a location before starting excavation at another location.

87-1.03E(3) Concrete Pads, Foundations, and Pedestals

Construct foundations for standards, poles, metal pedestals, and posts under section 56-3.

Construct concrete pads, foundations, and pedestals for controller cabinets, telephone demarcation cabinets, and service equipment enclosures on firm ground.

Install anchor bolts using a template to provide proper spacing and alignment. Moisten the forms and ground before placing the concrete. Keep the forms in place until the concrete sets for at least 24 hours to prevent damage to the surface.

Use minor concrete for pads, foundations, and pedestals.

In unpaved areas, place the top of the foundation 6 inches above the surrounding grade, except place the top:

1. 1 foot 6 inches above the grade for Type M and 336L cabinets 2. 1 foot 8 inches above the grade for Type C telephone demarcation cabinets 3. 2 inches above the grade for Type G and Type A cabinets and Type III service equipment enclosures The pad must be 2 inches above the surrounding grade.

In and adjacent to the sidewalk and other paved areas, place the top of the foundation 4 inches above the surrounding grade, except place the top:

1. 1 foot 6 inches above the grade for Type M and 336L cabinets 2. 1 foot 8 inches above the grade for Type C telephone demarcation cabinets 3. Level with the finished grade for Type G and Type A cabinets and Type III service equipment

enclosures The pad must be level with the finished grade.

Apply an ordinary surface finish under section 51-1.03F.

Allow the foundation to cure for at least 7 days before installing any equipment.

87-1.03F Conductors and Cable Installations

87-1.03F(1) General

The installation of conductors and cables includes splicing conductors and attaching the terminals and connectors to the conductors.

Clean the conduit and pull all conductors and cables as a unit.

If new conductors or cables are to be added in an existing conduit:

1 Remove the content 2. Clean the conduit 3. Pull both old and new conductors and cables as a unit Wrap conductors and secure cables to the end of the conduit in a pull box.



Seal the ends of conduits with a sealing compound after installing conductors or cables.

Neatly arrange conductors and cables inside pull boxes and cabinets. Tie the conductors and cables together with self-clinching nylon cable ties or enclose them in a plastic tubing or raceway.

Identify conductors and cables by direct labeling, tags, or bands fastened in such a way that they will not move. Use mechanical methods for labeling.

Provide band symbol identification on each conductor or each group of conductors comprising a signal phase in each pull box and near the end of terminated conductors.

Tape the ends of unused conductors and cables in pull boxes to form a watertight seal.

Do not connect the push-button or accessible pedestrian signal neutral conductor to the signal neutral conductor.

87-1.03F(2) Cables


Reserved


87-1.03F(2)(c) Copper Cables


Reserved

87-1.03F(2)(c)(ii) Detector Lead-in Cables

Install a Type B or C detector lead-in cable in conduit.

Waterproof the ends of the lead-in cable before installing it in the conduit to prevent moisture from entering the cable.

Splice loop conductors for each direction of travel for the same phase, terminating in the same pull box, to a separate lead-in cable running from the pull box adjacent to the loop detector to a sensor unit mounted in the controller cabinet. Install the lead-in cable without splices except at the pull box.

Verify in the presence of the Engineer that the loops are operational before making the final splices between loop conductors and the lead-in cable.

Identify and tag each lead-in cable with the detector designation at the cabinet and pull box adjacent to the loops.

87-1.03F(2)(c)(iii) Conductors Signal Cables

Do not splice signal cables except for a 28-conductor cable.

Provide identification at the ends of terminated conductors in a cable as shown.

Provide identification for each cable in each pull box showing the signal standard to which it is connected except for the 28-conductor cable.

Connect conductors in a 12-conductor cable as shown in the following table:



12CSC Color Code and Functional Connection Color code Termination Phase

Red Red signal 2, 4, 6, or 8 Yellow Yellow signal 2, 4, 6, or 8 Brown Green signal 2, 4, 6, or 8 Red/black stripe Red signal 1, 3, 5, or 7 Yellow/black stripe Yellow signal 1, 3, 5, or 7 Brown/black stripe Green signal 1, 3, 5, or 7 Black/red stripe Spare or as required for red or DONT

WALK --

Black/white stripe Spare or as required for yellow -- Black Spare or as required for green or WALK -- Red/white stripe Pedestrian signal DONT WALK -- Brown/white stripe Pedestrian signal WALK -- White Terminal block Neutral

Provide identification for each 28-conductor cable C1 or C2 in each pull box. The cable labeled C1 must be used for signal phases 1, 2, 3, and 4. The cable labeled C2 must be used for signal phases 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Connect conductors in a 28-conductor cable as shown in the following table:



28CSC Color Code and Functional Connection Color code Termination Phase

Red/black stripe Red signal 2 or 6 Yellow/black stripe Yellow signal 2 or 6 Brown/black stripe Green signal 2 or 6 Red/orange stripe Red signal 4 or 8 Yellow/orange stripe Yellow signal 4 or 8 Brown/orange stripe Green signal 4 or 8 Red/silver stripe Red signal 1 or 5 Yellow/silver stripe Yellow signal 1 or 5 Brown/silver stripe Green signal 1 or 5 Red/purple stripe Red signal 3 or 7 Yellow/purple stripe Yellow signal 3 or 7 Brown/purple stripe Green signal 3 or 7 Red/2 black stripes Pedestrian signal DONT WALK 2 or 6 Brown/2 black stripes Pedestrian signal WALK 2 or 6 Red/2 orange stripes Pedestrian signal DONT WALK 4 or 8 Brown/2 orange stripes Pedestrian signal WALK 4 or 8 Red/2 silver stripes Overlap A, C OLA

a,

OLCa

Brown/2 silver stripes Overlap A, C OLAc, OLC

c

Red/2 purple stripes Overlap B, D OLBa,

OLDa

Brown/2 purple stripes Overlap B, D OLBc, OLD

c

Blue/black stripe Pedestrian push button 2 or 6 Blue/orange stripe Pedestrian push button 4 or 8 Blue/silver stripe Overlap A, C OLA

b,

OLCb

Blue/purple stripe Overlap B, D OLBb,

OLDb

White/black stripe Pedestrian push button common -- Black/red stripe Railroad preemption -- Black Spare -- White Terminal block Neutral OL = Overlap; A, B, C, and D = Overlapping phase designation aFor red phase designation

bFor yellow phase designation

cFor green phase designation

Use the neutral conductor only with the phases associated with that cable. Do not intermix neutral conductors from different cables except at the signal controller.

87-1.03F(2)(c)(iv) Signal Interconnect Cable

For a signal interconnect cable, provide a minimum of 6 feet of slack inside each controller cabinet.

Do not splice the cable unless authorized.

If splices are authorized, insulate the conductor splices with heat-shrink tubing and overlap the insulation at least 0.6 inch. Cover the splice area of the cable with heat-shrink tubing and overlap the cable jacket at least 1-1/2 inches. Provide a minimum of 3 feet of slack at each splice.



87-1.03F(3) Conductors


Do not run conductors to a terminal block on a standard unless they are to be connected to a signal head mounted on that standard.

Provide 3 spare conductors in all conduits containing ramp metering and traffic signal conductors.

Install a separate conductor for each terminal of a push button assembly and accessible pedestrian signal.

Provide conductor slack to comply with the requirements shown in the following table:

Conductor Slack Requirements Location Slack (feet)

Signal standard 1 Lighting standard 1

Signal and lighting standard 1 Pull box 3 Splice 3 Standards with slip base 0


87-1.03F(3)(c) Copper Conductors


Install a minimum no. 8, insulated, grounding copper conductor in conduit and connect it to all-metal components.

Where conductors from different service points occupy the same conduit or standard, enclose the conductors from one of the services in flexible or rigid metal conduit.

87-1.03F(3)(c)(ii) Inductive Loop Conductors

Install a Type 1 or 2 inductive loop conductor except use Type 2 for Type E loop detectors.

Install the conductor without splices except at the pull box.

87-1.03F(4) Manual Installation Method

Use an inert lubricant for placing conductors and cables in conduit.

Pull the conductors and cables into the conduit by hand using pull tape.

87-1.03G Equipment Identification Characters

The Engineer provides you with a list of the equipment identification characters.

Stencil the characters or apply the reflective self-adhesive labels to a clean surface.

Treat the edges of self-adhesive characters with an edge sealant.

Place the characters on the side facing traffic on:

1. Front doors of cabinets and service equipment enclosures. 2. Wood poles, fastened with 1-1/4-inch aluminum nails, for pole mounted enclosures 3. Adjacent bent or abutment at approximately the same station as an illuminated sign or soffit luminaire 4. Underside of the structure adjacent to the illuminated sign or soffit luminaire if no bent or abutment

exists nearby 5. Posts of overhead signs 6. Standards



Before placing new characters on existing or relocated equipment, remove the existing characters.

87-1.03H Conductor and Cables Splices

87-1.03H(1) General

You may splice:

1. Grounded conductors in a pull box 2. Accessible pedestrian signal and push bottom conductors in a pull box 3. Ungrounded signal conductors in a pull box if signals are modified 4. Ungrounded signal conductors to a terminal compartment or a signal head on a standard with

conductors of the same phase in the pull box adjacent to the standard 5. Ungrounded lighting circuit conductors in a pull box if lighting circuits are modified Solder all splices using the hot iron, pouring, or dipping method. Do not perform open-flame soldering.

87-1.03H(2) Splice Insulation Methods

Insulate splices in a multiconductor cable to form a watertight joint and to prevent moisture absorption by the cable.

Use heat-shrink tubing or Method B to insulate a splice.

Use heat-shrink tubing as follows:

1. Cover the splice area completely with an electrical insulating coating and allow it to dry. 2. Place mastic around each conductor before placing them inside the tubing. Use the type of mastic

specified in the tubing manufacturer's instructions. 3. Heat the area under the manufacturer's instructions. Do not perform open-flame heating. After

contraction, each end of the heat-shrink tubing or the open end of the tubing's end cap must overlap the conductor insulation at least 1-1/2 inches.

4. Cover the entire splice with an electrical insulating coating and allow it to dry. Use Method B as follows:

1. Cover the splice area completely with an electrical insulating coating and allow it to dry. 2. Apply 3 layers of half-lapped, 80-mils, PVC tape. 3. Apply 2 layers of 120-mils, butyl-rubber, stretchable tape with liner. 4. Apply 3 layers of half-lapped, 6-mils, PVC, pressure-sensitive, adhesive tape. 5. Cover the entire splice with an electrical insulating coating and allow it to dry. 87-1.03I Connectors and Terminals

Apply connectors and terminals to cables and conductors using a crimping compression tool under the manufacturer's instructions. The tool must prevent opening of the handles until the crimp is completed.

Install crimp-style terminal lugs on stranded conductors smaller than no. 14.

Solder no. 8 and smaller conductors to connectors and terminal lugs.

87-1.03J Standards, Poles, Pedestals, and Posts

Install standards, poles, pedestals, and posts under section 56-3.

Ground standards with a handhole by attaching a bonding jumper from the bolt or lug inside the standard to a metal conduit or to the grounding wire in the adjacent pull box. The bonding jumper must be visible when the handhole cover is removed.

Ground standards without a handhole or standards with a slip base by attaching a bonding jumper to all anchor bolts using ground clamps and connecting it to a metal conduit or to the grounding wire in the adjacent pull box. The bonding jumper must be visible after mortar has been placed on the foundation.



87-1.03K Reserved

87-1.03L Utility Service

87-1.03L(1) General

Install the service equipment early enough to allow the utility to complete its work before completion of the electrical work.

At least 15 days before permanent electrical and telecommunication service is required, request the service connections for permanent installations. The Department arranges with the utilities for completion of the connections and pays all costs and fees required by the utilities.

87-1.03L(2) Electric Service

87-1.03L(2)(a) General

If service equipment is to be installed on a utility-owned pole, furnish and install the conduit, conductors, pull boxes, and other necessary material to complete the service installation. The service utility decides the position of the riser and equipment on the pole.

87-1.03L(2)(b) Electric Service for Irrigation

Establishing electric service for irrigation includes installing conduit, conductors, and pull boxes and making connections from the service point to the irrigation controllers.

87-1.03L(2)(c) Electric Service for Booster Pumps

Establishing electric service for a booster pump includes installing conduit, conductors, and pull boxes and making connections from the service point to the booster pump enclosure.

87-1.03L(3) Telecommunications Service

Establishing telecommunication service includes installing conduit, conductors, and pull boxes and making connections from the service point to the telephone demarcation cabinet.

87-1.03M Photoelectric Controls

Mount the photoelectric unit on the top of the pole for Type I, II, and III photoelectric controls. Use mounting brackets where pole-top mounting is not possible. Orient the photoelectric unit to face north.

Mount the enclosure at a height of 6 feet above finished grade on the same standard as the photoelectric unit.

Install a minimum 100 VA, 480/120 V(ac) transformer in the contactor enclosure to provide 120 V(ac) for the photoelectric control unit when switching 480 V(ac), 60 Hz circuits.

87-1.03N Fused Splice Connectors

Install a fuse splice connector in each ungrounded conductor for luminaires mounted on standards. The connector must be located in the pull box adjacent to the standard.

Crimp the connector terminals onto the ungrounded conductors using a tool under the manufacturer's instructions. Insulate the terminals and make them watertight.

87-1.03O Grounding Electrodes

Install a grounding electrode for each cabinet, service equipment enclosure, and transformer.

Attach a grounding conductor from the electrode using either a ground clamp or exothermic weld. Connect the other end of the conductor to the cabinet, service equipment enclosure, and transformer.

87-1.03P Service Equipment Enclosures

Installing a service equipment enclosure includes constructing the foundation and pad and installing conduit, adjacent pull boxes, and grounding electrode.



Locate the foundation such that the minimum clearance around the front and back of the enclosure complies with NEC, article 110.26, "Spaces About Electrical Equipment, (600 V, nominal or less)."

Bond and ground metal conduit as specified in NEC and by the service utility except the grounding electrode conductor must be no. 6 or larger.

If circuit breakers and components do not have a description on engraved phenolic nameplates, install them using stainless steel rivets or screws under section 86-1.02P(2).

87-1.03Q Cabinets

87-1.03Q(1) General

Installing a cabinet includes constructing the foundation and pad and installing conduit, adjacent pull boxes, and grounding electrode.

Apply a mastic or caulking compound before installing the cabinet on the foundation to seal the openings.

Connect the field wiring to the terminal blocks in the cabinet. Neatly arrange and lace or enclose the conductors in plastic tubing or raceway. Terminate the conductors with properly sized captive or spring spade terminals. Apply a crimp-style connector and solder them.

Install and solder a spade-type terminal on no. 12 and smaller field conductors and a spade-type or ring-type terminal on conductors larger than no. 12.

87-1.03Q(2) Department-Furnished Controller Cabinets

Arrange for the delivery of Department-furnished controller cabinets.

87-1.03Q(3) Reserved

87-1.03Q(4) Telephone Demarcation Cabinets

Installing a telephone demarcation cabinet includes installing conduit, cable, and pull boxes to the controller cabinet.

Install the cabinet with the back toward the nearest lane of traffic.

87-1.03R Signal Heads

87-1.03R(1) General

Installing a signal head includes mounting the heads on standards and mast arms, installing backplates and visors, and wiring conductors to the terminal blocks.

Keep the heads covered or direct them away from traffic until the system is ready for operation.

87-1.03R(2) Signal Faces

Use the same brand and material for the signal faces at each location.

Program the programmable visibility signal faces under the manufacturer's instructions. The indication must be visible only in those areas or lanes to be controlled.

87-1.03R(3) Backplates

Install backplates using at least six 10-24 or 10-32 self-tapping and locking stainless steel machine screws and flat washers.

If a plastic backplate requires field assembly, attach each joint using at least four no.10 machine screws. Each machine screw must have an integral or captive flat washer, a hexagonal head slotted for a standard screwdriver, and either a locking nut with an integral or captive flat washer or a nut, flat washer, and lock washer. Machine screws, nuts, and washers must be stainless steel or steel with a zinc or black oxide finish.

If a metal backplate has 2 or more sections, fasten the sections with rivets or aluminum bolts peened after assembly to avoid loosening.



Install the backplate such that the background light is not visible between the backplate and the signal face or between sections.

87-1.03R(4) Signal Mounting Assemblies

Install a signal mounting assembly such that its members are arranged symmetrically and plumb or level. Orient each mounting assembly to allow maximum horizontal clearance to the adjacent roadway.

For a bracket-mounted assembly, bolt the terminal compartment or pole plate to the pole or standard.

In addition to the terminal compartment mounting, attach the upper pipe fitting of Type SV-1-T with 5 sections or a SV-2-TD to the standard or pole using the mounting detail for signal heads without a terminal compartment.

Use a 4-1/2-inch slip fitter and set screws to mount an assembly on a post top.

After installing the assembly, clean and paint the exposed threads of the galvanized conduit brackets and bracket areas damaged by the wrench or vise jaws. Use a wire brush to clean and apply 2 coats of unthinned, organic zinc-rich primer. Do not use an aerosol can to apply the primer.

Install the conductors in the terminal compartment and secure the cover.

87-1.03S Pedestrian Signal Heads

Installing a pedestrian signal head includes mounting the heads on standards and wiring conductors to the terminal blocks.

Install the pedestrian signal mounting assembly under section 87-1.03R(4).

Use the same brand and material for the pedestrian signal faces at each location.

Install a pedestrian signal face such that its members are arranged symmetrically and plumb or level.

87-1.03T Accessible Pedestrian Signals

Use the same brand for the accessible pedestrian signals at each location.

Install an accessible pedestrian signal and the R10 series sign on the crosswalk side of the standard.

Attach the accessible pedestrian signal to the standard with self-tapping screws.

Attach the sign to the standard using 2 straps and saddle brackets.

Point the arrow on the accessible pedestrian signal in the same direction as the corresponding crosswalk.

Furnish the equipment and hardware to set up and calibrate the accessible pedestrian signal.

Arrange to have a manufacturer's representative at the job site to program the accessible pedestrian signal with an audible message or tone.

87-1.03U Push Button Assemblies

Install the push button assembly and the R10 series sign on the crosswalk side of the standard.

Attach the sign to the assembly for Type B assemblies.

Attach the sign to the standard using 2 straps and saddle brackets for Type C assemblies.

You may use straps and saddle brackets to secure the push button to the standard.

Use a slip fitter to secure the assembly on top of a 2-1/2-inch-diameter post.

87-1.03V Detectors

87-1.03V(1) General

Installing a detector includes installing inductive loop conductors, sealant, conduit, and pull boxes.



Center the detectors in the traffic lanes.

Do not splice the detector conductor.

87-1.03V(2) Inductive Loop Detectors

Mark the location of the inductive loop detectors such that the distance between the side of the loop and a lead-in saw cut from an adjacent detector is at least 2 feet. The distance between lead-in saw cuts must be at least 6 inches.

Saw cut the slots under section 13-4.03E(7). The bottoms of the slots must be smooth with no sharp edges. For Type E detector loops, saw the slots such that the sides are vertical.

Wash the slots clean using water and blow dry them with compressed air to remove all moisture and debris.

Identify the start of the conductor.

Waterproof the ends of a Type 2 loop conductor before installing it in the conduit to prevent moisture from entering the cable.

Install the loop conductor in the slots and lead-in saw cuts using a 3/16- to 1/4-inch-thick wood paddle. Hold the conductors in place at the bottom of the slot with wood paddles during placement of the sealant.

Wind adjacent loops on the same sensor unit channel in opposite directions.

Twist the conductors for each loop into a pair consisting of a minimum of 2 turns per foot before placing them in the lead-in saw cut and the conduit leading to the pull box. Do not install more than 2 twisted pairs of conductors per lead-in saw cut.

Provide 5 feet of slack in the pull box.

Test each loop for continuity, circuit resistance, and insulation resistance before filling the slots with sealant.

Remove excess sealant from the adjacent road surface before it sets. Do not use solvents to remove the excess.

Identify the loop conductor pair in the pull box, marking the start with the letter S and the end with the letter F. Band conductors in pairs by lane in the pull box adjacent to the loops and in the cabinet. Identify each pair with the detector designation and loop number.

Install the conductors in a compacted layer of HMA immediately below the uppermost layer if more than one layer will be placed. Install the loop conductors before placing the uppermost layer of HMA. Fill the slot with a sealant flush to the surface.

Install the conductors in the existing pavement if one layer of HMA is to be placed. Install the loop conductors before placing the layer of HMA. Fill the slot with a sealant flush to the surface.

87-1.03V(3) Preformed Inductive Loop Detectors

Construct a preformed inductive loop detector consisting of 4 turns in the loop and a lead-in conductor pair twisted at least 2 turns per foot all encased in conduit and sealed to prevent water penetration. The detector must be 6-foot square unless shown otherwise.

Construct the loop detector using a minimum 3/8-inch Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 PVC or polypropylene conduit and no. 16 or larger conductor with Type THWN or TFFN insulation.

In new roadways, place the detector in the base course with the top of the conduit flush with the top of the base. Cover with HMA or concrete pavement. Protect the detector from damage before and during pavement placement.



In new reinforced concrete bridge decks, secure the detector to the top of the uppermost layer of reinforcing steel using nylon wire ties. Hold the detector parallel to the bridge deck using PVC or polypropylene spacers where necessary. Place conduit for lead-in conductors between the uppermost 2 layers of reinforcing steel.

Do not install detectors in existing bridge decks unless authorized.

Install a detector in existing pavement before placement of concrete or HMA as follows:

1. Saw cut slots at least 1-1/4 inches wide into the existing pavement. 2. Place the detector in the slots. The top of the conduit must be at least 2 inches below the top of the

pavement. 3. Test each loop circuit for continuity, circuit resistance, and insulation resistance. 4. Fill saw cuts with elastomeric or hot melt rubberized asphalt sealant for asphalt concrete pavement

and with epoxy sealant or hot melt rubberized asphalt sealant for concrete pavement. 87-1.03W Sealants

87-1.03W(1) General

Reserved

87-1.03W(2) Elastomeric Sealant

Apply an elastomeric sealant with a pressure feed applicator.

87-1.03W(3) Asphaltic Emulsion Sealant

Asphaltic emulsion sealant must:

1. Be used for filling slots in asphalt concrete pavement of a maximum width of 5/8 inch 2. Not be used on concrete pavement or where the slope causes the material to run from the slot 3. Be thinned under the manufacturer's instructions 4. Be placed when the air temperature is at least 45 degrees F 87-1.03W(4) Hot-Melt Rubberized Asphalt Sealant

Melt the sealant in a jacketed, double-boiler-type, melting unit. The temperature of the heat transfer medium must not exceed 475 degrees F.

Apply the sealant with a pressure feed applicator or a pour pot when the surface temperature of the pavement is greater than 40 degrees F.

87-1.03X Reserved

87-1.03Y Transformers

Installing a transformer includes placing the transformer inside a pull box, a cabinet, or an enclosure.

Wire the transformer for the appropriate voltage.

Ground the secondary circuit of the transformer as specified in the NEC.

87-1.03Z Reserved

87-1.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

87-2 LIGHTING SYSTEMS

87-2.01 GENERAL

87-2.01A Summary

Section 87-2 includes specifications for constructing lighting systems.

Lighting system includes:



1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Standards 6. Luminaires 7. Service equipment enclosure 8. Photoelectric control 9. Fuse splice connectors 10. High mast lighting assemblies The components of a lighting system are shown on the project plans.


Reserved

87-2.01C Submittals

Submit a certificate of compliance and test data for the high mast lighting luminaires.


Reserved

87-2.02 MATERIALS

87-2.02A General

Reserved

87-2.02B High Mast Lighting Assemblies

A high mast lighting assembly includes the foundation, pole, lowering device system, luminaires, and control pedestal.

Each luminaire in a high mast lighting assembly must include a housing, an optical system, and a ballast.

The housing must be made of aluminum.

A painted or powder-coated housing for a high mast lighting luminaire must be able to withstand a 1,000-hour salt spray test as specified in ASTM B117.

The optical system, consisting of the reflector, refractor or lens, lamp socket, and lamp, must be in a sealed chamber. The chamber must be sealed by a gasket between the reflector and refractor or lens and a gasket between the reflector and lamp socket. The chamber must have a separate filter or filtering gasket for flow of air.

An asymmetrical luminaire must have a refractor or reflector that is rotatable 360 degrees around a vertical axis to orient the distribution of light.

The luminaire must have a slip fitter for mounting on a 2-inch horizontal pipe tenon and must be adjustable ±3 degrees from the axis of the tenon.

The reflector must have a specular surface made of silvered glass or aluminum protected by either an anodized finish or a silicate film. The reflector must be shaped such that a minimum of light is reflected through the arc tube of the lamp.

The refractor and lens must be made of heat-resistant glass.

The lamp socket must be a porcelain-enclosed, mogul-multiple type. The shell must contain integral lamp grips to ensure electrical contact under conditions of normal vibrations. The socket must be rated for 1,500 W, 600 V(ac) and 4,000 V(ac) pulse for a 400 W lamp and 5,000 V(ac) pulse for a 1,000 W lamp.



The luminaire must have a dual fuse holder for 2 fuses rated at 5 A, 480 V(ac). The fuses must be 13/32 inch by 1-1/2 inches, standard midget ferrule type with a nontime-delay feature.

The lamps must be vertical burning, protected from undue vibration, and prevented from backing out of the socket by a stainless steel clamp attached to the luminaire.

A 1,000 W metal halide lamp must have an initial output of 100,000 lumens and an average rated life of 12,000 hours based on 10 hours per start.

A 400 W high-pressure sodium lamp must have an initial output of 50,000 lumens. A 1,000 W high-pressure sodium lamp must have an initial output of 140,000 lumens.

The ballast for the luminaire must be a regulator type and have a core and coils, capacitors, and starting aid.

Ballast must be:

1. Mounted within a weatherproof housing that integrally attaches to the top of a luminaire support bracket and lamp support assembly

2. Readily removable without removing the luminaire from the bracket arm 3. Electrically connected to the optical assembly by a prewired quick disconnect The ballast for a metal halide luminaire must comply with luminaire manufacturer's specifications.

The wattage regulation spread at any lamp voltage, from nominal through the life of the lamp, must vary no more than 22 percent for a 1,000 W lamp and a ±10 percent input voltage variation. The ballast's starting line current must be less than its operating current.

87-2.02C Soffit and Wall-Mounted Luminaires

87-2.02C(1) General

Soffit and wall-mounted luminaires must be weatherproof and corrosion resistant.

Each luminaire must include a 70 W high-pressure sodium lamp with a minimum average rated life of 24,000 hours. The lamp socket must be positioned such that the light center of the lamp is located within 1/2 inch of the designed light center of the luminaire.

Luminaire wiring must be SFF-2.

Flush-mounted soffit luminaire must have:

1. Metal body with two 1-inch-minimum conduit hubs and a means of anchoring the body into the concrete

2. Prismatic refractor made of heat-resistant polycarbonate: 2.1. Mounted in a door frame 2.2. With the street side identified

3. Aluminum reflector with a specular anodized finish 4. Ballast located either within the housing or in a ceiling pull box if shown 5. Lamp socket The door frame assembly must be hinged, gasketed, and secured to the luminaire body with at least 3 machine screws.

A pendant soffit luminaire must be enclosed and gasketed and have an aluminum finish. Luminaire must have:

1. Aluminum reflector with a specular anodized finish 2. Refractor made of heat-resistant polycarbonate 3. Optical assembly that is hinged and latched for lamp access and a device to prevent dropping 4. Ballast designed for operation in a raintight enclosure



5. Galvanized metal box with a gasketed cover, 2 captive screws, and 2 chains to prevent dropping and for luminaire mounting

Wall-mounted luminaire must have:

1. Cast metal body 2. Prismatic refractor:

2.1. Made of glass 2.2. Mounted in a door frame

3. Aluminum reflector with a specular anodized finish 4. Integral ballast 5. Lamp socket 6. Gasket between the refractor and the body 7. At least 2 mounting bolts of minimum 5/16-inch diameter A cast aluminum body of a luminaire to be cast into or mounted against concrete must have a thick coat of alkali-resistant bituminous paint on all surfaces to be in contact with the concrete.

87-2.02C(2) High-Pressure Sodium Lamp Ballasts

87-2.02C(2)(a) General

A high-pressure sodium lamp ballast must operate the lamp for its rated wattage.

Starting aids for a ballast must be interchangeable between ballasts of the same wattage and manufacturer without adjustment.

The ballast must be provided with a heat-generating component to serve as a heat sink. The capacitor must be placed at the maximum practicable distance from the heat-generating components or thermally shielded to limit the case temperature to 75 degrees C.

The transformer and inductor must be resin impregnated for protection against moisture. Capacitors, except for those in starting aids, must be metal cased and hermetically sealed.

The ballast must have a power factor of 90 percent or greater.

For the nominal input voltage and lamp voltage, the ballast design center must not vary more than 7.5 percent from the rated lamp wattage.

87-2.02C(2)(b) Regulator-Type Ballasts

A regulator-type ballast must be designed such that a capacitance variance of ±6 percent does not cause more than ±8 percent variation in the lamp wattage regulation.

The ballast must have a current crest factor not exceeding 1.8 for an input voltage variation of ±10 percent.

The lamp wattage regulation spread for a lag-type ballast must not vary by more than 18 percent for ±10 percent input voltage variations. The primary and secondary windings must be electrically isolated.

The lamp wattage regulation spread for a constant-wattage, autoregulator, lead-type ballast must not vary by more than 30 percent for ±10 percent input voltage variations.

87-2.02C(2)(c) Nonregulator-Type Ballasts

A nonregulator-type ballast must have a current crest factor not exceeding 1.8 for an input voltage variation of ±5 percent.

The lamp wattage regulation spread for an autotransformer or high reactance type ballast must not vary by more than 25 percent for ±5 percent input voltage variations.




87-2.03A General

Set the foundations for standards such that the mast arm is perpendicular to the centerline of the roadway.

Tighten the cap screws of the luminaire's clamping bracket to 10 ft-lb for LED and low-pressure luminaires.

Label the month and year of the installation inside the luminaire housing's door.

Perform the conductor and operational tests for the system.

87-2.03B High Mast Lighting Assemblies

Mount and connect the luminaires to the accessory support ring. Aim the asymmetrical luminaire to orient the distribution of light.

87-2.03C Soffit and Wall-Mounted Luminaires

For a flush-mounted soffit luminaire:

1. Prevent concrete from getting into the housing during pouring of the concrete for the structure 2. Install the luminaire with the axis vertical and the street side of the refractor oriented as indicated 3. Locate the luminaire to provide a minimum 2-foot clearance from the inside surface of the girders and

1-foot clearance from the near face of the diaphragm 4. Install the bridge soffit and ceiling pull box over the same lane For a pendant soffit luminaire:

1. Cast in place the inserts for the no. 8 pull box during concrete placement for a new structure 2. Drill holes for expansion anchors to support the no. 8 pull box on existing structures 3. Bond the suspension conduit and luminaire to the pull box For a wall-mounted luminaire, provide:

1. Extension junction box or ring on a new structure 2. 4 external mounting taps on an existing structure Place the soffits or wall-mounted luminaires in operation as soon as practicable after the falsework has been removed from the structure.

If the Engineer orders soffit or wall-mounted luminaires to be activated before permanent power service is available, installing and removing the temporary power service is change order work.

87-2.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

87-3 SIGN ILLUMINATION SYSTEMS

87-3.01 GENERAL

87-3.01A Summary

Section 87-3 includes specifications for constructing sign illumination systems.

Sign illumination system includes:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Sign lighting fixtures



6. Enclosure for the disconnect circuit breaker 7. Service equipment enclosure 8. Photoelectric control The components of a sign illumination system are shown on the project plans.


Reserved

87-3.01C Submittals

Submit the manufacturer's test data for the induction sign-lighting fixtures.


Reserved

87-3.02 MATERIALS

An induction sign-lighting fixture must include a housing with a door, reflector, refractor or lens, lamp, socket assembly, power coupler, high-frequency generator, fuse block, and fuses.

The fixture must comply with the isofootcandle curves as shown.

Fixture must weigh no more than 44 lb, be rated for 87 W at 120/240 V(ac), and have a mounting assembly made of one of the following materials:

1. Cast aluminum 2. Hot-dip galvanized steel plate 3. Galvanized steel plate finished with one of the following:

3.1. Polymeric coating 3.2. Same finish used for the housing

Housing must:

1. Be corrosion resistant and suitable for wet locations 2. Be above the top of the mounting rails at a maximum height of 12 inches 3. Have weep holes Door must:

1. Hold a refractor or lens 2. Open without the use of special tools 3. Have a locking position at 50 degrees minimum from the plane of the door opening 4. Be hinged to the housing on the side of the fixture away from the sign panel 5. Have 2 captive latch bolts or other latching device When the door is opened, it must lock in the 50 degrees position when an 85 mph, 3-second wind-gust load strikes the door from either side.

The housing and door must be manufactured of sheet or cast aluminum and have a gray powder coat or polyester paint finish. The sheet aluminum must comply with ASTM B209 or B209M for 5052-H32 aluminum sheet. External bolts, screws, hinges, hinge pins, and door closure devices must be corrosion resistant.

The housing and door must be gasketed. The thickness of the gasket must be a minimum of 1/4 inch.

Reflector must not be attached to the outside of the housing and must be:

1. Made of a single piece of aluminum with a specular finish 2. Protected with an electrochemically applied anodized finish or a chemically applied silicate film



3. Designed to drain condensation away from it 4. Secured to the housing with a minimum of 2 screws 5. Removable without removing any fixture parts Refractor or lens must have a smooth exterior and must be manufactured from the materials shown in the following table:

Refractor and Lens Material Requirements Component Material

Flat lens Heat-resistant glass Convex lens Heat-resistant, high-impact-resistant tempered glass Refractor Borosilicate heat-resistant glass

The refractor and convex lens must be designed or shielded such that no luminance is visible if the fixture is approached directly from the rear and viewed from below. If a shield is used, it must be an integral part of the door casting.

Lamp must:

1. Be an 85 W induction type with a fluorescent, phosphor-coated, interior wall 2. Have a minimum 70 percent light output of its original lumen output after 60,000 hours of operation 3. Have a minimum color-rendering index of 80 4. Be rated at a color temperature of 4,000K 5. Be removable with common hand tools The lamp socket must be rated for 1,500 W and 600 V(ac) and be a porcelain-enclosed mogul type with a shell that contains integral lamp grips to ensure electrical contact under normal vibration conditions. The shell and center contact must be made of nickel-plated brass. The center contact must be spring loaded.

The power coupler must be removable with common hand tools.

High-frequency generator must:

1. Start and operate lamps at an ambient temperature of -25 degrees C or greater for the rated life of the lamp

2. Operate continuously at ambient air temperatures from -25 to 55 degrees C without a reduction in the generator life

3. Have a design life of at least 100,000 hours at 55 degrees C 4. Have an output frequency of 2.65 MHz ± 10 percent 5. Have radio frequency interference that complies with 47 CFR 18 regulations regarding harmful

interference 6. Have a power factor greater than 90 percent and total harmonic distortion less than 10 percent The high frequency generator must be mounted such that the fixture can be used as a heat sink and be replaceable with common hand tools.

Each fixture must include a barrier-type fuse block for terminating field connections. Fuse block must:

1. Be rated 600 V(ac) 2. Have box terminals 3. Be secured to the housing and accessible without removal of any fixture parts 4. Be mounted to leave a minimum of 1/2 inch of air space from the sidewalls of the housing 5. Be designed for easy removal of fuses with a fuse puller The fixture's fuses must be 13/32-inch-diameter, 1-1/2-inch-long ferrule type and UL listed or NRTL certified. For a 120 V(ac) fixture, only the ungrounded conductor must be fused and a solid connection must be provided between the grounded conductor and the high frequency generator.



The fixture must be permanently marked with the manufacturer's brand name, trademark, model number, serial number, and date of manufacture on the inside and outside on the housing. The same information must be marked on the package.

If a wire guard is used, it must be made of a minimum 1/4-inch-diameter galvanized steel wire. The wires must be spaced to prevent rocks larger than 1-1/2-inch diameter from passing through the guard. The guard must be either hot-dip galvanized or electroplated zinc-coated as specified in ASTM B633, service condition SC4, with a clear chromate dip treatment.



87-3.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

87-4 SIGNAL AND LIGHTING SYSTEMS

87-4.01 GENERAL

87-4.01A Summary

Section 87-4 includes specifications for constructing signal and lighting systems.

Signal and lighting system includes:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Cables 6. Standards 7. Signal heads 8. Internally illuminated street name signs 9. Service equipment enclosure 10. Department-furnished controller assembly 11. Detectors 12. Telephone demarcation cabinet 13. Accessible pedestrian signals 14. Push button assemblies 15. Pedestrian signal heads 16. Luminaires 17. Photoelectric control 18. Fuse splice connectors 19. Battery backup system 20. Flashing beacons 21. Flashing beacon control assembly The components of a signal and lighting system are shown on the project plans.


Reserved

87-4.01C Submittals

Submit shop drawings showing the message for each internally illuminated street sign, including the size of letters, symbols, and arrows.


87-4.01D(1) General

Reserved



87-4.01D(2) Quality Control

87-4.01D(2)(a) General

Reserved

87-4.01D(2)(b) Battery Backup System

Notify the Engineer 48 hours before testing the battery backup system.

Test the system in the presence of the Engineer by turning off the power to the signal system at the service equipment enclosure. The signal system must run continuously for 30 minutes. If the battery backup system fails, correct the problem and retest the system for another 30 minutes. After successful completion of the test, turn the power on for the signal system.

87-4.02 MATERIALS

87-4.02A General

Reserved

87-4.02B Battery Backup System

A battery backup system includes the cabinet, batteries, and the Department-furnished electronics assembly.

The electronics assembly includes the inverter/charger unit, power transfer relay, and the battery harness.

87-4.02C Internally Illuminated Street Name Signs

An internally illuminated street name sign includes housing, brackets, sign panels, gaskets, ballast, lampholder, terminal blocks, conductors, and fuses.

An internally illuminated street sign must be designed and constructed to prevent deformation or failure when subjected to an 85 mph, 3-second wind-gust load as specified in the AASHTO publication, "Standard Specifications for Structural Supports of Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals."

Sign must:

1. Be Types A or B 2. Have galvanized or cadmium-plated ferrous parts 3. Have screened weep holes 4. Have fasteners, screws, and hardware made of passive stainless steel, Type 302 or 304, or

aluminum Type 6060-T6 5. Operate at a temperature from -20 to 74 degrees C Photoelectric unit sockets are not allowed.

The housing must be constructed to resist torsional twist and warp. The housing must be designed such that opening or removing the panels provides access to the interior of the sign for lamp, ballast, and fuse replacement.

The top and bottom of the sign must be manufactured from formed or extruded aluminum and attached to formed or cast aluminum end fittings. The top, bottom, and end fittings must form a sealed housing.

For a Type A sign, both sides of the sign must be hinged at the top to allow installation or removal of the sign panel.

For a Type B sign, the sign panel must be slide mounted into the housing.

The top of the housing must have 2 free-swinging mounting brackets. Each bracket must be vertically adjustable for leveling the sign to either a straight or curved mast arm. The bracket assembly must allow the lighting fixture to swing perpendicular to the sign panel.



The reflectors must be formed aluminum and have an acrylic, baked-white-enamel surface with a minimum reflectance of 0.85.

Sign panel must be translucent, high-impact-resistant, and made of one of the following plastic materials:

1. Glass-fiber-reinforced, acrylated resin 2. Polycarbonate resin 3. Cellulose acetate butyrate The sign panel must be designed not to crack or shatter if a 1-inch-diameter steel ball weighing 2.4 ounces is dropped from a height of 8.5 feet above the sign panel to any point on the panel. For this test, the sign panel must be lying in a horizontal position and supported within its frame.

The sign panel's surface must be evenly illuminated. The brightness measurements for the letters must be a minimum of 150 foot-lamberts, average. The letter-to-background brightness ratio must be from 10:1 to 20:1. The background luminance must not vary by more than 40 percent from the average background brightness measurement. The luminance of letters, symbols, and arrows must not vary by more than 20 percent from their average brightness measurement.

The sign panel's white or green color must not fade or darken if exposed to an accelerated test of UV light equivalent to 2 years of outdoor exposure.

The sign panel's legend, symbols, arrows, and border on each face must be white on a green background. The background must comply with color no. 14109 of FED-STD-595.

The message must appear on both sides of the sign and be protected from UV radiation. The letters must be 8-inch upper case and 6-inch lower case, series E.

A Type A sign must have a closed-cell, sponge-neoprene gasket installed between the sign panel frame to prevent the entry of water. The gasket must be uniform and even textured.

The sign ballast must be a high-power-factor type for outdoor operation from 110 to 125 V(ac) and 60 Hz and must comply with ANSI C82.1 and C82.2.

The ballast for a Type A sign must be rated at 200 mA. The ballast for a Type B sign must be rated at 430 mA.

Sign lampholder must:

1. Be the spring-loaded type 2. Have silver-coated contacts and waterproofed entrance leads 3. Have a heat-resistant, circular cross section with a partially recessed neoprene ring Removal of the lamp from the socket must de-energize the primary of the ballast.

The springs for the lampholders must not be a part of the current-carrying circuit.

The sign's wiring connections must terminate on a molded, phenolic, barrier-type, terminal block rated at 15 A, 1,000 V(ac). The connections must have a white, integral, waterproof marking strip. The terminal screws must not be smaller than a no. 10.

The terminal block must be insulated from the fixture to provide protection from the line-to-ground flashover voltage.

A sectionalized terminal block must have an integral barrier on each side and must allow rigid mounting and alignment.

Fixture's conductors must:

1. Be stranded copper wire with a minimum thermoplastic insulation of 28 mils 2. Be rated at 1,000 V(ac) and for use up to 90 degrees C



3. Be a minimum of no. 16 4. Match the color coding of the ballast leads 5. Be secured with spring cross straps, installed 12 inches apart or less in the chassis or fixture Stranded copper conductors connected to screw-type terminals must terminate in crimp-type ring connectors.

No splicing is allowed within the fixture.

The sign's fuse must be the Type 3AG, miniature, slow-blow type.

The fuse holder must be a panel-mounting type with a threaded or bayonet knob that grips the fuse tightly for extraction. Each ballast must have a separate fuse.


87-4.03A General

Set the foundations for standards such that the mast arm is perpendicular to the centerline of the roadway.

Tighten the cap screws of the luminaire's clamping bracket to 10 ft-lb for LED and low-pressure luminaires.

Label the month and year of the installation inside the luminaire housing's door.


87-4.03B Battery Backup System Cabinets

Install the battery backup system cabinet to the right of the Model 332L cabinet.

If installation on the right side is not feasible, obtain authorization for installation on the left side.

Provide access for power conductors between the cabinets using:

1. 2" nylon-insulated, steel chase nipple 2. 2" steel sealing locknut 3. 2" nylon-insulated, steel bushing Remove the jumper between the terminals labeled BBS-1 and BBS-2 in the 5 position terminal block in the controller cabinet before connecting the Department-furnished electronics assembly.

87-4.03C Internally Illuminated Street Name Signs

Mount the internally illuminated street name sign to the signal mast arm using the adjustable brackets. Connect the conductors to the terminal blocks in the signal head mounting terminal block.

87-4.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

87-5 RAMP METERING SYSTEMS

87-5.01 GENERAL

Section 87-5 includes specifications for constructing ramp metering systems.

Ramp metering system includes:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Standards



6. Signal heads 7. Service equipment enclosure 8. Department-furnished controller assembly 9. Detectors 10. Telephone demarcation cabinet The components of a ramp metering system are shown on the project plans.

87-5.02 MATERIALS

Not Used


Connect the field wiring to the terminal blocks in the controller cabinet. The Engineer provides you a list of field conductor terminations for each controller cabinet.


87-5.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

87-6 TRAFFIC MONITORING STATION SYSTEMS

87-6.01 GENERAL

Section 87-6 includes specifications for constructing traffic monitoring station systems.

Traffic monitoring station system includes:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Cables 5. Conductors 6. Service equipment enclosure 7. Controller cabinet 8. Detectors 9. Telephone demarcation cabinet The components of a traffic monitoring station system are shown on the project plans.

87-6.02 MATERIALS

Not Used


Connect the field wiring to the terminal blocks in the controller cabinet. The Engineer provides you a list of field conductor terminations for the controller cabinet.


87-6.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

87-7 FLASHING BEACON SYSTEMS

87-7.01 GENERAL

Section 87-7 includes specifications for constructing flashing beacon systems.

Flashing beacon system includes:

1. Foundations



2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Standards 6. Service equipment enclosure 7. Signal heads 8. Flashing beacon control assembly The components of a flashing beacon system are shown on the project plans.

The flash rate for the flashing beacon must comply with chapter 4L, "Flashing Beacons," of the California MUTCD.

The flashing beacon must allow alternating flashing wig-wag operation.

The flashing beacon must have a separate flasher unit installed in the flashing beacon control assembly.

87-7.02 MATERIALS

Flashing beacon control assembly must:

1. Have a NEMA 3R enclosure with a dead front panel and a hasp with a 7/16-inch hole for a padlock. The enclosure must have one of the following finishes: 1.1. Powder coating. 1.2. Hot-dip galvanized coating. 1.3. Factory-applied, rust-resistant prime coat and finish coat.

2. Have barrier-type terminal blocks rated for 25 A, 600 V(ac), made of molded phenolic or nylon material and have plated-brass screw terminals and integral marking strips.

3. Include a solid state flasher complying with section 8 of NEMA standards publication no. TS 1 for 10 A, dual circuits.



87-7.04 PAYMENT

Not Used


87-12 CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN SYSTEMS

87-12.01 GENERAL

Section 87-12 includes specifications for constructing changeable message sign systems.

Changeable message sign system includes:

1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Service equipment enclosure 6. Department-furnished controller cabinet 7. Department-furnished changeable message sign 8. Department-furnished wiring harness 9. Service equipment enclosure 10. Sign disconnect The components of a changeable message sign system are shown on the project plans.



87-12.02 MATERIALS

Not Used


Install the changeable message sign.

Connect the field wiring to the terminal blocks in the sign assembly and controller cabinet.

The Engineer provides you a list of field conductor terminations for each sign cabinet and controller cabinet.

The Department maintains the sign assemblies.

87-12.04 PAYMENT

Not Used


87-18 INTERCONNECTION CONDUIT AND CABLE

87-18.01 GENERAL

Section 87-18 includes specifications for constructing interconnection conduit and cable.

Interconnection conduit and cable includes:

1. Pull boxes 2. Conduit 3. Signal interconnect cables The components of an interconnection conduit and cable are shown.

87-18.02 MATERIALS

Not Used


Test the signal interconnect cable.

Connect the signal interconnect cable to the terminal block in the controller cabinets. The Engineer provides you a list of terminations for each controller cabinet.

87-18.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

87-19 RESERVED

87-20 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

87-20.01 GENERAL

Section 87-20 includes specifications for providing temporary electrical systems.

Obtain the Department's authorization for the type of temporary electrical system and its installation method.

A temporary system must operate on a continuous, 24-hour basis.

87-20.02 MATERIALS

87-20.02A General

Material and equipment may be new or used.

The components of a temporary system are shown on the project plans.



If you use Type UF-B cable, the minimum conductor size must be no. 12.

87-20.02B Temporary Flashing Beacon Systems

A temporary flashing beacon system consists of a flashing beacon system, wood post, generator, and photovoltaic system.

The system must comply with the specifications for a flashing beacon system in section 87-7, except it may be mounted on a wood post or a trailer.

87-20.02C Temporary Lighting Systems

A temporary lighting system consists of a lighting system, generator, and wood poles.

The system must comply with the specifications for a lighting system in section 87-2, except it may be mounted on a wood pole or a trailer.

87-20.02D Temporary Signal Systems

A temporary signal system consists of a signal and lighting system, wood poles and posts, and a generator.

System must comply with the specifications for a signal and lighting system in section 87-4, except:

1. Signal heads may be mounted on a wood pole, mast arm, tether wire, or a trailer 2. Flashing beacons may be mounted on a wood post, or a trailer 87-20.03 CONSTRUCTION

87-20.03A General

Provide electrical and telecommunication services for temporary systems. Do not use existing services unless authorized.

Provide power for the temporary electrical systems under section 12-3.33, except you may use a photovoltaic system for the temporary flashing beacon system.

Install conductors and cables in a conduit, suspended from wood poles at least 25 feet above the roadway, or use direct burial conductors and cables.

You may saw slots across paved areas for burial conductors and cables.

Install conduit outside the paved area at a minimum of 12 inches below grade for Type 1 and 2 conduit and at a minimum of 18 inches below grade for Type 3 conduit.

Install direct burial conductors and cables outside the paved area at a minimum depth of 24 inches below grade.

Place the portions of the conductors installed on the face of wood poles in either Type 1, 2, or 3 conduit between the point 10 feet above grade at the pole and the pull box. The conduit between the pole and the pull box must be buried at a depth of at least 18 inches below grade.

Place conductors across structures in a Type 1, 2, or 3 conduit. Attach the conduit to the outside face of the railing.

Mount the photoelectric unit at the top of the standard or wood post.

You may abandon in place conductors and cables in sawed slots or in conduit installed below the ground surface.

87-20.03B Temporary Flashing Beacon Systems

Install a fused-splice connector in the pull box adjacent to each flashing beacon. Wherever conductors are run overhead, install the splice connector in the line side outside of the control assembly.



87-20.03C Temporary Lighting Systems

Wherever conductors are run overhead, install the fuse splice connectors in the line side before entering the mast arm.

87-20.03D Temporary Signal Systems

You may splice conductors that run to a terminal compartment or a signal head on a pole to the through conductors of the same phase in a pull box adjacent to the pole. Do not splice conductors or cables except in a pull box or in a NEMA 3R enclosure.

The Department provides the timing for the temporary signal.

Maintain the temporary signal except for the Department-furnished controller assembly.

87-20.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

87-21 EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

87-21.01 GENERAL

Section 87-21 includes general specifications for performing work on existing electrical systems.

87-21.02 MATERIALS

Not Used


87-21.03A General

You may abandon unused underground conduit after pulling out all conductors and removing conduit terminations from the pull boxes.

If standards are to be salvaged, remove:

1. All components 2. Mast arms from the standards 3. Luminaires, signal heads, and signal mounting assemblies from the standards and mast arms If the existing material is unsatisfactory for reuse and the Engineer orders you to replace it with new material, replacing the existing material with new material is change order work.

If the removed electrical equipment is to be reinstalled, supply all materials and equipment, including signal mounting assemblies, anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and concrete, needed to complete the new installation.

87-21.03B Maintaining Existing Electrical Systems

87-21.03B(1) General

Maintain the existing electrical system in working order during the progress of the work. Conduct your operations to avoid damage to the elements of the systems.

87-21.03B(2) Maintaining Existing Traffic Management System Elements During Construction

Section 87-21.02B(2) applies if a bid item for maintaining existing traffic management system elements during construction is shown on the Bid Item List.

Traffic management system elements include:

1. Ramp metering system 2. Traffic monitoring stations 3. Microwave vehicle detection system 4. Changeable message sign system 5. Extinguishable message sign system



6. Highway advisory radio system 7. Closed circuit television camera system 8. Roadway weather information system Obtain authorization at least 72 hours before interrupting communication between an existing system and the traffic management center.

If the Engineer notifies you that an existing system is not fully operational due to your activities, repair or replace the system within 72 hours. If the system cannot be fixed within 72 hours or it is located on a structure, provide a temporary system within 24 hours until the system can be fixed. Perform a functional test of the system in the presence of the Engineer. If you fail to perform the necessary repair or replacement work, the Department may perform the repair or replacement work and deduct the cost.

If you damage an existing fiber optic cable, install a new cable such that the length of cable slack is the same as before the damage, measured from an original splice point or termination. All splices must be made using the fusion method.

You may interrupt the operation of traffic monitoring stations:

1. For 60 days if another operational traffic monitoring station is located within 3 miles 2. For 15 days if another operational traffic monitoring station is located more than 3 miles away If a traffic monitoring station must be interrupted for longer periods than specified, provide a temporary detection system. Obtain the Department's authorization for the type of temporary system and its installation method.

87-21.03C Modifying Existing Electrical Systems

Modify electrical systems as shown.

87-21.03D Removing Existing Electrical Systems

The components to be removed are shown on the project plans.

87-21.04 PAYMENT

Not Used

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

DIVISION XI MATERIALS

92 ASPHALT BINDERS

04-15-16 04-15-16

Replace the 4th paragraph of section 92-1.02B with:

Crumb rubber modifier used must be on the Authorized Materials List for crumb rubber modifier.

Production equipment for PG modified asphalt binder with crumb rubber modifier must be authorized under the Department's MPQP.

Crumb rubber must be derived from waste tires described in Pub Res Code § 42703 and must be free from contaminants including fabric, metal, minerals, and other nonrubber substances.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^



96 GEOSYNTHETICS

01-15-16 Replace product name, manufacturing source, and date of manufacture in the 2nd sentence of the

1st paragraph of section 96-1.01D with: 01-15-16

manufacturing source code